Katt
\ as
iN a mou Ht Ay has hy

ey

eit rt a

BS Deteerer re i
cr

raya tre fn
ot Cot baller
A ae rary ive genni
Pea ga ae

 

Dd petal yirter Liber
f meoir 7

er Date Diana oa rear)

ws

pelea tant etd
LPitals tits
z Cera
Misia es sae
irks dain iigh Mer rhe niet
o slau suri gph iihere

ral

Seat taaegt

ree pcan

ser Eten ine
ria

S

iia

Dray

ARAN

iia (rt fue
aru

PTT

SEysiis

nn
TU Ad Hi Mt
vio ace I Tru bade br
rR PIM MCA
ie ee POOR Me
per e i
Cees an
ti Ht i aN) he ty aH
Durem ec i tat i oe Coe
ae
rn
PLE Wir hike
PUL Mara or Moe
eat) Pe ie ne
rad a at
0

nee

=

=

 

3
= QU

CORNELL |
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY |

 

 

 
i
| Cornell University Library

Hed Ve 1902

Tt wii

4 030 1

| olin Overs

 

 
 
STATE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.—PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT.
CONSTRUCTION OF TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY ON LAND-GRANT SYSTEM.

Adelaide, December 10, 1902.

ENDERS will be received at the office of the Railways Commissioner,

Adelaide up to noon of Monday, May 2, 1904. for the construc-

tion and working of a line of railway on the land-grant system between

Oodnadatta, in the State of South Australia. and Pine Creek, in the

Northern Territory, in accordance with the provisions of the Trans-
continental Railway Act, 1go2.

LAND TO BE GRANTED NOY TO EXCEED 75,000 ACRES FOR
EACH MILE OF RAILWAY, AND TO BE SELECTED IN ALTERNATE
BLOCKS ON EITHER SIDE OF THE RAILWAY.

LENGTH OF RAILWAY.—Not to exceed 1,200 miles.

RouTeE.—As per plan in the Act, or such alternative route as may

be agreed.
GAUGE.—3 feet 6 inches.
Motive POWER.—Steam or other approved power.

RAILS AND FASTENINGS.—Steel. (Rails to be not less than 6olbs.
to the yard).

Land to be granted in fee simple, with all gold, metals, and minerals
thereon and thereunder.

The tender must contain the following particulars :—

1. The quantity of land required for each mile of railway
constructed.

2. The number of miles to be constructed each year from
Oodnadatta and Pine Creek respectively.

3. When construction to be completed.

Copies of the Act above referred to and a description of the
country through which the proposed railway will pass may be obtained
at the office of the Chief Secretary, Adelaide; at the office of the
Agent-General for South Australia, at No. 1, Crosby Square, Bishops-
gate Street Within, London, E.C.; and may also be obtained or
inspected at the offices of every paper in which this advertisement
appears.

Tenders should be indorsed ‘“ Tender for the construction of
Transcontinental Railway, South Australia and Northern Territory,”
and must be accompanied by a bank deposit receipt for” £10,000

in favor of the Treasurer of South Australia at some bank situated
within the Commonwealth of Australia.

ALAN G. PENDLETON,
South Australian Railways Commissioner.
LAND-GRANT RAILWAY
ACROSS

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

THE

NORTHERN TERRITORY

OF THE STATE OF SouTH AUSTRALIA AS A FIELD FOR
ENTERPRISE AND CAPITAL.

BOUNDLESS. KESOUKCES=:
PASTORAL, AGRICULTURAL, MINERAL
NATURAL HARBORS.
NAVIGABLE RIVERS.

 

PUBLISHED BY AUTHORITY OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT

(Hon. J. G. Jenxins, PRemreR anp Minister ConTROLLING THE NorTHERN TERRITORY),

COMPILED AND EDITED BY
SIMPSON NEWLAND
(FORMERLY TREASURER OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA),
WITH
ILLUSTRATIONS, MAPS, AND COPY OF THE ACT OF PARLIAMENT
AUTHORISING CONSTRUCTION OF RAILWAY.

ADELAIDE:
PRINTED FOR THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT BY Hussey & GILLINGHAM. 26 AND 28, WAYMOUTIL STREET.

1902.
CONTENTS.

Introduction.
The Transcontinental Railway.
Port Darwin to London.

Transcontinental Railway Bill.

Characteristics of the Northern Territory: Its Products, Climate, and Resources.

Stocking the Interior.

Port Darwin.

Palmerston.

The Climate.

The Soil and its Capabilities.
Products Botanic Gardens, Palmerston.
Pearl Fisheries.

Character of the Country.

Records from Journals of Explorers, Travellers, and Others.

Extracts from Evidence before Royal Commission.

Indian Remount Service, Horse Breeding.

Mineralogy—Tenison Woods—J. V. Parkes—Professor Tate—H. Y. L. Brown

(Government Geologist).
Miscellaneous.

Appendices—

Statistics—Table of Rainfall—Mean Monthly Temperature—Elevations of the

Interior—Mineral Exports—Population—Stock.

Bibliography of Literature on the Northern Territory.

Act of Parliament.

Map of Australian States.

Geological Map (in two sections) of Northern Territory.
‘ALLE UVEIN WOT ‘NIMUVC LOG ‘NOLSUANTVG dO MITA

 

 
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 5

 

THE NORTHERN TERRITORY.

 

INTRODUCTION.

THIS pamphlet is compiled in order to show the importance of establishing the
quickest and most direct mail communication between South Australia by railway
across her Northern Possessions to Port Darwin—in other words, between Australia
and the whole world. This action, so imperatively needed, would have been taken
long since had this small colony—then less than 300,000 people—been able by any
possibility to bear the heavy burden. She did, however, take the first initiatory step
some 30 years ago, when at great cost and alone she laid the telegraph across the
Continent, regarding it as a forerunner of the railway that should soon follow
in its wake.

It was early felt that the only possible means of its accomplishment would be
effected through the Land Grant System, and negotiations have been repeatedly
opened up by capitalists and by syndicates with the Government on this basis. Bills
have been passed and commissions appointed to take evidence and report, all to be
ultimately defeated by opponents of any such principle of concession. At last, wiser
counsels have prevailed, and Parliament has sanctioned the passing of an Act
authorising the Government to invite tenders for the construction of a railway from
Oodnadatta to Pine Creek in exchange for grants of land. The measure is liberal in
its provisions, one of the most important being a maximum grant of 75,000 acres per
mile of rail constructed. The distance between the terminal points—Oodnadatta at
the end of the South Australian line to the north, and Pine Creek, the terminus of
the line from Port Darwin to the south—is 1,063 miles, making a total of 79,725,000
acres of land offered as a prize for the construction of the railway. A copy of the
Act 1s appended to this publication.

There is reason now to hope that this great project will receive the attention
that its magnitude demands, for we venture to think that there are few works of
such vast importance to mankind still left extant and unaccomplished. With the object
of supplying information about the country to be traversed by the proposed lines—its
character, capabilities, and resources—to capitalists, possible tenderers, and others,
this pamphlet has been prepared. While it is difficult, in the limited dimensions of a
work like this, to give more than mere extracts from the writings of any authors
however valuable, our aim has been to select, in as comprehensive a form as possible
from the evidence and the experience of eye-witnesses, the fullest information that
could be obtained of the characteristic features of this State, with a view of showing
on incontrovertible testimony that much of the wide area of South Australia and the
Northern Territory is capable of supplying most of the requirements and luxuries of
mankind and of supplying a vast population. And, while portions of this enormous
territory are less suitable for agricultural or pastoral purposes, such portions are
known to be rich in minerals; immense areas that have never been tested have been
pronounced by experts to possess most promising indications of mineral wealth,
while other large areas, hitherto untraversed, yet remain to be exploited.

Opinions have often differed respecting much of this comparatively unknown
land by explorers and travellers, as their impressions were naturally formed and
affected by the season prevailing at the time. If in a drought or rainless period,
to which all Australia is more or less liable, then and naturally they have taken too
gloomy a view of that portion of the country, its character, and capabilities. Under
such circumstances a wide tract has been declared a desert, while others have
pronounced it a paradise. The truth lies between the two. Australia, like much of
the world, is subject to rainless periods. This is not an unalloyed evil; it is Nature’s
fallow for the land, and compensation often comes in increased production in
the years that follow.

It cannot be said that the people and Legislature of South Australia have dealt
with this great undertaking with a niggardly hand. Recognising the vast importance
of the work to the State, they have been willing to part with the fee simple of an

enormous
6 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

enormous extent of valuable land rather than attempt its construction by burdening
the finances with its cost. While thus wisely relieving the taxpayer, it undeniably
offers a magnificent opportunity for the capitalist to embark in one of the few really
great undertakings with a golden future in prospect yet left in the world to be
achieved. Such an immense acreage of land, a principality in itself, much of it a
pastoral country not to be surpassed in broad Australia, a large proportion admirably
adapted for tropical agriculture, and an enormous area of potential mineral wealth
unknown and incalculable, but certainly immense—it needs but the iron road, the
enterprise, the skill, the wealth of the master minds of the world, and this ¢erra
incognita of Australia will be turned to the best uses of mankind. The magnitude of
the project is as entrancing as it is capable of accomplishment.

When considering the compilation of the salient points contained in the various
publications on the Northern Territory, it was impossible to form any idea of the rich
fund of valuable matter bearing on this subject contained in the voluminous works of
authors, explorers, journals, Parliamentary and official reports, papers, etc.

It is obvious, therefore, that in the brief space of such a work as this much must
be reluctantly omitted that may fairly claim a place for insertion. With every desire
to include more, selections have been unavoidably cut down to bring the work within
reasonable limits. The difficulty has indeed been with the plethora rather than the
paucity of the material at disposal.

In addition to the various reports and works which have been quoted, as
appearing in the footnotes, a full list, as far as is known, is appended of all the works,
reports, and Government and Parliamentary documents bearing upon the Northern
Territory. See Appendix B, “ Gill’s Bibliography Northern Territory.”

 

 

THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

South Australia is at length determined to push on her railway. Years ago
she built the road to Oodnadatta through some of the least valuable land in the
State, to a point that leads nowhere, with the avowed object of early continuing it
into the good country in advance, and ultimately to bridge over the continent by
connecting it with the Pine Creek end of the Port Darwin line.

The project of constructing this long railway out of capital borrowed by the
State was a bold but too ambitious one, and has eventuated in 1,063 miles being still
unfinished, and the consequent retarding of the development and prosperity of the
whole State. The time is now fully ripe for this great undertaking to be consum-
mated on the Land Grant principle. The majority of the opponents of this system
at length realise its absolute necessity. The State’s finances are in a less élastic
condition in consequence of the protracted drought than for years past, so that any
attempt to build the railway, at the present time, out of loan money, is acknowledged
to be impolitic if not impossible. In the interests of the country immediate action is
recognised as imperative, or a rival line, to our irreparable injury, will certainly be
laid down by the other States, leaving us in an isolated position. Once authorised
not a day ought to be lost in expediting the commencement of the work.

The construction of this truly national undertaking invited: by the South
Australian Government possesses marked and alluring characteristics. It is entirel
within our borders; it is a connecting link between British ports to the south of
Australia and the future port of the North, Port Darwin; and it is a fee simple of
the land granted, an absolute title under the British Crown, as sacred as ihe ale a
any private individual in the State—advantages that cannot be disturbed -
political complications which so often injuriously affect concessions in Africa and
other countries.

Nor must it be supposed that in the construction of this railway Tigors of
climate or deprivations or hardships of any kind will be encountered. The best beef

and mutton grown in Australia can be obtained at convenient distances along the line

from
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 7

 

from the existing cattle and sheep stations in unlimited quantities. Excellent
vegetables are grown, and can be grown where required. Good water, where not
available on the surface, has been proved to exist all along the telegraph line and
elsewhere at shallow depths in wells almost wherever tried ; indeed failures are quite
the exception.

It is not proposed to dwell upon the natural difficulties to be encountered and
overcome, but it may be doubted if anywhere in the world 1,100 consecutive miles of ©
railroad can be found presenting fewer or less important engineering obstacles, seeing
that ballast, stone, lime, and timber, will be found generally in abundance—certainly
at intervals along the whole line.

 

PORT DARWIN TO LONDON.

It is obvious that Russia is making an ambitious bid for the mails and trade of
the East. Her Siberian Railway is being rapidly pushed forward, and, with its
completion to Port Arthur, the coveted prize appears within her grasp, probably
for a time only. The advocates of that railway claim that when it reaches Port
Arthur mails and passengers can be landed at Port Darwin in 14 days from London.
The supporters of a continuous line of rails from the Mediterranean to Singapore
assert that this almost incredibly short period of time will be considerably reduced
and the transit rendered more reliable by the route they champion. This appears
to be correct, for the Russian route is certainly not the shortest, and labors under
the further disadvantage of traversing a region subject to extreme cold during the
winter months, where delays would inevitably occur from the blocking of the road by
snow and ice. The matter of routes, however, can be left to be fought out by the
rival advocates, knowing that the terminal point must be Port Darwin. No doubt,
the line that can deliver mails and passengers in London from that port in the
shortest time will command the traffic, since great despatch is the primary
consideration in this progressive age. It is for South Australia to seize the present
golden opportunity, and force her railway across the Continent from Oodnadatta to
Port Darwin with all speed, for, if ever time meant money, it does now to the welfare
of this State; and not to this State alone, for assuredly this railway will prove
for the reciprocal advantage not only of the Territory more immediately interested,
but of the entire Commonwealth of Australia.

It is confidently asserted by those who favor the Russo-Siberian Railway as the
future connecting link between Australia and the East and Britain, that before 1903
closes the steam horse will run to Port Arthur. Travellers assert that no expense is
being spared to make the express service the most comfortable, and even luxurious, in
the whole world. Several steamers are said to have been built, or are in the course of
construction, to meet the expected exigencies of the trade. Evidently the Russian
Government is determined to spare no expense to make its line the great artery for
the commerce and passenger traffic between the East and the West. That in this
stupendous enterprise Australia has a direct interest must be patent to all. With a
railway to Port Arthur, and fast steamers laid on to Port Darwin, mail communication
between London and Australia will be reduced, provided the Transcontinental road is
completed from Pine Creek to Oodnadatta, by at least a week or ten days.

The Imperialist, however, turns a longing eye to the map of the East, and asks
if Singapore cannot be made the terminus through British territory or the territory of
British allies with British sympathies. Singapore, at the extreme end of the Malay
Peninsula, stretches out some three days’ steaming nearer to Port Darwin than does
Port Arthur. Is it not possible that the line from Singapore will in the not distant
future connect with the Burmese railway system, and that with India, and eventually
through Persia to the Old World. With the consummation of these grand
conceptions, the time distance between London and Australia will be still further
reduced.

Military
8 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

Military and commercial interests alike demand the most direct and rapid a
communication, where possible, between all the important centres of the Empire
the Mother Country.

An Indian correspondent sends the following cutting from a local paper ae
‘With the completion of the extension from Serembam (Negri Sembilan), ie
Kuala Pilah to Kuala Gemas, on the Johore boundary, some 54 miles, there a
remain only the State of Johore to be traversed, say 120 miles, to complete a Be
from Penang to Singapore. This is a great step towards the realisation 0 qd
Singapore-Mediterranean railway in the fulfilment of securing easy and rap!
communication with Australia. It is the beginning of the end.”

Major-General Sir William Jervois, R.E., late Governor of South Australia, wet
visiting Port Darwin some years since in connection with defence matters, ce )
“ Port Darwin is the key to the East’’; and here, as has been remarked, it 1s evident
the future emporium and gateway of Australia will be found. The same gentleman,
in speaking of its commercial importance, used frequently to remark, in vindication
of South Australia’s independent undertakings in the Northern Territory, that i
would not only well repay the Government their outlay, but present such a source 0
national wealth as to see in future “ the tail waggle the dog.”

TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY BILL.

Extract from the Speech of the Hon. J. G. Jenkins, Premier of South Australia,
when moving the second reading of the Transcontinental Railway Bill, October

g, 1902 :—*

The distance from Adelaide proper to Port Darwin was between 1,900 and 2,000 miles, but they had 688
miles of line constructed from Adelaide to Oodnadatta, and on the other side 146 miles constructed from
Port Darwin to Pine Creek, so that 834 miles had already been finished. He would now say a word or two
about the Territory from tke geographical and pastoral points of view. Critics had said that if there was
anything like the amount of wealth in the Northern Territory which had been suggested, it would have been
developed to a larger extent years ago. Now, such critics must be unfamiliar with the country and with the
difficulties which confront mining there. It was easy to say that people rushed to Klondyke and that they
would rush to the Verritory if inducement offered, but it must be remembered that at Klondyke the finds
were purely alluvial, and no mining was required at all. The Government were having prepared, in
conjunction with other persons interested in the Northern Territory, a pamphlet, giving extracts from the
reports of the Government Geologist, of Mr. A. A. Davidson, wh» had travelled through the Territory for
three years in connection with the Australian Exploration Society, and of other experts connected with the
various fields. Plans and maps would accompany the pamphlet, and would give an amount of information
which it was impossible for him to impart in a second reading speech. Australia had only been prospected
to a very limited extent. There was no question that Australia to-day was the greatest gold-bearing country
in the world. Its production in 1899 was about £16,000,000 worth. The next greatest gold-producing
country was Africa, but it only yielded .£14,500,000 worth, and the United States of America came third
with about one-quarter, or half a million less than Africa. Then we had a larger belt of unprospected
mineral country than any other part of the world. All the authorities agreed that we have hundreds and
thousands of miles of mineral country which have practically not been prospected at all. In the nature of
things it was not likely that Central Australia would be found destitute of the great goldfields which have been
found east and west of it. The Government Geologist described hundreds and thousands of miles of this
country as highly mineralised and gold-bearing country. The Australian Exploration Society had spent
some £12,000 or £15,000 in connection with Mr. Davidson’s trip, extending over three years, and in that
gentleman's report he said there were vast fields where prospect trials had yielded at the rate of from 15 dwt.
to 20z. to the ton. Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, who had just returned from a long trip in the Northern Territory,
corroborated Professor Davidson's statements as to the richness of the country, but he added that the distances
were so great that large capital would be required until the means of access are improved. The Arltunga gold-
field, of which the Government Geologist spoke highly, had progressed as rapidly as could be expected, consider-
ing the distance from Adelaide. The Government, in order to encourage the field, established some years ago
a cyanide plant, and since the starting of the battery 3,152 tons of ore had been put through, yielding 3 385
oz. of gold, worth £12,486. It had not all been cyanided, and the miners had raised a large quantity of
additional stone, which would produce hundreds of ounces of gold. Apart from those facts, he would remind
members that the gold raised in the Northern Territory—and the mineral area was a vast one—was worth
from £3 15s. to £4 per oz, They should think for a moment what that meant. In parts of Australia the
gold found was worth only £3 per oz.; indeed, in some cases its value was below that amount, so that
practically the Northern Territory had a 25 per cent. advantage over other fields. After thoroughly
examining the MacDonnell Ranges field, and before writing his report, Mr. Brown telegraphed to him :—_

6 The

 

* “ Advertiser,’’ October 10, 1902.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 9

oes Sea eres, eh

 

“ The field promises to be an important one, and its importance will be increased as soon as more syste-
matic mining is commenced. This field has peculiar characteristics as regards the occurrence of gold.”
That telegram had created considerable interest, not only in South Australia, but elsewhere. Many practical
miners had gone to the ranges as the result of Mr, Brown’s expressed opinions, and new claims were
constantly being taken up and worked; but in order to carry out the work of mining more successfully, it
was necessary that larger capital should be provided than the miners could command. They had really
only commenced the work, and the shafts were down only a few feet. Mr. Brown's report was borne out by
Mr. Corbin, the manager of the cyanide works, who was intimately connected with the claims, and said that
hundreds of stampers could be profitably worked Ail existing goldfields were proclaimed entirely separate
from any grant which might be made to the company, and Arltunga had been declared a goldfield for 10
miles on each side of the cyanide works. It was declared generally some years ago, but it had been legally
proclaimed lately in order to exempt it from the operation of this Will. Mr. Brown thought there was plenty
of water to be obtained by sinking from 100 feet to 250 feet, and the experience in connection with the
wells was that in nearly every instance water was found in quantities which enabled mining work to be
carried on. Those acquainted with the topographical conditions of the country said that dams could be
constructed, and as nearly every year there was a heavy rainfall, dams could be constructed for water con-
servation. A question had been asked in reference to the quantity of gold exported. Up toa
recent date the quantity of gold taken from the Territory was 490,479 ounces, worth £1,695,479,
including the Arltunga yield, but in addition to that in all probability large quantities had
been taken away by the Chinese and others, of which the Government had no record. In pro-
portion to the white population the Territory was the greatest gold producing country in the
world, the average being £67 per head. There were not many miners there, but there was ample room for
more. So far as silver was concerned, there had been some valuable discoveries in the Territory, but it was
difficult to work silver mines there, to advantage. Already £13,000 worth of silver had been mined and
sent out of the Territory. Of copper £78,000 worth had been mined and sent out of the Territory, and of
tin £34,000 worth. During the last year or two, the northern part of Queensland had been turning out
hundreds of thousands of pounds worth of tin, and there was'no reason why the Northern Territory should
not be—as he believed it was—just as rich as Queensland. The Government Geologist reported that there
were indications in the vicinity of the Roper and Victoria rivers of payable goldfields. All the records he
had quoted dated from 1880. Previous to that there were no official records. There was no doubt a great
quantity of minerals had been taken out of the Territory before that date. There was in the Territory,
according to the reports of the Government Geologist and others, one of the best mica fields in any part of
the world. We had exported £8,000 worth of mica, notwithstanding that it had to be carried on camels for
hundreds of miles. In silver-lead we exported £36,215 worth, making the total value of minerals sent out
of the Territory £1,864,407. Although these figures might appear small in comparison with the vast area
of country, they showed it was highly-mineralised country, and that there was no question of the fields not
being payable if they were properly worked. The pearlshell industry was a valuable one. During the last
ten years we had exported £151,194 worth of pearlshell from Port Darwin, and there were only 50 or 60
boats working there. Then there was a vast extent of pastoral country in the Territory. We had 100
million acres of land there leased, but only a portion of it was stocked. There were 53,000 square miles
reported to be stocked on June 30, 1902, and at the end of last year there were only 28,005 square miles
reported to be stocked. Members were accustomed to treat the importance of our northern dependency
rather lightly. The Territory was bound to become the great cattle-growing country of the world. Could
members point to any part of the face of the earth as suitable for the growth of cattle in large quantities and
as cheaply as our Territory? They might say the vast tracts of country in Siberia or America could be used,
but they were cold countries, and could not compete in cattle raising with warmer countries, with suitable
grass and water. He admitted that Texas and other portions of the west and south-west of the United
States had produced enormous quantities of cattle, but year by year population was crowding on the cattle-
growing area, and it was found more profitable to go in for small products. During the last 30
years the population of the United States had more than doubled. It had grown from 38 millions
to nearly 80 millions. These people had spread over the vast areas he had referred to, and the
cattle ranches had year by year been driven out of existence. The vast extent of country
adjacent to the Victoria River was one of the best cattle-growing places on the face of the globe.
We had 255,000 head of great cattle in the Territory, but only a limited number of sheep
and horses. The distance was so great that it was almost impossible to get wool away.
During last year we exported 36,000 head of great cattle, of the value of £171,000, £7,000 worth of horses,
and £6,000 worth of wool. As to the growth of horses, some of the land that was not suitable for the
growth of horned cattle had been proved by the pastoralists to be the best possible land for horses. During
the last few years the lessees in the Northern Territory had imported valuable stud animals to improve the
breed of their stock. Those who had been sent out from Great Britain in connection with obtaining re-
mounts reported on the Territory as one of the best breeding grounds for horses to be found in the British
dominions. The Government would only deal with a genuine company or syndicate, which had the necessary
capital behind it to do the work. It had been suggested that the Government were parting with an immense
area of valuable land without getting a fair equivalent for it. There were 523,000 square miles of country in
the Northern Territory, equal to 335,116,800 acres. As there were over 100 miles of the railway in South Aus-
tralia proper the amount of land the company would get would be, say, 75,000,000 acres of Northern Territory
land, leaving the Government still over 262,000,000 acres, or nearly 20,000,coo acres more than the whole of
South Australia. The Northern Territory comprised practically more than one-sixth of the entire area of
Australia, and that magnificent country was practically lying idle for want of railway communication. If
this Bill were carried a company would get possession of but a comparatively small part of this vast estate, a
much smaller part than it would make accessible to the people of the Commonwealth for general utilisation.
There was no one more strongly opposed to the building up of strong monopolies that would be injurious
to the State than he, but the circumstances made this a different case. There were thousands of unemployed
men gathered in and around our seaport cities and towns of Australia to-day, and by the starting of the
Transcontinental railway it would not only relieve the overburdened labor market, but would throw open a
great country for development. With the experience of other countries before them members must ae

the
ae

10 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

the vast possibilities of the Northern Territory, even outside its mineral and pastoral resources. The reports
of Mr. Holtze and the Government Resident proved that there were large tracts of land there which ae
capable of intense cultivation and the growth of tropical fruits. There were other parts of it emi
suited for general agriculture, and if they could give facilities for settlement they would attract a poe
and thriving population that would benefit the whole of Australia. Rapid communication to and ieee tae
great commercial centres of the world were being considered day by day with increasing interest, and it aa 2
matter of supreme moment to shorten the distance between London—the heart of the great world—an ia
great dependencies of the British Crown. By the completion of the Trans-Siberian railway, the time for the
conveyance of passengers and mails was lessened several days. There was a proposal on foot also to oe
struct a railway across the British dominions in Asia. If this line were finished, the mails would not take ha
the time between England and Adelaide that was occupied now. South Australia would become, by the a
struction of this line, the intermediary between Great Britain and the whole of Australia and New Zealand oe
as quick transit was concerned. There was a point they should not for a moment lose sight of. When that
occurred, Port Darwin, in the Northern Territory, was bound by the very necessity of things to oe
a very important town. With an important town at the end of the line, and the added importance that the
line would give to South Australia, the vast country between the termini would benefit. They had been
frequently asked, ‘‘ Why don’t the Government undertake this work themselves?” It might be profitable
for the State to carry this work out, but they must look upon it to a certain extent as speculative. He had
already pointed out that there were vast tracts of country which had practically never been prospected for
minerals, and upon the result of such discoveries in the territory opened up by the line its success or failure
would to a considerable extent depend. That in itself showed that it was speculative. It was not within
the province of the Government to borrow £5,000,000 at a time of such financial depression in order to go
in for a scheme that was of a speculative nature when they had an opportunity of carrying it out on the lines
proposed by this Bill. Those who spoke against the construction of the line on the Land Grant system
said, ‘‘See what injury it has done to other States.” What injury had it done to the United States of
America or to Canada? He would like some definite information as to the injury those two countries had
suffered from their Land Grant railways. He had an opportunity of knowing that there were millions
of acres of undeveloped country in America which carried no more population than the Northern Territory
until the Trans-American Railway was made by the Land Grant system, after which the mineral resources
of the country were enormously developed, and trade increased in all the States the line had passed
through. A good many companies that undertook the construction of the line were injured far more than
the States through which the lines ran. The State had the benefit of the railway and the increased
population. Take the Canadian Pacific Railway line. Did the remarks of certain members with regard to
monopoly and land grabbing apply to that? It had been the means of opening up millions of acres in
Manitoba, the greatest wheat producing country in the world. Thousands and thousands of acres of that
land had been purchased by the settlers from the company that constructed the line. It was carried out by
the Land Grant system, and they had further concessions; but even with the further concessions no one
could say it had not been of benefit to Canada. He did not deny that that was better country, and the
contractors received less of it than the South Australian Government were willing to offer in this instance.
He questioned whether Canada would have commenced the construction of that line upon its own
responsibility until the present day but for the Land Grant system. If they would turn up the history
of Canada, they would find that in Manitoba the company constructing the line on the Land Grant system
had made better conditions with the settlers than the Government themselves had done for the settlement ,of
their own land. It stood to reason that if they intended the land to benefit them as a company they must
make liberal offers and concessions to settlers to take it up. They must also be liberal as far as mining on
the land granted to them was concerned. By the granting of that land to a company, they would be making
accessible hundreds of miles of land that was inaccessible at present, and it would be to the benefit
of the whole State.

 

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY — ITS
PRODUCTS, CLIMATE, AND RESOURCES.

THE TERRITORY.

The Northern Territory, or that range of country extending from the present southern railway terminus,
Oodnadatta, to Port Darwin (comprising about one-fifth of the whole of Australia), extends from Latitude
26° South to Latitude 11° North, and lies between Longitude 129° and 138° It thus covers about 16
degrees of latitude and nine of longitude, or, roughly, 560 miles wide by goo miles long, and contains an
area of about 523,620 square miles, or 335,116,800 acres. It was annexed to South Australia by Royal
Letters Patent on July 6, 1863.

The area of the United Kingdom is in round numbers 77,000,000 acres, and of France 130,000,000
acres, so that the Territory is about 24 times the size of France, and 44 times the size of Great Britain.
The area sold is 473,278 acres, leaving unalienated and available for land-grants 334,643,522 acres.

It has also a frontage of 1,200 miles to the Indian Ocean, intersected by numerous rivers, man
of which, such as the Roper, the Adelaide, the Daly, the Victoria, etc., are navigable for from 20 to tes
miles from the sea. The number and volume, therefore, of these great rivers may afford some indication of
the fertility of the country through which they flow.

Along the extensive northern seaboard there are many valuable harbors, of which Port Darwin js equal
or superior, to any other in Australia. Situated as it is in a commanding geographical position with regard

to
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 11

 

to India and the East, at no distant time it must become one of the greatest trading emporiums of the
Southern Hemisphere. Palmerston, situated on the shores of Port Darwin, is the principal town.

Doubtless when the Transcontinental Railway is completed from this port to Adelaide (a distance of
1,896 miles, of which 834 miles are now running—146 miles from Port Darwin, and 688 from Adelaide—
leaving 1,063 miles unmade) the principal mail traffic from Europe will take this route, and prove a powerful
factor in the development of the Territory.*

STOCKING THE INTERIOR.

At the present time only a relatively small portion of the Northern Territory is stocked with cattle,
leaving an enormous area of splendid pastoral country unoccupied. This is by no means confined to the
more tropical lands on the fine rivers flowing into the northern seas, or even the vast tablelands further in
the interior, but embraces much of the broad expanse of the Territory extending right to the 26th parallel—
country with a less rainfall, but in many respects better adapted to horned cattle, and undoubtedly for
horses, and even more certainly for sheep. Over this country, where surface waters do not exist, there 18
strong evidence that abundant supplies can be obtained at shallow depths by sinking wells and artesian bores.

It is a remarkable and significant fact that on passing the 26th parallel of latitude the climate becomes
more temperate in these respects. The rainfall increases, the fierce north wind, that plagues so much of
Australia, loses its force, and the nights become cooler

In an interesting paper read by Mr. J. P. Thomson, Hon. F.R.G.S., before the Geographical Society,
Queensland, on September 16, 1901, on “The Climate and Artesian Waters of Australia,” T he says :—
‘One of the first to publicly express an opinion in favor of the existence of artesian water in Central
Australia was the late J. E. Tenison Woods, who was a most intelligent observer, had travelled a good deal
in Central Australia, and from an enlightened study of the rock structure and certain surface indications
there he was led to believe that an underground supply of water existed in that portion of the country.
i 8 For richness of soil and dryness of climate the great inland plains and tablelands of Australia
are nowhere else surpassed. An adequate water supply is all that is needed to render them fertile, and this
may now be obtained from the effective artesian wells to which I have alluded, and from others where the
underground storage reservoirs of the far interior have been tapped.”

In offering a few figures to illustrate in a concise form what a moderate expansion of pastoral Central
Australia will result in, no close calculations have been attempted. That vast flocks and herds will be fed
on the boundless pastures of which this pamphlet treats, as shown in the numerous records of explorers and
others who have traversed the country and reported thereon, is plainly manifest. When that day arrives, as it
will with the railway across the continent, the necessity for similar meat-preserving works and manufactures
to those obtaining in America will arice.

Hornep CaTTLe.

If the carrying capacity of that portion alone of the Northern Territory that is permanently watered
were reduced to figures, the result would be almost more than surprising. But if we consider the immense
area of partially-watered country as thoroughly developed by means of dams, tanks, wells, and artesian
bores, the magnitude to which the pastoral industry may attain is even more strongly forced upon the
attention. Ther are also large tracts of excellent pastoral land as yet without surface water, land such as
in other States (particularly New South Wales and Queensland), through the energy and enterprise of the
lessees, has, by the judicious expenditure of capital, been formed into the finest stations in Australia. The
practical outcome of the stocking of but a small portion of the vast area of the waste lands of the Northern
Territory would mean not only the establishment of meat-preserving, canning, and freezing works (when the
Transcontinental Railway is built), but also an extensive live stock export trade, not only to the neighboring
colonies, but also from Port Darwin to Singapore and other Eastern States.

An approximate estimate of the carrying capacity of the country to the nortu of Barrow Creek—some
200,060 square miles, at 10 head of cattle per mile—gives a total of 2,000,000 head. This is an extremely low
estimate, as much of the rich pasture land on the rivers flowing from the tableland to the coast will support
and fatten many more, probably double the number,

The number of horned cattle in the Northern Territory in relation to the vast area never trodden by a
hoof is a mere bagatelle, but late results from the few stations in existence are very satisfactory. Even
during the worst period of the present unprecedented drought in Australia, Mr. Sidney Kidman, the well-
known live stock dealer, has been almost weekly dispatching from the Territory droves of the primest fat
cattle ever seen mainy hundreds of miles by road, rail, or steamboat to nearly every market in the Australian
group—a striking evidence in its favor as a pastoral country..

SHEEP.

At the present time sheepfarming in the Northern Territory excites comparatively little interest. It is
not that an enormous portion of the country is unsuitable to the growth of wool and mutton of the first
quality, for, in the opinion of men best fitted to judge, more than half of the total area is even better suited to
sheep than to horned cattle. The solution of this is to be found in a word, viz. in the utteriy
inadequate means of transport for heavy goods and produce. Furthermore, the cost of carrying the fencing
wire to enclose a large station, say, at the MacDonnell Ranges, on camel-back is simply prohibitory.
Adding also to this all other necessary supplies and the sending the wool and fat stock to marke‘, and you
are met with the same insuperable difficulties in general delays, other contingencies, and cost of transit.
But with the railway once laid down across the intervening area, these great difficulties will varnish or be
materially reduced, and a safe and reasonable transit will become an accomplished fact. 8 ia

“ith

 

*© The Northern Territory,” by H, Vere Barclay. + Queensland Geographical Journal, Vol. XVIL,, 1901-2.
12 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

With the lapse now of a very few years, with the certain completion of the railway, millions of sheep
will be bred on the now unoccupied lands of Central Australia. That portion of the Australian continent
known as the Northern Territory will then become one of the greatest live stock producing parts of the
world, simply because it is perhaps better adapted to animal life than almost any other portions of the globe.
Beef, mutton, and wool of unsurpassed quality can be, and are, produced there zow, under all difficulties, 10
all too limited quantities. Given reasonable facilities of transport, and they can and will be produced in
such unlimited quantities as to develop a trade that will lift Australia to a height of prosperity she has not
hitherto known. The pastoral interest was once of the first importance in Australasia; there is quite
sufficient evidence in the Northern Territory to inspire confidence in its more than complete resurrection. It
has been often said that sheep will not thrive well north of Barrow Creek. This has certainly not been
proved, but in roughly dividing the Northern Territory into portions most suitable for sheep and cattle a line
running east and west from Barrow Creek has been adopted, somewhat in deference to that idea. Speaking
quite approximately, the extent of country south of this line indicated is 200,000 square miles, which, at an
average of 50 sheep per mile, gives a total of 10,000,000; and reckoning the total area per mile south of
Barrow Creek, this number would be increased by one-third. The annual clip of wool at a low valuation,
say, of 5 lbs. wool worth 6d. per Ib., or 2s. 6d. per sheep=£1,237,500. To this must be added the value of
the surplus sheep sold annually.

It will be understood when referring to the total area of the Northern Territory, viz., 523,620 square
miles, that in making these rough calculations a large extent of country has been set aside so as to allow
an ample margin for the expansion of agriculture and other industries.

Horses.

Experts appear to be unanimous that the country and climate of the Northern Territory to within
a short distance of the coast are exceedingly well adapted for the breeding of first-class horses. But there
is a difference of opinion as to where in this area of varied pasture, climate, and soil the most perfect animal
for military purposes can be reared, Although some of the best known judges of horse-breeding favor the
richer tablelands well within the tropics, where the rainfall is heavier and the pasture more luxuriant, there
is good reason to think that the more enduring and sounder animal, with better legs and feet, will be raised
on the drier, harder country and with a lighter rainfall, as in the centre of the continent and to the south of
the MacDonnell Ranges. The writer has seen much of the horse of this region, and after a lifetime’s
experience of what other parts of Australia can do in producing high-class animals, must give him the palm
for stamina, legs of steel, and feet of iron. He is a wonderful horse, as with a good strain of blood he must
be, bred on such a country and on such a pasture. And the demand that must arise for good horses,
whether as army chargers or for other purposes, will inevitably lead to the formation of horse-breeding
stations in suitable localities over a considerable portion of the Northern Territory, and which, by the careful,
intelligent breeding of the noble animal, must become a stable and profitable industry.

When the Australian States are connected with the Pine Creek railway, Port Darwin will occupy its
geographical position as the port of Australia for the East, and the horse stations of the Territory will then
be admirably situated, either for export by sea or for dispatch by the railway cattle-car. In an ordinary
season, and with a proper system of stock routes, droves can be at less cost sent to the most favorable
market. It may be confidently predicted that it needs but the advent of the iron road to stimulate cattle,
horse, and sheep breeding, to the lasting benefit of all Australia.

THE CaMEL.

The camel is now a thoroughly acclimatised animal in Australia, and is rapidly increasing in numbers
and, fortunately, in size, strength, and stamina, thus showing that the country, food, and climate are suited
to the animal. Its value as a beast of burden is universally recognised, and, we may add, that there are
many parts of the great Continent that to-day would be unknown but for the assistance of this useful but
ugly beast; and it is not too much to say that there is no part of Australia the camel will not traverse,
however severe the season, with his load of from four to six cwt., often much more. A writer, the late
Mr. N. E. Phillipson says : ‘‘ Camels are the only motive power that is of any service in times of drought, to
which the interior of this continent is so subject: and as shown they are able to keep in excellent condition
on the scantiest feed, and when an occasional good season occurs they get very fat. In addition to being
employed in the transit of wool, they convey immense amounts of supplies into the interior, including stores
and provisions required for the Adelaide to Port Darwin telegraph line, and are in general use by the police
telegraph, survey, water conservation, and geological departments.” ,

Tue Osrricu.

That the ostrich will thrive well over a large area of the Northern Territory is certain. The latitude
climate, and soil are all favorable, and many varieties of the birds’ natural food grow in abundance ; indeed, the
ostrich that would turn up its nose, or, to be strictly accurate, its beak, at the larder provided in these ostrich:
favored regions must be an epicure of epicures. It is safe to predict that not many years will elapse befo
the ostrich feather of commerce and fashion will be one of the products of Central Australia That farmi -
these magnificent birds is a remunerative industry has been abundantly proved not only in South ieee Ge
in South Australia, at Port Augusta and Lake Alexandrina. At each of these farms splendid Feather:
grown, equal, we understand, to the best produced in the world. Fed on the indigenous plant life sad ad
of the interior of Australia, there is good reason to assume results would be even more satisfactory. a

It is matter for regret that the ostrich, the eland, and other useful creatures embracing the many kind
the antelope tribe, have not years since been introduced and turned at large toroam over much of ike hith a
waste parts of Australia. Without doubt, all would have thriven well, and many have proved of ne
as an article of food in the development of the country. In a country and climate so admirably
animal life, it is unfortunate this has been so long neglected.

great value
adapted to

PORT
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 13

 

PORT DARWIN.

 

Mr. J. G. Knight, a former Government Resident, describes this harbor as follows :—

_ Port Darwin, the principal harbor for shipping in the Northern Territory is situated in latitude (of Fort
Hill) 12° 28" 30” S., and longitude 130° 52’ E. The harbor is fine and spacious, comprising many square
miles of water, varying in depth from four to 15 fathoms. It is high water at ‘full and change,” five
hours 25 minutes. Springs rise from 16 to 24 feet; and neaps, from two to 12 feet. The tides are
irregular—the ebb stream commencing some 40 minutes before high water.*

Tue Jerry.

The original wooden pile jetty at Port Darwin having been greatly damaged by the depredations of
the Teredo sp., it is being replaced by a substantial iron structure, under the instructions of the South

 

 

 

i ——

 

 

Pratt 1—New Jetty, Port Darwin.

Australian Government. When completed it will be worthy of the trade and the Port (see Plate No. 1).
Appended is a memo. from the Engineer-in-Chief :—

The last report from the Northern Territory regarding the new iron pile jetty is dated August 16 last.
The whole of the connection between the shore and the working head of the jetty—about 400 feet—which
constitutes the heaviest part of the work has been finished, and the iron piling of the transverse head for 135
feet has also been put in place and completely braced down to low water level. The divers engaged upon
the job are now putting on the lower bracing, and the same has been completed for a length of 45 feet.

(Signed) A. B. MONCRIEFF,
16/10/1902. Engineer-in-Chief.

PALMERSTON.

 

On the shores of this splendid harbor, on a plateau 60 or 70 feet above the sea level, the rising town of
Palmerston has been established, and is the terminus of the principal line of submarine cable connecting
Australia with Europe and the East; also the northern headquarters of the telegraph line across Australia
to Adelaide, and thence to all the principal cities of Australia. (See Frontispiece and Plate 2).

Palmerston is also the northern terminus of the first section of railway already completed and extending
to Pine Creek, 146 miles in length, and passing through a rich mineral country. The distance from
Adelaide

 

*“ The Northern Territory,” by J. G. Knight, 1880.
14 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

seenars She SS

 

Adelaide to Oodnadatta, the present termination of the southern section, is 688 miles, leaving, therefore,

about 1,083 miles of line to be laid down by the proposed Transcontinental Railway. And it may be
here to mention the existing stations which have been opened up along the line of telegraph from ice
Creek to Oodnadatta; these are Daly Waters, Powell Creek, Tennant Creek, Barrow Creek, 1
Springs, at MacDonnell Ranges, Charlotte Waters, and, after this, the terminus, Oodnadatta.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS, RAINFALL, AND TEMPERATURE.

Before entering upon the general resources of the Northern Territory, agricultural, pastoral, mineral,

or otherwise, it may be desirable to furnish extracts from official sources embracing the climatic conditions
of the Territory,* also a general table of average rainfall, extending over a number of years, at the betes
principal stations on the proposed line, including Port Darwin, to which is also added a table o uae
monthly temperature at three stations—Port Darwin, Daly Waters, and Alice Springs. These tables have
been supplied, through the kindness of Sir Charles Todd, from the Adelaide Observatory. The average
annual rainfall in the first column is also recorded in map. See Appendix A.

 

 

 

THE CLIMATE.

Mr. J. A. G. Little, Senior and Inspecting Officer of the Post and Telegraph Department, Port
Darwin, supplies the subjoined remarks under the above heading :— ;

The year has two climatic divisions, consisting of the wet season (from October to April) and the
dry period (from May to September). The different changes of these seasons are so uniform and regular
that they may be predicted almost to a day. Signs of the approach of the wet season appear immediatel
after the sun has crossed the Equator during the spring equinox, in September, when the strong ES E
monsoon—which has been blowing continually throughout the dry season—ceases, and is succeeded ‘by
calms and light, variable winds ; the weather becomes intensely hot, and small thunder-clouds gather se
the land, increasing in size and density day by day until they burst into terrific thunder-storms accom-
panied by hurricane squalls of wind and rain. These squalls, at first, take place every four or five days
gradually increasing in number until the end of November, when they occur almost daily. They come u :
in a dense black bank, and travel so very rapidly that they are generally out of sight on the pester

horizon

 

 

* See “ The Northern Territory of South Australia.”—J. G. Knight, F.R.I.B.A., A.I.C.E. (Lond.), 1880.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 15

horizon within 40 minutes. About an inch, or sometimes more, of heavy driving rain accompanies each
storm ; but in the year 1871 the writer of this article saw 23 inches of rain gauged within 10 minutes
during one of these squalls.

During December the N.W. monsoon gradually gains the ascendency and blows steadily, with an
occasional break of calm weather. The thunder-storms disappear, the sky becomes overcast and clouded,
and the atmosphere gets thoroughly saturated with moisture—so much so that leather-work becomes green
with mildew if not constantly attended to, the binding of books becomes soft, and sugar or salt, if exposed
in an open vessel, will soon liquify. This is felt to he an agreeable change after the intensely hot weather
during the change of the monsoon in October and November, and, although the humid, moist atmosphere
induces profuse perspiration, the effects of the weather are not nearly so unpleasant or severe as those
attending the dry heat experienced in the southern portion of Australia during the same and two
succeeding months.

The N.W. monsoon is accompanied by rain almost daily, and increases in force until the latter end
of January or beginning of February, when it is blowing in full heart, and penetrates with its copious
and fertilising showers into the very centre of Australia. During this period thick, damp weather
prevails, the clouds being very low, and scud and banks of nimbus pass over almost constantly from the
N.W. to the S.E. with great rapidity. The maximum temperature in the shade during the day in this
weather is 96°, and the minimum during the night 65°.

On the approach of the autumn equinox the N.W. monsoon gradually dies away, and is succeeded
by the calms, variable winds, thunder-storms, and oppressive weather until about the end of April, when
cooler weather is felt, the S.E. monsoon sets in, and the dry season may be said to have fairly commenced.
The wind is characterised by a clear sky, enjoyable weather, heavy dews, and cold mornings and nights
—so much so that blankets can be used when sleeping. It blows off the coast without intermission, and
with great force, almost throughout the season, being in full heart between June and July. At Port
Darwin and other places adjacent to the coast, the monsoon generally drops in the afternoon, and is some-
times succeeded by a sea breeze, which is merely local, and only extends a few miles inland. The
atmosphere is clear and dry, aid rather hot during the middle of the day—the maximum temperature in
the day being 89°, and the minimum during the night 56°, *

The Government Resident, in his report dated Palmerston, April 1, 1885 (A. No. 54), also says :—

Tt must be freely admitted that the north coast of Australia is distinctly tropical, and also that we
suffer here the ordinary ‘ills which flesh is heir to’ in the tropics; but, at the same time, it can be
affirmed with confidence that the climate of Palmerston is undeniably healthy. Children live under the
verandahs in the open air, and grow and thrive. Women, who are freed from the kitchen by Chinese
cooks, maintain their strength. Men can work in the lightest and airiest of attire with comparative
comfort, though with much perapiration ; they can play tennis and cricket, also with much perspiration,
and generally look well. Of course Palmerston has the benefit of sea breezes, and Dr. Wood, who has had
a wide experience ia tropical countries, informs me that for its latitude he knows of no place in the samo

parallels of latitude so healthy.

 

 

THE SOIL AND ITS CAPABILITIES.

AGRICULTURE.

COTTON.

There is no doubt that the Northern Territory is singularly noted for the growth of cotton.
Although not indigenous, it is now found growing wild through the jungles, and there is no place in the
world more adapted for its successful cultivation. Dr. Holtze, when Director of the Botanic Gardens at
Port Darwin, sent some of the produce to the Manchester Exhibition, where it was most favorably
reported on. The mill owners of Lancashire, with the view of cmancipating themselves from the rings
that control the American supply, are now reported to be’ searching for some part of the British
Dominions where they can successfully promote the growth of cotton. They might search in vain for a
better place than the Northern Territory. Provision would nn’oubtedly have to be made in the near

future for the labor required.

In a paper read before the Geographical Society in Adelaide on July 4, 1901, by Mr. Maurice Holtze,
F.LS., F.R.G.S. (Lond.), who for many years was Director of the Botanic Gardens, Palmerston, Port
Darwin, he states there is quite enough suitable land in the northern extremity of the Territory for very
considerable cultivation, quite enough to make the country prosperous. The agricultural land is situated
near the soa coast and on the banks of the rivers flowing to the sea, Plantations should therefore be kept
within a belt of, say, 80 miles wide round the coast, which would give us an area of about 80,000 square
miles, or upwards of 51,000,000 acres. A small part of the Northern Territory indeed ; but yet even
granted that less than a quarter of this area is suitable fur agriculture, it is sufficiently large to employ

several hundred thousand people in tropical agriculture.
This assertion may seem greatly exaggerated till you remember that Java, within less than five days’
steam from Port Darwin, carries on something like 80,000 square miles a population of considerably over

20 millions.
Propucts

 

* See “ The Northern Territory of South Australia,”—J. G. Knight, F.R.I.B.A,, A.I.C.E. (Lond.), 1880,
16 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

Propucts THAT MAY BE SUCCESSFULLY GkOWN.

Now you will ask: “Is the climate and rainfall suitable, and what plants can be rie
grown?” To this question I can say: Those parts of the Territory J have seen myself have a en
larger proportion of good arable land than I just estimated, and persons quite able to judge who ane
other parts of the coastland maintain that this is the case also'there. The rainfall of the coasta Faded
the Northern Territory is almost identical with that of French Cochin China, and this coun Stier
feeding its own teeming population, exports annually half a million tons of rice. I can hardly 9
than to quote here from my report on “ Agriculture in French Cochin China,” written 10 1887 :—

Early on the morning of March 4 we started by railway to see the country The on tae "a
to Mytho, 72 kilometres (45 miles) from Saigon. The whole of the environs of Saigon an . sce
the railway line may be termed one large rice-field. The soil and the whole aspect of a eee : fe
very similar to the banks of our large rivers that the most discriminating judge would not be ailveator
where the lands of the Saigon River are superior to those of, for instance, the Adelaide a ee
Rivers. A sample of soil dug up by me at Benluck during the stopping of the train, ee Za el
rice-field, has been pronounced by everybody who has seen the Adelaide River as inferior, but ve ua
like the bulk of the Adelaide River land. Yet Saigon is able to export this year some ss pee
pickuls, or, in a round sum, half a million tons of rice, while our poor Territory, with a a er =
better climate, has to import even the small quantity of rice consumed there, while her large a
arable land lie idle.

I have before this strongly and repeatedly recommended that the Territory should be snooutgt’
every way to grow rice, but since I have seen Saigon and its rice country I am more than ever oF =
that only cheap labor and liberal land laws are required to make the Northern Territory the re a
field for the Australian colonies. It is an interesting fact that it is the only country in the world w
the rice plant is indigenous.

T subjoin here the rainfall for Saigon, according to the Annuaire de la Cochin-Chine :—

 

 

1884. 1885. ae

January His ofa ae 21 millimetres — millimetres.
February... % ss 45 vi = ”
March ae “3 08 — <i 5°0 ”
April a 5 a 47 ‘ 3720,
May ue i 99°7 . 145°60 3
June 2 3 Ht 10255 - 186 0 =
July ek = ve 807-85 . 743-0 -
August ie 208 = 127 05 5 119°90 %
September ... si we, 81425 + 129 20 ‘is
October see st bed 187°80 33 117°60 is
November ... Bs A 117 88 . 105°40 3
December ... fi a 37:0 i 39°73 ie

Totals sis ... 1,305 38 millimetres, 1,628°63 millimetres,

or 52°20 inches. or 65°14 inches.

By this table it can be seen that Cochin China has a distinct dry and wet season like the Northern
Territory, whose rainfall is somewhat heavier than that of Saigon, while the temperature (as Saigon is
almost the same latitude north, 10° 46’, as Port Darwin is south) is very near the same.

The rainfall of the Northern Territory for the 13 years from 1887 to 1899, the only period the records
of which I have just at hand, is in round numbers as follows for Port Darwin :—

1887 sig ... 67 inches, 1894 Ree ... 603 inches.
1888 o . 61, 1895 a . 782,
1889 ghd owe BSE ay 1896 vane je (OTR cg
1890 i ae OBS 5; 1897 ee wow 24 ‘ee
1891 a ean ands 1898 on BS,
1892 ibe woe §«=424 ,, 1899 oe ear ADORE. 55
1893 asi we 623 =,

This report, I take it, compares very favorably with that of Saigon, and so far as the cultivation of
rice is concerned, there is no doubt whatever that the Territory could produce all the rice the Common-
wealth of Australia ever will require. There are, however, other plants which, with proper management,
can well be grown in the Northern Territory. This I have proved to the satisfaction of every visitor able
to judge, in the Botanic Garden at Port Darwin, the soil of which is decidedly not superior to the average
soil of the Northern Territory, and have done so on an expenditure per acre less than that generally
considered necessary on properly-conducted plantations. These are sugar, rice, coffee, tobacco, cocoanuts,
india-rubber, jute, ramee, arrowroot, tapioca, sesame seed, and peanuts, besides maize and the usual food and
fodder plants and fruits of the tropics. For all these plants the soil and climate of the Territory are
quite suitable, and there is no reason why they should not be successfully grown.

PRODUCTS BOTANIC GARDENS, PALMERSTON.

Appended are extracts from the report of the late curator, Mr. Holtze, and also from his son, Mr.
Nicholas Holtze, of their operations at the Botanic Gardens, Palmerston, at several different periods

showing an extensive range of products under cultivation, and indicating other kinds that may be
successfully grown.

ReEporr
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 17

 

Report For 1890. B. No. 28.
Palmerston, January 1, 1891,

T annexed to my last report a list of useful plants being then on trial in the garden. I will now take out of this
list a number of plants whose products are prominent in tropical agriculture and commerce, and show what success
may be expected from their cultivation in the Northern Territory, All the plants with which I will now deal, I
may remark, are not in the garden as single specimen plants, but have been grown in quantities. I believe that I
am justified if I maintain that what has been done with these plants on hundreds of square yards can also be done
on hundreds of acres, :

Maize.—Of this crop an area of about ten acres has been planted. This large area was planted to clean the
ground, which is horribly infested with weeds, and to prepare it in this manner for other crops. At the present
time the crop stands simply magnificent.

Oil Plants.—Peanuts, chufa, sunflower, sesame, castor oil, croton oil, benoil, jatropba oil. All these plants
have this year again done so well that even the most exacting critic would not be able to find fault with them.

African Oil Palm,—The trees in the garden are doing very well; a number of young plants will be planted out
shortly,

 

Prats 3—RueA oR Ramee Fisre. FIvE MONTHS’ GROWTH

Botanic Gardens, Port Darwin.

’~ Palms,—Date palm, Chinese fan palm, Toddy palm, Areca palm, Palmyra palm, Sago palm, Kittool palm,
Gomuta palm, Cabbage palm, Bastard sago palm, and several other less useful palms all do well in the garden, and
most of them have made fair growth.

[Note by Editors.—There is no doubt that the Date palm (Phoenix Dactylifera) and probably many other varieties will
grow luxuriantly over many parta of the most arid portion of Central Australia. ]

Fibre Plants.—Ramee (see Plate 3), jute, sun hemp (see Plate 4), cotton, kapok, Manila hemp, bowstring
hemp, Pita fibre. These are all thoroughly successful ; ramee shoots four months old are over eight feet high ; and
sun hemp sown 2} months ago is already seven feet high without showing as yet any flowers. Cotton,
as well known, only requires cheap labor to make its cultivation here a pecuniary success.

Arrowroot.—Red as well as white arrowroot has always been successful here. ‘The shoots of the red arrowroot
(Canna) are over nine feet high.

Cassava, or Tapioca.—In good friable soil the growth of this plant is as good as can be seen anywhere. 5
LATE
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

18

 

‘Ulaleg log ‘suapaed o1ueqog

‘HEMOUD SAUVGA OMT, “INVIG NONVNNIQ—Q FLVIg

‘aqqas Woud

‘uIMIed WOg

SHINOW dIVH V GNV HOOK

 

‘suopaeyy) o1ueqod

‘(vaounl viwvjoj04g) aNayY NaQ—F sLvIg

 

Spices
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 19

Spices and Medicinal Plants.—Pepper, cinnamon (see Plate 5), ginger, turmerix, zedoary, yalanga root, cassia,
citronella grass, cardamon, nutmeg, vanilla. . Of these plants the three latter have as yet not been very successful,
and are not yet grown in numbers. Pepper has been of rather slow growth owing to the dry weather we have this
season experienced, but is doing fairly well, All the other spice plants have been quite successful.

_ , Carob Tree.—I have been told by visitors who have seen this tree in the southern colonies that its growth here
is decidedly stronger than there ; at any rate, the plants stand very flourishing.

The white, green, and black grams are all three doing thoroughly well again. As they ripen their pulse within
four months and grow on very indifferent ground, their culture should be of interest to southern farmers.

Millet, caffircorn, sorghum, broomcorn, and dhol, are all growing most luxuriantly.

Voandzeya.—The Madagascar earthbean. This interesting plant grows in great luxuriance, and gives a large
crop of edible pulse which ripens underground like the peanut.

Fodder Grasses.—I did not include these in my list of useful plants, but may be allowed to mention that a very
complete collection of grasses and other fodder plants are grown in the garden. Some of the best perennial kinds

 

Puate 6—Tsosinte (Fopper Grass), Five MONTHS FROM SEED.

Botanic Gardens, Port Darwin.

such as sorghum halepense, panicum maximum, tricholaena rosea, teneriffae, and atropurpurea, are already spreading
wild over the country (see Plate 6).

From Report ror 1889. A No. 28.

African Oil Palms have done well, and twenty more trees have been planted out; more seed has been planted
recently.

Cocoanut Palm (see Plate 7).—The nuts planted last year are doing so well that I can only repeat my recom-
mendation, the waste space between the cultivated part of the garden and the sea, which consists to the greater part
of mangroves, should be planted with cocoanuts, which would, in times to come, give a very handsome permanent
revenue. The small islands and otherwise useless parts of the seashore should also be let under easy terms and long
periods, for the cultivation of cocoanut palms. The yearly crop of cocoanuts in Ceylon is estimated to be of a
value of £2,000,000 by Sir Charles Dilke. The value of the export alone was, for 1884, about £900,000. Other
useful palma have been planted out in considerable numbers, as for instance, 150 areca palms, 500 sago palms, 250
talipot palms, 20 Palmyra palms, and a number of other palms in smaller quantities. All of them seem to do ee

B2
20 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

pita, African hemp, absoma

Fibre Plants.—As jute, sunhemp, cotton, ramee, Manila hemp, bowstring hemp, ecivia of the garden,

hemp, and others have done well. Of kapok, 200 young trees were planted out in the ou

: e all done well.
Arrowroot, touslesmois, and tapioca have done again as well as usual. Dye and tan plants hav

200 arnatto
There have been planted out 20 divi-divi, 10 gamboge, 100 sappanwood, 100 logwood, a a OP riuben nerd
(see Plate 8), 150 areca palms. Arnatto has fruited freely in the garden during the pas repeat that forete of
gum-arabic occupy about a quarter-of-an-acre on the outskirts of the garden. I can only rep
those trees should be established by the Government.

ry good
Oil Plants.—Peanut. Of this plant about one acre had been planted last season. ; ae EH aie nea
and after keeping six cwt. for seed and distribution, I sold one ton to the Chinese ae he Held Iooke wou
24 acres have been planted on very sandy soil, between young cocoanut palms, an dee
promising. In addition to keeping the ground cool and free from weeds, this gave a revenue

: ; i f ce to
Sesame. —Receiving during the last year a communication from the Waverley CUB lat teary eren
this oil seed, I have planted about one acre of this on a poor stony slope, and the crop stands mag .

, vat d
Choofa, croton oil, castor oil, sunflower, bean oil, jatsopha, and litsomella grass have all done very well, an

the new crops are promising.

 

Piate 7—Cocoanur Patms. SIxTEEN MONTHS’ GROWTH,

Botanic Gardens, Port Darwin.

Rice.—All the sorts experimented on have done well, and a heavy crop of rice was obtained. A Chinese
merchant took samples of the rice to Hongkong for the purpose of inducing his friends there to take up land in the
Territory for the cultivation of rice, but owing to the restrictions put on Chinese immigrants, [ believe this scheme
will fall through.

Vegetable wax has made very good growth, but has not fruited as yet.

Spices and Medicinal Plants.—Cinnamon has fruited in the garden this year for the first time, and about 100
young plants have been planted out. Pepper and Betel pepper have done wellin shelter; about 50 of each have
been planted out in the jungle adjoining the garden. Through the kindness of the Buitenzorg Botanical Gardens, I
received a new supply of vanilla, which has done better than last year, and been planted out in the jungle.

Cocoa.—Forty young healthy trees have been planted out, and seem to do well.
Liberian Coffee.—Eight hundred trees have been planted out, and healthier looking trees could not be expected.

Tobacco,
THES, TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 21

 

Tobacco.—There cannot be the slightest doubt that the Territory is suitable for the growth of the best sorts of
tobacco. The trial this year comprised small beds of 33 sorts of tobacco. Of these, seeds received from cold
climates, such as Germany, Russia, and Hungary, have been least satisfactory ; while Manila, Havanna, and other
tropical kinds, have done very well, Sorts received from America have also given good crops. Of course heavy
leaves could not be expected from ground which has been at least six years under cultivation, On the rich virgin
soil of our valleys and jungles tobacco cultivation should become one of the chief factors of the country’s wealth.

Palse, grains, millets, sorghum of all kinds, dhol, earthpea, etc., have all done very well, and the present crops
stand luxuriant. Our collections of fodder grasses and valuable exotic timber trees are also added to constantly.
Amongst the latter, I must draw your attention to the splendid growth made by the Indian teak trees, about 100 of
which have been planted on the outskirts of the gardens, and if their growth continues as it haa been till now it
would be well worth the consideration of the Government to establish forests of this tree in the Territory.

I would like.to draw the attention of the Government to the fact that quantities of raw material go annually to
waste in the gardens for the want of simple and inexpensive machines to transfer this waste material into commercial
products,

 

Pirate 8—ArnattTo (Dye Plant). Two Years’ GROWTH.

Botanic Gardens, Port Darwin.

Before concluding this my report [ have to draw the attention of the Government to the trial shipments of
pineapples made by me under your orders last month. A letter from Messrs Smith & Son, Angaston, having been
received by Mr. Knight on the subject of a supply of pineapples for canning from here, this letter was handed by
Mr. Knight to me for attention. I was unable to induce any of the Chinese to make at least a trial shipment.
Referring this case to you, you at once saw the possible good this could do to the Territory, and ordered me to send
as a trial two crates with fruit. This shipment has been so successful that of a number of over 11 dozen only four
pineapples were slightly spoiled. That no artificial means are required to establish successful plantations here is
sufficiently shown in the garden. I will here state most distinctly that there is no artificial treatment used in the
cultivation of any of the plants mentioned in the report. Such a course, even in the smallest quantities, would
expose our experiments to the remarks that our plants were highly manured, while, in fact, all our experiments are
conducted on ground which has been previously used for the growth of maize and rice by Chinese squatters during
at least four years, so that a planter with well-selected virgin soil should have no difficulty in obtaining better

do.
results than we I have, ete.,

MAURICE HOLTZE, F.L.S., Curator.
Further
bo
Lo

THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

 

 

a

 

Further and later extracts are appended from the Reports of the Curator, Mr. Nicholas Holtze.

ReEporT FoR 1897. A. No. 45.

: ’ eip
Indiarubber.—This product has excited much attention during the past year owing to the world’s supply & =
unequal to the demand, and I have had several enquiries from local and outside sources for Es a. eeen
plants. We have at the present time four different kinds of rubber-yielding plants under Mone ee oad
rubber (Mtnhot Gaziovi), H2vea rabber (Hevea Brasiliensis) (see Plate 9), Assam rubber coe ae aa a
Madagascar rubber (Cryptostegia grandiflora). Of these the most succeseful is the Ceara rubber ;
growth, and thoroughly suited to soil and climate.

Sisal Hemp.—Tha plants in our nursery beds are out-growing their limits, I had a waste pe ea
prepared, and 2,000 suckers put in the lines, The plants first introduced iato the garden have eae iy Eoeeauchly
specimens, and produce any quantity of suckers. I[t has been amply demonstrated that the plan
suited to the soil and climate of the Territory.

 

Puate 9—Hevea Russer (Hevea Brasiliensis ).

Botanic Gardens, Port Darwin.

Report For 1898. A. No, 45.

Indiarubber.—A small plantation has been made of the Ceara rubber (Manihot Glaziov),
growth. This rubber does the best in the Northern Territory of any that we have tried
thoroughly suited to the country. It is of fast growth, comes quickly to maturity,
An objection against it is that the wood is very brittle, and the trees liable to be damag

and it is making good
so far, and is proved
and produces plenty of seed.
ed by strong winds.

Sisal Hemp.—The 2,000 plants put out last season are doing remarkably well on very indifferent soil, and there
is no question that the plant has found a congenial home here. The two plants first introduced into the Northern
Territory seven years ago are now both showing flower spikes, and after producing bulbils may be expected to die
out. The production of suckers from the root is enormous.

REPORT FoR 1901. B. No. 45.

Sugarcane.—The different varieties made very satisfactory growth last season, some in particular showin
. : 1 8 -
did sticks. The second “ ratoons ” now are looking as well as can be wished. pablee

Ginger,
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 23

 

_ Ginger.—Splendid tubers were produced last season, and I have increased the area of the block under culti-
vation with the same. The plants now are just showing above the ground. ‘Two varieties are cultivated. Sun
hemp, a plant largely cultivated in India, is represented by a small block, though, as a matter of fact, it is indigenous
to the Territory, and has been noticed by the late curator of the garden occurring with rice on the Daly River.
Another Indian fibre, the jute, represented in our collection, is also indigenous to the Territory. The value of the
raw fibre of this plant annually imported into England is stated to be over £4,000,000 sterling. Ramee Fibre.—
A fresh block has been planted with roots of this plant, and magnificent growth has been made. Bowstring Hemps.
—Three species are represented in the garden, but only two (Sanseviera Zeylanica and S. Cylindricu) grow large
enough for fibre purposes. The plants have been proved well adapted to the climate, and last year a successful
experiment was made in propagating them from leaf cuttings, one leaf giving perhaps half-a-dozen plants, so that a
stock can be soon worked up when required. The fibre produced is stated to be excellent, and worth £20 to £30
aton. Among other kinds that may be mentioned, the following proved thoroughly suited to the place, viz.,
Manila hemp, of which a small block has been planted out; 50,000 tons of this fibre are annually exported from the
Philippine Islands,

The experimental plots have been fully occupied during the year, and make a good show. I would particularly
refer to the different starch plants, turmeric, patchouli, peanuts, citronella oil plant, rice, the cocoa plant, the
different fodder grasses, cassava, grasscloth (rhea), and the various other fibre plants.

A large number of African oil palms (Elais guineenses) have been planted out in the Garden this season. These
plants were raised from seeds produced by the trees first planted in the Garden, which are doing remarkably well,
and appear to be one of the few species not touched by white ants,

The sisal hemp makes a fine show planted out on the outskirts of the cultivated portion of the Garden, and is
producing an unlimited supply of young plants both by the pole and by suckers,

A couple of date palms produced fruit very freely this year, but it proved of poor quality. This, however, is
not to be wondered at, considering that the trees are seedlings, As the growth has been so encouraging, I shall now
endeavor to obtain suckers.

The fodder grasses introduced this season include the Mitchell and Flinders grasses, received from the
Tablelands, and Paspalum dilitatum, or crown grass, which has created such a stir recently in the southern States. It
is too early yet to speak of the results, but the growth of the Mitchell grass is particularly encouraging, and it may
prove suitable for dissemination on the coast country.

I have, etc.,
NICHOLAS HOLTZE, Curator.

His Honor Mr. Justice Dashwood, Government Resident.

 

PEARL FISHERIES.

In addition to the agricultural capabilities thus reported on, a valuable and remunerative pursuit has
been carried on for some years in the Pearl Fishing Industry.

After an interval of nine or ten years, this industry was resumed in 1892. We append extracts
from the yearly reports of the Government Resident, showing the number of tons raised in each year and
the value thereof, giving for the ten years, 1892-1901, a total of 1,385.8, tons pearl raised; value,
£151,195 :— ,

PEARL SHELL FISHING.

 

 

 

Year. Tons Raised. Value.
1892, = Ly 10 £1,705
1893 ue vids on 45 5,995
1894... a ds 1118, 8,618
1895. oe : 17235 12,935
1896 i sid iiats 18933, 18,362
1897... oo ie 13738 15,666
1898 Ses seit xs 193 18,563
1899 sia as wth 211 29,509
1900. a as 174 22,674
1901 Soy cee wie 141 17,168

Total for ten years... 1,385.5 £151,195

 

 

 

 

CHARACTER
tae ae

24 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY.

——

 

CHARACTER OF THE COUNTRY.

We now append a series of extracts from the journals and diaries of various notable ssploe T
the view of eliciting the testimony borne therein to the general character of the country thus Pt rank
chronological arrangement, commencing first with the journals of John McDouall Stuart, : #560
explorer, when he succeeded in crossing the Australian Continent for the first time, from November, :
to September, 1861.*

 

JOUN McDOUALL STUART.

 

Apri! 4, 1861, Mount Humphries.—At break of day ascended the Mount, which :
composed of a soft, white, coarse sandstone. On the top is a quantity of water-worn quartz, cemente
into large masses. The view is much the same as from Mount Beddome—broken ranges all round the
horizon, and apparently a dense scrub from south-west to west. It then becomes an open and grassy
country, with alternate patches of scrub. I can see a gum creek about two miles distant ; I can also see
water in it. To the north and eastward the country appears good. Went to the aforesaid water to see if
there is any I can depend upon. The creek is very large, with the finest gumtrees we have yet seen —all
sizes and heights. This seems to be a favorite place for the natives to camp, as there are 11 wurleys in
one encampment. The creek I have named the Finke.

April 5.—Good country. Started
on the same course, through sand-
hills and spinifex, for 10 miles.
Halted for half an hour to obtain an
observation of the sun, 117° 6’.
Within the last mile or two we have
passed a few patches of sheaoak,
growing large, having a very rough
and thick bark, nearly black.

April 6.—Small gum creek in
range of hills. Started on the same
course, 330°, to a remarkable hill,
which has the appearance at this
distance of a locomotive engine
with its funnel. For three miles
the country is very good, and at
six miles we got to one of the
largest gum creeks I have yet
seen. lt is much the same as
the one we saw on the 4th, and
the water in it is running. As
far as I can judge, the creek
comes from the south-west, but
the sandhills are so high, and the
large, black sheaoak so thick,
that { cannot distinguish the creek
very well. These trees look so much
like gums in the distance; some
of them are very large, as also are
the, gums in the creek. Numerous
tracks of blacks all about. We
passed through a few patches of
good grassy country. In the sand-
hills the oak is getting more
plentiful. We were three-quarters
of an hour in crossing the creek ; Puate 10.—CHampers PILLAR.
and obtained an observation of

 

the sun, 116° 26’ 15’. We then proceeded on the same course towards the remarkable pillar
of sandstone, standing on a hill upwards of 100 ft. high. From the base of the pillar to its top is
about 150 ft., quite perpendicular ; and it is 20 ft. wide by 10 ft. deep, with two small peaks on the top.

I have named it Chambers Pillar (see Plate 10). To the south-west are some high hills, through
which I think the Finke comes.

April 7, rainwater under sandstone hills.—Started on the same course, 330°, over low
sand rises and spinifex, for six miles. It then becomes a plain of red soil, with mulga bushes, and for
seven miles was as fine a grassed country as anyone would wish to look at—it could be cut with a scythe
Dip of the country to the east, sandhills to the west ; afterwards it became alternate sandhills and grassy
plains, mulga, mallee, and black oak. Proceeded through another long plain sloping towards the creel

ae ee and

 

 

 

*“ Exploration in Australia: Stuart, 1864.”

Briggs een
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 25

 

and covered with grass. At about one mile from the creek we again met with sandhills and spinifex, which
continued toit. Arrived and camped ; found water. Itis very broad, with a sandy bottom, which will not
retain water long ; beautiful grass on both banks. Wind east, and cool.

April 8, the Hugh Gum Creek.—I have named this creek the Hugh, and the range James Range.

THe James Rance.

_ April 9, the Hugh Gum Creek.—Started for the highest point of the James Range. At four miles
arrived on the top, through a very thick scrub of mulga. The range is composed of soft red sand-
stone, long blocks of it lying on the side. ‘To the east apparently red sandhills, beyond which are seen
the tops of other hills to the north-east. On the north-west the view is intercepted by a high broken
range with two very remarkable bluffs about the centre. I shall direct my course tu the east bluff, which
is apparently the higher of the two. In the intermediate country are three lower ranges, between which
are flats of green grass and red sandhills. To the west are grassy flats next to the creek; beyond these
are seen the tops of distant ranges and broken hills. At about six miles the Hugh seems to turn more to
the north, towards a very rough range of red sandstone. We then descended into a grassy flat, with a few
gum trees. At sundown, after having gone about eight miles further, we made a large gum creek, in which
we found some water. Itis very broad, with a sand-and-gravel bottom.

April 10, gum creek, bend of the Hugh.—A large number of native encampments here, and rushes
are growing in and about the creek. There is plenty of water.

April 11, bend of the Hugh.—The cucumber plant thrives here in great quantities, and
water is abundant. At 12 miles we got through both the gorges of the range, which I have
named the Waterhouse Range. The country between last night’s camp and the range is a red
sandy soil, with a few sandhills, on which is growing the spinifex, but the valleys between
are broad and beautifully-grassed. At fifteen miles again crossed the Hugh, coming from the east,
with splendid gumtrees of every size lining the banks. The pine was also met with here for the first time.
There is a magnificent hole of water here, long and deep, with rushes growing round it. I think it is a

spring ; the water seems to come from below a large bed of conglomerate quartz. I should say it was
permanent.

April 12, the Hugh.—Started for the bluff. At eight miles we again struck the creek
coming from the west, and several other gum creeks coming from the range and joining it. We have now
entered the lower hills of the range. Again have we travelled through a splendid country for grass, but
as we approached the creek it became a little stony. At 12 miles we found a number of springs in the
range. We are camped at a good spring, where I have found a very remarkable palmtree, with light green
fronds 10 ft. long, having small leaves }-in. in brea'lth, about 8 in. in length, and }-in. apart, growing from
each side and coming to a sharp point. They spread out like the top of the grasstree and the fruit has a
large kernel about the size of an egg, with a hard shell; the inside has the taste of a cocoanut, but when
roasted is like a potato. Here we have also the india-rubber tree, the corktree, and several new plants.
This is the only real range that I have met with since leaving the Flinders Range. I have named it the
MacDonnell Range, after His Excellency the Governor-in-Chief of South Australia, as a token of my
gratitude for his kindness to me on many occasions. The east bluff I have named Brinkley Bluff, and the
west one I have named Hanson Bluff. The range is composed of gneiss rock and quartz.

April 13, Brinkley Bluff, MacDonnell Range.—At sunrise I ascended the Bluff, which is the most
difficult hill I have ever climbed. It took me an hour and a half to reach the top. It is very high, and
is composed principally of igneous rock, with a little ironstone, much the same as the ranges down the
country. To the north-west the view is intercepted by another point of this range, on which is a high
peak, which I have named Mount Hay. To the north-east is the end of another range coming from the
south. On this, which I have named Strangways Range, is another high hill. Beyond is a luminous, hazy
appearance, as if it proceeded from a large body of water. Camped at sundown on the creek. There is
an abundance of water, which, apparently, is permanent, from the number of rushes growing all about it.
The feed is splendid. There are a number of fresh native tracks.

MacDonneELL Rance.

April 14, MacDonnell Range.—Started at 8 a.m. to follow the creek, as it seems to be the best way
of getting through the other ranges; but as it comes too much from the east I must leave it, and get
through at some of the low hills further down. This we at last contrived to do after a severe
struggle. It has taken us the whole day to come about five miles. We are now camped north of the
Bluff, at a gorge, in which there is a good spring of water. The creeks now run north from the range.

April 15, the North Gorge of MacDonnell Range.—I ascended the high hill on the east side of the
gorge; the atmosphere being much clearer, I got a better view of the country. To the north-west,
between the MacDonnell Range and the conical hill north north-west, is a large plain, apparently scrub ;
no hills on the horizon, but a light shade in the far distance ; the conical hill bears 340° from this; it
appears tu be high. From the foot of this, for about five miles, is an open grassy country, with a few small
patches of bushes. A number of gum creeks come from the ranges, and seem to empty themselves in the
plains. The country in the ranges is as fine a pastoral hill country as a man would wish to possess ; grass
to the top of the hills, and abundance of water through the whole of the ranges.

April 16, the North Gorge of MacDonnell Range.—Started at 9 a.m. to cross the scrub for the
distant high peak. For five miles ithe plain was open and well-grassed; afterwards it became thick with
mulga bushes and other scrubs.

April
 

26 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

oe i ithout
April 18, under the High Peak, Mount Frecling.—I must not leave this range wl

1 ; he range is
endeavoring to find a permanent water, as no rain seems to have fallen to the north of Se ee ok
composed of the same description of rocks as the MacDonnell Range, with vather Se ae wall
We have found new scrubs and flowers, also a small brown pigeon with a crest.

cone of stones on the peak, and named it Mount Frocling, The range I have called the Reynolds.

April 19, Mount Hugh.—Moved to the east side of the mount to fee ie be
water from the top. We found plenty of water in the gum creek, which is the head o hes Ce DS” The
on Tues lay night just before making the range. At this camp I have marked a tree ‘ : ae eM
cone of stones on the top of the mount bears 293°. Ten miles distant, in a branch creek did evoie- we
to the north of this, is more water ; and a little higher up, in a ledge of rocks, is a splendi : enh 7
water, 30 yards in diameter, and about 100 yards in circumference. We could not get to a a st
try the depth, but where we tried it was 12 feet deep. A few yards higher up is another le i tied
behind which is a second reservoir, but smaller, having a drainage into the former one. I have na
this Anna Reservoir.

April 20, east side of Mount Hugh.—Started to the south-east to find a epee ak cae
the range. On the other side we found a large gum creek with water in it, running to the north-east.
The range is well grassed, with gum creeks coming from it, and a little mulga scrub.

April 21, gum creek, east side of Mount Frecling.—Started at 7.30 a.m. across oie scrub
to another high hill, For seven miles the scrub is open and the land beautifully grassed. At 12 miles
from the camp we crossed another gum creek, coming from the range. As far as I could see, it ran to the
north-east. At about 22 miles met another arm of the gum plains, with large granite rocks nearly level

 

Pirate 11—Crntrat Mount Sruart.

with the surface. We found rainwater in the holes of these rocks. At 32 miles crossed the sandy bed of
a large gum creek divided into a number of channels ; too dark to see any water. Four miles further on,
cawped on a small gum creek with a little rainwater. The creeks are running to the north-east.

CentraL Mount Stuart.

April 22, small gum creek under Mount Stuart, centre of Australia.—To-day I find from my
observation of the sun, 111° 0’ 30’, that I am now camped in the centre of Australia. I have marked
a tree and planted the British flag there. There is a high mount about 24 miles to the
north-north east. I wish it had been in the centre ; but on it to-morrow I will raise a cone of stones, and
plant the flag there, and name it Central Mount Stuart.*

April 23, Centre—Took Kekwick and the flag, and went to the top of the mount. It is
quite as high as Mount Serle, if not higher. The view to the north is over a large plain of gums, mulga,
and spinifex, with watercourses running through it. The large gum creek that we crossed winds round
this hill in a north cast direction. At about ten miles it is joined by another.

April

*In Stuart’s M.8.8. Journal the mount was named Sturt, in memory of Captain Charles Sturt, the celebrated
Australian explorer (his leader in the expedition of 1844-5-6 into Central Australia), In his published diaries ang
in his subacquent publications and mays his own name—Stuart—has been substituted.

 
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 27

 

; April 24, Central Mount Stuart (see Plate 11).—Sent Kekwick in search of water, and to examine
a hill that has the appearance of having a cone of stones upon it. Kekwick returned in the afternoon,
having found water higher up the creek.

April 25, Oentral Mount Stuart.—Started at 9 a.m., on a course a little north-west, to the high
peak that I saw from the top of Mount Stuart, which bears 272°. To the north and south of our
line are several isolated hills, composed principally of granite. At ten miles there is a quartz reef on the
north side of the south hills. At 12 miles struck a gum creek coming from the south and running to the
north ; it has three channels, We found a little rainwater in one, and camped. The large creek that
flowed round Mount Stuart is named the Hanson.

STUART'S NEXT EXPEDITION,

Further extracts from the same journal of Stuart’s subsequent explorations, from December, 1861, to
December, 1862 :—

On March 12, 1862, the Centre was passed, when Stuart and his party camped for a day or two at
Attack Creek, and on April 5 camped at the east end of Newcastle Water. The next day the
camp was moved to the north end of Newcastle Water.

April 15, Sturt Plains, Forest.—Proceeded on a course of 250°, and at five miles again
struck the open plains, and changed to 189°. At one mile I found a fine waterhole three feet deep and
about 40 feet in diameter. Watered the horses, and proceeded on a southerly course, through grassy
plains with stunted gumtrees to the first water I found yesterday, and camped.

April 16, Frew Waterhole, Sturt Plains.—Started at 7.45 a.m., on a course of 302°, keeping
along the edge of the open plain. Seeing a small rise on the open plain, a little to the north of

west, I changed to 275°, and at two miles came upon some fine ponds of water about 14 miles long,
20 feet broad, and 3} feet deep.

April 17, Howell Ponds.—Started at 7 a.m., on a bearing 10° north of west. At 12 miles crossed
the open plains, and entered a thick forest of gum and other trees and shrubs,

May 1, Howell Ponds.—Leaving Mr. Kekwick in charge of the party, started with King
and Thring to the waterhole that I discovered on the 15th ult. Arrived in the afternoon and camped
This waterhole I have named Frew Waterhole. This waterhole is about 20 feet below the plain.
Since my last visit it is only reduced two inches, and is still a large body of clear water from the drainage
of the adjacent country. It will last much longer than I anticipated.

May 2, Frew Waterhole.—Started at 7.30 a.m.; course, 335°. At 10 miles, a dense forest
and scrub, Changed to 10° east of north. At half a mile struck a watershed, and followed it
north for two miles. At 34 miles again changed to 320°, and at about 1} miles struck some fine
ponds of water. Not seeing any opening in that direction, I changed to the gumtrees. At onc
and a half miles I was delighted at the sight of a chain of fine waterholes; their course north-wesb to
south-east, the flow apparently to south-east. I followed one pond, which was about half a mile long, and
appeared to be deep. A number of smaller ones succeeded. These pouds I name King Ponds.

May 8, Howell Ponds.—Started ap 8.30 am., keeping the former tracks made on my
previous journey to the westward to where we met with the thick foresp, About a mile beyond struck a
native track , followed it, running nearly north-west, until nearly 3 p.m., when we came upon a small
waterhole or opening in the middle of a small plain, which seems to have been dug by the natives, and is
now full of rainwater.

May 9, Nash Spring.—The whole of the day’s journey has been through a wooded country,
in some places very thick, but in most open ; it is composed of gums, hedge-trees, and some new trees, the
gums predominating At the end of 18 miles I again got into the grass country.

May 20, King Chain of Ponds.—Leaving Mr. Kekwick in charge of the party, I started
with King, Thring, and Auld on a northern course. At 1 p.m. changed to 65°, to what appeared to be a
bare hill. Ata little more than a mile struck a small watercourse running towards the north ; followed
it, and at about 24 miles came upon some ponds of water, but not so large as those at our depdét.
These ponds I name Auld Ponds.

May 21, Auld Chain of Ponds.—Started at 8.20 a.m. ; course, north. At three miles I found
another chain of ponds, but not so large These I named McGorrerey Ponds. Proceeded on the
same course, and passed through some thick belts of hedge-tree and scrub. The country then opened and
became splendidly grassed, with gums and other trees. Having seen what I consider to be permanent
water, I shall now runa straight course 20° east of north, and strike it occasionally to see if the water
continues. I have named these Daly Waters, in honor of His Excellency the Governor-in-Chief. Within
100 yards the banks are thickly wooded with tall mulga and lancewood scrub, but to the east is open gun
forest, splendidly grassed. Proceeded, occasionally touching the creek, and always found fine reaches of
water, which continued a considerable way.

DaLty Waters.
May 31, back to Daly Watora.-—Ascending more to the eastward, its bed is now conglomerate. There
are a number of small fish in this water, from three to five inches long, something resembling a perch.
June
28 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

June 2, Daly Waters.—Started at 7.20 am.; course, north. The whole day’s journey wee
been through splendid grass country and open forest of gumtrees and other shrubs. The country ae
over consisted mostly of undulations of ironstone and gravel, with a brown-colored rock occasionally,
between which were broad valleys of a light-colored soil.

June 13, Purdie Ponds.—Proceeded on a north course, and at seven miles crossed what seemed
to be a watershed, seemingly running to the west of north. Changed to north-north-west to follow
it. It gradually assumed the appearance of a small creek. At two miles came upon three small pools of
water. The general flow of the creek is north. Some of the new trees are growing very large on its
banks. The cabbage-tree is growing here also. This is the first time I have met with it, sometimes
growing to the height of 15 feet. All along the banks of the creek, and apparently for some distance
back, is covered with an abundance of grass,

June 14, River Strangways.—Ascended a hill near the creek to see what it and the country
ahead was like. Dismounted and scrambled to the top of the precipice ; was delighted to see below me a
large hole of water. Found the water to be deep and beautifully clear. Proceeded down a little farther,
and saw another large one. Discovered four new trees that we had not seen before, and several new
shrubs. Some of the party succeeded in catching a few fine large fish, some of them weighing two and a
half pounds. Some were of the perch family, and others resembled rock cod, with three remarkable black
spots on each side of their bodies. Latitude, 15° 30’ 3”.

June 19, gorge, River Strangways.—At 12 miles, seeing a stony hill of considerable elevation,
I went towards it. At the base of it was a deep creek; I was pleased to see a fine supply of
water in it. Followed it for abuut 10 miles through a beautifully-grassed country, passing occasionally
sandstone rises, with apparently scrub on their tops.

June 20, first camp north of gorge.—In the bed of the river there is growing some very large
and tall timber, having a dark-colored bark, the leaf jointed the same as the sheaoak. There are also some
very fine melaleuca trees, which here seem to displace the gums in the river. We have also passed some
more new trees and shrubs.

June 21, first camp north of gorge.—Started, following the river down, it frequently separating
into two or three channels and again joining. Numerous small watercourses are coming in on
both sides, from east and west. At nine miles I found a large and excellent pool of water in one of the
side creeks: it will last some time. It being now afternoon, and there being a nice open plain for the
horses, I have camped. The river is now running through stony hills, which are very cough, composed of
hard sandstone mixed with veins of quartz, some of which are very hard, much resembling marble with
crystalline grains in it. We are now passing a number of stringybark along with gum and other trees.
To the north, which is now apparently the course of the river, there seems to be an opening in the range
of stony hills. At 33° east of north from the camp, about eight miles distant, there is a high wooded
tent-hill on the range. This I have namec Mount Miller. The valley through which the main channel
flows is good soil, and covered with grass from two to four feet high Towards the north-west the hills
appear to be very rugged. Latitude, 15° 10’ 40”.

June 25, River Strangways —Started ab 9 a.m.; course, about 70° east of north, following
the channel. I expect in two or three miles to meet with the Roper. At three miles struck a
large sheet of deep clear water. Rounded the large sheet of water and proceeded along it. Followed
down the banks of the river, which I now find is the Roper. At seven miles tried to cross it, but found
it to be impossible ; it is now divided into a number of channels, very deep wud full of running water.
The banks of the river are thickly lined with cabbage-tree, also the cane, bamboo, and other shrubs.
The country is still of the same fine description. We are now north of Mr. Gregory’s tracks.
Latitude, 14° 5’.

June 27, West Roper River.—Started on a course of 320°, and at three and a half miles again
struck the Roper. It is a splendid river. We have passed many brooks and deep reaches of water some
miles in length, and the country could not be better ; it is really magnificent.

Roper River.

June 28, Roper River.—The water of this river is most excellent; the soil is also of the
first description; and the grass, although dry, most abundant, from two to five feet high. This is certainly
the finest country I have seen in Australia. We passed three rocky hills yesterday, not high, but having
grass up to their tops, round which the river winds at the base, forming large and long reaches of water.
On the grassy plains it forms into different channels, and is thickly timbered with sheaoak, gum, cabbage-
trees, and other trees and shrubs. Wind variable. :

June 30, Roper River.—Started at 8.10 a.m. Course west, following up the river. The
country is of the same excellent description. We have passed the stony rises on the north side of the
river, which are covered with grass to their tops. After crossing the river, I ascended another of the same
kind. To the south are a few hills scattered over the grassy plains, with lines of dark-green trees between
them. The river is still ranning very rapidly, and as this is a different branch from those previous]
discovered, I have named it the River Chambers. 7

_ duly 1, reedy swamp, River Chambers (see Plate 12).—Started at 8.20 am., following the
river on a course 30° east of north. After a mile it gradually came round to the south-east ale a
running stream in that direction. After passing a number of fine ponds, many of them with water in
them, came upon a large creek having long reaches of water in it, but not running. The reedy swam

must be a mass of springs, which causes the Roper to run with such velocity. Latitude, 14° 41’ 39”, P

July
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 29

a ee

 

 

 

July 2, west-north-west of yeedy swamp, River Chambers.—Started at 7.40 a.m, following
the river up until 10 o’clock. At 1 o'clock the river suddenly turned to the east, coming from very rough
hills of sandstone and other rocks. The country, although rough, is grassed to the top of the hills, with
an abundance of permanent water in the river. Latitude, 14° 32’ 30”.

July 3, River Chambers.—At 13 miles again struck the river coming from the west-north-west. Left
it, and followed its north-west course ; and at another mile again came upon it; with plenty of water.
After following it for three miles, came upon @ fine permanent hole of water. The valley through which
the creek flows is well-grassed, but the sides and the tops of the hills are spinifex mixed with grass.
All the small valleys are well-grassed. Latitude, 14° 26’ 50".

July 5, gorge.— Struck another large branch coming from the north-east and ranning apparently
south ; plenty of water in it. This I named the Waterhouse. The country on the last course 1S
again of the very best description, and well-grassed.

July 7, Waterhouse River.—Struck another creek coming from the north-east, with plenty
of water. Latitude, 14° 18’ 30". The timber is stringy-bark, some splendid trees ; amongst them gums
and a number of pines, also very fine. The first eight miles was again over a splendid country, and the
last three of the same description.

July 8, water creek in stony rises. —At 18 miles struck the head of a small creck flowing
nearly on my course. At two miles came upon another large creck having a running stream to the south
of west. This I have named the Katherine. Latitude, 13° 58’ 30”.

 

Piate 12—CHAMBERS RIveErR.

July 9, the Katherine.—Crossed the Katherine, and proceeded on & north-west course over &
basaltic country, splendidly grassed. Proceeded on the westerly course, expecting to meet with a
creek ; found none, but large springs coming from sandy rises. There is an immense quantity of water
coming from these springs ; the soil round them is of the best deep-black alluvial. About a mile to the
west is a strong stream running to the south west from them. I have called them Kekwick Springs.

Latitude, 13° 54’ 12”.

July 10.—Ab 1.30 crossed the table-land ; breadth, 13 miles. The view was beautiful. Standing
on the edge of a precipice we could see underneath, lower down, & deep creek, thickly wooded,
running o@ our course ; then the picturesque, precipitous gorge In the table-land ; then the gorge in the
distance. To the north-west were ranges of hills. The valley near the creek (which is a running stream)
is very thickly-wooded with tall stringybark, gums, and palm trees. The latter are very beautiful, the
stem growing upwards of 50 feet high, with leaves from eight to ten feet in length. Followed the creek
for about two miles down this gorge. The top course of the table-land is a layer of magnetic ironstone,
which attracted my compass upwards of 90°. In the valley is growing an Immense crop of grass. Beyond
all doubt we are now on the Adelaide River. Latitude, 13° 44’ 14”.

ADELAIDE RIVER.

July 11 Adelaide River.—The country is nearly all burnt throughout, but those portions
which have escaped the fire are well grassed, I should think this isa likely place to find gold in, from
the
30 _ THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. ee:

 

7 ‘ ; the
the quantity of quartz, its colour, and having so lately passed a large basaltic and granite country ;

conglomerate quartz being bedded in iron, and the slate perpendicular are good signs.

. . ]
July 12, the Mary Adelaide River.—The valleys and banks of the creek are of et pane
soil. One new feature seen to-day is the growing of large clumps of bamboo on the ban
river, from 50 to 60 feet in height and about six inches in diameter at the butt.

July 16, the Mary Adelaide River.—Passed over an undulating souteys oa say ae
the soil of the richest description. The rises are comprised of quartz and a hard white ’
occasionally a litttle ironstone.

July 18, Priscilla Creek.—Passed over grassy plains and stony rise, when,
the termination of a range in a bluff point, changed my course to 310°.

July 19, Lily Marsh, Adelaide River.—At three miles crossed some stony rises one nee
alluvial grassy valleys ; at four miles met the river. There is a small stony range of hills” to bs “ ;
which at the end of three miles dropped into a grassy plain of a beautiful black alluvial soil. atitude,
12° 39' 7”.

July 23, Freshwater Marsh.—Started at 7.40 a.m.; struck a large creek, deep and long
reaches. ‘this I have named Thring Creek. The country gone over to-day, after leaving the side of the
marsh, is of the same rich description of soil covered with grass. Latitude, 13 22’ 30".

July 24, Thring Creek.—Proceeded through a light soil, slightly elevated, with a little ironstone
on the surface, the voleanic rock cropping out occasionally ; also some small flats of black alluvial soil.
At 8} miles came upon a broad valley of black alluvial soil, covered with long grass; from this
I can hear the wash of the sea. Stopped the horses to clear a way whilst I advanced a few yards on
to the beach, and was delighted to behold the water of the Indian Ocean in Van Dieman’s Gulf. Thus
have I, throngh the instrumentality of Divine Providence, been led to accomplish the great object of
the expedition, and take the whole party safely through one of the finest countries man could wish to
behold ; good to the coast and with a stream of running water within half a mile of the sea. From New-
castle Water to the sea beach, the main body of the horses have been only one night without water, and
then got it within the next day. If this country is settled it will be one of the finest colonies under the

Crown, suitable for the growth of any and everything.

at three miles seeing

 

 

W. C. GOSSE’S EXPLORATIONS.

Extracts from diary of W. C. Gosse’s explorations (Paper No. 48/73) :—

July 19, camp in spinifex sandhills—When I got clear of the sandhills, and was only two miles
distant, and the hill for the first time coming fairly in view, what was my astonishment to find it was one
immense rock rising abruptly from the plain. The holes 1 had noticed were caused by the water in some
places forming immense caves. At 34 miles reached foot of rock. I have named this Ayers Rock.

Ayers Rock.

July 20, Ayers Rock (see Plate 13).—I rode round the foot of rock in search of a place to ascend.
Found a waterhole on south side, near which I made an attempt to reach the top, but found it hopeless.
Continued along to the west, and discovered a strong spring coming from the centre of the rock, and
pouring down some very steep gullies into a large deep hole at the foot of the rock. Seeing a spur less
abrupt than the rest of the rock, I left the camels here, and after walking and scrambling two miles
barefooted over sharp rocks, succeeded in reaching the summit, and had a view that repaid me for my
trouble. The top is covered with small holes in the rock, varying in size from two to 12 feet in diameter,
all partly filled with water. Mount Olga is about 20 miles west. This is a high mass of granite, the
surface of which has been honeycombed and is decon¥posing, 1,190 feet above surrounding country, two
miles in length (cast and west) and one mile wide, rising abruptly from the plain. The soil around the
rock is rich and black. This seems to be a favorite resort of the natives in the wet season, judging from
the numerous camps in every cave. This rock is certainly the most wonderful natural feature I have ever
seen. What a grand sight this must present in the wet season: waterfalls in every direction !

August 8, Ayers Pack.—Started for Mount Olga. At two miles the good country round the rock
ends, and spinifex and oak sandhills commence, and continue to eight miles. From here the country is good,
with abundance of good grass ; very thick timber close to the hill.

August 10.—Continued on same course three miles ; foot of stony rise timbered with a new variety of
mulga in blossom—very pretty trees. At 44 miles crossed a watercourse. The banks of it
were covered with quandong trees, loaded with ripe fruit, the finest I ever saw, some of them 1}
inches diameter. It is the prettiest fruit I have seen growing, the rich red contrasts so well with the
green leaves. Six and a half miles top of peak. By the barometer I find it is 1,480 feeb above
surrounding country, composed of granite, basalt, and quartz.

Mounr Ote@a.
August 12, Mount Olga.— Mount Olga is about 1,500 feet above surrounding country.

August 14, water near Stevenson Peak ; latitude, 25° 29’ 15” south.—Started for Mann Ranges
passing over wel] grasscd country and stony rises, I found two nice waters in small gum creek, coming

from
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 31

from a range east of Peak. At six miles over sandy ground with beautiful grass and herbs, which has
more the gay appearance of a flower garden than pasture land. Struck a granite rise bearing north-west.

“a August 15.—At seven miles spinifex country changed to a splendidly grassed flat, with vetch and
_ geranium, which extend to foot of range nine miles. Here I found a little water, enough to water
orses; but I must search for some to bring camp to. Proceeded round to west side of this high point
named Mount Charles, and found a strong stream running from hill. This is the finest country I have

seen since leaving the good country, say within 200 mil 1 i i i
ane te g y, say hin miles of Adelaide, and is equal to any in Australia at

August 19, scrub,—Started at 7.30 a.m., and reached the water about noon. In the afternoon I
ascended Mount Charles, which I found to be 1,565 feet above surrounding country, and 3,596 feet above
the sea level. It is composed of grey granite and slate. Strike west dip 65 south. The south portion of
these ranges, about eight miles distant, shut out all view in that direction; they extend as far as I can
see west. Very high ranges east and east-south-east.

. August 20, foot of Mount Charles, south latitude 25° 59’ 17”. —TI continued 24 miles to where
it comes out of a rocky gully—still a very strong stream. The bed of creek to this point is sandy and
stony, and densely covered with teatree, winding throvgh splendid grassed flats, some of them very boggy.
I noticed some gums here with very dark purple leaves, growing in the creek. At four and a half miles
saw a low place in range and turned to it, but was unable to reach the range on .account of boggy
ground, through which a creek with Tunning water comes from range; all these flats are good soil
abundantly grassed and numbers of herbs, timbered with cork wood and mulga,

 

 

ERNEST GILES’ EXPLORATIONS,

Extracts from diary of Ernest Giles’ explorations in 1873-74 (Paper No. 217/74) :—

September 14, 1873.—I encamped at Mount Olga. The appearance of this mountain is marvellous in
the extreme, and almost baffles description. Here I shall only remark that it is formed of several vast and
solid rounded blocks of bare, red colored stone of a kind of conglomerate, being composed of untold masses
of round stones of all kinds, mixed as plums in a pudding and set in shapes upon the ground. There was
water running from the base of one of the hills, down a strong channel, and filling several rocky basins.
The supply of water is not great, but I consider it permanent.

September 17.—The appearance of Mount Olga from this camp was most singular. I can only
liken it to several enormous rotund, or rather elliptical, shapes, which had been placed beside one another
by goodness knows what freak or convulsion of nature, I found two other running brooks—one on the
west and one on the north side.

June 8, 1874.—I went completely round the mountain, and returned to camp. The extraordinary
appearance of this feature will never be out of my remembrance. It is, I should say, decidedly of volcanic
origin, belched out of the bowels and on to the surface of the earth by the sulphurous upheavings of sub-
terraneous and subaqueous fires, and cooled and solidified into monstrous masses by the gelid currents of
the deepmost waves of the most ancient of former oceans. As I said before, it is formed of mixed and
rounded stones into rounded shapes ; but some upon the eastern side are turretted, and are almost pillars,
except that their thickness is rather out of proportion to their height. The highest point of this mountain

I made 1,485 feet from the surrounding country.
H. VERE
32 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

H. VERE BARCLAY’S EXPLORATIONS.

Extracts from H. Vere Barclay’s journal, 1878 (Paper No 209/78):—

February 5, 1878.—Started from Alice Springs ; went out in north east direction. are anete ee
ranges to south of Mount Milton, and had great difficulty in forcing our way through thic a a 3 and
Yurned north-west, and at last got sut on Burt Plain, to west of Mount Milton, seeing ae on ntr
kangaroo in great numbers, but could find no water. Splendid feed all over this part ea t an pe
(grasses). Turned north-east, and found an excellent track through a pass on north west SI ei i a
Milton. We were now fairly on east side of Strangways Ranges, on on extensive, undulating pe a
Splendid feed, grasses, saltbush, and cotton-bush ; soi], chocolate-colored loam. Went east by a, d
look for water, but coming on evening were obliged to camp without. The country traversed all good.
Cotton and saltbush in patches, and splendid grass, but no sign of water.

February 28.—Started at 6.45 a.m. for the water reported by Pfitzner, and, passing over and ae
small stony hills, all well-grassed, came to a good-sized creek running north-north-east, and found a fair
supply of water in the creek where they had reported it.

March 14.—Came on a large creek running north-east through a gorge in the range. Deep we
holes in gap, and plenty of water for at least four miles down the creek. A remarkable hill bears south o
east end of this gorge, and makes a good landmark for it. I believe the water in the gorge would eee
long time, if not permanent. Followed the creek down for 3} miles, and then turned north and campe
on a creek running north-north-east. Water in the sand, and splendid feed.

March 28.--Started from Oamp No. 3, and, after some difficulty in crossing the creek, took south-
south-east course, the ground still being so soft as to render travelling very difficult. Then turned cast by
north along open plain, well-grassed, with patches of salt and cotton-bush. Soil reddish loam, strewed
with small flint, quartz, and ironstone pebbles. Crossed creek, and camped for the night near a claypan.
Splendid green grass three feet high.

April 19.—Soil light coffee colored loam, and sandy; al) well-grasced—principally silver-grass here.
At 4.40 struck the large creek reported by Pfitzner (which is a continuation of the creek at No. 4 Camp),
and obtained water readily by sinking in the sand. The bed of the creck here is a quarter of a mile wide,
with deep white sand, and heavily-timbered with white gumtrees. It has not run this year, but must
carry an immense body of water in some seasons, as I noticed floodmarks 14 feet high on the trees.

April 20.—We made a well five feet deep, with five feet by four feet timbering, and got a splendid
supply of water; could not bale it dry with two large canvas buckets constantly going. Drove a stake
down, and found that there is at least five feet more sand below bottom of well—all, of course, full of
water—so that I have no doubt we can get water here for the next 12 months without rain falling.
Named creek the Plenty.

May 6.—Started in a north-north-east direction, and, passing over some very fine country, with
patches of sand and spinifex here and there, struck a large creek with deep white sand. This creek has
had some water in it this year ; it has run for 12 miles below this, and then the stream has died out. Fine
white gum timber all along creek, and splendid feed on both banks (grasses). Red sandy and loamy soil ;
very heavy travelling for wagon. High range to northward.

May 22.—I started at 12.30 towards a conical hill bearing north by west, crossing over splendid
country for a couple of miles; and then turned west towards high ranges, where we found a large rock-
hole with a little water in the bottom of it. The hole is in a watercourse running north-east ; country
splendid, deep coffee-colored loam, all well-grassed, and lightly-timbered with large myall trees, and, in
places, a few box trees. Here and there small ironstone hills and gravelly patches ; and to the west and
north high ranges, which I have named the Jervois Ranges.

May 25.—Started 7.30 a.m. in northerly direction, passing through some very fine country. At
12.15 p.m struck a small but very deep creek, which evidently had teen running some time this year.
Followed it down, going east, and at 1 o'clock found some very fine waterholes in it, but only a little
water left in them. At 2.40 started in a northerly direction, crossing a splendid gum flat (subject to
inundation) for four miles.

 

 

J. G. KNIGHT,

Mr. J. G. Knight, who was Government Resident in the Northern Territory in 1890, gives the
following short description of the country, and at the same time includes a condensed report by Mr.
J. A. Giles, explorer, of his expedition from Pine Creek southward to Charlotte Waters, giving a
comprehensive summary of his observations in the concluding paragraph :—

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

A few years ago it was customary to regard the central portion of Australia as a barren desert, but
the travels of recent explorers have entirely dispelled that illusion. Port Darwin has been reached
overland from Western Australia; there is a well-beaten road from Northern Queensland to Port Darwin,
as well as from Adelaide to the same port. The last feat we know of was that of a stockman driving
over 200 head of cattle from Queensland to Palmerston, his only company and assistants being a few
natives,

The
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 33

 

The fattening character of the country is proved by the circumstance that when horses or cattle
stray away from their owners, on being found again after a few months’ roaming, they are always in fine
order and condition.

A serious drawback to the immediate success of squatting pursuits is the heavy cost of conveying
stores, and also the shipment of wool, etc. The exportation of frozen meat from Australia will probably
become a great industry, and will add another reason in favor of the one and only means of rendering the
Territory prosperous and self-supporting, viz, the formation of a railway towards the interior.

There can be no doubt that as the wildly luxurious indigenous grasses of the more tropical part of
the country are fed down the character of the herbage will be completely changed, and that horses, cattle
and probably sheep will thrive prodigiously. It is hardly to be feared that the climate will be found too
hot for the growth of good wool, as fine fleeces are produced in Queensland in corresponding latitudes; but
it may need time, patience, and discrimination before finding out what particular breeds of sheep are best
fitted for the country. *

J. A. GILES.

 

. Extracts from Description of Oentral Australia, written by Mr. J, A. Giles for the South Australian
~ Register,” of his explorations in 1872-4 :—

Starting from Pine Creek, the first water is at Stuck-up Camp, four miles distant, the road passiug
through low slate hills with numerous quartz reefs. The hills are highly timbered with gum, blood wood,
and other trees, and tolerably well grassed. There is a fine hole of permanent water here, and the road to
the Cullen Crossing, nine miles off, is through a granite country, with low timbered rises and broad, open,
and well grassed flats between. There is plenty of permanent water at the crossing, where the river is a
deep sandy channel. On the south side open and well grassed country extends to a distance of eight miles
to the Fergusson River. The route is also marked by the same characteristics. The Fergusson is a broad
and deep river, running for several months in the year. Plenty of water is to be obtained in the driest
seasons, and the surrounding land is good. The stream, after meeting the Cullen about eight miles to the
westward, joins the Katherine River, about 40 miles further to the south-west. From the Fergusson
crossing to Driffield Oreek, four miles away, the road passes over slate and quartz hills splendidly grassed
and timbered with gums, stringybark, bloodwood, and other trees. The Driffield is a tributary of the
Fergusson, with a deep sandy bed, and some good waterholes above the crossing. From here to the Edith
River, ten miles on, the road passes through another hilly region of slate, quartz, and ironstone, thickly
timbered in places and well grassed. The Edith is a small stream flowing west and running throughout
the year. There are fine paperbarks, gums, and palms growing along the banks ; the surrounding country
being hilly, open, and splendidly grassed, with black soil along the river. The locality is similar for the
next four miles to the Phillips Creek, a tributary of the Edith. Here the land changes, becoming very
stony with high broken ranges of slate, quartz, ironstone, and trap rock. This continues for about three
miles and then come very rough broken hills covered with honeycombed boulders of basaltic rock. The
road winds through these, ascending gradually for about three miles to the top of the tableland, from
which tke country has a gradual fall to the Katherine River, a distance of 20 miles. Bay of Biscay plains,
covered with quartz, ironstone, agate, and flint pebbles are now met with, and the soil gradually becomes
richer towards the Katherine, the hills being capped with immense masses of blue limestone, and here and
there are huge isolated rocks of sandstone. The soil is a rich chocolate loam, magnificently grassed and
lightly timbered, while nearer the Katherine are flats of rich biack soil.

The Katherine River is, at the crossing, about 500 yards broad from cliff to cliff, and 90 to 100 feet
in depth. The stream it-clf is, at the driest time of the year, about 150 feet wide and has an average
depth at the fording place of 24 feet. This is at the driest time of the year, but drring the wet season
the water often rises to within a few feet of the tops of the cliffs. From what I know of this river and
from informnation obtained from others who have lived for some time on it, I am strongly of opinion that it
will, when explored, be found navigable, at a moderate flood, to the Telegraph Station. Should it be
so, it will save 200 miles of land carriage. The land on either side is magnificent, consisting of rich black
loam, chocolate and brown clay, with lighter soils, all splendidly grassed and timbered. At twelve miles
from the Katherine the road enters a sandy tableland well grassed and heavily timbered with gums, blood-
wood, ironbark, etc., with here and there kelts of large pines. It is about six miles across this tableland,
from which the road descends into heavy forest country well grassed. At four miles the country changes
to thick, ragged scrub scantily grassed ‘The soil is of a light description, covered with small, brown iron-
atone gravel. ‘This extends to the King Creek - three miles. From this creek to Abraham Lagoon, a
distance of 40 miles, the road passes through alternate patches of good and inferior country, crossing three
creeks, The Roper Oreek is three miles from the King, the Gum Billabongs, fourteen, and thence to the
Stirling the distance is 15 miles. None of these creeks contain permanent water. Abraham Billabongs
are long, deep ponds in heavy paperbark and gum forests, and are permanent and well stocked with
several kinds of fish, including black cod, catfish, and a small white fish. There isa splendid, black soil
all along these lagoons. Three miles from here is the Bitter Spring, close to the road, in a small hollow
on the banks of the Roper River. An immense volume of water issues from under a ledge of limestone
rock, and the water is of a slightly bitter and sweet taste. To the east, about 200 yards distant, is one of
the branches of the Upper Roper, rendered conspicuous by the lofty and dense mass of vegetation growing
along the banks : consisting of gigantic paperbarks, gums, corkscrew palms, and in places the tall, stately
fan palm, which here grows to the height of 60 feet. At Bitter Spring the road branches into Ha ae

eft-han

 

 

* “The Northern Territory.”—J. G, Knight, 1830,
 

34 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. _

ardt Bar, 130 miles, the overland

left-hand track following the river to the Roper Depot and the Leichh )
Elsie—twelve miles through rather

track turning off to the right, to the Warlock Ponds on the Upper
sandy and heavy timbered country, well grassed.

The Warlock Ponds, in the Elsie Valley, are large, deep ponds of permanent water, from 200 to
300 yards long, and from 80 to 100 yards broad in the dry season. In the wet season, and for a month or
two after, the valley is full, and is 200 yards broad and about three to four feet deep. Some few miles
down the Elsie are vast paperbark swamps, the sources of the Elsie proper, which is a strong running
stream. From the Warlock Ponds the road crosses undulating country for 25 miles to the Birdum Creek,
timbered with stringybark, gum, bloodwood, ironbark, and other trees. The Birdum Creek is in a broad,
shallow valley, rising at Stuart Swamp and Daly Waters, and running north to the Elsie, a distance of
from 95 to 100 miles. There are plenty of clay waterholes all the way, but none are permanent. In the
wet season the whole valley, which is from half a mile to three or four miles broad, is inundated. It is
timbered with box and gutta percha trees, and covered with a thick growth of blue grass. About 20
miles from the Daly it is covered with wild rice, which grows to the height of seven or eight feet, and
bears a grain a little smaller than the common rice, and with a black husk. On either side of the valley
the country is undulating and in some places sandy with thick clumps of trees and shrubs interlaced with
creepers and vines. The ebony tree is first met with here, and towards the Daly, dense belts of hedge
trees and open forest country well grassed are met with. The road from the Elsie, after striking the
Birdum, follows along the eastern side of the valley for about 70 miles, then crossing it and following the
western bank for 20 miles to Daly Waters Telegraph Station, which is situated on the Daly Creek at
Stuart Camp. The station is a strong wooden building of sawn slabs of bloodwood and ironbark, roofed
with galvanised iron, and contains officers’ quarters, office, store, and kitchen. There is also a large iron
store used for the telegraph construction stores. In front of the building is a securely fenced garden, well
stocked with sweet potatoes, Timor pears, bananas, pineapples, lettuces, radishes, beans, etc, and a
tamarind tree ; it is now about 10 feet high. There is also a well grassed paddock, a mile square, enclosed
by a wire fence. The stock at this station consists of horses, cows, sheep, and goats; all of which do
remarkably well, and are in splendid condition. The region round the station is open forest, splendidly
grassed. A road goes from here to Leichhardt Bar, on the Roper River. From Daly Waters to Frew
Ironstone Pond, a stretch of 50 miles, the route passes through alternate patches of open forest land, well
grassed, and dense hedge tree and mulga scrubs.

Frew Pond is a circular basin, about 300 yards in circumference, with a depth of about 20 feet for
a third of the circumference on the west side, where the bank slopes gradually into the water. On the
other side is conglomerate limestone. When full, the pond is a fine one, but as the water gets low it becomes
almost undrinkable, in consequence of the thousands of divers and cormorants which frequent it. There
are some splendid sturdy old box trees growing round, and the ground is covered with a thick, short, green
grass like a carpet, making it one of the best and prettiest camps on the road. To the east the country is
scrubby, and to the west and south are open plains of black Bay of Biscay, subject to inundation. "The
drainage is all to the westward. Four miles from Frew Pond the road enters Sturt Plains crossing it
in 17 miles. To the east the forest runs parallel to the road at a distance of about six miles, but on the
west not a tree is to be seen as far as the eye can reach, until the traveller is about half way over, when a
point of forest appears in the distance. This plain is entirely composed of black soil, and during the wet
season is cumpletely under water to the depth of a foot, with a very gradual flow to the westward.
After the water has drained off, the herbage and grass are most luxuriant. The plains having been crossed
belts of hedge tree with fine open stretches of land are met with for seven miles to the north, when the
Newcastle Waters are reached. This watercourse rises to the eastward of the Ashburton Range comes
close round to the north end, flows south for 35 miles, and finally empties itself into Lake Woods. , Along
the whole of its course there are magnificent reaches of permanent water varying in length from one to
two miles and from 100 to 200 yards in breadth, with broad, open, and gently sloping banks covered
with short, green grass. There are thousands of pelicans, ducks, geese, and immense numbers of cor-
morants in the vicinity.

__ The Ashburton Range runs parallel to the Newcastle the whole way, and is from two to four miles
distant from it, the road going between the two through splendidly grassed country. The range is rough
and stony, composed of a hard white sandstone.

From the South Newcastle to the Lawson Creek is six miles’) The creek rises in the Ashburton
Range, and flows to the west into Lake Woods, which is about two miles from the crossing of the creek
There is no permanent water at the crossing, but about 14 miles up the creek in the ranges is a fine spring,
There is good land on both sides. From here to the Fergusson Creek, 12 miles off, the route passes aver
good country, lightly timbered and well grassed, and skirting the foot of the range. The Fergusson is a
large deep creek, rising in the range and emptying into the Lake Woods. It has some fine waterholes and
several springs in the range, and is surrounded by splendidly-grassed valleys and flats.

From the Fergusson Crossing to Powell Creek Station is 14 miles, the intermediate territory being
patchy. The way ieads through the ranges, and a short distance to the westward good land opens out into
extensive well-grassed plains. There is a fine spring of good water within 50 yards of the station. On
= cae a a sides are high rocky hills, with a valley to the south-east, through which the creek
which is plentifully supplied with permanent water, comes. The stock h i
ce ie ae al ere consists of horses, cows, and

Renner Springs are close to a high pile of rocks, and consist of mounds covered with reeds. There
are several fine gumtrees growing round, and on the east is a, fine, open, well-grassed plain with a ran
of hills beyond, about two miles from the springs. Three creeks are met with, all running to the westwa aL
but without permanent water. These are not permanent, but hold water for a long time after rain Th ;
surrounding district is good and well grassed with different varieties. Permanent water also is obtainable
by following the creek to tha eastward for about six miles. From these ponds to the Morphett Creek,

2

eight
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 35

eight miles, the country is for the first four or five miles very good, but it then becomes scrubby and in
places stony. The Morphett is a very broad gravelly creek, running to the eastward, with permanent
water obtainable about three miles down it, and with some good land on both sides. From here it is three
miles to Attack Creek, the region being open and well grassed to the eastward. :

Attack Creek is large, rising in high ranges to the westward, and running to the north-
east. There are fine holes of water in it, but they are nob permanent. From Attack Creek it is 40 miles
to Tennant Creek Telegraph Station,

Tennant Creek Telegraph Station is another creditably and substantially built stone structure,
situated on rising ground about a quarter of a mile on the western bank of the creek, in which, however,
there is no permanent water; but a well has been sunk and a sufficient supply obtained for station
purposes. The surrounding district is open and well grassed along both sides of the creek. There are
horses, cows, and sheep here, and all in fine order. About 12 miles down the creek there is splendid
country.

From the Taylor to Barrow Creek, a nine miles’ stretch, the traveller passes through good grassed
land, with open plains and high ranges to the east, west, and south, Barrow Creek Telegraph Station is
situated round the western end of a high cliff-capped range close to its foot, and nearly facing the Forster
Range. There is no permanent surface water, but a well has been sunk, and a plentiful supply of brackish
water has been obtained. For drinking purposes the water has to be carted nine miles from the Taylor.
Splendid grassed country surrounds all Barrow Creek. There are horses, cows, and sheep at the station.

Resuming the journey, the road passes through good land for three or four miles, which, however,
gradually becomes hilly, stony, and covered with spinifex. After 10 miles the track ascends the western
end of the Foster Range, winding up a steep spur. On the summit of the range an extensive view is
obtained to the east, south, and west. To the south, at a distance of about 30 miles, is Central Mount
Stuart, high and massive looking, and high ranges stretch out to the south-west, west, north, and north-
east. From the top of the Forster Range the road descends in spurs about two miles in length, at the
foot of which is the Stirling Creek, which the road follows for about eight miles, through a level, open, and
splendidly-grassed region. After leaving the Stirling, a good-grassed and lightly-timbered locality is
traversed for 12 miles to the Hanson, a very broad, sandy, gum creek, which rises in the Mount Freeling
Ranges, and, running in a northerly course, rounds the eastern end of Central Mount Stuart, and gradually
trends to the westward. There is very little surface water in the creek, but abundance can be procured
by digging from six inches to a foot in the sand. The route follows the eastern bank of the Hanson for
12 miles, and Central Mount Stuart is then about two miles off on the opposite side. From here to the
Teatree Well, 14 miles off, very fair land is traversed. This well is about 15 or 20 feet deep, with a
splendid supply of water.

From Teatree Well to the Woodforde Creek, 12 miles, the country is very good, fine, open, short-
grassed plains, with here and there a few clumps of trees. The Woodforde is a deep sandy creek, rising
in the Mount Freeling Ranges and running to the eastward. Plenty of water is to be got by digging in
the sand at this crossing. The locality on both sides of the creek is excellent. The road now leaves the
Woodforde and enters a long valley formed by the Mount Freeling Range on the west, and the Mount
Boothby Ranges on the east. The valley is about 12 miles through, and water may be obtained by turning
off when about nine miles up, and making for Mount Freeling, striking a creek after about half a mile,
and following it up into a deep rocky gorge, where there is a plentiful supply of the pure element.

The Burt is a small creek rising in the Strangways Range to the eastward, and emptying out on to
open plains. There is no water here, but nevertheless the surrounding region is magnificent, and would do
splendidly for sheep, being thickly grassed with short, fine grass, salt and blue bush, and geranium and
other herbs.

From the Burt to Alice Springs Telegraph Station (see Plate 14) is 36 miles, the first six miles being
throvgh country similar to that just described. The next four or five miles are covered with rather
scrubby rises; then follow eight miles of open mulga serub, splendidly grassed, and with plenty of
geranium and other herbage, the soil being a rich red loam. The next two miles consist of open and
splendidly-grassed land, with saltbush and herbage; and here also is the Ten-Mile Oreek, the water of
which is slightly impregnated with soda. The creek is on the top of the MacDonnell tableland, over 2,000
feet above the sea level. From this point the road descends for 10 miles to the Alice Springs, winding
about in every possible direction through a perfect jumble of granite hillocks, the last descent being down
a very steep hill covered with immense granite boulders, with only just room enough for a dray to pass
between. From the hilltop a most magnificent view is obtained. Right in front is an immense range
stretching to the east and west as far as the eye can reach, having the appearance of an enormous red wall.
No animal, excepting the rock wallaby, could scale it. At intervals of several miles there are gorges
through which creeks find their way, but it is only through one or two of these gorges that it is possible to
take a dray, and then only when the creeks are dry. After descending this hill, the track, after winding
about a little farther, reaches the Alice Springs. The station is situated on the west bank of the Todd
Creek. On the opposite side is a rocky hill composed of large granite boulders, at the foot of which is a
large and deep waterhole. Close behind the building is another high hill of huge boulders, and all round
are rocky hills. In front of the station, about half a mile off, are two gaps, through one of which goes
Todd Creek. About 200 yards at the back of the station is a high rocky range, in which the Jessie takes
its rise, running over ledges of rock and falling into a most remarkable gorge, the mouth of which, close
to the station, is about 30 yards wide, the walls rising up perpendicularly to a great height, On entering
the range the gorge opens out in a circular form, with perpendicular cliffs over 100 feet in height all round.
The bottom is filled with enormous boulders. Where the creek comes from seems to be a complete
mystery, and itis only by threading your way amongst the rocks right up to the very foot of the cliff at
the end of the gorge that the traveller solves the problem by discovering a very narrow peeeeee ee

skywards,

o2
36 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

 

Tn front of the station,

skywards, and down which a nice little stream of clear water is always running. ce Ange. ue poe

about four miles away, is the red range, through a gorge of which the Jessie Cc : a
referred to is only to Me got through by swimming a deep pool of water occupying a a ae
gorge, and the cliffs rise from the water perpendicularly to a height of 200 feet. ee oo dea ata
the range, towards the Alice Springs, is another gorge, the Emily, also full of water, bu

about three feet. This is about 300 yards through, and about 30 yards wide.

; 8.
Five miles from this, along the range, is the Heavitree Gorge, through which os te aa
The next gap--Temple Bar—is 12 miles away. The Roe Creek, the Overland Lo earn
road go through it. The country between this range and the northern one forms the ean gr. e ats
Australia, The northern range is composed of coarse, grey hornblende, granite, blue slate an A ed = :
steatite, and several other rocks ; and the southern of a hard, close-grained red-and-white fe eo se
grains highly crystalline. A complete jumble of low, sharp-pointed, slate hills makes up the
district, covered with ironstone, quartz, and mica.

i i i he westward
After passing through Temple Bar, 12 miles from Alice Springs, the traveller turns to the ’
crossing Tnestone unis and ace sine into a deep valley about a mile wide, with another ce ee
range on the south side. The valley is well-grassed, and the route follows it for about eig aoe em
then turns through Fenn Gap in the southern range, entering another parallel valley avon a ari aa
mile wide, with a very high rocky range on the south side. The road now tracks this valley a
miles to the Jay Oreek, close uuder an immense range, the highest points of which are tes : er y
(a stupendous dome-shaped mountain), Brinkley’s Bluff to the west, and Mount Charles on the eas . :
said that they have been estimated as being 4,000 feet above the sea level. The road, after crossing .
Jay Creek, passes over a low hilly region to the Hugh, an immense gum creek rising in the ak im
flowing to the south (there is abundance of water here), following along the eastern bank of the Hug
for eight miles—about three miles through a splendid district.

 

Puare 14—Anicx Sprines Station.

The locality is fine and open to the north-east. From here the road follows the bed of the Hugh
through the gorge for about two miles, thence across open country, striking the creek again after five miles,
and, crossing it, passes through mulga country for ten miles, again reaches the creek at McClure’s Springs,
in the James Range, and follows it through gorges, crossing it repeatedly for seven miles to Stuart’s
Waterhole. From here the route passes over spinifex country for 28 miles to the Long Waterhole, where
there is good country. Four miles further on the track again crosses the Hugh at the Deep Crossing,
thence passing through a fine region to Mount Burrell, on the Hugh, 14 miles distant. This is a fine
open hilly district, watered, well-grassed, and with plenty of herbage and cotton-bush.

The next water from here is Percy Hill, a distance of 17 miles, on the Hugh, the journey being
through the same description of country. The creek here runs down to the foot of high broken cliffs,
under which plenty of water is to be obtained by digging in the sand. Running along the foot of the
cliffs for about half a mile the creek suddenly turns, and doubles back almost on its former course. There
being no way round the bend by the cliffs, the track has to cross it twice, and, continuing through high
sandhills for 22 miles, reaches the B Depét, on the Hugh, near its junction with the Finke River, crossing
it here for the last time. The whole course of the Hugh is thickly timbered with splendid gums, from
three to four inches to several feet in diameter, growing to a great height, and perfectly straight. From
the B Depét to the Horseshoe Bend, on the Finke River, is 12 miles, the intermediate country consisting
of sandhills for the first three or four miles, though the remainder is well-grassed open mulga land.

The Finke at this point is considerably over a mile in width, and the main channel has a clear
smooth bed of fine white sand over half a mile wide. There is plenty of surface-water, which, towards the
dry season, becomes brackish. The river rises in the northernmost of the MacDonnell Ranges, and runs

to
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 37

 

to the south-east for 400 miles, passing to the east of the Charlotte Waters Station, about nine miles off,
gradually trending to the eastward.

From the Horseshoe Bend to the Finke ap Mount Musgrave, 15 miles, the road passes through the
mulga forest, well-grassed, and with a few sandhills, for about seven miles, and then comes open grassed
country and high-peaked hills to the east, north, and west, the summits covered with gypsum and having
@ snow-capped appearance. From Mount Musgrave—where there is plenty of water, both salt and fresh—
the way passes over stony, undulating, well-grassed, and open territory to the Finke. Crossing ten miles
thence, it goes to the Goyder Creek, 30 miles, through a fairly-grassed, hilly, and rather stony region, with
here and there patches of mulga scrub. Crossing the Goyder—a large, sandy creek running into the
Finke from high ranges to the westward—the road for the next 30 miles, to Charlotte Waters Telegraph
Station, is characterised by mulga scrub, open plains, sandhills, and stony rises poorly grassed.

; The MacDonnell Range country, from the James Range to Barrow Creek, 250 miles, is, as far as
‘climate, water, grasses, and herbage are concerned, admirably adapted for sheep, cattle, and horses. The
ease is much milder than in the northern runs of South Australia, and the country is infinitely better
grassed.

In conclusion, it may be stated that the foregoing description faithfully represents the country and
the waters as they actually are on the route of the Overland Telegraph line in comparatively dry seasons.
In ordinary wet seasons there is water in abundance for nine months out of the year, but in many of the
places above alluded to it is not permanent—as, for instance, on the Tomkinson Oreek and between Daly
Waters and Frew Pond. Water in abundance is often found from one season to the other in Attack
Creek and the Phillips. :

From the foregoing narrative it will be seen that, from Pine Creek to the Katherine—a distance of
54 miles—the country is well grassed and watered. Some portions of the land are known to be auriferous ;
limestone is first met with at the Katherine ; and there is plenty of timber suitable for sleepers, culverts,
and small bridges.

_ From the Katherine to the next telegraph station at Daly Waters the distance is 166 miles. There
is no lack of water along this stage, timber is generally plentiful, and grass abundant.

From Daly Waters to Powell Creek Station the distance is 138 miles; most of the country is good,
and well supplied with water.

Next in succession is Tennant Oreek Station, 113 miles from Powell Creek. Portions of this
stretch of country are poor and scrubby. There is no creek-water within 20 miles of the station, but water
is obtained by sinking. :

Barrow Creek is the next station, 147 miles from Tennant Creek. Brackish water is obtained by
sinking, and there are several holes of fresh water. The land varies in character from good to scrub and
spinifex. In the neighborhood of Sutherland Creek the poison plant is met with.

Following the telegraph line, the next station arrived at is Alice Springs, 171 miles from Barrow
Creek. Water is easily obtainable along this route, and most of the land is fitted for pastoral purposes.

From Alice Springs to the Charlotte Waters Station—-a length of 232 miles—there are large tracts
of splendid land and plenty of water ; there is aleo an abundant growth of paper-bark timber, one of the
best woods for railway sleepers or bridges.

 

 

ERNEST FAVENC.

Extract from “Report of North-East portion of Northern Territory, travelled over from 1878 to
1883,” by Ernest Favenc (Paper No. 181/83) :—

On my former expedition we passed over a large extent of sheep downs country. I had then, of
course, no knowledge of the country to the north, between this tract and the coast ; but since having had
to make different explorations, both when looking for a road to Oreswell Downs and for general purposes,
I think I'am now in a position to tell you of the capabilities of the whole country that lies south of your
portion of the gulf coast as far as the | 9th parallel of latitude. There is no doubt about the value of this
country, but at present there is a drawback from the fact of there being no recognised port in the gulf
portion of the Northern Territory. There is a large tract of territory comprising land of the same nature
as the best “downs” country in Northern Queensland—in fact, equal to such places as Lansdowne,
Terrick Terrick, Northampton, and Portland Downs, which are recognised as the cream of the Barcoo
country. This is all tableland country, the main slope starting about 17° 30’ S., and running thence
almost east and west until reaching the Overland Telegraph line.

The value to South Australia of the abovementioned downs country consists in the fact that she
pussesses such a large tract of sheep country close to the coast, the settlement on such country being, of
course, closer than on the ordinary cattle country of Australia, and of correspondingly greater value. The
great belt of valuable downs country lies between parallels 17 and 19. This land is, with the consequent
admixture of desert, which is to be expected on the inland slope, equal to anything in Australia. We
found waters that have since been marked on the continental map, and were furnished, I believe, to the
South Australian Government after the termination of the survey. Since then I have been back from
the Powell Telegraph Station to the head of the Nicholson River, followed it down, and found a large

: quantity
38 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

d. This was in 1882. The sheep
tity of valuable cattle land country, well and permanently watere e

Eacald ies oes not seem to aztane to the heads of the Nicholson. The great tract of ae Weary
South ‘Australia possesses lies more to the southward, and is watered by the Oreswell, Buchanan, Playford,

and other creeks to the westward.

Immediately to the west of the Queensland boundary, on what is known as ee np which
flows northward into the Gulf, there is fine cattle country permanently watered. ; On ae i — rs =
I have said, good ordinary cattle-breeding country, and the geological formation = casi oe = 7c
A. C. Gregory —desert sandstone. West of Settlement Creek is a large river, which I took to ce
Calvert, but did not follow it to the mouth, and so could not identify it. On this ae ae 2 ‘
richly grassed country, the only drawback being that it is rough and stony, while, on the : er ;
there is a great absence of spinifex. West again we came across the same description o oe
sandstone tableland—wherein the creeks and rivers descended abruptly to the coast throug ob
precipitous gorges. There is a great deal of permanent water in this district, but the country is - y :
the character general to the break between the rich inland tableland and the coast. There : ae ou :
this country, both on the coast waters and inland waters, will soon be stocked with sheep on cat es
least the character of the country leads me to believe so. There is much permanent water on a e
rivers running down to the Gulf of Carpentaria, but I could not discover any practicable route down
either the Calvert or Robertson Rivers. From my former trip in 1882 I judge that the Abner Range is
part of the great tableland system which exists in the north of the Territory, and that the rivers leading
into the Gulf of Carpentaria only extend back a distance of say 100 miles, and the drainage then goes to
the south. The country on the southern slope is of a nature known all over Australia as being of the best
description for sheep. The country drained by the coast rivers is of a different character —better watered,
not so well grassed, and only adapted for cattle, with the exception of the Macarthur and the head of the
river J called the Parsons. The territory possessed by South Australia, viz., from the 16th to 19th
parallels of latitude, is of a description calculated to invite settlement. The rivers, though rough and not
exactly trafficable, are full of large, deep, and permanent lagoons. The country is not suited for sheep,
although in these spinifex ridges there is any amount of herbage and vines, which are very fattening for
the cattle. In fact, during my various trips across the Territory I have always found that, in even what
is known as the worst spinifex desert, there are vines and grasses that horses are always eager for, and do
well on. With regard to the spinifex country, I should like to bring under your notice the fact that many
people are now recognising the value of these hitherto abused tracts. The spinifex itself is valueless,
but the country on which it grows is often rich in different kinds of herbage and vines that alone serve to
fatten.

A marked feature of the country about parallel 17 is this, that the Nicholson runs in an east and
west course, whereas all the other rivers falling into the Gulf flow north and south. This creates a
divergence in the great tableland which is, geographically speaking, marked and decided. Of the herbage
found there I need scarcely speak, as the Mitchell, Flinders, and barley grasses are too well known
to need description.

As regards sugar-growing land, I saw nothing on the actual coast calculated to invite enterprise ip
this line, although further back we found large tracts of rich soil, permanently watered by springs suitable
for irrigation. The climate would also be generally favorable to this industry.

The prevailing geological features of the country traversed are those peculiar to North Australia, viz.,
red sandstone, limestone, and trapstone. With regard to minerals, I saw indications of gold-bearing
country in several places, but have never had time to trace them up. Such indications were especially
numerous on what I presume to be A. C. Gregory’s creek, which is marked on the map as Lagoon Vale
Creek. I also saw auriferous indications in that part of the head of the Nicholson which runs
through the Northern Territory.

ERNEST FAVENC AND L. CRAWFORD.
i.
Extracts from Report on the Macarthur River, Northern Territory, 1878-83 (Paper No. 181-83) :-—

We left North Newcastle, and crossing good country the whole way we came to the lagoons formerly
marked by Messrs. Briggs and Headley when out with Mr. E. Favencin 1879. Tho country passed over
up to Yarroo Creek was, as far as we saw, of very good fattening description, equal to anything we have
ever seen on the inland slope; but many mulga ridges intrude on it, taking up a large extent of ground.
These, however, are of small importance, in fact, there is a great deal of herbage growing in the serub
which is of a fattening nature, and, no doubt, if permanent water is found, this country will prove a large
and reproductive district. We camped at the head of a creek, and saw before nightfall a large number of
pigeons, galars, and cockatoos, indicating the preseuce of permanent water; for at this season of the year
any water found must be permanent—at least judging from the state of the Overland Telegraph line when
we left it. In the morning we went south and south-west, finding good country in both directions, but no
indications of creeks, and, in fact, only ordinary tableland. Still the grass was good—of a fattening
description—and calculated to invite settlement. Down this creek the country was first-rate, but we got
no water except in a small lagoon almost dry, which had evidently been the resort of natives during the
dry seasons. Our next trip was north. We passed through good country with grasses, on which our
horses fattened ; we descended to a valley running east and west, consisting of forest and plains, capitally
and thoroughly well grassed—the plains especially—being of the same character as the grasses already
desciibed as characteristic of the inland slope, Mitchell, Flinders, and barley grasses. This is marked as
Yahyah Creek on the map. We ran this creek down for about 14 mile, finding a permanent lagoon in a

rocky
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY. 39

 

 

rocky gorge. Thence we went south across open plains and forests—the plains being splendid country ;
the ridges intruding thereon simply desert, which is the usual characteristic of the inland country. We
passed several good plains of the description usually ascribed to the best fattening country in Queensland.
We struck the creek at dinnertime, which we called 8.A. Creek. Up this creek the route must eventually
go to the great downs of the interior. We can tell you of very little water in this creek, as we did not
follow it down. Striking east-south-east some distance we got amongst dry limestone ridges richly
grassed, with creeks capable of holding permanent water ; then we struck north-north-east, came to a fine
creek spring on a creek we calle | Kangaroo Creek—a grand creek running through stony country of a
description I have not seen before in Australia: stony ridges, thickly grassed with short grasses, inter-
spaces of black and chocolate soil, which flats grew the best specimens of the famous Mitchell grass of the
interior. At this camp, where we were stationed some time, we had an opportunity of examining the
country some distance on ail sides, and found it thoroughly fitted for pastoral settlement. We found this
country—at what we presume is the very head of the Macarthur—very good plains, well grassed, any
amount of creeks; and the forest, although with an admixture of spinifex, is always full of fattening
vines herbage. Thence we followed the river down from our old camp on Kangaroo Creek. We struck a
large flat of pandanus country before entering a rocky limestone gorge; from this flab headed a series
of springs, which caused the river (named Macarthur by Leichhardt) to run strong for about 10 or 12
miles. All this country is quite available for cattle, and will, no doubt, be thickly populated in the
future. After running an almost easterly course for some distance it comes abruptly on a red
sandstone range of great height. Aiter touching this range the river runs nearly north, and on the north-
western bank is always of a character which would induce to the settlement of sheep. On the eastern—
skirting the range—are a few small flats very richly grassed, between the range and the bank of the river.
The whole of the valley of the river is here of a character exactly resembling the best downs in the
interior. We have never seen better or more richly grassed country in any latitude. The country is
admirably adapted for settlement, being level, and supplied with fresh water. We will condense in a
paragraph what we have to say avout the river.

The Macarthur is, without doubt, a grand stream, deep under the banks to the extent ot at least 30
feet by our own measurement and with little hindrance in the way of islands. The banks are free from
mangroves and the country near them is open box forest. We could not get down to the actual mouth of
the river on account of the deep salt water creeks on both sides, which, of course, stopped us from
crossing on horseback. There is no doubt that if no bar exists, this will be one of the finest ports in the
gulf district, ie., the part of the gulf owned by the South Australian Government, which we can state is
certainly the best part (as we have seen all the Queensland portion), and excepting the Batavia River,
there is nothing to equal the Macarthur, in the Gulf of Carpentaria.

We cannot say much for some of the country at the mouth of the Macarthur, except as regards
timber and general characteristics—that is to say it is good breeding country, also capable of settlement ;
but beyond that it is not equal to anything to be seen 30 miles south of the Port Darwin road. Striking
back, we took a different track, making on to a creek which we recognised as A. C. Gregory’s creek , followed
it for some distance, finding it of good fertile character with plenty of water and well grassed flats on
either bank. We crossed thence to another rough limestone creek, which, although it gave us good water,
had a lot of broken country round it; still this country is good and fattening. We followed it up for
some days, left it, and struck out south-south-west, striking back into the valley we had previously
discovered from our camp on Relief Oreek.

We were greatly pleased with all the country we saw after getting over the dividing range between
the coast waters and those of the Macarthur slope. We found a great difference in the country, and
although we found no water we found creeks that in any ordinary season would be capable of holding
water for at least 12 months. We had some trouble with regard to water here, although we were on
splendidly grassed country, and finally got it in a creek which we called Elinor Pool; thence the next
morning we struck a river which we took the liberty of calling the Parsons. It is well watered; in fact,
throughout the whole time we were on the country drained by this river and its tributaries we had no
trouble about water. While following the river up we found a range on the western bank, which is well
supplied with springs nearly at every mile or half-mile. The head of the river is in good country—equal
to that I have described on the Macarthur, namely Bawhinia downs, Mitchell grass, barley and Flinders
grass. Thence we struck straight for the Overland ‘Telegraph Line, accurately examining the country
north and south of us. All we can say is that it has much the appearance of the country already
described. It is all valuable for stock—a good deal of it fit for sheep—and there is generally no lack of
water, which, of course, is the main desideratum.

 

ALFRED GILES,

Extracts from a letter written by Alfred Giles, the explorer, to Mr. J. G. Knight, C E., Chief
Warden of Goldfields, Northern Territory, published in ‘‘ Northern Territory Times ” :—

Port Darwin, May 11, 1880. To Mr J. G. Knight.—In answer to your request to be furnished with
replies to a few questions relative to the character of the country between Adelaide and Port Darwin,
and its suitableness or otherwise for agricultural and pastoral purposes, in the event of the construction of
a transcontinental railway, I have travelled six times across the continent from Adelaide to Port
Darwin ; five out of the six journeys with stock, 7.¢., sheep, horses, and cattle. These trips have not been
wholly confined to the course of the telegraph line, having made several tracks to the east and west of the

line from different starting-points and for considerable distances.
Taking
40 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

 

Australia, th
ater in which
cannot in the

“ Taking Charlotte Waters as the southern base of the Northern Territory of South
principal creeks crossed on this route are the Goyder, Finke, and Hugh, the supplies of w
are dependent upon the periodical floods; The country, although of such a sandy nature, d. and the
strict sense of the word be termed a desert. Large areas of these sandhills are richly grassed, an eh
flats of the Finke and Hugh creeks, after a fair rainfall, are clothed with rich herbage and Pikes aa es
latter also stand well in dry seasons of reasonable duration. This country is fit only Zot pashore’ PREROS™
and several cattle stations are now formed in its centre as evidence of its suitability.

The James Range terminates this sandhill country, and gives place to land vastly superior, extending
to 40 miles north of Barrow Creek Station, a distance of 260 miles, and passing through the Waterhouse,
MacDonnell, Hanns, Reynolds, Forster, Watts, and Osborne Ranges. The contrast between the sou h
and north base of the James Range is very striking. The high red sandhills give place to undulating
plains, slightly stony and intersected by numerous creeks and hills richly grassed. In the different tiers
of the Waterhouse Range, in which are several permanent waters (the largest being at Owen Springs’,
abundance of water at a shallow depth can be got by sinking in he bed of the Hugh, such as at tle
“ Doctor’s Stones,” Boco Creek, and McLure Springs. From the north side of the Waterhouse Range to
the south base of the MacDonnell, a distance of eight miles, the country maintains its character for grass
and herbage, and extends east and west for many miles. A large creek called the Jay joins the Hugh, to
which the question of shallow sinking equally applies, that is to say, from a depth from 3 to 20 fect,
From the junction of the abovenamed creeks the road and line tend easterly along a valley 11 miles in
length, and bounded on either side by high and precipitous mountains; 't then passes through Fenn’s Gap,
and crossing a creek, proceeds for four miles to another gap and creek known as Temple Bar. Abundance
of water here by sinking about eight feet, or permanent surface water 24 miles higher ‘northwards) up the
creek at a perpendicular pass known as Simpson’s Gap. Still bearing easterly, the line proceeds to Alice
Springs, or the last tier of the MacDonnell Range, which has a width of 10 miles, and may be described
as a low, irregular jumble of granite rocks and boulders, intersected, however, by numerous creeks and
springs, and forming splendid sheep country.

From the northern base of the MacDonnell Range vo the west range (Hann) is a distance of 70
miles, the whole of which is magnificently grassed, although timbered thickly in places by mulga (acacia).
At 25 miles from the MacDonnell Range are rolling downs thickly grassed and equal in richness of soil to
any in South Australia, being inundated plains of rich black and red soils, fit for the growth of wheat
‘This excellent country extends east and west for considerable distances, also to the north-east and north
west. North of Hann Range the country continues good and splendidly grassed, but badly watered.
Brackish water nas been obtaincd at 80 feet in abundance. The country offers every facility for dam.
sinking. At 20 miles north of Hann Range the road touches the Wood Creek, and follows it a distance
ot 40 miles, tho whole of its course being through richly-grassed plains, with occasional patches of mulga
timber up to the base of Central Mount Stuart, under the foot of which runs the Hanson Creek, where
permanent water exists a few inches under the sand, and by using a plough and scoop in the bed of the
creek large reservoirs can be scooped out, yielding unlimited supplies of water

The land along the course of the creek maintains its rich character for grass and herbage, improving
as it approaches the Stirling Creek, and rendering it exceptional for agricultural or pastoral purposes.
Water may be got at an exceedingly shallow depth. Crossing the Forster Ranges the road descends on to
richly-gri-sed plains, lightly timbered by gidgee and gum. assing Barrow Creek Station and proceeding
to Taylor Creek, a distance of 50 miles from the last station; two small creeks are crossed, and then
Attack Croek is reached, and is more worthy the name of creek, as it contains waterholes that have never
yet been known to be dry. The largest hole when full is about one mile long, aud is situated two miles
below (eastward) the crossing of the telegraph lines. Attack Creek, from its source to its mouth, is ony
40 miles long, but empties into very rich land, with well-timbered, open grass plains on either bank the
whole way down.

Powell Creek ‘elegraph Station is a distance of 80 miles from Attack Creek. The country 18
alternately good and indifferent. The principal creeks are the Morphett and the North and South
Tomkinson. Forty-eight miles north of Attack Creek, and six miles to the cast of the track, are some
fine springs known as the Helen Springs. They stand in the centre of a large patch of an exceedingly
fine and well-grassed country, near Powell Creek Station, and alongside the road are some very fine mound
springs known as Renner’s. An inexhaustible supply of water may be obtained by a very little labor,
and the surrounding country is all that can be desired for pastoral or agricultural purposes. The
garden at the station is the pride of the telegraph line. Abundance of vegetables and tropical plants
of every kind are grown there throughout the year,

The Newcastle Lake, discovered by Mr. John Ross, is estimated when full to be 20 miles wide by 50
long. It is filled by the Newcastle Oreek. The country along its eastern shore is generally undulating,

with richly grassed slopes leading from the range, and open plains of blue-black soil, capable of producing
all kinds of tropical vegetation.

South Newcastle, i.¢., the entrance to the lake, is a large and permanent sheet of water, overflowing
its banks to the north from two to five miles. The road and line follow the course of this creek for
26 miles. Ib is not a permanent running stream, but the waterholes are never dry and the undulated
portions of the creek would answer admirably for rice fields. This country maintains its character to
Daly Waters Station. This is a creek about 20 miles in length, and drains all the ironstone country just
referred to ; it empties itself into a large swamp found by Stuart and hears his name. This swamp, after
continuous rain, again overflows and inundates an immense stretch of low country-—black soil, Bay of
Biscay plains, covered with light and stunted gum scrub —and gradually this flooded country forms into a
flat channel, called the Birdum Creek, and tends for 6Q miles through light forest country, ultimately
emptying its waters into the Elsie Or-ek, a tributary of the Roper River. The traveller who crosses the

Continent

 
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY. 41

 

Continent thus far, at the Elsie Creek, may joyfully acknowledge that all.anxiety with regard to
procuring water ceases.

The Elsie Creek, discovered by Gregory, flows easterly. It has at the line crossing several large,
deep, and permanent billabongs of water. It has then a dry bed for four miles, at the end of which is a
channel or waterhole having an average width of 50 yards and ten miles in length. On either side of this
splendid reach of water is a magnificent growth of malleuca or paper bark timber—-a forest of straight,
tall spars, all thicknesses, and extending a quarter of a mile wide, giving an inexhaustible supply of one of
the most useful woods in the Northern Territory proper. Below this for several miles the creek is dry,
with a rocky bed, when it suddenly appears from under a crust of limestone as a running stream, and so
continues to its junction with the Roper River. This river appears to take its rise from some very strong
limestone springs, a group of which has been named the Bitter Springs. But it is not from these springs
alone that the Roper receives its supply, for innumerable springs exist all along the upper portion of the
river ; it is also fed by a large river called the Waterhouse. The timber and soil surrounding the Bitter
Springs and upper portion of the Roper are all that the most exacting settler could require, the former
bcing paper bark, Leichhardt pine, mahogany, etc., suitable for any building purposes, stockyards, railway
sleepers, or telegraph poles, a forest also in which one may cut and come again. The soil is (as before
stated of the Elsie) a rich decayed vegetable matter, a land more suited for tropical agriculture than for
pastoral purposes, and the numerous surrounding springs render irrigation an easy matter.

Forty five miles from Bitter Springs is the King River, a permanent running stream cmptying into
the Katherine River. The country surrounding the King is generally sandy and thickly timbered ; large
quantities of Cyprus pine exist in the neighborhood. This is the most useful timber in the Territory,
being light of carriage, and one of the few timbers proof against the attacks of the white ants. Telegraph
poles erected of pine are as sound now as when fixed in 1871. The lower portion of the King, that is,
near its junction with the Katherine River, passes through exeellent country. The country between the
King and the Katherine by road is chiefly sandy, but gives a good growth of grass in the wet season, and
the sandy soil is useful at that time on account of its boing very high and dry for stock.

The Katherine River is one of the large rivers of the Territory, taking its source in high bold
tablelands 40 to 50 miles east of the telegraph station. The country about its banks is admirably adapted
for pastoral purposes. Oattle, horses, and sheep are now located on the river, and are thriving well. It
is a never-failing stream, now believed to be the Daly River, and is navigable for 100 miles; and, irideed,
in times of flood it is merely a question of steam power to make ii navigable right up to the telegraph
station. Its water margin is well lined with most useful timber, paper bark and pine predominating. It
is proved that the grasses, when fed down, rapidly improve, and that English and American grasses thrive
well. Large springs have been found along its banks, throwing immense volumes of water. Limestone
is procurable in unlimited quantities, and good building stone.

The Cullen passes through a considerable number of rich black soil flats and valleys. It is 14 miles
south of the Pine Creek Goldfields, and has permanent water in several places along its course. The
discontinuance of working the reefs must not’ be attributed to the total exhaustion of the precious metal,
nor to the distance from the seaboard (130 miles), but to the present difticulty of reaching the coast. The
enormous cost of cartage and the absence of anything approaching cheap labor is enough of itself to
swallow up profits that would be considered small fortunes in other colonies that are favored with means
of transport to the coast.

It has been justly remarked that with roads come traffic, with traffic, commerce, industrial pursuits,
and manufactures. Roads also bring a market for the sale of live stock and agricultural produce, and
towns spring up from the facilities of communication thus afforded.

Alluvial gold has been and is yearly found in paying quantities around Pine Creek. A distance of
32 miles by road to Yam Creek, or nine miles to the Union Reef, reveals to the traveller an unbroken
course of auriferous country, besides alternate blocks of agricultural and pastoral land. From Yam Creek
to the Howley, a distance of eleven miles, embraces the John Bull, the Alexandra, and Fountain Head
reefs. Around the latter are fine open black soil plains, with abundance of permanent water in billabong
creeks. The Howley Creek has an abundance of good grass land, well watered by the creeks and
billabongs of permanent water. There are some exceedingly good patches of land about the Howley and
Bridge Creeks. Five miles further north, and east of Bridge Creek, and around Mt. Paqualin, there are
some rich black soil plains.

The country on the south side of the Adelaide River consists of fine open expansive plains, having a
park-like appearance, and well watered by creeks and billabongs. During the wet season portions of
these plains are inundated, and on that account might be utilised for rice paddocks. The river is well
timbered with useful woods for building purposes and bamboo of a large size. It is an ever-running
stream ; its width, etc, I shall refer to elsewhere. The north bank of the river differs from the south,
being hilly, with rich valleys extending to the Stapleton Creek, or the boundary of Mr. Goyder’s survey
(a distance of 50 miles), embracing many fine streams, such as Bunyan, Rum Jungle, Finniss, and Collet
Creeks, all of which streams flow through rich agricultural land. Bunyan and Rum Jungle valleys, as
also the flats of the Finniss, are on account of the excellence of their soil, worthy of special notice. Nearer
Southport, along the course of the Blackmore River, i.e., its upper portion, similar rich land is met with.
The township of Southport is situated at the head of the navigation of the Blackmore River, being distant
from Port Darwin 25 miles by water and 45 by land. The land round the township is high, dry, and
safe, being ironstone rises. There is a fine creek one mile from the township, called the Darwin, and a
few miles further on the road to Port Darwin a fine fresh-water lake called Lake Dean.

Having thus far attempted to describe the country across the Continent along the course of the
telegraph line, I would now wish to give as brief a description as possible of those portions of the Continent
travelled
42 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

travelled over by me at a distance from the telegraph Leaving Mount Margaret in May, 1870, I
proceeded 70 miles north, and striking the Macumba Creek, going westerly ten miles along its course to
its junction with the Stevenson, continuing along that creek for 20 miles. The whole of the country along
the course of both these creeks is admirably adapted for sheep or cattle—possibly, on account of the sandy
soil, more suitable to the latter. It is well watered on its lower (Macumba) portion by large waterholes,
and, unless an unusually dry season occurs, they contain water for 18 months without rain. From Central
Mount Stuart to the north base of MacDonnell Range the country is all that could be desired for any
pursuit, but is indifferently watered. In the range itself, the valleys between the various tiers are exceed-
ingly rich in soil herbage and springs, but to a limited extent.

On the completion of the telegraph, in August, 1872, I proceeded from the Daly Station to the head
of the navigation of the Roper River, or seven miles east of Leichhardt Bar, travelling along the course of
the Strangways River. I was particularly impressed with the value of the country along this river for
pastoral purposes. The land cartage of wool would be nil, as sheep could be shorn on the banks of the
river, and the wool, preserved meats, horns, hides, and hoofs rolled from the shed on board a 1,000-ton
steamer and shipped direct to London. Such facilities also apply to other rivers in the Territory—such as
the Fitzroy, Daly, and Adelaide, and possibly the Alligator, Rivers. In May, 1878, I proceeded, by
direction of Mr. Todd, northwards from Charlotte Waters, taking a middle course between my two
trips of 1870, and at 150 miles struck the lower portion of Todd Creek, where it empties out into thickly-
timbered gum swamps, the timber being of a very useful! kind.

In a letter from Mr. Giles (Boorok Station, Pine Creek), dated July 14, 1902, he writes as follows :—

The war has proved that the demand for horses of the right stamp has exhausted the supply. What
would it have been if England had not been able to purchase so largely in Canada, America, and the
Argentine, etc.? It behoves the pastoralists, therefore, to be ready to meet such a demand, which may
arise any day. If England and Japan happened to go to war with a third power, it is only natural that
Japan would buy her horseflesh from her ally. Where could she get a better or a nearer port of shipment
than Port Darwin? Thus it will be the interest of the squatter to obtain the nearest suitable land to that
port for horse-breeding. That such land exists goes without saying. Alice Springs, and all through the
MacDonnell Ranges, cannot fail to commend itself to horse-breeders as equal to any country in Australia ;
but first-class country is available very much nearer the port of Wanoui than that. Distance in travelling
horses is a secondary consideration as compared with cattle ; but the railway is required to carry stores
and plant in order to form the numerous inland homesteads, and for trucking horses when urgency demands
it. My 25 or 30 years’ experience in this Territory enables me to point to vast areas of such suitable
country, watered by permanent rivers and springs; and our annual tropical rainfall renders the word
“drought” as having no meaning here. We have at times a scarcity of feed towards September and
December, but, to counteract this, enormous stacks of splendid bush hay could be stored in March or
April, and chaffed-up ; and who knows what agriculturists may not, ere then, tempt the soil to produce
—maize, sweet potatoes, oats, and the Indian grain, that would fodder the shipments of horses on their
brief voyage to the Hast? The country is capable of doing all this, as you know—indeed, it has been
waiting the opportunity. The time has come ; let us make use of it; and then Northern Australia will
take her place amongst the great producing countries of the world in tropical and semi-tropical productions,
besides her immense mineral resources.

 

 

SIMPSON NEWLAND

(Late Treasurer of South Australia).

Extracts from description of his journey through the Northern Territory in 1887, by 3. Newland * :—

Through open country, in which is a belt of good sandhills with plenty of bush a
Oodnadatta, the terminus of the South Australian railway, which is Lee on a fis oe
Neales. Here the weather-worn, gravelly hills approach near the flooded ground of the creek, in some
places the soft shale standing on edge, as it does where the gold is found at Algebuckina. At aONSEL miles
through nice level stock country we cross the Swallow, well known as a camping-spot. It is a fair water
hole under a rocky bank, where swallows build their nests; hence its name. Thence the road asonnda
some stony country, where we leave the telegraph line to pursue its endless way, via the Alberga d
Stevenson, while we diverge to the right for the Macumba. In a few miles we drop into the vail na
Storm Creek. As we descend the somewhat steep declivity of the tableland dividing the tributari : Ph
Neales and the Macumba, a fine view is afforded of the basin of the latter river with Mount ‘Ale : d :
in the distance. Storm Creek is followed by a winding track on its rocky course to the Ma acca
about five miles, to near the Government well of fresh water; this is also well situated abo ; 16 es
from the next. The country round is fairly bushed and grassed, but stony. Lower down ic. ; miles
: SEs acne a oe where mm ake across a nine-mile plain of chocolate soil, but of ea tee
escription, so far as feed is concerned, :
only a ewing in the “gileys.” : for the Alberga. The salt and cotton bush is far apart, the grass

Then comes a change to gladden the squatter—excell i i
between, to the Alberga River. This we ‘ebue and in a ie te Senne ea ong ints
slowly over a portion of their wide and shallow sandy beds, having been in heay a 4 eae
previously A couple of wiles below is their junction, forming the Macumba in an z a 4 Jom. days
well-known Ross’s Hole, considered the finest water within many miles. It is see lh ie
| , thoug

without

 

 

 

* Far North Country,” by S. Newland, 1887.

 
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 43

 

 

 

without stocking it is said to last 18 months. The tableland to the east of the Macumba is reported to be
first-class, and what I have seen bears out that character. After crossing the Stevenson, the Macumba
Station, now occupied as a store, is but a short distance. For some miles, except the sandhills, where
mulga and smaller bushes are to be found, the country is timbered with box and gum, indicating that it is
subject to big floods. This is so in fact, as the old Macumba Station was abandoned in consequence of
frequent floods Excellent water is here obtainable on the bank of the stream at shallow depths, but the
lessees of the run were not successful in their attempts when sinking in the back country. After a night’s
stay, with a fresh stock of provisions we start on our track up the Stevenson. For a while the road is
over some heavy sand, but improves as we progress. For about 50 miles the valley of the creek is
followed, occasionally a spur of tableland having to be crossed. Then the telegraph line is met once more,
and we strike off to the north for Blood Creck. In the stretch of country from the Macumba Station to
Ike Well, where the telegraph line crosses the Stevenson, there are three Government wells, each of good
water. As all are in the valley of the creek, it may be argued that they are no index as to whether fresh
water can be obtained on the higher land, but as to their value in opening up the road in any season there
can be no two opinions. The tablelands appear all stony, but thero is much good stock feed upon them,
though the timber, or indeed nearly everything above the size of a saltbush, is confined to the lower lands
adjacent to the creeks. The actual beds of all the large streams are pure white sand, and the Stevenson,
so far as I have seen it, is no exception.

At Adminga, some miles above the telegraph crossing, there are splendid waterholes, generally well
supplied with water since the occupation of the country in 1876, though during a very severe drought the
whole of them, with one exception, were dry, and the one referred to nearly so. It is in hilly country,
and said to be favored by a better rainfal] than other places in this dry region. As we leave the Stevenson
this station is to our left, Dalhousie Springs, the ‘wouder of the North,” being some 30 miles on our right.
These springs are indeed a marvel. Almost surrounded by hills a few miles distant, they are themselves
on a considerable elevation about 10 miles long. Several of the most extraordinary were shown, among
the rest the famed hot spring, the water flowing from which would be called a river in the settlements.
The supply is evidently inexhaustible, and while quite appreciating their present importance it must strike
the observer as a pity they are centred in so compuratively small an area. In the no distant future I
venture to predict that a large portion of these waters will be carricd very many miles away in pipes from
the source. Spring Creek offers a fall down which the pipes can be laid to good country, thus saving stock
the long tramp that kills to water. Immediately round the springs a kind of acacia bush, rushes, and
reeds, with several kinds of grasses, among the rest a couch-grass, are growing freely; but as the water
descends on to the level ground vegetation disappears, indicating that when the water rises it is compara-
tively free from the properties deleterious to vegetabie life. This view is borne out by the fact that the
creek from the hot springs flows in a well-detined channel lined with bushes for from two to three miles,
and then spreads out into a swamp covered with reeds such as grow in the swamps of the Murray. Below
that it becomes impregnated with saline maiter, and the ground presents the same white barren aspect
characteristic of the springs from the Eergott to the Peake. On the whole, however, the country round
the Dalhousie Springs is much better, and the number of cattle it has supported in many droughts is a
proof of this.

The road to Blood Creek crosses a plain broken by sand-rises and claypans very similar to much of
the back country of the Darling. There is another Goverment well at Blood Creek, near the junction
of the Dalhousie road. The water is good, and, I understand, the supply also. A house of accommodation
for travellers and a store has just been opened, which will be a great convenience, as that is a general
camping-place. A few miles farther we ascend the stony tableland dividing the watersheds of the
Stevenson and the Finke. Descending into the valley of the Adminga, we breathe freely again. Here
stoncs still prevail, but the road is better. There is little timber in this tributary of the Finke, and the
country is but sparsely bushed or grassed. It is hard and hilly, and should be a good watershed, causing
the creek to flood with light rains. From here to Charlotte Waters Telegraph Station is 16 miles.
Bullocky Creek lies between, where the wellsinkers tried boring, but abandoned the effort in consequence
of some breakage in the tube. For some miles before arrival at the telegraph station the road traverses
quite open, gravel, and stony country, with low hills to the left and the Coglan Oreek on the right, beyond
which can be seen the depression of the Finke.

We are now just over the 26th parallel of latitude, and may well pause to consider the different
aspect presented by the country as it lies before us. South Australia proper is behind ; the Northern
Territory in front. The line almost defines the diftcrence in vegetation. Looking over the Coglan Creek
to the north, trees, bushes, and grass are growing in profusion ; in sume places the timber appears almost
dense. To the south stretches a wide expanse of vountry, where the eye in vain scarches for tree or bush.
The Charlotte Waters Telegraph Station is not the residence likely to be selected by anyone having the
wide world to choose from. If the ground is not a monotonous dead level, it ought to be from appearances.
It is built of stone round three sides of a square courtyard, tho fourth being closed in by a wall, in which
is the solitary door giving access to an establishment comprising telegraph station, post-office, store, dining
room, sleeping apartments, kitchen, etc.

On the day after arrival at Charlotte Waters we crossed the creek into rich pastures, where a mob of
Crown Point cattle are mustered preparatory to the final start for the Adelaide market They are a credit
to the station, and show what can be produced in quality aud weight in the north. Our course lies down
the Coglan Creek, through picturesque country dotted over with box, showing that it is subject to fluods.
There are many kinds of good stock bushes, including salt and cotton bush, as also grasses and herbs of
various descriptions. The soil generally is a sandy loam. not calculated to stand the heavy stocking of the
higher land as we progress, but evidently a favorite feeding ground, judging from the number of cattle
upon it. At the junction of the Coglan with the Finke high tablelands, on the south side ending in a
steep cliff, the river turns abruptly to the east, which forms as it does so some fairly good waterholes. The
gum and box in the levels and flooded flats are thick with the undergrowth of acacias, willows, and a

considerable
44 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

the timber appears large, but there are
Soh cane for the railway can be

obtained up the Finke, but as the timber is generally young the authorities eae = an
its use. It is, however, well known that box is most durable, not splitting with the - = dak a stony
does. Onthe south the tableland comes to the river bank. It is about 50 feet c : ss Valley
character, but splendidly covered with Mitchell and numerous other grasses. Over thi ee eal
the east soft sandhills form its boundary. Some stand up high above the cans trees a fae ence ot
others, again, are slight elevations broken by flats between. In one respect t - . = i mo boas
furnish ample supplies of the most fattening herbs for stock, besides numerous bus te anna
river channel here does not present the same broad, white sandy bed characteristic 0 C oe ee
it is affected by the frequent flooding of the Coglan Creek, flowing principally tai See Walesa
stony country, and bringing little white sand with it. It has lately been in flood, Ha t i 7 ae
Waterhole. ‘There is a shallow well here belonging to the Crown Point Station, in the ag eee
surrounded by water. The supply it gives is excellent and inexhaustible. In so fine a part of the

is invaluable.

Another well was sunk by the telegraph party near the junction of Coglan Creek, bub the se 7
brackish —fit for stock, but not suitable for the requirements of the telegraph station when its usua : ipply
fails. A further well was therefore put down a few miles up the Finke, where an abundant ae ae
water was obtained. Indeed, in no instance coming under my notice has water failed to be ae :
Finke at a depth not exceeding 30 feet; more usually under 10 feet. Returning, I aes ac
on the south side of Coglan Creek, passing some fine waterholes in its channel with box and gum fringing

considerable quantity of other small trees and bushes.
fine poles which are well adapted for station purposes. No doubt many sleepers

 

a

$2:
ions
as
“es

a
=

 

Piate 15—Crown Point.

the banks. On the following day we started for Crown Point (see Plate 15), making a detour up Coglan
Creek and some of its tributaries, round Mount Daniel to the Goyder. Higher up the creek offers greater
facilities for damming, as the ground is more tenacious and firm than below the telegraph station. The
country around is generally firm, Lut we pass some good sandhills with small plains. Opinions cannot
differ as to its carrying capabilities as a steck country. Cotton and salt bushes abound, while grass of
many varieties is thick. Gidea is again met with in the higher creeks, but mulga predominates, particularly
as we approach the Goyder through undulating country with sandy soil. This stream has only partially
run from the late rains, but its bed of sand is full of water, as is proved by the scoop holes where the
sand has been removed for a few feet and where stock are now drinking. We follow the stream up some
ten niles, seeing some water on the surface, and then turn off to the right for Crown Point. About mid-
way we drop into the Finke depression and continue up the flats to the station, passing some ouricus hills
and cliffs. During the last two days we have seen nothing but good country, and its carrying capabilities
are unquestionable, The station is situated on the rising ground at the margin of the floods. To the
west is a plain bounded by low elevations with the usual covering of foliage met with since passing
Charlotte Creek, bushes, grass, and herbs being in abundance. To the north Crown Point and Onetree
Hill cliff stands conspicuously out some two miles away ; the first ending a range of hills on the west bank
of the Finke, the other the same on the east. Each is absolutely flat on the top with steep weather-worn
sides. Here the Finke Valley is at its narrowest. The river bed for many miles below this and until the
MacDonnell Ranges are approached consists of pure white sand. The depth apparently is not ascertained,
as the influx of water is too great in nearly every instance to be coped with. Immediately out of the
main channel here, as below, gum and box poles grow in immense quantities. One wonders how it comes

to
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 45

 

to pass that there are so few of greater age or dimensions. Several days are spent in examining the
surrounding country. Lilla Creek, joining the Finke to the west about 15 miles up, is visited. Again is
seen the ribbon of sand instead of water, characteristic of all these rivers. Like the Goyder, this creek is
lined with timber of small kinds on the higher parts of its valley, and rough box and gum of large size
near the banks. On the north it is bounded by the most extensive plain seen thus far. To the south is
Mount Humpbhris with other smaller hills, circled by small plains and sandhills. Generally the lower
Lilla country is open, but there is no mistake about it being a beautiful stock country. In our ride we
look at several wells in the Finke, all of fresh water, at seven or eight feet.

Preparations completed, with fresh horses we start for Alice Springs. Our course lies over the Finke,
along the telegraph line. Sandhills are around, but the track dodges most of them, keeping generally on
hard ground with open country until within a few miles of the Horseshoe Bend, where they have to be
overcome. To Idracowra both road and country are good, but on from there for about 15 miles to beyond
Chambers Pillar the sandhills are a terror. Soft and steep, they meet one in interminable rolls. Spinifex
luxuriates here, but withal it is not bad stock country. It is seeding plentifully, as I am told ib does
annually, and then cattle and horses are very fond of it. Leaving the sand some easy road, through nice
mulga country is passed, and then some more sand before Mount Birrell is reached: The road to the east
has some sandhills also, but there is not such a continuous length of them as by Chambers Pillar: the
distance, too, is fifteen miles shorter. There is good water in the Government well at Alice Oreek, 21
miles from the Bend. It can also be obtained from the old depét, but another well should be sunk at
Frances Oreek to break the distance from Alice Creek to Mount Birrell. Mount Birrell is situated a little
to the east of the Hugh. There are fine troughs and a good well in the bed of the river.

The Hugh, whose broad bed of white sand now so familiar, affords plenty of water, runs through the
property. Of grass, bush, or saline plants there are sufficient for cattle, horses, or sheep to thrive well on.
There is now again a choice between two tracks; one generally travelled up the Hugh via Dr. Stone’s
well and Owen Springs, the other a mere camel pad up Olive Creek through the James and Waterhouse
Ranges. The latter is said to save 50 miles—so grave a consideration that we choose it, though warned of
the presence of the “ Pinch.” The going is good for 20 miles through open undulating salt and cotton
bush country, well grassed. Then we have five miles of desert oak sandhills before reaching the James
Range. This is a broken, low range, presentirg no difficulties to us, as we passed though a convenient
valley without rising a yard, and strike for the Waterhouse through about 15 miles of sandhills, on which
grows a forest of desert oaks. Their trunks are 14 or 15 feet long, and should be useful for building
and fencing purposes, or for railway sleepers. .As we approach the range a valley opens out, up which we
proceed to the foot of the “Pinch.” Another mile brought us to the gap: it is simply a doorway in the
cliff, only fifty feet wide, the two walls standing up perpendicularly perhaps 150 to 200 feet. I mounted
one only a few feet wide, piled rock upon rock as if by Titans, smooth and slippery, with not a loose stone
left. For nine miles further the track is still in the spurs of the range, but at Ooramina, a rock waterhole
considered permanent, we are through, and 20 miles of what is called plain are before us, lying between
the Waterhouse Range and Emily Gap. The country is, however, bushed over generally, the watercourses
being marked by box timber. We follow up a buggy track ina tolerably straight line to Emily Gap, a
gateway similar to the last, but ona grander scale. Its cliffs rise many hundred feet overhead, wild and
almost unassailable. This range is pierced by several of these gaps, through which the various creeks
make their way, though how, wiser heads than mine may determine, for the rock is as hard as flint so that
it appears impossible for the action of water to wear it away. The range stands up almost sheer from the
plain on either side, forming but for these gaps an impassable barrier. Here grass grows thickly and
luxuriantly. A hungry and thirsty appearance can only be seen here when a drought rages, and droughts
are strangers to few parts of Australia. Yet though this is a grass country there is plenty of saltbush in
parts, the “old man” kind in particular being very abundant. From the 26th parallel there are many
varieties of trees, besides gum, box, and mulga. There are bloodwood, ironwood, beefwood, and white-
wood. Of bushes of the larger description there are many kinds—acacias, emu bush, dogwood, orange,
native hop, and a host of others. Nearly all, too, form food for animal life during time of drought.
Many are always greedily selected by stock. In looking at this part of the country one can discern few
signs of severe drought. Comparatively few bushes or trees are dead, and where they are the result
appears to be due to fire. If cannot be urged that the country has never been put to the test of heavy
stocking, for on some of the permanent waters it has undoubtedly been severely tried. This is simply what
may be expected from a country where bushes and grasses well known to stand drought best grow in profusion.
In the soft sand country the famous parakilla is flowering to perfection with the gay hues of the portulacca
tribe. There appears no doubt that cattle can and do live without water through the hottest summer
where this plant, or rather these plants, grow ; there are certainly two or three varieties of it, probably
many more. Passing through Emily Gap we leave Undoolya station about five miles to the right. Ib is
pleasantly situated under the main MacDonnell Range, with the lofty Undoolya Mountain to the east,
and the Slippanel and Jessie Gaps to the south and south-west. Our course lies along a valley, between
ranges running east and west, picturesque and interesting in the extreme. Occasionally the track crosses
stony rises, but generally there appears to be a deep loamy soil rich enough to grow anything under the
combined influences of sun and rain. Alice Springs lies six miles away from Emily Gap across the valley,
nestled in some small hills. Approaching it we leave Hevertree Gap to our left. Nearer again we pass a
store, and then comes into view the telegraph station, most important from its situation of all along the
line from Port Augusta to Port Darwin.

Alice Springs is undoubtedly the most interesting of all the stations on the overland line. Its height
above sea-level is variously stated at from 1,500 to 2,500 feet, but at any rate it is the highest of these
stations. Situated, too, in the range dividing the water system of the Continent, it is on the confines of
the great saltbush country, far beyond which it is questionable whether sheep will thrive. The scenery
around it is always interesting, often striking, and sometimes magnificent. The valley in which it lies has
no counterpart in South Australia that I have seen. It stretches away in the dim distance, east and

west,
46 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY.

west, bounded to the south by the marvellous wall of hard flinty rock with the ready-hewn ene
through it, and to the north by the broken-up main MacDonnell Range, the source of the rivers, creeks,
and springs—a range of granite, now in huge boulders, and again decomposed into excellent pasture land.
Eighteen miles to the west of the telegraph station is Temple Bar, a gap through which the telegraph line
passes ; while immediately opposite is Simpson Gap, a wonderful gorge in the main range; with mighty
cliffs towering up to the heavens, between which lies a beautiful pool of permanent water. To pass those
narrow heights the traveller must swim that icy stream upon which the sun can shine but little. On the
other side the approach is difficult, so torn is the range, so rough the boulders. Further to the west there
are many of these gorges (see Plate 16), and one cannot wonder that the native lords of these wilds have
conceived the idea on more occasions than one that they could defend them against the white man. — High
up on the face of these magnificent cliffs grows a beautiful tecoma wherever there is a little soil in the
fissures of the rocks. Sometimes it occurs in the form of a bush, at others as a creeper, its flowers of
creamy white hanging in bunches, As Alice Springs is a repeating station, the duties of the officers never
cease, necessitating the employment of a large staff of operators. Hence it is looked upon as a place of con-
siderable importance. Prettily and picturesquely situated on the banks of the Todd, under, yet in, the range,
it has much to recommend it as a place of residence. Hot winds, surely, can never reach it under the cover
of all these hills far and near. There are trees, too, around, and some planted by the residents already shade
the buildings There is an attempt at gardening, inasmuch as a piece of ground is enclosed and a pump
erected over a shallow well adjoining, from which water is laid on. With soil, water, and climate in favor
of the production of most vegetables and many fruits, the result appeared to me disappointing. Surely
where so many are employed it would pay to keep a good gardener. The actual amount of rations saved
by a continuous supply of vegetables would be considerable, to say nothing of the health of the community

It is a pity that something was not done years ago in planting vines and fruit-trees, as well as attention

 

Pratrt 16—Finkr GorGE.

paid to a kitchen garden in a place like this. A few cows are kept, which afford a supply of milk and
butter, but beef is obtained from Undoolya Station. Only a few sheep are now left out of the original
flock. All reports, however, agree in stating that these sheep did very well, and in such a country there
is no reason why, with proper attention, they should not.

After one night’s rest J started over the range for Bond Springs. We turned and twisted through the
hills, over creeks, and along creeks, and eventually found ourselves at Bond Springs Station, on the Todd,
once more. The afternoon was spent in riding to the south east through a jumble of watercourses, hills,
and valleys with a soil largely composed of decomposed granite, but excellent grazing land. Gum and tea-
tree are in the creeks, and mulga on the hills, with many of the bushes common to the lower lands. We
climb one enormous blow of white quartz, but can detect no gold in it. In these ranges there are many of
these reefs, nearly all of them running from east to west. Bond Springs Station is placed nearly upon the
top of the MacDonnell Range, but it has only the appearance of being in a number of low hills. There
are several waterholes in the creek. Following the channel up a few miles the range is passed through,
the creek taking its rise on a table-land or plain from the north. We ride on, and next, at about eight
miles, are at Allan Waters, a creek running nearly east and west. As we proceed the country becomes
somewhat densely timbered with big mulga. Then we cross the Harry, running parallel with Allan
Waters, and the country becomes more open. The Strangways Range is now only a few miles to the
right, standing so as to give the impression that the highest crest must reach a considerable elevation.
From this range the Burt, running parallel to and about 30 miles from the MacDonnell Range, takes its
rise. We arrive at the creek about sundown, and camp at the Government Well, which contains excellent
water. There has evidently been little rain here, as the creek has no water in it, and the grass is drier
than nearer the range. Extensive plains stretch to the west, well-grassed and bushed ; and, as we strike

off
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 47

 

off for Painta Spring. to the west of our outward track plains of saltbush on the mulga country are
frequently met with. Burt Creek, about 30 iniles beyond the MacDonnell Range, was the farthest point

reached during the trip. There the country looked of an excellent pastoral character, but it is evident
that permanent surface-water is very scarce.

When we again reach the MacDonnell Range—at Painta Spring—it has assumed an abrupt ascent,
and so stretches away in a defined line to the west, with a plain running at its foot with evidently an
immense extent of level country to the north of it. Painta Spring is prettily situated a few feet up the
cliff. A hole has been sunk, and the water fills it and flows over. The element could scarcely be purer,
and probably the supply could be largely increased. One solitary palm-tree—the only one seen by me in
the range—grows at this spring. From the summit of the hill overlooking this water the view is extensive,
showing the range to be much more rugged than to the east of the telegraph line. To the south, between
Painta Spring and the telegraph line, are Flint Springs— no doubt permanent with anything like fair
treatment.

Regarding the climate, much misapprehension certainly exists. There is no question that the
thermometer rises to a great height in much of the North. At Alice Springs, with its elevation, the glass
for 60 or 70 days in the year registers over 100°. At Charlotte Waters and the Peake it is hotter still ;
but this is common to the interior generally, both in Queensland and New South Wales. It is surprising
to hear that the hot blast of the North, so familiar to us about Adelaide, and so well-known in our neigh-
boring colonies, is scarcely felt beyond and about the Peake. The hottest wind felt there, I am told, is from
the south-east ; so that it appears we must look for the birthplace of our fiery foe nearer home than has
been usually supposed. The steady, burning heat must, however, be very intense in many localities,
mitigated though it doubtless is on the higher land by cool nights.

At Alice Springs the average rainfall is 11-796 inches, and 6-190 inches have fallen for the half-year
to the end of June. It is impossible that there could be any considerable flooding of creeks when, during
the six months, there has been no 3-inch rain. It indeed seems rather a poor result in a country where,
during the last ten years, returns show that there have been 34 falls exceeding three inches, six exceeding
four inches, four of over five inches, two of over six inches, and one of over eleven inches. The season may
therefore be considered an average one in the MacDonnell Ranges, but in no sense is it an exceptionally
good one. Just about the Charlotte Waters the rain for the half-year has been abnormally heavy, being
nearly as much as the average of the year. At the Peake, however, the actual amount registered is less
than the average, being only 2°465, against 5-436 for the year.

Distance is but relative, and only those who have travelled day following day on horse or camel across
the monotonous, boundless Australian landscape can realise how endless, how enormous, it is. The
enquiring lover of his country may well ask, What shall we do with it? What can 300,000 people do
with it? I am not dealing with the coastline either north or south, or the settlements where agriculture
is more or less successful, but of the vast interior that Nature’s voice—the rainfall—has plainly proclaimed
is pasture land: a rainfall light in itself generally, though at and beyond the MacDonnell Ranges heavy
enough for grain of many kinds to be grown if it but fell in the winter months. But look at the records
for the last ten years, and it will be seen that the principal rains are from October to March. But it is
pasture land capable of such development as would, under wisely liberal legislation, make South Australia
one of the first meat- and wool-producing countries on the globe.

The business man asks: “If the stock and the wool are grown, where is the market?” The answer is—
Grow the stock in sufficient quantities, and a market will be found. Freeze the meat upon the line and ship
at Port Augusta if it cannot be taken down alive. The difficulty to my mind is not raising too much, but
too little. Our local market ig so small that we glut it with a few hundred head, but if we grew thousands
where we have hundreds we should be doing an important export trade. None of the colonies have beaten
ua in wool, and as we go nearer in the tropics the absence of the scorching blast of the north, with the
accompanying clouds of dust, are all in favor of the growth of good wool. That many fruits and vegetables
can be grown is certain. The easentials—soil and water-—are to be found in many places, with heat every-
where in the interior. There is pasturage there to support flocks and herds vast enough to enable us to
establish a great wool and meat trade with the old world after supp'ying our own requirements.

The difficulties do not appear greater than have been contended with and overcome in America. An
authority on the meat trade in Chicago states “that 10,000 miles of railway are largely occupied in the transit
of cattle, many days and nights being required for a journey.” One establishment for shipping and canning
meat has a slaughtering capacity annually of 400,000 cattle, and others bring up the grand total to about
9,500,000 head. Our cousins bring their stock by rail as far or farther than it is necessary for us todo. To
this it is objected that they feed and water them in transit, and with proper arrangements we can do the same.
They, however, are contemplating more extensively using the refrigerating car, which probably would answer
our purpose best. Articles have recently appeared in various publications relative to this subject, in which
attention is drawn to the fact that Australia is alluwing herself to be cat out of this trade by the Americans.
This is not because they possess superior advantages, for some of the American writers admit that the
Australian meat is better than much of their own. Thousands upon thousands of their cattle are sent to
market from such cold regions that to us it may well appear surprising that they fatten at all. It is therefore
absurd to suppose that with a climate more favorable to the 1aising of stock, and a pasturage producing a
better quality of meat, we cannot compete with them. All we have to do is to produce more. Where we
have scores we should grow thousands, and the market will open out by the establishment of a shipping and
canning trade probably somewhere on the Transcontinental Railway similar to that at Chicago.

t ine what even partially stocking some of the country beyond the 26th parallel means to
See Austell: For example, fake a belt of it 200 miles wide along the telegraph line from Charlotte
Waters to about Barrow Creek, say 400 miles by 200, some 80,000 square miles of country carrying 50 sheep

Lo the mile, 4,000,000 head, a low estimate giving 5 lbs. of wool worth 6d. per !b., or 28, 6d. PSO ae
48 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

£500,000. Add to this 400,000 sheep for sale annually at 5s. per head=£100,000. on se hes
£600,000 of exports from 80,000 miles of country out of over 300,000 miles, probably as well a sae fs
stock as the strip I have named. It must be recollected, too, that much of the land along the cologte ine
will support 100 sheep to the mile, just double the estimate I have given. Of course, some of it is better
adapted to cattle, but for the convenience of calculation I have confined myself to sheep. Then there is an
enormous extent of country to the north of Barrow Creek certainly suitable for cattle if not for sheep, eon
of which is being stocked now. The chief entrepét for that portion of the continent may not be in Sout

Australian seas; but when the Transcontinental Railway is completed we certainly shall receive a share of it.

w Creek out of our calculations, what does the

But leaving the whole of the country beyond Barro Ef
h of it mean to us? At the moderate estimate

opening up and stocking of the immense tract to the sout c
given for : portion of it the amount of wool would be 80,000,000 Ibs., having a money value of £2,000,000,
nearly double the quantity we now produce, to say nothing of the annual surplus from 16,000,000 sheep,
which may be roughly reckoned at another £1,000,000. With all this additional raw material, what would
our manufactories spring to? Not only should we supply our own population with meat, but a great export
trade would arise, and South Australian ports and wharfs would become centres of life and activity. Looking
now at our wild waste lands, this may seem like an enthusiast’s idle dream, but it is capable of realisation in
part at least in our own day, and in its entirety during the life of the next generation, if only wise counsels
prevail. Capital and population are the levers to work this marvellous change. South Australia has them
not, and for want of them her progress has been stayed, and her sister colonies leave her behind in the
friendly race for pre-eminence. She must attract both by offering a liberal share in the dormant wealth lying
in almost criminal uselessness now. The utmost encouragement should be given to develop her vacant
pastures by low rentals aud absolutely fixed tenure, but special inducement ought to be held out to those
permanently watering country now destitute of the indispensable element. It has been wisely said that “he
who makes two blades of grass grow where only one grew before is a bonefactor of his race.” How much
more is this true of those who provide perpetual water where none existed previously? It should be our
national policy to urge on the development of our vast interior until it is covered with cattle, sheep, and
horses. With this going on, cities will spring up, as they have in other colonies, far beyond where agriculture
has ever been attempted.

There is every reason to believe that near the heavier rainfall of the tropics water will be found at less
depth and of purer quality. And we may depend upon it, there it will yet be found, in some of tbe most
reliahle country for stock in the colony. I have said little about breeding horses. That they will thrive has
been demonstrated beyond question. Indeed, that is saying but little, as we know that the horse of the north
is unsurpassed for strength, size, and endurance. It is probable that this will be recognised in the course of a
few years, and horses bred in the north command the highest prices not only in the east, but in the markets
of the whole world. As in the broad pastures of the Far North the horse is already superior of his kind, so can
cattle and sheep be raised superior of their kind, or second to none in any land. That the country is subject
to droughts is a fact that cannot be overlooked. All saltbush country, wherever situated, is so; but as a
compensation for that it is the healthiest for stock of any known in the world. Australia may well be proud
of her flocks and herds, for, without disparaging any interest, she owes to them a larger portion of the wealtl:
of her exports than to any other industry ; and glancing at the broad area we claim as our own, the question
is forced upon us: “Is there any other admitting of such expansion?” *

CHARLES WINNECKE, F.R.G.S.

Extracts from Paper read by Charles Winnecke before the Royal Geographical Soclety of Australasia
(South Australian Branch) on June 28, 1886 f :—

On THE PuysicaL Features or SoutH AUSTRALIA.

The Finke River or Larra-Pinta of the aboriginals, including its various tributanes, notably the Goyder
and Hugh, must be nearly 1,000 miles in length. It has a very wide channel, which is almost entirely filled
with fine white sand, resembling that found on the sea beach. Water is nearly always procurable by digging
in this sand. In its upper portions, especially amoagst the MacDonnell Ranges, the banks of this river are
steep and rocky, and in several places, and especially in the numerous gaps and gorges through which it has
forced its way, fine long reaches of water are to be seen, in which several varieties of fish abound. In its
lower portions the banks of this peculiar river are scarcely perceptible, and are quite’ inadequate to confine
the immense body of water which sometimes (once, perhaps, in many years) rushes with tremendous force
down its channel. These waters constitute the drainage of the MacDonnell, Gill, Krichauff, and other
ranges in Central Australia, from which this river derives its source. The lower Finke when an overflow
occurs, floods hundreds of square miles of country, forming apparently numerous vast lagoons or lakes of
fresh water—a most cheering view in these otherwise arid regions. Eventually a portion of this vaat
quantity of water finds its way over low swampy flats into the Macumba River, and thence into Lake Eyre
but by far the greater portion is absorbed in the soil or sand, and no doubt materially adds to the su 1p of
subterraneous waters now practically ascertained to exist in the Lake Eyre basin Pe

There are several other large rivers, such as the Todd, Hall, M i : :
existence from the northern, eastern, and southern slopes of the MacDonnell Bee” ar si ne
southward towards the Lake Eyre basin. Some of these rivers have as yet only been partiall explated
They are known to traverse a portion of the great interior, but their limits are as yet neR OnE Tt is
however, in my opinion, beyond doubt that they also tend to increase by absorption the supply of anderdiotal

water

 

*“ Our Waste Lands,” by S. Newland, 1888, + Proceedings Royal Geographical Society;(South Australia), Vol. 2, 1890,
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 49

water {i the Lake Eyre basin. All these rivers have beautiful large gumtrees growing along their banks,
whose timber is well adapted for a variety of purposes, and will eventually become valuable in a country
where the prevailing vegetation is so stunted.

We have thus several large rivers which take their rise in Central Australia amongat high ranges of
from 5,000 to 6,000 feet in elevation, and which, in their southward course, drain an area of many
thousand square miles, and gradually disappear in the vicinity of those mound springs in the Lake Eyre
basin. A glance at the map of Australia will show that this basin receives the surface drainage of about half
a million of square miles of country. The mound springs, in my opinion, are ef very great importance, and
my short description will, perhaps, give you but an inadequate idea of their value. I have found these
springs in various localities, several hundreds of miles apart, with no material difference in their outward
appearance, and I have come to the conclusion that they all emanate from one source, and all derive their
existence from the immense quantity of water which must necessarily exist underground in these regions.
They may be, therefore, called natural artesian wells. A large cluster, consisting of some thousand large and
small springs, is situated in about Longitude 139° and Latitude 23° S., but the most remarkable are the
Dalhousie and other springs near the Overland Telegraph Line, and near the northern boundary of South
Australia.

Amongst the mass of springs called the Dalhousie, which stretch over a considerable extent of country, and
are surrounded by a low stony tableland, almost every variety of water is obtainable. Many of these springs
are deliciously cool and fresh even in the hottest part of summer ; others again are warm, some are brackish,
and again some are so hot as to be undrinkable. The majority of the springs contain soda, salts of ammonia,
iron, magnesia, and other ingredients in more or less abundance. Nearly all these waters have, however, been
frequently used, and it is therefore reasonable to suppose that there is nothing deleterious contained in them.
Reeds grow luxuriously and in great abundance around the Dalhousie Springs. I have tested the temperature
of the water at the Lodon Spa Spring at various times and seasons, and always found it to be 92°. Nearly
all the springs afford an unfailing supply of water.

Perhaps one of the most remarkable features in Central Australia is the MacDonnell Ranges, which
were discovered by John McDouall Stuart in his overland journey to the north coast many years ago. These
very remarkable ranges, the limits of which have been ascertained and mapped by later explorers, extend from
the 130th to the 136th meridian of longitude, a distance of about 400 miles, with a variable width of from
20 to 50 miles, and attain an elevation of over 5,000 feet above sea level. The ranges are interspersed by
numerous deep and rocky creeks, which collect the water from innumerable gullies and ravines, and trend
their tortuous way sometimes under perpendicular cliffs of enormous elevation until they find an outlet
through the main outside range by one of those previously-mentioned gorges. In Many places isolated
mountains appear, rising abruptly and grandly above the surrounding lower hills, their aides lately indicating
the action of water. The formation of the MacDonnell Ranges is principality red gxaniie, shough nearly all
other rocks are to be found in more or less abundance. Many of the lower hille are composed of manganese,
iron, slate, basalt, gneiss, sandstone, and quartz; copper, and indications of gold, téa, aud other metals have
also been discovered in several places. Hitherto I have endeavored to deseribe those natural features which
must be considered of the greatest importance to the interior of Australia, and as my space must necessarily
be limited, I will only add a few general remarks in reference to exploration.

The limits of the desert are, as a rule, sharply defined. The explorer may travel in these latitudes for
hundreds of miles through a weary and monotonous scrub and sand, when suddenly, as if by magic, the scrub
terminates and he enters on an apparently boundless plain. The change in the soil is equally marked. The
desert portions consist of red clay and sand, and the plains are composed of a rich alluvial soil of black and
brown loam mixed with clay. The vegetation also undergoes a complete change, the plains being thickly
covered with the finest and most nutritious grasses, which are capable of supporting any number of stock.
{ have no hesitation in declaring this latter country equal to the finest pastoral country of Australia.

TABLELAND OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY.

Extracts from report of C. Winnecke (to the Hon. Minister for the Northern Territory) of his explora-
tion of the Tableland during 1877 to 1881, in conjunction with David Lindsay, whose report is annexed

N.T. 31/98) :—
ae eel 32 and 33, Eagle Chambers, Adelaide, July 25, 1898,

Dear Sir—I have been requested by Mr. T. W. Conran to furnish you with a general report on certain
portions of the Northern Territory of South Australia, described as the Barclay Tableland, which I explored
on behalf of, and whilst I was in, the Government service during the years 1877 to 1881, now known as The
Tableland. I was able to trace the exact south-western boundary of these magnificently-grassed downs and
plains from latitude 18° 30’ S., longitude 134° 30’ E., to latitude 22° S., longitude 137° E. and 138° E.
—a distance in a north-west and south-east direction of nearly 400 miles. To the north-east of this line the
country which I examined to some distance beyond the Queensland boundary (longitude 138° E.) consists of
open, magnificently-grassed Mitchell grass downe and plains, intersected by numerous large and small water-
courses, some of which, from the volume of water that sometimes flows down their channels, have been termed
rivers. Two of these were discovered and named by me, viz., the Playford and Buchanan Creek. These
—like the Rankine, James, and Herbert Rivers, and Creswell, Brunette, Corella, Lorne, Happy, and other
creeks—have clay channels, containing numberless large and small waterholes, some of which have been known
to last stock several years without being replenished. Excellent facilities for large dams exist almost every-
where in these rivers and creeks,

The bluebush, of a few feet in height, and the polygonum, which sometimes attains a height of 20 feet
and more, are most excellent feed for stock. My horses, of which I had a very large number, thrived
amazingly on these two plants. Almost without exception, the whole of these tablelands consist of this

: variety
D
50 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

variety of country. The famed Mitchell grass predominates every where, but several other allied grasses are
Foun tee parte with it. This is most aticeable near the belts of timbered country. eae el
of gidyea and a variety of eucalyptus (gum) are met with on these plains. Along the eS : errs
country previously mentioned fine straight timber (gum) is frequently found, cata stockyards
building purposes. The creeks and rivers contain a stunted growth of river gums (coolibah).

During my connection with the development of this country near the Queensland border, I a
that abundance of water can be obtained at a depth of about 200 feet below the surface. At this depth,
apparently, there is a strong and unlimited underground flow of water northward, on which exhaustive
pumping could make no diminishing impression.

I was employed in surveying and sketching or mapping this country for nearly 18 months, during me
summers and a wet season, and found the climate equal to that of the temperate (zones) regions further south.
The temperature ranges from 26° F. in June to 120° in January. During this latter period, however, the
prevailing south-east breezes neutralise the general effect of such a high temperature.

Fever is an unknown ailment here ; no single instance then and since has come to my knowledge. The
elevation of this country above sea-level on the western parts is about 800 feet, and on the eastern portions
near the Queensland border, latitude 22°, about 450 feet. This, I think, may account for the equable climate.

In my opinion—which I expressed then against the general conviction, and which has since been verified
by actual proof—this country is eminently suitable for sheep that have thrived in higher latitudes imme-
diately to the westward, and on greatly inferior country, without showing any deterioration either in the wool
or carcase after a number of years.

The average rainfall is about 20 inches, though this has been greatly exceeded of late years.

I have, etc.,
Cuas. Winyecrs, Licensed Surveyor and Explorer.

The Hon. the Minister controlling the Northern Territory.

[Letrer to THE Epiror.]

Eagle Chambers, Pirie Street, Adelaide, August 23, 1902.

Dear Sir—My experience of the Northern Territory extends over 35 years. I have been astounded at
the frequent mention of desert country. My experience is that some of the finest pastoral country in the
world is found in Central Australia. Water, principally artesian, is more abundant than supposed. Gold is
scattered all through this vast area, one quartz range showing gold for fully 36 miles. The Orabarra Reef, in
the Jervois and Tarlton Ranges, has never been visited by any white man but myself. Professor Tate and
Experts Watt and Achimiovitch (members of the Horn Expedition, of which I was commander) all stated
that the best indications of diamonds exist to the west of Charlotte Waters. Coal of good quality is found in
the MacDonnell and more northern areas. It speaks for itself that more than a fourth of the Territory is
settled with stations, mines, etc. I have no hesitation in declaring that it will be the finest and most
remunerative country in Australia. The extent of auriferous country is simply unknown, and a railway would
increase all these resources a hundred-fold. My past remarks on the fertility of the Northern Territory
should be a guarantee that I am notin error. For further details, I refer to ‘“‘ Physical Features of Central
Australia” (June, 28, 1886).

Cuas Wiynecgs, F.R.G.S., F.R.AS., ete.

DAVID LINDSAY, F.R.G.S.

Report on “THe TAaBLELAND.”
N.T., 31/98.] 131, Royal Exchange, Adelaide, July 25, 1898.

Sir—I have the honor to report as follows upon certain country in the Northern Territory of South
Australia, known as The Tableland, laying between latitudes 17° and 21°, and between the Overland Tele-
graph line and the Queensland Border :—

You are aware that I spent about five months in this country surveying and exploring.

_ _ Climate.—The climate is healthy and enjoyable. During the winter monthe—April to September
inclusive—the days are mostly warm and dry, the nights cold and clear, the thermometer often falling to 32° F.
The summer temperature reaches at times to about 110° in the shade.

Rainfall.—The average rainfall is about 20 inches per annum, mostly falling during the summer months.

Timber.—On the rivers and low ground the hardwood coolibah flourishes, and scattered here and there
are clumps of gidyea, gutta percha, acacias, Landsborough pine, and whitewood, giving good shade for stock.
There are also extensive belts of forests of hard durable timber—eucalypti—providing abundance of wood for
fencing and all station purposes.

Physical
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY, 5]

Physical Features.—The whole of this extensive Tableland {s about 1,000 feet above sea level, and may
be described as “ downs” —that is an undulating country—with extensive plains, some of which are liable to
inundation. The more eastern portion is the highest—a low range some 100 feet to 150 feet high, being the
most conspicuous feature. The water channels are the Lorne, the Rankine, the James Buchanan, and Play-
ford rivers; the Bluebush, Brunette, and the Creswell creeks, and numerous others of less importance.
The comparative evenness of the surface causes the flow of water to be very slow. These rivers and creeks
empty into large depressions, forming extensive lagoons and lakes, some of which may be classed as nearly
permanent.

Rocks.—The principal rock is limestone, with sandstone and quartzite, the range before referred to being
formed of the two latter rocks.

Water.—The eastern portion of this vast Tableland is fairly well watered by the Lorne, Rankine, James
Buchanan, and Playford rivers, by the Bluebush, Brunette, and Creswell creeks, and by numerous other
watercourses and channels. Several valuable springs have been discovered north of the Playford in the low
range above mentioned. In all these water channels are many waterholes, some of them extending miles in
length, besides billabongs and lagoons.

The contour of the country renders the conservation of water an easy matter. Inexpensive embank-
ments thrown across these channels at suitable spots would dam the water back for miles, conserving many
millions of gallons. The soil being somewhat porous a considerable loss of water would result by soakage
until the sheep or other stock had puddled the sides and bottoms, but I have no doubt, taking into
consideration the fact that there is a great deal of clay in the soil, that in two or three years these reservoirs
would hold water satisfactorily. This opinion is formed from observing that many of the natural holes hold
the water until consumed by stock and evaporation.

Large supplies of good fresh water have been obtained at varying depths up to 200 feet, and no doubt
exists that water can be obtained anywhere by sinking. It is just possible that artesian water may be found.
A trial bore on the Alexandria station, put down to a depth of 1,664 feet, failed to strike artesian water,
although at 238 feet water was met with, which rose 19 feet and yielded 24,000 gallons per day, the utmost
capacity of the pump, without diminishing the flow. By means of windmills the water from wells can be
very cheaply raised and pumped into tanks. During the dry season—the winter—strong winds blow
regularly, ensuring the satisfactory working of these mills. Owing tothe absorption of the immense bodies of
water which find their way on the western portion of this tract of country, and the rock formation of the
ranges near the telegraph line, artesian water should be found over a considerable area, but here the grasses
are not nearly so good as on the eastern portion of the Tableland. Throughout the whole of this area all
the surface water is fresh. :

Soil.—For the most part the soil is of a rich black or red loam mixed with clay. On the bluebush flats
and parts liable to inundation the soil is loose and very porous, and in the dry season full of cracks, through
which immense quantities of water flow to the subterranean reservoirs and channels. This is specially
noticeable on the western half of the Tableland.

Grasses.—The whole of this vast tract of country may be described asa luxuriantly-grassed country. Much
of it, especially the country on the Herbert, James, Buchanan, Rankine, Playford, and Brunette creeks, and the
head of the Creswell Creek, can scarcely be surpassed, so far as my experience goes, in Australia. It is
equal to some of the finest country on the Cooper, in Queensland. The grasses are chiefly the Mitchell,
which is too well known and appreciated to need description. Scarcely second in importance is the red
grass, which is a hardy leafy variety, standing the dry weather well; at certain times of the year the stock
prefer it to the Mitchell grass. There is also a species of barley grass — a vigorous-growing variety with a
corn-like seed. The much-favored Flinders grass was noticed occasionally.

Edible Bushes.—The most plentiful is the bluebush, growing to about three feet high, having a broad
succulent leaf, in appearance somewhat like the “buck saltbush.” It is very nutritious and fattening; all
stock are very fond of it. Roley-poley, munyeroo, acacias, whitewood, Landsborough pines, gidyea, and
currant bushes make up an excellent list of good fodder plants. A little saltbush was seen at rare intervals.

I have no hesitation in expressing my opinion that thie country is eminently adapted to wool-growing,
and sheep will do well, there being sufficient shade trees scattered over the country, The grasses are short,
and free from injurious seeds.

Locality.—This Tableland extends to within 80 miles{of Port Macarthur, the headwaters of the Rankine
being distant about 200 miles direct, though nearly 300 miles by the present mail track. Lt also extends
to the Queensland Border, and is distant about 120 miles from Burketown, to which there isa good dray road.

To briefly summarise, I would say that this is a most excellent pastoral country, well clothed with the
best of Australian grasses ; fairly well watered naturally; underground supplies of water easily obtainable ;
reservoirs easily and cheaply constructed; a good healthy climate; a good rainfall; a magnificent country

for sheep as well as for cattle and horses.
I have, etc.,

* 66/98. __ Davin Linpsay.

ExpLoRATIONS IN ARNHEIM LanD.

Extracts from paper by David Lindsay of his explorations in Arnheim Land in 1883, read before the
Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (South Australian Branch) on June 29, 1887 * :—

Armbeim Land is the northern portion of the Northern Territory. A sandstone tableland, rising to a
height of at least 1,200 feet above sea level, lies north and south right across the centre of Arnheim Land
From

* Proceedings Royal Geographical Society (South Australia), Vol. 2, 1890.
p2
52 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

From this tableland flow out rivers to the north, south, east, and west—the South and East Alligators ; the
Mary River, which was discovered and travelled down by Stuart ; the Katherine, the sources of es mere
discovered by one of Australia’s earliest and bravest explorers, Dr. Leichhardt in 1845 ; the Waterhouse a
Chambers, which, joining the Roper, help to make that ever-flowing river one of the finest in Australia. :
may be considered the southern boundary of Arnheim Land. Permanent springs In a saan an

basaltic country send forth a large volume of water, which winds its tortuous way through a most magni cent
agricultural and pastoral country, composed of downs and plains densely clothed with most luxuriant grasses
and herbs. It is navigable for 90 miles, where a 500-ton vessel can lie in fresh water and discharge its cargo
direct on to the banks. The Cadell and Liverpool Rivers flow into the north coast.

The tableland, which is but a narrow belt, has springs right on top of it, and numerous springs give
rise to many ever-flowing creeks which wind their crystal way through deep ravines and gorges on to the
valleys and plains lying from 200 feet to 500 feet beneath; when alternately flowing over pebbly beds and
deep still ponds covered with beautiful flowering nymphea or lilies, they form the rivers which flow through
well-grassed country to the sea.

We, coming from the eastward, struck the Liverpool River about 20 miles in a direct line from the
coast, where the country was very suitable for agriculture. We proceeded to follow up the broad white sandy
bed, in which was a stream of water not always showing on the surface, through a country over which hills
and huge piles of sandstone were scattered, crossing at times good valleys with granite and diorite hills.

The Wilton is a fine river, containing very large waterholes, easy of access for stock. Broken sandstone
with spinifex on top; good valleys, well grassed ; fine open plains, well grassed—on the whole, a very good
strip of country. At the head of the Wilton is a large tract of undulating country, lightly timbered and
well grassed, some 2,000 square miles in extent, surrounded by a fine range, extending from about 50 miles
on the west right around north, to 40 miles on the east ; hilly between the range to the eastward.

The Walker runs through, on the whole, very good country; a good deal cf it is poor, but some really
splendid. The river itself is by far the best I have seen in the Territory for stock watering. The country is
mountainous, and the river scenery most picturesque and beautiful.

We crossed a dividing range, and immediately struck water going north. We followed this, and it
gradually enlarged into a fine river running through fair country, with patches of really good land, until we got
through all the ranges on to the level country, which is really magnificent, either for grazing or agriculture.
Sugar land I imagine to be unsurpassed in the Northern Territory. These magnificent plains extend
40 miles to the sea-coast at Castlereagh Bay. The river is a fine stream, and unless bars exist on these plains,
which I think very unlikely, will be navigable for 40 miles right through all this magnificent country.

The Liverpool River descends through this country in a series of waterfalls. One was 50 feet in height,
while at another point we stood upon an overhanging ledge of rock, with the water, deep and dark, 200 feet
beneath us, rushing between two perpendicular walls 200 feet apart, and sweeping round a terribly broken
cliff whose interstices were filled with beautiful green tropical vegetation ; while up the stream we could see
seven distinct waterfalls from five feet to 50 feet in height.

The eastern division of Arnheim Land has two or three main ranges, whose peaks reach an altitude of
about 1,500 feet above sea level, with many hills and small ranges, making it a mountainous country, in
which are found many extensive valleys clothed with all our best grasses and well timbered. The coast is
low, and in many parts covered by a dense low scrub extending back 10 miles or more, whilst in many places,
as at the bottom of Blue Mud Bay, extensive and magnificently-grassed plains run down to the mangroves
bordering the coast, and are backed by an exceedingly well-grassed, open forest country.

Limestone, basalt, sandstone quartz, ironstone conglomerate, and quartzite prepouderate. Many important
creeks and rivers were found, the principal being the Walker, which, though navigable but a few miles, is a
running stream for 80 miles in its course through very good country. The Goyder, down which I travelled for
about 80 miles, isa magnificent stream, running so rapidly that at one place the miniature waves, caused by the
rocky bottom, are breaking backwards into foam. It is navigable for 20 or 30 miles, and flows through a
magnificent country, plains of alluvial soil stretching away back to the jungle-capped freestone ranges, and
covered by a dense growth of grasses; springs and beautiful lagoons, swarming with wildfowl and full of
fish, fringed with the most luxuriant tropical vegetation to be seen in the Northern Territory. Jungles of
noble Leichhardt pines and beautiful fan palms, from 20 feet to 40 feet high, two feet to three feet
in diameter, with leaves seven feet across. This river is destined at some future date to carry a large
agricultural population, and will be the most important outlet for Eastern Arnheim Land.

And now J might be permitted to, in a few sentences, take a glance right through the Northern Territory.

Our southern boundary is the 26th parallel of south latitude, where the average annual rainfall is
64 inches, and between here and latitude 21° 30’, a distance of 300 miles, where the rainfall has increased to
154 inches, there is a great deal of waste, sandy, desert country, into which the backbone of Australia—the
MacD.nnell Ranges, reaching an altitude of, according to Mr, Winnecke, over 5,000 feet—has pushed its
good pastoral country. Numerous permanent springs and underground rivers will enable this centre of
Australia to support large herds of cattle and horses ; and when the Transcontinental Railway—which I hope
to see pushed across to Port Darwin—reaches this far, vast flocks of sheep will prove this to be a ver waltable
diatrict, The climate is almost perfect. Proceeding northwards, the rainfall increases by about ee inches
for every 100 miles, until we touch the coast range in about latitude 16°, where the rainfall is 31 inches—
pre-eminently a pastoral country, but also in many parts suitable for agriculture, with a climate sufficient]
cold to successfully produce wool. I therefore hope and expect to see the time when the sheep of the
Northern Territory, instead of being counted by tens of thousands, will be counted by millions.

the coast the rainfall rapidly increases to considerably over 60 inches. AS we: near

Our
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 53

 

., Our coast country, with its numerous splendid rivers flowing through immense plains of rich alluvial
soil, point to the inevitable conclusion that tropical agriculture will at no distant date be a most important
element 1n our national prosperity ; while its metalliferous fields, said by a competent authority to be of such
exceptional richness, together with the new ones which will be found to exist in Arnheim Land in the
eastern coastal ranges and in the central ranges of the continent—gold, silver, copper, and tin have already
been discovered in the MacDonnell Ranges—-must prove remunerative fields for the investment of capital.

Thus we have a country capable of supporting hundreds of thousands of cattle and horses and millions
of sheep ; extensive agricultural areas which will produce sugar, rice, coffee, cotton, and nearly all other
tropical and sub-tropical products necessary for our use; and the wonderful mineral wealth of gold, silver,
tin, and copper, all combined, will make the somewhat despised Northern Territory of vast importance, and
place it in the front rank of the Australian States.

EXPLORATIONS IN THE NorTHERN TERRITORY IN 1885-6.

Extract from Paper read before the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (South Australian Branch)
by David Lindsay, of his Explorations in the Northern Territory in 1885-6 * :—

Before crossing the 26th parallel into the Northern Territory, I spent some weeks in tracing the course
of the Finke river to its debouchement.

Following down the Finke from a waterhole named Muckarinna, we traversed a well-grassed valley
several miles wide, which is subject to inundation. This is clearly shown by the dense growth of box, gum,
and other trees, and also herbs and fodder bushes growing to a height of 5 to 10 feet.

Here and there a solitary boxtree was undoubted evidence that the water did pass through these
hollows, when it emerges in two places, distant one from the other about six miles, on to a very good
well-grassed plain.

Here Spring Creek, which drains the high lands surrounding Dalhousie Springs, 30 miles distant,
contributes its waters, which, again entering the sandhills, splits up into many boxtree watercourses, to again,
in about 25 miles, after forming some fine waterholes, flood out on to splendid plains, clothed with grasses
saltbush, and other good stock bushes. These plains lead south-easterly, and it soon became evident to us
that the Macumba flood waters came up this far, and, after inundating some 200 square miles, flow on to
Lake Eyre.

We returned to the Finke and followed it up for eight days, through a very good pastoral country.
splendid grasses, herbs, and bushes, and fine timber, water in claypans and native wells. At times the
vegetation was over our heads as we sat upon the camele’ backs. The air was alive with music of many
birds, magpies, parrots of various sorts, pigeons, doves, diamond sparrows, and many others.

Thirty miles of the journey from the Finke to the Lower Todd was over low irregular sandhills, clothed
with spinifex, desert oak, parrakeelya, and low bushes, with an occasional low stony hill; we then entered a
very fine pastoral country, mulga and good grasses, high bold hills and ranges; passing through these we
emerged upon some flooded box country, with a waterless creek crossing our course. Some isolated hills
stood 350 feet above the plain; from the top of one I had an extensive view over broken ranges to the north
and west, and to the east and south sandhills and a few table-topped hills showing faintly on the eastern
horizon some 40 or 50 miles distant.

An accommodating gap through a very precipitous range, whose summit towered by aneroid measurement
700 feet above us, afforded an easy passage into a mulga-covered and well-grassed plain, with a very high
range to the north. All these ranges run east and west ; on the face of one 11 distinct walls of perpendicular
rock rendered the ascent difficult, if not impossible, the height being 1,100 feet.

Journeying onwards we passed through sandstone, quartz, limestone, gneiss, and granite, with some good
rock waterholes. Fine shady gum trees, good bushes of many varieties, grasses, and saltbush showed this to
be a very fair pastoral country. Animal and bird life was very scarce. A few grey kangaroos and euro
hopping up the hills, and an occasional dingo and emu, were all we saw. This country is, by aneroid
measurement, about 3,000 feet above sea level.

After three days’ travelling we found a large gum creek coming from the westward ; it is evidently the
tale River of Mr. Winnecke, and is another of those sandy rivers peculiar to Central Australia. We
followed this creek easterly for eight miles through a very good pastoral country, when it junctioned with a
larger creek coming from the north-west, and which I named the Elder in honor of Sir Thomas Elder,
G.C.M.G.. etc., whose very great interest in exploration has often been shown by the assistance he has given

to various explorers.

Still travelling eastward, we found water in the sand in a few places, and tin in a granite hill, also a bai
of granite completely studded with garnets crossing the creek. Just above this point, when scratching for
water under a rocky cliff, I found a quantity of beautiful gem sand, containing many garnets and some red
stones of great brilliancy, which, after careful examination, I believe to be rubies. Calling the attention of
the members of my party to this discovery, which may prove of great importance to Central Australia, we
passed on, to find a large deposit of these beautiful stones at the entrance to and in a wild and romantic
gorge, which I named Glen Annie. This glen, which is five miles through in a southerly direction, and in
parts only one chain wide, with perpendicular cliffs towering up 300 to 500 feet high, is impassable for
loaded camels. In it there are some permanent waterholes and springs. From the top of a high hill I could

trace

* Proceedings Royal Geographical Society (South Australia), Vol. 2, 1890.
d4 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

 

 

trace with my glasses a dark-green line of gumtrees, marking the course of a creek nearly due east for 30 or
40 miles, having a fine rugged range on its south side, and winding through apparently a very good country.

We had now to faee a terribly rough bit of country. By leading my camel, with great difficulty
I descended to the plain, and going svete some three miles to a bold, black-looking, garnet-studded eae
range 700 feet high, found a gum creek, whieh formed a passable route for the caravan. © Palms etc -
fruit were found in this range. Passing on, we found a very fine pastoral country. Granite hills studde : a
good valley, through which wound many gum creeks, whose green vegetation held out the promise of wat .
at shallow depths. Then entering a rough but interesting country, bold, broken, granite ranges, _
numerous peaks and fantastic-shaped tops, good grasses and bushes in abundance. Some of the hills are cla
with palms, some with pines and gumtrees, whilst others are but a mass of rock destitute of any vegetation.
Quartz was met with, and as we neared the northern and eastern extremity of the range the hills became very
rough, composed of gneiss, quartzite, and sandstone.

Going east for 84 miles along a great sandy river, the Marshall, to a amall waterhole, over for ae
part a very good pastoral country, which stretched away for a considerable distance north and south. ae
parts the country was most beautiful, having shady trees scattered about and producing splendid grasses. e
sandy country, clothed with mallee and poor scrub, came in occasionally.

Every mile as we travelled north-easterly seemed to improve, until surrounding the Tarlton Range, wie.
is composed of low stony hills beautifully grassed, we found a really excellent pastoral country with
the Mitchell and other good grasses. No permanent waters exist, but, some distance to the north, water can
be had in large quantities by sinking only five feet. This water, I believe, is the underground channel of o
of those great sandy rivers which drain a great area of the MacDonnell Ranges. From here to Lake Bie
we passed over a splendid pastoral country, parts of it really magnificent, undulating and clothed wit
luxuriant grasses, herbs, creepers, and bushes, acacias, box, and other trees ; limestone | and a coarse yellow
sandstone, with a few small waterholes, but many places eminently adapted for conserving water. Leaving a
native well at which a number of natives were camped, we paseed through low hills clothed with mulga and
gidyea, the broken flint-strewn surface causing considerable inconvenience and suffering to our camels. We
then entered upon the extensive Mitchell-grass plains and downs which, relieved by an occasional clump of
gidyea, stretched away as far as the eye could see, and continuing with us until a broken crystalline limestone
country bordering the valley of the Herbert was crossed, and we found ourselves on that river about nine
miles from Lake Nash Station, having safely accomplished our explorations.

Speaking generally there are no great forests, but its hundreds of creeks have very fine gum trees, and
many varieties of eucalypti and pines are scattered over the country.

Only in the ranges do we find permanent surface supplies of water, but much of the country having a
very fair rainfall can be made available by conserving water in dams and reservoirs. And no doubt large
underground supplies exist which will be tapped by wells and the boring rod or diamond drill.

Its grasses are good, the chief being barley, silver, kangaroo, and Mitchell. I found tin, silver, and cop:
per. Gold will certainly be also found. The whole of the country passed over from the Finke is capable of
carrying stock.

The country between Lake Nash and Powell Creek, on which we spent six months, is an elevated
tableland, bordered on the south by a sandy country and on the north reaching up to the coast range, on
which cattle and sheep stations are being formed. It is watered by many creeks and rivers, and embraces an
area of about 25,000 square miles of magnificent downs and plains well and densely clothed with Mitchell,
Flinders (red), and other well known grasses, besides bluebush and many other good stock bushes, and it has
an average annual rainfall of about 18 to 20 inches. I am inclined to the belief that this is destined to become
ere many years have elapsed one of the finest wool-producing districts in Australia.

The conserving of water by dams and reservoirs from the nature of the soil and the contour of the
country will be easy and comparatively inexpensive. Good water will also be obtained by sinking over the
whole tableland. Timber is rather scarce, though sufficient for all station purposes, being limited to the
watercourses and patches of forest country, which by some explorers have very erroneously been styled desert
country.

 

Lerrer To THE Epitor or tHe Soutn Austrauran “ Recister,” June 25, 1902.

Sir—Is the Northern Territory worth retaining? Some of our politicians, judging by the haste they
made in offering to transfer it to the Commonwealth, evidently consider it is not. By your kind permission,
I will briefly give some facts which I trust will assist the people of South Australia to decide this momentous
question, and if the verdict be ‘ Yes,” I hope one and all will use their best endeavours to secure for this
State the advantages to be gained by speedily connecting Oodnadatta with Pine Creek. Most of your
readers will know that I write from a personal knowledge gained by many years of residence in and extensive
travels through the country in question. Oodnadatta to Charlotte Waters is in the driest belt in Australia,
the average rainfall being about six inehes; yet much of it will stand light stocking, and as it is within the
artesian water area the precious fluid can be obtained by boring. Including the wonderful nest of springs
known as Dalhousie, it should carry (say) 30,000 cattle besides being an ideal country for the Angora goat.
Proceeding northwards the rainfall gradually increases, and we find belts of fair to good pastoral country,
with some natural waters—and water can be had by sinking—whilst there are many places suitable for
conserving water. This should depasture at least 15,000 cattle. The MacDonnell Ranges, extending east and
west of the proposed railway, present a large area of excellent pastoral country, good for sheep or cattle; and
magnificent for horses, perhaps unequalled for breeding a hardy type of horse suitable for military purposes.
The climate is beautiful. » This tract of country should carry (say) 150,000 head of great cattle. The mineral

belt
 

THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY. 55

belt —the development of which awaits the advent of the railway—is, I feel sure, an extensive one of great
promise _The district known as Arltunga is already proved to contain payable gold mines; but how can this
field be exploited when for over 400 miles the supplies and machinery have to be carried on camels or wagons 1
Still on northwards, the rainfall increasing at every stage, we pass through pastoral country, capable of
carrying (say) 30,000 cattle, to Tennant Creek, which is on the edge of another belt of auriferous country,
in which prospectors have found quartz reef carrying gold in sufficient quantities to be payable with rail com-
munication. Just east of Powell Creek we find the edge of a magnificent pastoral country stretching away
to the Queensland border, having many natural waters, and promising to have abundant eupplies underground.
This belt of country should carry say 900,000 great cattle. Then away to the westward, right over to the
border of Western Australia, is a large tract of magnificent pasture land fit for sheep or cattle, with, I
believe, another belt of auriferous country. This extensive region, which would be served by the railway,
is capable of carrying (say) 300,000 great cattle. Newcastle Waters is on the edge of another large area of
good pastoral country. At this station at present there are 7,000 fat cattle, but no means of getting them to
any market. The whole of the country to the coast would carry stock (say) 200,000 cattle. From the break
of the tableland to the coast, a strip of country containing about 100,000 square miles, is not only capable of
carrying some stock, but is rich in all the minerals, and the soil and climate are admirably adapted for the
growth of all products indigenous to those latitudes.

Briefly the railway would connect Adelaide with two promising mineral fields in the central regions, and
country capable of carrying over 1,600,000 cattle and horses during the driest seasons, also the agricultural
areas of the coast, besides making Port Darwin—one of the finest harbors in the world—the Brindisi of
Australia, the shortest, cheapest, and quickest route to China, India, Asia, Europe, and England. Without
the railway the whole of that country must remain for ever undeveloped and practically unoccupied. With
the railway Adelaide would be independent of Queensland for its meat supplies.

I am, Sir, etc.,
’ -Davip Linpgar.

W. H. TIETKENS, F.R.G.S.

: Extracts from “ Journal of Central Australian Exploring Expedition, 1889, under command of W. H.
ietkins ” * :—

Returned to Bond Springs, which is 12 miles north of Alice Springs. I felt much disappointed that a
supply of seeds and dates promised by the Conservator of Forests had not arrived. A blunder appears to
have been made by the Railway Department in misdirecting the parcel. The opportunity now afforded for
planting date palms in Central Australia is passed, The experiment would have been both valuable and
interesting, as I was anxious to have tested certain localities where I knew good soil and permanent water
existed. Date palms in fruit at permanent watering-places would prove an inestimable blessing to the
famished and wearied traveller in tropical Australia, and nothing would have given me greater satisfaction
than to have been favored with the pioneer work of so philanthropic an undertaking.

I had decided to follow the north slopes of the MacDonnell Range westerly to Glen Helen Station.
Travelled three miles west to low, well-grassed, stony hills; then a course west for three miles, which took
me to the telegraph line. From here I followed the foot of the main MacDonnell Range for eight miles, on
a bearing of S. 76° W., when the Painta Spring was reached at dusk. Travelled 17 miles through splendidly-
grassed country, the timber consisting chiefly of bloodwood, mulga, and various leguminosw of stunted but
healthy growth.

March 15, Painta Spring.—Found the Painta Spring to be a well about 12 feet deep, and blasted out of
the solid rock at the foot of the ranges, which are of no great elevation at this point. The water, which is
of the most excellent description, is raised by means of a windlass and bucket The overhanging rocks are
shaded by beautiful fig trees, which unfortunately were not in fruit. Near the well a handsome specimen of
the Zamia palm is growing.

March 23.—Cleared away from the Painta Spring at 10.45 taking a N. 35° W. course along the foot of
the range. The travelling is simply perfect, level as a bowling-green, the weather delightfully cool. Travelled
about 17 miles over level ground on the Burt Plain. Timber, principally bloodwood and mulga, and also
noticed a few native orange trees (Capparis).

March 24.—Started away at 8.45, upon a bearing of N. 86° W. This course kept us close to the foot
of the range. Travelled 22 miles over plains of a red sandy light soil, with good loamy soil in places, on
which I noticed several varieties of acacia and an occasional orange tree.

March 25, Burt Plain; Barometer, 27.835 inches; thermometer, 66° at sunrise.—At this point the
highest peak of a detached range bears N. 22° W., distant about two miles, so that the travelling to-day will
be in a valley between the main MacDonnell Ranges, which are here about 1,200 feet above the level of the
plain. Started from the camp at 8.45, and at three miles came across a crabhole full of water from yesterday’s
rain, at which I gave all the camels an opportunity to drink, which very few availed themselves of. The
grass and herbage here were most luxuriant.

March 26.—Thermometer 70° at 6 a.m.; cloudy but cool all night. Our camp is very prettily situated at
the entrance of a little glade, and the range being less abrupt, grassy, and more sloping, gave it quite a

picturesque appearance.
April

 

 

* Published 1891,
ab THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

 

April 4, Glen Helen.—Started from the camp to make the ascent of Mount Sonder. Travelled easterly
down the creek for three miles, and entered upon low stony hills covered with mulga scrub. As we neared
the rang: these became very dense, until we arrived at its base, where there was a large gum creek that
appeared to take its rise at the western end of Mount Sonder, which is called the Redbank Creek—a most
beautiful and picturesque spot. The creek is one of the sources of the Finke, and is fringed on both banks
with large and splendidly grown gums. It winds round the base of Mount Sonder, and flows southerly for
four miles, when it joins the Davenport Creek.

April 8, Glen Helen.—Thermometer, 62°. Not altogether satisfied with my short visit to Mount Sonder,
I decided to visit the spot again and to spend a few days there prospecting. Started soon after midday, and
travelled down the Davenport Creek for four or five miles, almost to its junction with the Redbank. Then
striking a little northerly across some bald stony hills, we reached the foot of Mount Sonder, where we camped
amidst the most charming and romantic mountain scenery. I went to the mine or silver workings. I found they
had followed the underlay of a reef of clay slate for 18 feet, going through an ironstone crust on the surface,
under which were various colored clays, all charged with iron. A gypsous earth seems also to have been met
with. Some of the small ironstone knolls in this neighhorhood have quite a purple appearance. Upon close

 

Puate 17—Reppank GorGcE

inspection they are found to be a decomposed shale stained on the surface with iron. Others present quite a
charred and blacked look, having all the appearance of manganese, for which I at first took it. In describing
the rock formation of this part of the MacJ)onnell Range I should say that the main ranges are composed of
sandstone and quarizite. The lower hills at their foot, and towards the alluvial flats through which the
creeks flow, are composed of clay slates and shale, with occasional hills of ironstone.

April 11.—Thermometer 55°. I went up the creek this morning with the camera, and took some
photographs of this wild, romantic spot. A walk of a little over a mile took us nearly to the head of Redbank
Gorge. (See Plate 17.) Beautifully clear water was running over the pebbly bed of the creek. As we
approached the gorge the hills upon each side formed into perpendicular cliff-, and the creek channel became
a chaotic mass of boulders, around and under which the water found its way. A little farther, and the cliffs
upon each side met, and all further progress was stopped by a large, deep pool of water, with perpendicular
cliffs several hundred feet high upon either side. There is a strange fissure in the wall, if I may so describe
the mighty cleft in the range. It is the opposite side of the pool, and, of course, quite unapproachable, and
it is down this cleft that the water comes from its unknown source, fills the pool, which, always overflowing,
runs down the creek for a mile or more, There is a strange, wild beauty about this place which tempts one
to remain and admire its lovely wonders: Several cranes were hovering about, and these had brought to the
bank a fish from the water, and were discussing it when disturbed by our approach. It was much larger
than any I have seen at these inland waters, and must have been nearly two pounds in weight.

April
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 57

 

April 17.—Started away at 10 am. on a bearing N. 75° W. for four miles. This took ue down the
Arumbara Creek, which at this point took a turn to the northward towards a range that is called Haast Bluff,
The outline of this range is most striking, being a series of irregular peaks. ;

April 21, Carmichael Creek.—Thermometer 51°. Turned S. 70° E. for 14. miles, and again emerged
upon the alluvial flats through which the creek flows. Here we found abundance of feed for the camels near
the gum creek, upon which we camped. These mulga flats are intersected by small gum creeks, and are park-

pase very attractive to the eye, in a rainy season with water everywhere and abundance of rich green
erbage.

May 11.—Thermometer 66°. Travelled upon the same bearing as yesterday, viz., S. 34° W., for two
miles, when I decided to turn towards the hills where I had been overtaken by the rain. Here { knew there
would be water, and hoped that a day’s rest would recruit the camels. Turned S. 35° W., towards a creek
that was running when I was there last week. Reached this in five miles; camped at 1 pm. It has
been quite a summer’s day, the thermometer 89° in the shade. These hills have been named Watson Range.
Barometer, 27°631 inches ; thermometer, 84° at 3 p.m.

May 12.—I now turned S. 64° W., and in five miles reached the southern slope of the range. I now
directed my course towards a singular-looking hill seen from the top of the Watson Range, and after
travelling for eight miles upon this bearing S. 83° W., I camped for the night, the last three miles of the
day’s travelling being over well-grassed open country, with occasional clumps of mulga.

May 13.—Travelled over open spinifex sandhills for ten miles, then turned northerly for half a mile
when we came to a gum creek running south-west , I was in hopes of obtaining sufficient to fill my kegs, but
was very agreeably surprised to find a stream of beautifully clear water coming from a glen in the hills. I
have never seen such magnificent bean trees as those growing on the banks of this creek, besides gum trees of
majestic proportions luxuriating in the richest brown loam imaginable. There were grasses, shrubs, and
undergrowth of the most vigorous growth, low pine clad sandstone hills on either side, completing a landscape
only too seldom met with in Central Australia.

May 14, Gill Creek.—S. latitude 23° 49’ 25” E. longitude 130° 33’, barometer 28-010, thermometer 50%.
Went up the glen to explore its beauties and wonders, walked for three miles up the creek, for the last two
miles we had walls of sandstone rock about 80 or 100 feet high on either side, the creek channel being about
a chain wide, running water the whole way. The creek in many places formed into pools or rock ponds;
these were two and three chains in length and 10 and 12 feet deep, and so sbaded hy rocks on every side
that they cannot be looked upon as otherwise than permanent for caravan purposes, I have called this Gill
Creek, and the range from whence it takes its rise, the Cleland Hills.

May 20, native well at Sandstone Rocks.—S. latitude 23° 52’ 36”, barometer 28-320 inches, thermometer
56°, cold south-east wind. The well filled up to 16 buckets during the night; these we baled out into the
tarpaulin, and more slowly drained in.

May 22.—We entered into a broad open valley, in which we found a strong stream of water running to
the southward ; there was good feed for the camels, and while they were unloaded I rode to the head of the
valley to reconnoitre. In the middle of this valley there is a singular mass of rock, around the base of which
is now running a stream of beautiful water; to the north-west I obtained a good view of the high range that
was first sighted at the sandstune rocks and native well; from here it seems to be the eastern end of a very
high range that extends to the westward. Iam very sanguine of valuable and important discoveries being
made there, and my hopes are raised by visions of better grassed and more hospitable country than that
I have just passed over.

June 8, shore of Lake MacDonald.— Barometer 28:500 inches, latitude 23° 35’ 52”: In six miles we
reached the south shore of the lake, here there was abundance of camel feed, and after a short search I found
a claypan which would meet all our requirements for one day The lake I estimate to be about 15 or 18
mileg east and west, and about 12 miles from north to gouih ; of course this does not include the miles of arms
thrown out from its western side. The water in the lake is apparenily very shallow, no streams whatever
run into it. Having now satisfied myself of the insularity of this leke, I name it Lake MacDonald.

June 9.—Taking up an easterly course we travelled for four miles on its south shore, the lake here being
but 1} mile in width. Here it abruptly ended, and we were face to face with the high spinifex sandhills
and forests of well grown desert oaks. I had now travelled the three sides of the lake, the south side having
no samphire swamps or marsh land on its boundary, whilst the eastern side appears to be bounded by

spinifex sandhills.

June 15.—Latitude 24° 33’ 21”, variation 0° 26’, barometer 28:400 inches, thermometer, 52°, Heavy rain
commenced at 8 p.m. last night, and continued with great violence till 3 a.m. this morning, violent squalls of
wind and rain being followed at intervals by steady soaking rain. An idea of this rainfall may be gathered
from the fact that a 2-lb. meat tin was quite two-thirds full this morning, and a tin dish more than half full.
At 9.15 am. we started away on a bearing of 90° In a quarter of a mile reached some old native
encampments, where there was a small stream of water running for a few yards into the sands. These, of
course, was the result of last night’s rainfall. I decided to stay, for the camels required rest and all our
belongings wanted drying. There is fairly good feed here for camels, and some rough grass for horses.

June 28.—S. latitude 24° 39’ 16”, barometer 28-510 inches, thermometer 46°. The camels all drank well
last night, and as there was abundance of feed for them they looked very well when brought up for duty. I
intend to follow down the south shore of the lake to-day, so followed my tracks for three miles to the point
where we first struck the lake, the camels marched grandly along upon the clear flat clean ground upon the

shore of the lake.
June
ys Gerd

58 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL. RAILWAY

June 30.—Started away at 8.20 a.m. on a bearing of 8. 17° E., Mount Olga being now in ap eet
Seen for the first time from any point this mountain must always strike the traveller as being eal
and wonderful object, and our wonder and amazement increases as it is eee ; ; ee
over spinifex sandhills for 11 miles, and then reached stony ground with mulya ae oe patches o
grass, Continued on until 4.30 p.m., the last few miles being over mulga flats splendidly grassed.

July 1, Mount Olga.—Its height is already determined (1,500 feet). Started, and at 14 a at oe
foot of this stupendous mass of bare rock ; proceeding round its west extremity I passed a beautifully oe
flat, timbered with bloodwood and mulga. There was a stream of clear water running gout su S
for nearly a mile from the range; passed this, and in another mile reached Mr. Giles’s ome Te
the abrupt wall of the mountain. Here was another beautiful stream of water, but as it was not so ae :
a camping ground as the firat stream we crossed, I returned, and the camels were soon let go upon the mos

luxuriant pasture.

July 9.—Started, Ayers Rock being five or six miles away, travelled over sandy ee ee
scrub, passing occasional spinifex sandhills, and soon reached the grass flats at the foot of the rock. =
round the south base of this mountain of unbroken, unfractured stone. After dinner we went out to explore
and admire this wonder in solid granite. Many and varied are the wonderful shapes it assumes. 2 one
place the graceful curves and lines upon this vast expanse of rock resemble an enormous curtain turne ta
stone. In one or two places large caves are to be found near the foot, and these in a measure spoil ca er-
wise regular and graceful lines chiselled by nature upon its face. The rock formation is a coarse-graine ere
granite, the surface all over being a reddish color from exposure to the elements, smooth as glass and almost
polished.

July 14.—A bitterly cold night, had to turn out several times to make up the fire, bedding all frozen hard.
Started at 8.30, Mount Connor being in full view. Travelled over grass flits covered with dense mulga
scrub, between these were spinifex sandhills; at noon reached a low sandstone ridge, covered with dense
mulya, and is marked by a low abrupt cliff that stops the caravan approaching any nearer to Mount Connor.
Followed up this low ridge in a northerly direction, and in five miles, Billy, who was walking on ahead, cried
out “ Water!” I think I never saw water in a more unlikely looking place. it was in a native well, at the
foot of this cliff of fractured and riven sandstone. I decided to take advantage of this discovery, so had the
camels turned out while I ascended the little ridge to view the surroundings. I find that this little spring
is about half a mile from the most easterly end of this low ridge, and about 14 mile north of Mount Connor.
I notice an attractive range about 30 miles distant, its outline and general appearance being very similar to
Gill Range. Its western extremity bears N. 8° E.; its eastern end N, 22° E. A salt luke formation oe
N. 15° E. This may possibly be the eastern extremity of Lake Amadeus; ano‘her salt chaunel bears 3°. I
intended to travel easterly from here towards the Goyder Springs, bu: this range, with a lake apparently
close to it, has altered my plans. I shall visit these features, for neither are marked on any plans that I have.

July 15.—S. latitude 25° 26’ 55”, 2 a.m., the thermometer went down to 29°.

July 18.—S. latitude, 25° 5’ 40”. A central point of Mount Connor bears 200° 35’ from this camp, but
as it presents only an extensive flat surface I should say that is the bearing of its centre. Started at 8.30
a.m. on a bearing of N. 40° W. towards the western end of the range, thence west for two miles. Directly I
left the range the country improved, and at sundowa I turned the camels out upon a grassy mulga flat where
vag the most luxuriant herbage for them. Travelled 18 miles, being much delayed owing to the difficult
nature of the ground. I have named this the Kernot Range.

July 19.—I noticed splendid cotton-bush growing at this spot, the first seen since leaving the settlements.
I found this ridge to be compused entirely of sandstone lying horizontally , after three miles of very rough
stony hill travelling, was again upon a flat well-grassed country. At 4.30, meeting with an exceptionally
rich patch of herbage and bush for the camels, I turned out, having travelled 24 miles. Mount Connor is
rather indistinctly seen from this camp, bearing 235° 10’. I bave named this Basedow Range.

July 20.—Passed over a few low stony hills, well clothed with grass, saltbush, and bluebush, and in 22
miles reached the foot of the Basedow Range. I find it composed of a white sandstone, the surface of which
nad become of a brown color owing to exposure. It is covered with mulga scrub. From its summit tbe
view to the nerthward appears to be one of saltbush and cotton-bush country, flat, and timbered with mulga.
Tie horizon, however, is not a very distant one, which leads me to suppose that probably a sandhill country
will be met with in that direction. Descending from the hill, I travelled upon a beating of 94°. Passed

over very splendid pasture country until midday, and then turned the camels out. The weather was
delightful and the surroundings most charming.

July 23, Erldunda Station.—S. latitude 25° 12’ 57”. The Basedow Range is easily seen from any of the
sandhills near the Goyder Springs, though they seem never to have been visited. This group of springs lay
south-westerly from here, distant about 25 miles. Erldunda Spring was discovered by Mr. Warburton about
five years ago, and was but a small native well at which one horse could barely find a sufficiency. By the in-
dustry and untiring energy of the proprietors of the station this was soon opened out, and the supply of water at
seven or eight feet was found to be practically unlimited. At midday, everything being in readiness, we
started, taking the track that for some few miles goes towards the Goyder Springs. Travelled over sandy
country for eight or nine miles upon a bearing of S. 66° W., and then the dray-track was lost. We now
turned upon a bearing of S, 66° W., and entered upon an extensive salt and cotton bush plain, where we

camped. The herbage and grass were most luxuriant, the evening air being laden with the delicate perfume
of many wild flowers around.

August 3.—S. latitude 25° 28’ 59”; thermometer, 16°. As will be seen by the thermometer, this was by
far the coldest night that we have experienced. Continuing westerly for three miles, we reached the west
extremity of the salt lake, following this down for half an hour, and then came to a gully, down which, in
time of rain, water would run from the adjacent sandhills into tne lake. Some two or three chains away

from
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 59

 

 

co the lake and up this gully was a small hole surrounded by rushes and shaded by a small acacia bush.
a is was the spring, evidently a very good one; the water is of most excellent quality, and it simply requires

Sepening to water any quantity of stock. From this spring we travelled S. 58° W. for two miles, and
arrived at Koolida Spring. ‘Here are four or five mound springs with tall reeds round them ; they are situated
upon the south-western end of a small salt lagoon. The springs are choked up with black mud and reeds,
but a small stream of beautiful water runs from them into the lake. Continuing upon a course of 8. 30° W.,
we reached the Elinburra Springs in 14 miles, the most southerly spring of the Goyder group, and by far the
best of them all. Like all the rest, it is situated at the edge of a salt lagoon, and three strong streams of
beautiful water run into the lake. The adjacent country is of an undulating character, and to the southward
1s especially well grassed. From a low limestone hill a few hundred yards westerly from the spring I
expe ted to have been able to take a bearing to Mount Oonnor, but was disappointed, no hills being in sight
but the Basedow and Erldunda Ranges.

: August 4.—For five or six miles travelled over really very splendid and well-grassed country. Limestone

Tises occasionally appeared, and these were well clothed with saltbush and bluebush. Mulga scrub and a
poorer class of country then set in; at 11 miles entered into a settled sandy mulga scrub country, with
occasional sandhills,

August 5.—After travelling for six miles through dense though exceedingly well-grassed mulga scrubs,
we emerged into more open country, rich in every variety of pasture. From the top of a low sandstone ridge
that was here met with I obtained a more extensive view of the eastern horizon than I have had for a long
time. North-easterly is a line of hills of considerable height, though apparently of no great extent. Upona
bearing of S. 55° E. I observe some masses of bare red rock, apparently granite, and I decided to visit them
with the hope of finding some feature of value and interest. Travelled over flat, well-clothed pastoral
country, which is now looking its very best. Bright flowers blossom all around ; their varied hues and
delicate tints present a brilliant and ever-varying panorama of splendor. In six miles we were close to the
rocks, and here the growth of grass, crowfoot, and other plants was most luxuriant ; eclipsing all by the
brilliance of their blossom was the vetch, a pea so plentiful in the Musgrave Range, and which here grows in
large patches of an acre or two. In color the flower is of a bright carmine, and forms quite a feature in the
appearance of the landscape.

_ August 6.—Travelled over well-grassed flat mulga country for five miles, then turned §. 65° E,, and
in nine miles upon this bearing struck a small watercourse with a few gumtrees on its banks. I therefor®
called a halt for an hour, so that a search might be made. We heard Billy calling out, and we returned to &
spot only a few yards down the creek where we crossed it, and there was a group of four or five native wells
or springs in the creek. Surrounded as they are by very splendid pastoral country, this position will some
day te of value.

August 7.—S, latitude 35° Passed on the south side of the trig. hill, between it and some isolated rocks
and ridges, a little southerly from it. We now entered upon a tableland country, well clothed with every
variety of herbage. At nine miles from last night’s encampment reached a small sandy channel running to
the southward, in which was a strong water soakage. Billy tells me it is called Imbunyerra.

August 10.—Arrived at Eringa Station, South Australia.

Lake AMADEUS aND ADJACENT CouNTRY.

Mr. W. H. Tietkens, F.R.G.S., read the following paper before the Royal Geographical Society
(S. A. Branch) on “ Lake Amadeus and the Adjacent Country,” on August 30, 1886 :—

Within view of this Lake Amadeus are two of the most remarkable natural features in Australia, I
refer to Mount Olga and Ayers Rock; but it is a subject that baffles any power of description. We havea
good idea of the outline of Ayers Rock in the engraving contained in Volume I., recently issued by this
Society. Mr. Gosse determines the height to be 1,100 feet, and in attempting to realise in our minds the
appearance of so enormous a bowlder (for it may be said to be one unbroken piece of stone), let us imagine a
wall of granite as upright and as smooth as a wall of this room, and seven times higher than the post office
tower. This granite wall, with its several indents or bays, is half a mile long, I dare say, and right at the
foot, or foundations as it were, and in the indents deep pools of beautifully clear cold water will be found,
upon which the sun never shines, the granite walls rising quite perpendicularly on either side for over 1,000
feet. Mount Olga is a few hundred feet higher than Ayers Ruck and covers a much larger area, and, I think,
quite inaccessible. The wall on its southern side is quite as perpendicular as that of this room, aud towards
the top it hangs over, but from the foundations of this monster there issues a stream of beautiful water that is
as permanent as the hill itself. It runs for a few chains over a pavement of coarse puddingstone or con-
glomerate, and is then lost in the sand.

If the barometric observations taken with so much care by our associate, Mr. C. Winnecke, and which
may have determined the levels of Lake Eyre—of which he gave us particulars in the interesting paper that
was recently read at a meeting of this Society, could be produced to Lake Amadeus, much interesting and
valuable information would be gained ; and J would remind you that this lake drains an extent of country
probably as large as that drained by Lake Eyre, and we have seen what valuable work has been effected in
that basin by the diamond drills of our Water Conservation Department. I would like to see a lightly
equipped party fitted out to determine the outline of Lake Amadeus, to follow in detail to their sources any
channels of supply, to secure for us a collection of the rock formation of every separate range, more par-
ticularly those interesting sandstones of Gill Range and the granites of Mount Olga and Ayers Rock, and to
take photographs from every point of view of these wonderful monoliths. Such an expedition would return
to us loaded with much valuable information of a country which must have peculiar interest; and if, as I
imagine, a channel of supply enters the lake at its north-west extremity we may hopefully look for a safe and
easy overland route to the settlements on the north-west coast.

HORN
60 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

 

 

 

HORN SCIENTIFIC EXPLORING EXPEDITION (1894). *

 

Extracts from the Journal of the Horn Expedition, by C. Winnecke, F.R.G.S :—

May 26, Finke River.—Started early, consequent upon my intention to make Henbury Station to-night.
Crossing the Finke immediately after leaving our camp, on a bearing of 327°, across red sand ridges covered
with porcupine, we reached the junction of the Palmer and Finke Rivers at 23 miles. A fair-sized and
rather deep waterhole marks the confluence of these rivers. We continued on a bearing of 343°, over red
sand ridges and river flats, the latter being fairly well grassed. When 15 miles had been completed, and
again at 33 miles, we crossed the Finke River. From this ascent I obtained an extensive view of the valley
of the Finke River, and could trace the tortuous course which this stream here pursues. Low hills are
observable in all directions. Resuming then our journey on a bearing of 318° 20’ across a level and
splendidly-grassed plain, on which a few patches of stone occur at intervals, at sundown, having travelled
8} miles on the last bearing, we camped on the Finke River, near Henbury Station.

May 30, Parke’s Running Water.—S. latitude 24° 18' 21” Continued on last night's bearing for one
mile to a point of the range, across sandy flats splendidly grassed in places and timbered with mallee,
bloodwood, and mulga, to a porcupine hill. The range to the north, about 24 miles distant, continues
westward in an apparently unbroken line. Altered our course to 272° 5’, crossing a few porcupine sandhills
and well-grassed mulga flats. Five distinct varieties of the eucalypti apparently occur somewhat plentifully
in this region. At 24 miles we crossed a large gum creek issuing from the ranges to the northward. I now
directed the main par.y to proceed to Illamurta, which was in sight, and following the Llpilla Creek for two
miles into the ranges, at 14 miles I found a nice little water with abundance of fish—Illamurta Springs—at
which we camped. This spring is situated in a small creek, which is easily found from its proximity to a
huge and imposing pile of rocks, which form a striking feature in the range. The water appears only for a
few chains in the creek, and is of excellent quality.

June 1.—A start was made westward along the south side of the James Range. This remarkable and
extensive range has an unbroken and almost due east and west direction, extending from the Todd River in
longitude 135° E. to the westward, a distance of 250 miles. For 33 miles through open and splendidly-
grassed mulga scrub the expedition continued, then for four miles over sandhills and well-grassed flats to the
Palmer River, a broad sandy stream lined with gum saplings and containing plenty ~' water, which was still
running at the time of our crossing. About I} miles north a large waterhole—Ilarra, some 24 miles long—
occurs in the river. Save a few miles of sand and porcupine near the Palmer, the whole of our journey
to-day has been over splendidly-grassed saltbush country.

June 2, Palmer River.—At 14 miles we crossed the Walker Creek, a gum creek having a sandy channel
equal in size to that of the Palmer; at 24 miles we reached the break in the range, which I found very rough
yet passable for the camels; at 34 miles we altered our course to 258° 20', across splendidly-grassed saltbush
and cotton-bush flats, lightly timbered with gums and acacias; at 1} miles we passed some high sandstone
rocks ; and at five miles arrived at the Petermann Creek, which is about 40 yards wide, with high precipitous
banks. Its gum timber is similar to that on the Palmer, being mostly young saplings. At 54 miles
we crossed a gum creek, Undia, coming from the ranges to the south ; at 74 miles a spur of the Levi Range
approached the Petermann Oreek, and at 8} miles I found a shallow waterhole about 300 yards long and
15 yards wide, at which I decided to camp. The country passed over to-day is mogt magnificently grassed,
and good saltbush and cotton-bush are everywhere abundant.

June 4—Starting in the direction of Mount Lewis, a high prominent point in an elevated scrubby range,
I crossed the Walker Creek in 1} mile; at 3} miles over red sand ridges covered with porcupine grass and
casuarina (desert oak) forest. At half a mile we again crossed the Walker, and at 23 miles entered the
Walker Gorge. This gorge is formed by the Walker Oreek fluwing through three ridges of the James Range.
High precipitous rocks abut on the watercourse : an abundance of water is always running amid the reeds and
rushes here. Emerging from the gorge we entered the Tempe Downs Plain, and after twice crossing the
Walker Creek in 1} mile we arrived at the station.

June 19.—Height 2,586 feet. The party moved on in an easterly direction through closely grown mulga
scrub and across stony undulations for 24 miles to the foot of Mereenie Bluff. This range presents an abrupt
and almost inaccessible front to the westward and northward, an extensive escarpment in these directions of
an intensely red color being its distinctive feature. The elevation of this, the western commencement of
Mereenie Valley I estimated to be about 2,800 feet above sea level. This in all probability is the loftiest
watershed in Central Australia, The Darwent Creek trends eastward and occupies nearly the whole of
Mereenie Valley, in which we discovered an extensive bed of fossiliferous limestone soon after crossing the
watershed. The escarpment of the Mereenie Range continues in an unbroken line tn the eastward, resembling
an enormous wall, the range to the north apparently increasing in height. At seven miles we passed an
enormous boulder of quartzite that had fallen from the cliffs, forming the escarpment on the south range some
800 feet above the valley. The weight of this enormous block of stone had caused it to roll into the centre
of the valley, and it now forms a most conspicuous landmark visible for miles on either side. A small gorge

in the northern range exists about three quarters of a mile to the eastward. This has been named Stokes
Pass ; it contains a permanent supply of water.

June 21.—The course starting was through the gap, a narrow pass some three qu ile i

arters of a mile in
length. Near the entrance of the second gap and at the confluence of two creeks pernapeyt pools of water
were found. Teatree, frequently an indication of permanent water, grows in profusion along the several

channels of the creeks. Leaving the range, in another mile we ent - i
which both saltbush and cottonbush flourish, SEI pe ete gen welnee ane

June

* “Journal of the Horn Scientific Exploring Expedition,” Adelaide, 1897
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 61

 

June 26, Mount Ziel. —Starting on the bearing of 128°, we crossed the Finke River, here called the
Davenport, at half a mile and arrived at Glen Helen Station in 14 miles. This station which has now been
abandoned, consists of three substantial stone and wood houses and a large stockyard—all in good order.
The garden still contains a few vegetables. We secured a quantity of tomatoes, cabbages, and melons, and
continued on the previous bearing. At 2} miles low hills form a gap, through which the creek takes its
course. A small waterhole in the creek near the station is said to be a permanent water. At 43 miles
altered the course to 86° for 3} miles to a waterhole in the Finke River, near Mount Sonder, and camped,

ie Redbank Creek from the north and several gum creeks from the south unite with the Finke River near
@ camp.

June 27, Mount Sonder.—Height 2,135 feet, S, latitude 23° 36’ 16”, E. longitude 132° 30’ 47”,

_ June 28.—-Computed the altitude of the various mountains in this neighborhood, which give the fol-
lowing results :—Mount Heughlin, probably the highest hill in Central Australia, 4,786 feet above the sea
level ; Mount Ziel, 4,040 feet , and Mount Sonder, 4,496 feet in height

June 29.—Started on a bearing of 138° 10’ through well grassed mulga scrub with occasional low spinifex
andulations. Continued on a bearing of 301° 20’ for 14 mile, three quarters of a mile to a low hill, passing
several small quartz reefs to a large tributary creek (the Davenport) of the Finke River ; this was followed by
the whole party on _a bearing of 241° for 1 mile and 225° 30’ for 2} miles to a gorge or pass in the northern
tange of Mereenie Valley. I have named this gorge Goyder Pass. It furnishes the only possible approach
to Glen Helen Station now that the Finke Gorge—21 miles to the eastward—has become impassable. Con-

 

 

Pirate 18—Cycaps.

tinued due south through the pass for half a mile; then altered our course to 192° along Mereenie Valley,
which is here about a quarter of a mile in width and hemmed in on either side by high precipitous ridges.
The bed of fossiliferous limestone previously noted in this valley again appears here.

June 30.—Height 1,889 feet. Following upon an intensely cold and windy night, we started early on a
bearing of 96° 50’ and at 5 miles arrived at the Finke River, which here forms three gorges through the
parallel ridges to the north and south. Camped on the eastern side of the river near the southern ridge ; in
the afternoon visited the Finke Gorge. There are two immense and extremely steep ridges north of our
present camp, through which the Finke River has forced its course. The gap in the first of these is only a
quarter of a mile off. Numerous fossils were discovered here. The second, or Finke Gorge, is 1} mile north
of the camp. A large and deep permanent waterhole completely fills up the space between the high perpen-
dicular rocks conatituting the sides of the gorge. Several charges of dynamite were exploded in the water-
hole, and a quantity of small fish secured for Professor Spencer’s collection. The waterhole, however, proved
to be tco large to render this method effective with the large fish.

July 2.—Followed the Finke southward, passing through the gap in the southernmost ridge of the
MacDonnell Ranges, on a bearing of 153°. At 14 miles the ranges, consisting at this point of conglomerates,
terminates, and we entered the Missionaries Plain, which occupies the intervening space between the
MacDonnell and Krichauff Ranges. This plain has a width of from eight to 20 miles, and is about 150 miles
in length, extending from E. longitude 131° 50’ to E. 1349 10’. Ib consists of sandy, well-grassed country,

thickly
62 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

i i i i iles covered, we arrived at the
thickly timbered in places with mulga and low cassia bushes With 19 mil , d

io Gn, Mission ee Hermannsburg, on the northern side of the Finke River, and about one mile north
of the Krichautf Ranges. Mr. Heidenreich, jun., who is now in charge, heartily welcomed us.

July 3, Hermannsburg Mission Station.—Latitude 23° 56° 52", E. longitude 132° 45'.—The so
enters the Krichauff Ranges 1 mile to the south of this station and continues its sinuous course Bron
these massive ranges for some distance to the south of our No. 22 Camp. The palms (Livistona Mariae) 4
this glen reach a height of 60 feet to 100 feet, and are exclusively confined to this one ee The ve
(Encephalartos MacDonnellt) (see Plate 18) also grows abundantly in the Glen of Palms some four miles to
the westward. (See Plate 19.)

July 4.—-Surveyed the Mission Station, which proved to be a very extensive place. It comprises three
large well-built stone houses, one of nine rooms, and two of seven rooms ; two large two-roomed stores, built
of sandstone; and numerous small huts built of wood and clay—the whole forming a village ae
conspicuous than many of our northern townships. The garden—justly noted for its abundance of fe
vegetables and fruit trees, among which numerous date palms, some bearing fruit, are conspicuous—is on the
uorthern bank of the river. A simple and effective system of irrigation from shallow wells of good inaler has
been brought into reqnisition, and the whole of the extensive area can be watered in a very short time by the
use of several pumps The water in the Finke River, now running in a small stream is of varying quality.
The altitude of Moun! Giles, in the main tier of the MacDonnell Ranges east of Mount Sonder, is 4,260 feet.

 

Puate 19—Patm CREEK.

July 10.—To complete the work allotted to the expedition it is necessary to visit Paisley Bluff in the
MacDonnell Ranges. Started on a bearing of 44° 50’ in the direction of a high bluff east of Mount Conway.
At 11 miles we got among some low but very rough and precipitous stony rises, terribly overgrown with
porcupine grass. Sundown found us camped on a small teatree creek, near the base of the southern ridge of
the MacDonnell Ranges, a stage of 74 miles having been made. I followed this creek into the range, and
discovered a small spring about a quarter of a mile to the north of our camp. I have named the spring
Edgar Spring. Its water, which flows for about 30 yards and then disappears, emerges from a crevice in
the conglomerate rocks ; the latter extend from here to the Finke Gorge and to near Mereenie Bluff.

July 11—Height 2,086 feet, S. latitude 23° 49’ 50”. To the north we discerned several parallel ridges of
the MacDonnell Ranges. Mount Conway, I found, bears 53° 45’, Brinkley’s Bluff 32°, and Paisley’s Bluff
90° 50’. Continuing on a bearing of 342" 40’, we passed, at 1 mile and 24 miles, through two gaps
in quartzite ridges having an east and west direction At the latter gap we crossed the confluence of two
large gum creeks, tributaries of the Hugh River. Here occurs a very striking and interesting geological
change, which will be fully recorded in the geological report of the expedition. I have named the several
gaps through which we have travelled Gill Pass. Altered course to 33° for one mile and 79° 20’ for 24
miles, over grassy plains to the Hugh River. Continued on the previous course for an additional 24 miles to
the foothills of Mount Conway, a prominent mountain, on which I erected a trigonometrical station in 1877.
We passed numerous waterholes, and at one mile altered our course to 351° in the direction of a gorge of
singular appearance west of Paisley Bluff. At 2} miles a large gum creek joins the Hugh River from the
westward. Changed course to 98° (direction of this ridge), finding at three-quarters of a mile that the Hugh
River passes through a gap, in which we found a large and, I think, permanent waterhole. Paisley Bluff is
probably 1,500 feet above the gorge, which is only about 20 yards wide, and is densely timbered with large
pines, gums, and cycads (Encephalartos MacDonnelli), When I entered the gorge the sun had already set ;
I did not, therefore, venture far into the gloomy valley, which I have named Spencer Gorge.

July 12.—Proceeded northward for the purpose of ascertaining whether a practicable road exists through
the MacDonnell Ranges in this direction, Cowse 29° for half a mile to a gap in another high ridge, which

ruoa
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 63

 

rans in a parallel line with Paisley Bluff Range ; thence 87° 30’ for 1% miles between high ranges, and
22° 30’ for half a mile to a gorge in the main range west of Brinkley Bluff. The latter bluff is an immense
mass of granitic rocks of great altitude, abrupt and apparently inaccessible from the west. A large waterhole
occupies the whole space between the perpendicular walls of the gorge, which is only about 25 yards in width.
To-day the water near the eastern wall of rocks was fortunately of no great depth, and I succeeded in
getting through the gorge.

 

A. A. DAVIDSON.

.

Extracts from paper read before the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (South Australian
Branch) on A. A. Davidson’s Explorations, by C. Winnecke, F.R.G.S., on December 15, 1901 *:— ~

This expedition was conducted during a period of three years—from 1898 to 1901, Two years were
occupied in proving the country east of the transcontinental telegraph line between Barrow Creek
Telegraph Station and as far north as Tennant Creek Telegraph Station, a block containing over 11,000
square miles. Comparatively speaking, only a small proportion of it was occupied by metalliferous
country, and the belts representing this area were, with one exception, very small. Throughout these
belts we discovered a number of gold-bearing reefs, and a considerable amount of capital was sunk in
developmental work. The reefs, however, proved to be of such a low grade that it was considered it would
not justify my employers in raising the necessary funds to thoroughly develop them. With the extension
of the railway from Oodnadatta to Port Darwin these conditions will be modified, and the mineral
resources of the interior would then become the great factor in the development of Central Australia.
Nearly the whole of this large block—11,000 square miles—is occupied by the massive Murchison and
Davenport Ranges, parts of which are of considerable elevation. The ranges contain numberless splendid
gorges, large waterholes, and several permanent water springs, etc.

Mr. Davidson discovered many gold-bearing areas in these ranges, besides those mentioned by
Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, and he thought it worth while to specially test and describe five of the principal
belts, as well as to furnish a detailed sketch of these places, locating the various gold reefs, copper, and
other mineral deposits. There are, of course, many more auriferous areas in this locality, but Mr.
Davidson had no means or time to test them. In one place, however, he discovered opals, and in several
localities alluvial gold was obtained. The principal gold-bearing belts are called the North Ooorundee,
South Coorundee, Munadgee, Coondinga, and Skinner. Mr. Davidson tested these various reefs, more
particularly those at Munadgee, where several shafts were sunk to a vertical depth of 51 feet, besides
some distance beyond this on the underlay of the reef; and although the results would have been
considered very payable in other and more accessible regions, nothing less than 10-oz. ore was considered
payable here. Doubtless, as Mr. Davidson remarks, when the Transcontinental Railway comes into
existence a large mining field will he developed here, as the country, being so elevated (2,000 feet) is very
suitable for permanent settlement. Water also is abundant, and good grazing land is found in the many
valleys and adjoining plains. The country is, moreover, plentifully timbered with large gums and
other woods.

CAPTAIN CARRINGTON.

Extracts from paper read before the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (South Australian
Branch) on November 1, 1886, on the “Principal Rivers of the Northern Territory,” by Captain
Carrington, Commander s.s. Palmerston + :—

The importance of rivers for the development of new or comparatively unknown countries, and their
economic value as commercial highways, render any addition to our knowledge of them, however slight,
worth recording ; and the Northern Territory of South Australia is very rich in rivers, some of them
being navigable for very large ships for considerable distances, and all of them navigable with suitable

craft,
Victrorta River.

The Victoria River was discovered and surveyed by Captain Stokes, of H.M.S. Beagle, in 1839. It
penetrates farther into the continent than any other river on the northern coast, and empties its waters
into the Indian Ocean in 8, latitude 14° 40’, and E. longitude 129° 21’ or, say, 20 miles east of our
western boundary. Its mouth is 26 miles wide between Turtle and Pierce Points.

It is now over 40 years since the chart of this river was first published, and more than 20 years ago
a pamphlet was published here “under authority” by the Government printer. This publication speaks
highly of the Victoria as a port for shipment of stock for India, and alludes to it as the probable locality
of the first settlement in Northern Australia.

The Victoria is navigable for ships of the largest class for a distance of 50 miles from the sea, and
farther for a distance of 60 miles with suitable river craft drawing not more than three feet. This is to
& point known as Gregory’s Camp, where that explorer camped for some months, and may be considered

the

 

* Proceedings Royal Geographical Society, 8.A., 1902, Vol. 5. t See Journal Royal Geographical Society, Vol. 27.
64 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

Perhaps the value of this magnificent stream as a commercial highway pa a
better shown by comparison. In comparing it with others I have only in view its capability = oe or
ad its easiness of access. Bearing this in mind, I have no hesitation whatever in saying that the Victoria

is far superior to the Thames, Mersey, or Hooghly.

the head of navigation.

ictoria i i he only outlet for is

i try that the Victoria is the natural and, I believe, t é
ue suous eae miles, or, say, 57,000,000 acres. This includes a small strip of oe
Avstralia Of the major part of this vast tract little is generally known ; it is, however, all or nearly a

taken up by pastoralists, and is being rapidly stocked.

ality of the land, Mr. Wilson, geologist to Gregory’s expedition, says :—‘‘ In no part of
the ae cen grass grow so luxuriantly ; and Mr. H. Gregory observed . . during Seimei
journey when I accompanied him and his brother to the Upper Victoria, that es a oe . g sans
than during all his life before.” He farther on speaks of large tracts of good land on : : a : ee
Jasper Plains, and Beagle Valley”; of country on the “ Norton, ‘Shaw, and Hea po e cl 0
Sturt Creek and Fitzmaurice Rivers, amounting in the aggregate to 5,000,000 oo hs : : ne
tracts came under the limited observation of the party, anu may all be considered well-watered pasture
lands.” Such is the Victoria and the country it drains.

 

 

 

Pirate 20 Roper River. Tue SS. Craup HAMILTON.

Oaptain Stokes, of H.M.S. Beagle, also says:—“ A glance at the map will show that we have not
overrated its importance or acted hastily in calling it the Victoria ; and it must be admitted that, as the
Murray is to south eastern Australia, so in value and importance is the great river Victoria to the opposite
side of the continent.”

Daty River.

This river is navigable, with proper light-draught river boats, for a distance of about 60 miles. Two
years ago I made a detailed survey of its mouth and about eight miles of this stream, the whole being
equal in length of our Port River. Langdon Island lies just inside the mouth, thus making two channels.
There is not more than three feet on the bar at low-water spring tides. The rise of the tide is, however,
large, being from 18 feet to 24 feet, so that large ships can enter and find good anchorage. The plan has
been published, and in view of the valuable copper mines now known to exist near, the river should prove use-
ful. I think something like 2,000 tons of copper ore have been exported from the Daly to Newcastle to be
smelted, the whole averaging something like 264 per cent. of copper.

ADELAIDE River.

The Adelaide is navigable at tidetime for vessels drawing 16 feet to 18 feet, and, with the exceptions
of the Beatrice Rock and the bar, the upper reaches are apparently clear of any obstruction. The only
difficulties are at its entrance through Adam Bay and the first reach after passing the narrows. It is
accessible to vessels drawing 10 feet to 12 feet, and navigated by the Palmerston for over 80 miles.

The
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 65

 

The river winds through magnificently-grassed plains, with lagoons at frequent intervals, Marriki, one of
the stations of Messrs. Fisher & Lyons, is situated on the Adelaide, and they get all their supplies by
water. Mr. H. W.H. Stevens, the energetic general manager of the firm, has successfully grown a variety

Bs ae products, an account of which can be found in various quarterly reports of the Government
esident.

Roper River.

; The Roper empties its waters into the extreme south-west part of the Gulf of Carpentaria. Its mouth
is to some extent sheltered by Maria Island, some 14 miles east of it, where the coast in the vicinity
is very low, fringed with mangrove, and fronted by extensive sand and mud flats, and without prominent
marks, the only conspicuous Jand being Gulnare Bluff, some 14 miles from the outer bar. The river is
navigable for vessels drawing 10 feet to 12 feet for a distance of upwards of 90 miles.

Before leaving the Roper I should state that the Hodgson and Wilton Rivers flow into it. The
latter is unnavigable, and filled with rocks at its junction. The Hodgson was examined for a distance of
four miles. At about three miles from its junction with the Roper there is a rocky bar extending across
the river, over which we with difficulty could find sufficient water for our launch. The river at our

farthest runs through a rocky gorge, and the country on its banks is much cut up by watercourses ; grass
and herbage abundant.

; One of the sources of the Roper River is a magnificent spring, locally known as the “ Bitter
Springs.” It issues from beneath a limestone cliff about four miles distant from the river, and has cut a
tortuous channel, through which it winds and seethes. Early explorers and others speak of this spring as
being perhaps the finest natural source of any river in Australia.

Macartuur RIver.

The principal mouth of the Macarthur River is situate 8.W. by W. | W., 8} miles distant from the
south-east point of Centre Island, its approximate position being 8. latitude 15° 49’, E. longitude 136° 50’.
From the entrance the river was traced in a general south-west direction for an estimated distance of 50
miles. At this point the river is fordable—is, in fact, the place where overlanders cross their stock. Last
year the township of Boroloola was laid out some three miles below the crossing.

It will be seen that the river is only navigable for vessels of light draught. This, however, is not of
so very much importance, since there are excellent harbors at its mouth, the outer bar, which I
considered to be the best channel, is approximately south-west, distant five miles from the south-east point
of Centre Island. The bar has six feet to seven feet at low water, and the channel carries from 7 feet
to 16 feet to its junction with the main stream, which carries from 12 feet to 30 feet up to and inside the
river proper.

The practical value of the Macarthur River lies in the fact that it is the natural outlet for a tract
considerably larger than the island of Tasmania,-and extending inland as far as the telegraph line. The
greater part of this large area has been represented to be equal to the best pastoral country of Queensland,
and the tableland portion is capable of carrying some millions of sheep. Good harbors exist at its mouth,
and the river is navigable with suitable craft for a distance of 50 miles.

The agricultural future of this great country can only be limited by the limited faculties of mankind.
Nature has apparently done everything possible.

Mr. J. Bradshaw, F.R.G.8., in an article which appeared in the Melbourne Age of July 14, 1900,
says :—‘'The recent discovery of large lodes of galena on the Macarthur River tends to confirm the
opinion of Tenison Woods, ay a few weeks ago several tons of this galena were smelted at Maryborough,
Queensland, and it is found to contain a large percentage of silver. There is no doubt but that the
Macarthur lodes travel northward, underlying the marshy plains of the Roper River, and radiating into
Arafura.”

HERBERT River.

Mr. Sidney Kidman, of the great Australian cattle-dealing firm of Kidman Brog., on his return to
Adelaide on August 18, 1902, after a long trip through the Far North of South Australia, Queens-
land, and the Northern Territory in search of stock for the Adelaide, Melbourne, and Western Australian
markets, i the course of an interview with a representative of the Adelaide “ Advertiser,” in speaking about
the country, stated that in places there was splendid grass, but there was not stock to eatit. On the
Herbert River the country was looking wonderful, clover and feed being from one foot to two feet high.
And a young stockman writes under date July 14, 1901, from Bottle Tree Hut, on the Nigri Station,
Northern Territory, to his uncle in London, “that the station has the important advantage of being
situated in a country free from drought, which he declares has by this time been well proved.” He
reckons there are on this property over 60,000 head of cattle, and considers that if it were given a show
to dispose of its bullocks it would bring, in three years, £50,000 profit to the owners, and with its long
leases it ought to be quite a fortune-making concern. The Nigri Station consists of about 2,000 square
miles of country,

Mr. John Costello, also, of Lake Nash, in his evidence before the Royal Commission on the Northern
Territory in 1845, said :—‘“ There is a large area of country from Newcastle Waters and the head of the
Roper to the Queensland border at Camooweal. This magnificent belt of country, known as the Table-
land, may be said to be the cream of the pastoral land of the Territory. I have the fullest and greatest

faith in the future of squatting in it.”
PASTORAL

E
66 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

PASTORAL RESOURCES.

We have before stated that the area of the Northern Territory is 523,000 square miles, or nearly
five times larger than the United Kingdom. It has every variety of soil and equally varying climatic
conditions—mostly tropical. The general character vf the country and its pastoral capabilities will be
seen in the various reports now appended. Four of these, viz.—(1) On the south of the coast country of
the Northern Territory ; (2) On the Limmen River country ; (3) On the Macarthur River district ; and
(4) Creswell’s Letter on the Roper and Macarthur Rivers—are extracts from the Government Resident’s

Report of June 30, 1885 (Paper No. 55).

(1). THe Sours or tHe Coast Country In THE NortHERN TERRITORY.

The reports furnished to me by Messrs. Stevens and Giles have fully described what is known
as the “Coast country.” Mr. Giles’s report indeed covered country stretching further south. It appeared
to me, however, that an account of the country along the telegraph line, from the present standpoint,
would be a valuable contribution to the general knowledge of the route of the proposed Transcontinental
Railway. That that railway will be the means of opening up immense areas for settlement which, with-
out the railway, must remain unoccupied, is now universally admitted. The cost of the carriage of stores,
with the uncertainty as to dates of arrival, render teams impossible as a means of transport. I have,
therefore, asked Mr. J. A. G. Little, the senior and superintending officer of the Post and Telegraph
Department, whose duties annually take him as far south as Attack Creek, to give me the result of his
observations.

By Mr. J. A. G. Little :-—

I have the honor to forward for your information a few particulars of the nature of the interior of
the Northern Territory, from Port Darwin to Attack Creek. The latter place is situated on the 19th
parallel of latitude, and is distant from Port Darwin 590 miles by wire, or about 650 miles by road. I
can, therefore, speak from my own personal observation.

After the watershed of the coast country is passed, the country gradually rises to an open undulating
plateau, or tableland, apparently about 1,000 feet above the sea level. Any surface drainage from the
tableland either spreads out and loses itself on open plains or makes its way to the southward by a low
depression which seems to run right through the centre of Australia to Lake Eyre in South Australia
proper. For instance, the water of the Herbert River and other rivers, rise at no great distance inland
from the Gulf of Carpentaria, but they all run to the southward.

After the coast country has been left behind, the whole nature of the country seems to change. The
forest country disappears, and is replaced by open plains or belts of scrub, or by lightly timbered country.
The long grass also disappears and is replaced by a variety of grasses, such as Mitchell grass, blue grass,
Flinders (or red) grass, kangaroo grass, also several other varieties of grasses, the names of which I do not
know. Herbs and bushes, of which stock are very fond, also abound. The grasses on the inland plateau,
or tableland, do not require to be burnt every year in the same manner as the long grasses near the coast.
The grasses inland are very fattening and nutritious when in either a green or in a dry condition. Stock

o ve kinds, including sheep, thrive and do remarkably well on the inland plateau and tableland throughout
year. ;

Surface water is very scarce, but could easily be collected and stored by means of tanks or dams, as
the country is full of good clay flats, which offer every facility for tank sinking or dam making. The
annual rainfall as far south as Barrow Creek is much lighter than the rainfall experienced in the coast
country, but sufficient rain falls every year to provide an ample supply of grass and water. Droughts of

two and three years duration similar d ou ht in pastora ist e outhern colonies
to dr S ex erienced
9 g Pp Pp 1 d stricts in th 8

The ranges and ridges of the interi i ini i \

; ge: erlor are mostly covered with spinifex, but the plains are nearly all
well ane being composed of undulating downs, or country locally known by the es of Bay of ie
or - 5 pee A great deal of the scrub country in the interior is intermixed with good grass
country. e scrub exists in belts or patches, with good grass country between. Between the telegraph

line and the Queensland border, the country is descri i i
ae eee ee aes ry is described as being mostly large open plains, well

; As far as I have seen, the interior of the Northern T
oad enaerer ae interior simply wants to be opened up by railway communication, in order to make
antee ce a re A oe pastoral country. The interior, like nearly every part of Australia, contains
the oa 5 on fhe i foe also a great deal of medium and bad country. At the present time the bulk of
inland for fe ive a ee 1s not stocked, owing to cost and difficulty of sending men and material so far
SMIonote alk of making waterholes and dams, also for fencing and forming stations. Such work
a Los ea ed out at the present time at a loss, but railway communication will alter all this, and

Probably ‘ead to very large sheep stations being formed in the interior of the N orthern Territory.

erritory is by no means a desert country as some-

oe rece ae ered is passed, there are no natural obstacles
t cap line of railway. The proposed overland railway line will prob bly foll
the |
plains between the telegraph line and the Queensland border. hice: atti. sail hoesea Have Ree tried

at the overland tel i
ay egraph stations as far north as Daly Waters, and have been found to breed and thrive

of any consequence to the for-

(2). ON
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 67

 

(2). On Tae Linmen River Country.
By Mr. A. K. Holden, a well-known pastoralist :—

The Limmen River country consists wholly of a succession of gorges or pockets surrounded by hills so
stony and precipitous as to form in almost all cases perfect natural fences for cattle and horses. The
character of the country in these gorges varies. I may divide it into three classes: —

First, sound, open, black soil plains, dotted with lagoons : some of which are permanent and timbered
about the water with “coolabah ” (a species of box), and with small clumps of “bohenia” on the higher
ground. “ Bohenia,” I may remark, is one of the myall tribe, and, like all its class, invariably a sign of
good country. This country, which I have just described, is covered with a profusion of rich grasses and
herbs, and abundance of bluebush. Mitchell, blue, barley, Flinders, umbrella, and tuft grasses are all well
represented. A vine, a species of vetch, of which stock are ravenously fond, is very plentiful; also a
kind of marshmellow. There are, besides, large stretches of low land bearing a species of peabush, which
cattle eat readily, and many other herbs with which I am unacquainted, but of which their utility is proved
by the fact that stock eat them up clean. After 20 years of experience in saltbush country, I can fairly
state that I have never seen cattle fatten more speedily than on this country. I put on old, poor cows in
October and killed them good beef the following April. There are now on the run about a hundred cows
as fat as can be produced anywhere off grass in Australia,

The second-class country is clean, sound, open “coolabah” forest, abounding in most of the grasses
already enumerated, yet lacking the supply of herbage, but also well watered by permanent lagoons.

The third-class consists of thickly-grassed country, the grass of a coarser description interspersed
with spinifex, and timbered rather scrubbily in places with bloodwood, quinine, and teatree, with occas-
sional stretches of low, stony ridges. The river only runs through the rainy season, up to about May, but
every here and there you find large, deep, permanent holes, probably fed by springs. Numerous springs
run from the most precipitous parts of the mountains; more than enough to render the country quite
independent of the river for water. Inthe gorge, where I am residing, there are three separate springs,
each of which would thoroughly water 10,000 head of cattle.

As is generally the case in rich country, good timber for general use is not plentiful. The river and
all the larger creeks are marked by a dark fringe of oak and paperbark, and the mountains are almost
wholly timbered with a species of eucalypti called “ wolly-butt.” These and bloodwood (which I have
before omitted to mention) are what we principally use.

The natives are giving us at present no trouble having, apparently, cleared beyond our reach —not
one has been seen for at least six months. In addition to the grasses and herbs already enumerated, the
country abounds in edible bushes; those which stock are most partial to are the orangebush and white-
wood or milkbush. They keep these topped even when grass is at its best. Mr. John Costello, who holds
all the country between us and the coast, has explored it, and states it to be alla useful well-grassed
country, opening towards the coast into large richly-grassed plains of the most fattening description.

(3). J. P. Hinaston.

Extracts from report of Mr. Hingston, surveyor, on the Macarthur River country :—

Leaving the Lower Roper township on February 7, 1885, we arrived at the Macarthur Bar on
Monday morning, February 9, and employed the remainder of the day in fitting out camp. Starting
from the ship on Tuesday, at 6 a.m., we reached the site of present proposed Government wharf on the
Macarthur River at 5.30 pm.

The river resembles the Daly River very much in appearance, having occasional low shores heavily
timbered, alternated with long reaches and high open banks. The general course of the river from 12
miles above the mouth to the present town is more westerly than south-westerly, and the distance does not
exceed 40 miles. For navigation the river is superior to the Daly ; it has not the shifting quicksand banks
and is free from tidal bores. The township is at the head of the navigation, and had I stopped on account
of the rocky bars—there being three in the river—would have been obliged to select a site about 15 miles
from the mouth. As the last bar is no worse than the first, I went as far as boats drawing six feet at high
tides and eight feet at springs can go. This places the town a' out four miles above the last bar, and 1}
miles north by west by the river from the Port Darwin and Queensland track and the main cattle-crossing
of the Macarthur River.

Running parallel with the southern boundary we have the Macarthur Downs. This is the best
pastoral country I have seen in the Northern Territory. As there are so many varied opinions regarding
the soils adapted for the cultivation of sugar and other tropical products, I beg to call your attention to
the specimens of grasses I brought back with me. The finest of these is the “Old man Mitchell,” which
grows abundantly on these extensive plains, consisting of a thin top crust of sand, with a deep blue clay
subsoil. The herbage growing on the downs is plentiful, and very fattening for stock. The Old man
Mitchell, barley, Flinders, an flood grasses are so well known t!.at nothing I may say can add to the
estimation in which they are held. The ground is covered by numerous vines and creepers, which, I am
informed, last long after the grasses become seared, and constitute the dry season’s feed. During the
rains these plains are boggy, but with the least fine weather they become passable for all kinds of stock.
On the western boundary of the park lands there is a strip of about two miles of inferior country, being
sandy and covcred with stunted timber and triodia. On the eastern side, adjacent to the river, the
country is broken sandhills, very rich in vegetation, and abundantly supplied with medicinal grasses, viz.,
the dysentery, scurvy, and rosella ; the white currant bush is also very prolific. Most of the pees 7

cooliba

E2
68 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

Mer eee aee ae Ae ee ee

 

wo wn gs ee ee eee

ildi he river and on the creeks
i d flood gums, both poor for building purposes. On the banks of t
ee soralind of apoiati black oak, and Leichhardt pine; and I was informed that about

two miles above the crossing there was a forest of cypress pine.

(4). Caprain W. R. OReswELt, R.N.

important discoveries, by which a good dray route has been discovered by Captain W.
R. era oe ations Lagoon, in Creswell Creek, by way of Cattle Creek and the Se
Valley (so named by Mr. Favenc), through a gorge in the rough ridgy country farther ae inte i e
Macarthur River township ; and also another route by Mr. McGregor, in the employment of Mr. Walter
Douglas, who started from the Macarthur, and has arrived at Powell Creek.

Captain Creswell’s letter is so interesting and important that we will now append those portions
which describe the country through which he passed. It will convey much valuable information about
these two rivers—the Roper and Macarthur—which will soon be important commercial centres :—

All the country east of the telegraph line between Tennant Creek and Charlotte Waters has been
justly described by Mr. Ernest Favenc as equal to the best pastoral country in Australia.

Ten stations are already formed there, and this number is being daily added to. This road will
shorten their distance to a base of supplies by nearly 200 miles—a benefit which will be equally shared by
the stations of the Overland Telegraph line. In addition to facilitating the development of this portion
of the Territory, there will be immediately directed to this route all the traffic from the inland plateau,
which has hitherto flowed over the border to the Queensland ports in the Gulf of Carpentaria, thereby
bringing it under the immediate control of the Customs and adding to the revenues of the Territory.

The route we have discovered is one passable in all seasons, both for travelling and. general stock, — It
has no long dry stages, and nearly as direct as the crow flies. Teams will leave here immediately upon it.

Following this is an extract from Captain Creswell’s evidence * :—

983, The Commission understands that at one time you were in the Northern Territory, and that you
were successful in opening a stock route from the tableland to the gulf country 1—Yes, that is so.

984, What is your opinion of that part of the country for carrying stock {—I have written out a
general statement of my impressions, which, with the permission of the Commission, I will read.

985. We shall be glad to hear it ?

“Tn 1885, in the month of January, I crossed the tableland from the head of the Nicholson River to
Powell Creek telegraph station. After making a gradual ascent along the foot ridges running parallel
to the main coast range or divide, the final ascent to what is known as the “jump up” placed us on the
tableland. The first thing that struck me as remarkable was the change of climate; the air was cool and
refreshing at night and even bracing. Although it was the rainy season there was not that muggy, close,
enervating feeling that never left one on the coast. From the edge of the “jump-up” westward to
Powell Creek, a distance of over 300 miles, there is not a hill of any consequence. For half a day's
travelling we kept to the fringe of the country near the coast range ; directly we left it we came upon the
great plains and downs of the tableland. ‘This nature of country, almost without intermission, extended
to within a few miles of the telegraph station ab Powell Creek, and there it changed to country only
slightly inferior. The tableland country appeared to me to be quite equal to the very best that I have
seen in Australia. The plains and downs were splendidly grassed, and reminded me of the Liverpool
Plains in New South Wales. The soil of the downs was a soft, rich, black loam, so friable that our
horses sank in to their fetlocks at every step. All the best known grasses of the fattening countries
covered the plains and downs, especially the latter.

“ Asa sign of the soundness of the country, on our way out we chanced upon two horses that had been
lost for over eighteen months by a drover who had passed that way with the first cattle. They came
quietly up to our own horses when we camped in the evening. These horses were so fat as to be quite
unrideable, One was saddled, and after an hour’s travelling in the heavy black soil lay down. It seemed
to me then that the country had only to be known to be immediately stocked, and that this could not be a
matter of many months. When I came south to Adelaide I thought then, and still believe, that down
here there was no conception of the goodness of the tableland country. J have seen nothing in South
Australia to equal it.

“T can give you no better idea of the general level of the country than a description of what is called
the Ashburton Range on the map. It was only by the map we discovered that it was a range, and any
railway contractor would have thought nothing of making as high a range if it were let to tender.

“We then explored a route from the tableland to the Macarthur River at Borroloola. Up to this there
had been no port for the squatters on the tableland. They had for the most part sent to Burketown, from
300 or 400 miles away, for their supplies. The short cut to the coast had not been attempted, because it
was reported that there was no passable descent for nearly 200 miles, the cliffs and broken country being
impossible for even horsemen, and a road was said to be quite out of the question. We were fortunately
able to find a road, and took down it wagonsand drays, thus placing the tableland in direct communication
with its natural port, distant from Creswell Downs about 150 miles.

“ We found below, at the site of the present township, that a mob of cattle had just started to go west,
after trying for three months to find a road up the Macarthur. Their alternative was a journey of 900

miles

* See Northern Territory Commission, 1895 (Paper No. 19/95).
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 69

 

miles instead of about 300. The difficulties of the country had not been exaggerated, and we congratu-
lated ourselves upon having discovered a good road. I was particularly struck with the beautiful rich
country at the head of the Macarthur ; prettier or richer country I have never seen. The cliffs and broken
country that follow to the coast are broken by valleys of well-grassed and splendidly-timbered country.”

 

 

D. J. GORDON.

wo from articles by Mr. David J. Gordon, published in the South Australian “ Register,”

Barrow Creek was the limit of our journey northwards, our further travelling being east and north-
east, in the direction of the Queensland border. To the east of Barrow Creek are the Murray Downs,
and in this direction we shape our course for about 40 miles, when Mount Skinner stands out prominently,
while stretching away to the right and left is a fine valley well covered with vegetation of various sorts.
The Skinner Creek runs through the Murray Downs, providing a fine supply of water. We camped that
night alongside a waterhole about a mile long, 60 yards wide, and some J8 feet deep. Further on to the
eastward is the Spence Creek, and as we ride along the valley of the Spence we almost forget that we are
some 1,300 miles north of Adelaide, and in the very heart of the Continent. We have seen nothing to
equal this valley we are now in. On either bank of the Spence grow large trees, confusing in their
very variety, luxuriant grasses, wild flowers and delicate ferns, large snow-white lilies grow to the water's
edge, while the screeching cockatoos and beautifully plumaged birds that fly overhead all tell us we have
come into a new country. On our right, about a quarter of a mile away, running parallel with the creek,
is a high range of hills rising abruptly and overlooking the valley, with white lime-trees and vegetation
growing to the very tops, and flowering creepers overspreading the rocks. The sky, sun, air, and eloquent
waters, inspiring mountain-tops, the murmuring and glossy woods, are all in evidence that here in this
valley Nature deals with a bountiful hand. As we approach the range that divides the Murray Downs
country from the Frew the ranges gradually narrow in until we are now riding down a narrow passage-way,
high ranges, with projecting boulders of great size, being within a stone's throw on either side of us. After
passing through two or three gorges of great beauty we cross the dividing range, our arrival being
welcomed by two unusually large emus that scamper off along the top of the range, and are soon out of
sight. We have been ascending rapidly for the last 26 miles, and the ranges that hereabouts run in all
directions are several hundred feet above us. It is here that the Frew commences, the water trickling
down the side of a high rocky hill, and starting off in a little stream until assisted by some tributaries it
broadens out, and within a few miles of its rise flows with some force. We camp in a narrow gorge,
through which the river runs, and where there is a huge rockhole of great depth. The water has under-
mined a large hill, and the great boulders that overhang the waterhole threaten to come tumbling down.
From various sources we have heard different accounts of this new land, the general opinion being that it
was too fresh for pastoral purposes. What we have seen in the valley of the Spence, however, has been satis-
factory, and the assurance of Mr. Ooulthard has already been given that, in addition to the variety of
fresh grasses we have already seen, there are portions of the country covered with sultbushes. We rode for
35 miles along the Frew, which at the time of our visit was running. Altogether, the country is the best
watered and the finest we have yet seen. At places the Frew is almost wide enough and deep enough to
be navigable. Where the Frew Head Station is situated the river widens out, and there are several
splendid sheets of water. It is evident, from the vegetation, that the Frew country has a good rainfall,
and as the river contains a variety of fish, some of them being several pounds in weight, it is pretty good
evidence that protracted droughts are unknown. Some of the station hands have caught sufficient fish in
the waterhole close by the station—Tootoowa, as the natives call it—in two hours to last all hands for a
week. Birds are very numerous on the Frew. Twenty five miles below the station we saw a sight to delight
in—a moonlit lake some two miles long; on either bank the typical Australian gumtrees towering above
the water in majestic splendour, making with their evening shadows a picture full of the sublime and
beautiful. The natives have christened the place with a pretty name—Arralooloola. Nature’s gifts are
plentiful here, and we saw wild ducks, pigeons, emus, and kangaroos, and no doubt in the water are fish in
abundance. The valley of the Frew below the station opens out, the ranges leaving the river at one place
almost at right angles, only to return again, however, later on. The grass and foliage, rich and luxuriant,
are made green with the running of rivers and gracious with temperate air. We journeyed west and north-
west over several unnamed ranges towards Tennant Creek, passing a large fresh water swamp, alive with
woodduck, until we strike a creek called The Whistle Duck, owing to it being a rendezvous for the
whistling duck. When out here we came across several good patches of healthy saltbush, the finding of
which set at rest any doubts as to whether the country is suitable for pastoral purposes. There are some
very fine waterholes on the Elkedra, providing a plentiful supply of water, and the valley is almost as rich
in herbage as that of the Frew. In several places we saw where the blacks had been cutting holes in the
trees, so as to extract the honey deposited there. We were not fortunate in seeing any of the bees that
are said to be so plentiful, but we were given to understand they are of the black bee variety, and somewhat
smaller than the ordinary bee. They make the hollow of large trees their hives, and unless disturbed,
store up a large quantity of rich honey. In our various journeyings over the Frew country we noticed the
following trees:—Gum, bean, corkwood, paper-tree, teatree gidyea, bloodwood, beefwood, ironbark,
lancewood, and emu and apple teatree. There were several others that we were unable to class. Then as
to grasses and herbage, we saw Mitchell grass, silver grass, kangaroo grass, blue grass, mulga grass, and
harpoon grass that grows downward in the shape of a harpoon. Then there is saltbush, bluebush (much
the same as the Queensland bluebush), Queensland barley grass, herbage, and various kinds of creepers and
runners. There was one fine specimen of grass, very much like an oat stalk, that our horses took a great
fancy for. Then we noticed also various native fruit trees, such as the currant-bush, native orange and

pear
70 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

 

pear trees, plum, yam, and quinine bushes. We had some berries off the latter, and they were bitter and
of the same taste as quinine. Currant bushes abound on the Frew, and the fruit in the proper season is
plentiful. Birds are numerous. There is, of course, the crow and magpie ; where can you go in Australia
and not find them? Among the cockatoos there are the Major Mitchell, galar, black, pink, and white.
Among others, there are the magpie, lark, bowerbird, parrots of a dozen varieties, ringuecks, bluebonnets,
and goolahs, kingfishers, doves, pheasants (small birds with lovely fantuils), hawks (eagle, brown, and kite
hawks), rock pigeons, with pretty little topnots and very tame, slate-coloured pigeons, bronzewing, and
flock pigeon, robin redbreasts, skylarks, mutton birds, the minor, Derwent jackass, mopoke, bellbird, lyre-
bird, blackbird, and curlews. The woods are full of these and other kinds of birds. The sportsman would
be able to find plenty of gaine in this country to the east of Barrow Oreek. There is, of course, the
kangaroo and emu, the latter being unusually large in these parts, wild turkeys, ducks (the whistle, black,
teal, diver, and woodduck), wallabys, wild dogs, euros, paddy melons, kangaroo rats, wideawakes, and
mountain devils.

AN OVERLANDER’'S OPINION.

 

In the Report of the Government Resident, dated June 30, 1886 (No. 54), is an article
taken from the ‘“ Australasian,” signed ‘“ Overlander,” containing his impressions of the Northern
Territory, and well worthy of notice :—

The country about the Elsie creek is low lying and swampy, with numerous large lagoons which
are covered with ducks, geese, and other water fowl. Mr. Wallace’s cattle which we saw here, were
looking remarkably well, which I take to be the best practical test of the value of the district for pastoral

purposes.

At the Katherine station the Government has fenced in a paddock of about 600 acres for the horses
used by the line repairers, inspectors, and ration carriers. The fencing of this paddock shows how
wonderfully this country will be improved when it is stocked and subdivided. Outside the fence the soil
is generally sandy, and is far too rank and coarse for pasture. Inside the rail the change is perfectly
startling. The ground has been consolidated by heavy stocking, and the rank grass has given place to a
sward of finer grasses, on which the horses and Mr. Murray’s cows seem to thrive well.

After travelling down the Katherine for about 10 miles over forest country, with rough stony patches
alternating with black loam and chocolate soils, covered with kangaroo and other grasses, we reached
Springvale station. Round the house a very good garden has been laid out, in which many varieties of
tropical fruits and vegetables, such as seguars, sweet potatoes, bananas, pine-apples, etc., thrive luxuriantly
under the care of the celestial gardener. There are several large paddocks, fenced in with wire and cap-
rail; the grass inside the enclosures showing the same improvement compared to the outside run as we
observed in the case of the Government paddock at the Katherine. Mr. Giles is going in for horse-
breeding on a rather extensive scale, and we were fortunate to arriye at a time when a large number of
horses had been run into the paddocks. The young stock seem to be a very fair lot, especially the
draughts. The manager had recently imported a Clydesdale stallion from the south, which would be a
credit to any breeding establishment, and such of his stock as we saw take after him in a very marked
degree. The absence of fences hitherto has given the mob rather a mixed character, there having been
one if not two thoroughbred entires running out with the mares. Now that additional paddocks have been
enclosed, this will be avoided in future, and I have no doubt that the run will not only raise good draught
horses, but also superior remounts for India.

Our impressions of the Northern Territory are very favorable. Here we see the same things going
on that happened in Queensland 30 and 40 years ago. We see the usual conquest of civilisation, and the
same indifference to recognise it on the part of most of our practical men. We have the same rough life,
the same difficulties with the natives. The pioneers are the same: some prosper, some soon die, some
return tu abuse the country in which, as a rule, through their own incapacity, they have failed. There is
a great future before this country: its mineral resources I believe areenormous. Rich deposits have been
found of copper, iron, lead, also silver ; and not only is there a large area suitable in the highest degree for
pastoral purposes, but also land specially adapted for tropical agriculture.

 

A QUEENSLAND STOCKOWNER.

 

An important testimony is also borne to the capabilities of the Territory by Mr. Hugh Heber Percy,
of Queensland, as seen at length in the Government Resident’s Report for 1887 (A 53, No. 95/88), extracts
from which are appended :—

_U have obtained from Mr. Hugh Heber Percy, of Queensland, a very graphic account of the Florida
station, which has been established on Glyde’s Inlet. It forms a valuable addition to our knowledge of
Arnheim [and both for pastoral and agricultural pursuits. Writing to me under date of December 10,
1887, Mr. Heber Percy says :—

“ Having been asked to give you the impressions that I have received during this my first visit to the
Northern Territory of South Australia, I am very pleased to doso. After a delay of about three weeks,
Mr. Macartney and I steamed away from here in the s.s. Active, owned by Mr. Millar. We found our-
selves on the morning of Monday, October 31, about 20 miles up the Glyde Inlet, at what is known as

Carrington’s
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. a

Carrington’s landing, about eight or nine miles from Florida head station, and were met by the manager
(Mr. Randell) with horses to take us up to the station. The country going up to Glyde’s Inlet was
generally big plains, which are thickly grassed, and on which I hear the stock thrive extremely well.
These plains, the soil on some of which is good, deteriorating towards the coast line, are bordered on the one
side with a narrow belt of mangrove scrub along the inlet, with now and then a patch of vine scrub with
feather palms and Leichhardt trees ; and on the other, the west side, with ridges through which run good
creeks, some, if not all, starting from springs having in their course large clear waterholes, with pink
lillies, looking both picturesque and permanent. There is no timber on the plains; but in the ridges on
tableland behind we saw much fine timber, including pine, though I did not see a great quantity of the
latter, but here it is considerable. The country hereabouts is all good coast cattle country, carrying the usual
coast grasses, and making a grand resort for the cattle in heavy wet weather, being sound and sometimes sandy.
Further to the north-west of the Green Spring, near the mouth of Glyde Inlet, say some 20 miles, you get
on to first low-lying paper-bark country, sometimes with a dry swampy appearance, and then on to very large
plains, some three miles wide by eight miles long, of good soil and well grassed, and bordered on the west
side by some sort of palm trees growing in beautifully rich soil, and carrying very rich grasses, with here
and there an acre or so of thick vine scrub. Riding up to the top of a bare ridge near here we hada grand
view of the country on the east side of Glyde Inlet towards the Goyder; it was a fine sight, beautifully
green plains divided from one another by low single bald ridges, and stretching away east and south for
many miles. In the distance, to the south-east we could see the dark rich green of the timber on Nelson
Lagoon ; also that of the station lagoon. Riding up near and parallel to Glyde Inlet, starting from the
Green Spring towards the station, that is about south, one crosses large plains of good soil bordered on the
west by ridges, at the foot of which grow palm trees, with springs and swamps of good water dotted about,
then through a narrow belt of scrub. The lagoon is swarming with fish of various kinds. J went out in
a large Malay canoe they have on it, and being paddled about through the lilies I speared over 20 fish—a
aort of cod—in a short time, and had I not been a novice at the work might have speared many more—I
speared two at one shot. The number of geese that we saw passing over the station at flight time was very
great, from the horizon to the west to the horizon to the east, as far as the eye could reach, for about half-
an-hour there were continued flocks of from 2 to 150 flying southward. The garden, which is near the
lagoon, is a capital one, having all sorts of fruits and vegetables—mulberries, melons, pineapples, pawpaws,
mangoes, bananas, passion fruit, figs, lemons, oranges, etc. ; they have over 700 pineapple plants, and we
were assured that pineapple tops, not suckers, that were planted had borne fruit within five-and-a-half
months. In Queensland pine tops take 18 months or two years to bear fruit.

“Some 10 miles south from the station is Mount Delight, mentioned by Mr. David Lindsay, which is
surrounded by richly-grassed country. It lies near, but separate from, the edge of the tableland which
runs all along to the west of the plains. This tableland is lO miles in width opposite the station, crossing
which you find Eururya Creek, which I believe is always running ; and from there, 15 miles, is the Blyth
River. About opposite Mount Delight, going west, we rode about half a mile over tableland, and then got
on to one of the heads of the Blyth River. Until you reach the Blyth, the country is fairly grassed, but
not so rich: but on the Blyth, which has fine reaches of water on it, and always continues running, the
country is very good, with rich plains on it of good soil and good forest country. From Mount Delight,
continuing south, we crossed through 10 miles of forest country, well grassed, with here and there
a paperbark swamp ; and then turning east, crossed im a couple of miles Capsize Creek, in which we found
water, but not running.

“The country was good forest country, carrying good grasses. From there we rode south-east about
eight miles over mixed plains and forest country on to Boggy Creek, which runs continually and is very
boggy, and then on some four miles through rich soil plains carrying rich grasses, and good forest country,
till we reached the Crescent Lagoon and the Serpentine. The latter is a splendid reach of deep water
surrounded by richly-soiled forest country richly grassed. From there we rode east on to the Goyder
River, about three-quarters of a mile or more. This river here is very fine, being about 300 yards
in width, with generally high banks dropping almost perpendicularly down into deep, black, clear water.

“ Turning north along the Goyder, we rode for a mile or two through open scrubby country, and then
got on to beautiful rich soil plains carrying beautiful grass, herbage, and vines of all sorts, with here and
there clumps of feather palms and Leichhardt trees. About here we saw some wallaby, which were the
biggest I ever saw, and Mr. Randell told us that they are excellent eating, being very fat, and having a caul
fat like a good sheep.

“This is a rough sketch of all the country I saw at Florida. There are miles and miles of the richest
soil there, fit to grow anything for which the climate is suitable, and I should say especially sugar ; and
owing to the regular rainfall everything grows in the most wonderful way. I have heard it stated that,
instead cf getting one crushing of sugar in 18 months, as is done in Queensland, two crushings could be
got in 12 months, and there are no white ants to destroy it. Mr. Randell told us that during the 23 years
he has been there he has only had two months without rain, and the heat is certainly not so great as at
Port Darwin.

“T have seen nearly all the best coast country in Queensland, and I can safely say I have seen none
that I like so well. I was surprised to find it so good, as, previous to my visit here, I had heard the
Northern Territory so often run down that I looked upon it as a foregone conclusion that I should see
inferior country ; but it is nothing of the kind, and it is destined sooner or later to be made use of for
agriculture and to carry a large population. It seems quite a pity to leave it lying idle. In the meantime,
however, if good markets can be found for cattle or beef in China, India, or Java, or somewhere in that
direction, this and any good stations on the northern coast must become some of the most valuable in
Australia. I cannot see why young cattle, say 12 or 18 months old, should not be shipped in large numbers
for England or Europe. There would not be much risk if sent young, and the right season picked ;
sufficient fodder for the journey could be obtained with mowing machines in a very short time. ae a

splendid
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

~
wo

splendid property that would be from which you could turn off your cattle at that age at a remunerative
price, and there must surely be sufficient margin between £2 per head, which would pay handsomely at
that ave here, and the price obtainable in England or Europe, say £8 or £10, which even at present low
prices they would be worth, and many would be fat and bring a good deal more. The number you could
grow on 10,000 square miles of country like Florida would be great, when you could get rid of them at 18
months, instead of keeping them till they were three or four years old or aged, waiting for a market. I
might enlarge on the subject of shipping young cattle to the mother country ad lib.; there are so many
advantages to be obtained by doing so - quick return of money, greater capacity for breeding numbers,
smaller percentage of loss, safe market, and you can always relieve the run in case of drought, etc.

“T cannot end this letter without alluding to the kindness and hospitality that has been shown m®
during my visit here, and of thanking you especially for having made it so agreeable.”

I. 8. LITTLE.

Extracts from three reports to the Government Resident (Hon. J. Langdon Parsons) by Mr. I. S.
Little (Austral Downs Station) :—

(1.) July 1, 1884 (Paper No. 53a).—I estimate that this part of the tableland in Northern Territory —
that is, the southern slope—when improved will carry from four to five millions of sheep. Of course, large
sums of money in fencing and dam-making will have to be expended first, and capitalists here are only
waiting for labor and carriage. Timber is very scarce on the Herbert auction blocks. There is
desert gum and blackwood, but only sparse patches of it, and difficult to get at. On the
O'Shaunessy River, en rowée to Burketown, there is a forest of line gum. Timber used for fencing
here is bloodwood, coolobar, and gidyea. It has to be drawn Jong distances, as the country is all plains
and downs. White ants do not attack any of the timber. Old posts put up by Ranken, Nash, and others
in 1867-8 are as sound as the day erected, except the sap wood. The ants do not make any of the tall
nests in the downs country.

(2.) April 1, 1885 (Paper No. 54).—On our Milne River Station I struck an unlimited supply of
fresh water at 130 feet in limestone. I think water can be got anywhere in this district at less than 150
feet. Carrandotta and Hedingley, a little farther south, struck fresh water at depths varying from 50 feet
to 65 feet, and each well had an apparently unlimited supply. The well I sank was out on the downs,
and there was 80 feet of rock ; so I take it to be a general underflow of water all through this country,
and not local soakage. This proving an underground supply of water, in such grand sheep country, is of
incalculable value.

Hersert River District.

(3.) July, 1885 (Paper No, 55).—Since my last letter we have had a splendid season, the Herbert,
Ranken, James, Playford, Buchanan, and Milne Rivers, and all the creeks, have been running for months.
This country now is equal (pastorally) to anything I have ever seen in the colonies for either sheep, cattle,
or horses.

 

THE COUNTRY ROUND DALY WATERS, THE KATHERINE, POWELL CREEK, AND
TENNANT CREEK.

 

Appended are the following condensed reports from the resident officials :—

By Mr. W. J. Henderson, 8.M.

In reply to your message of 2nd, regret personal experience limited to one trip from Katherine to
Daly Waters, and local experience of 11 months at latter place. Main road from Katherine is through
open forest country, light timber, principally eucalypti; country perfectly level; two or three creeks
intersect road, flooded during wet season ; scarcity of water throughout dry season ; soil mostly yellowish
clay, with patches of sand. Experience different points east and west of Daly Waters 12 to I5 miles:
open forest country, perfectly level ; scarcity water:

By Mr. R. M. Murray, S.M.

Country northwards first 10 miles biscay flats, with few small creeks ; low stony hills here and there
lightly timbered. Next 50 miles, stony hilly country, with long, leading flats and valleys ; few large
creeks, viz., Edith, Dritheld, Fergusson, and Cullen, all subject to heavy floods in wet en Railway
difficulties slight, excepting rivers; comparatively level track could be found between Pine Creek and
Katherine by following close under tableland. Country south to Daly Waters flat open forest country,
with few creeks, all subject to floods. There is a belt of low country, subject to heavy floods, between
Providence Knoll and Bitter Springs. It can be avoided by keeping out 5 or 10 miles west of road. The
Elsie Creek is sometimes half a mile wide in wet season ; country to east open, stony, down first 15 miles
then stony hills until top of tableland is reached ; 30 miles, several small creeks ; country 30 miles west,
low flat forest country, with few hills and many creeks, :

By
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 73

 

By Mr. H. 8S. Linton.

_ About Powell Creek the country consists of broken ridges covered with spinifex and stunted timber,
which extends to the north 10 miles, to east 9 miles. Seven miles to the west there is a good spring and
some small open plains with fair pasturage. Powell Creek, when running, flows westward. During the
dry season the station is supplied by soakage wells. From 10 miles north of Powell Creek to Daly Waters
the country is very much alike, and, with the exception of a few stony ridges, is flat and sandy,
principally covered with spinifex. Mulga and bloodwood are the only serviceable timbers. At the
different camps there are good grassy patches. There is a broken range running parallel with the road
from Powell Creek to the North Newcastle Waters on the eastern side, at a distance varying from one
to six miles. On the Newcastle Waters there is good open pastoral country, with a plentiful supply of
water, extending about 35 miles. North of this the different waters are very limited. Eight miles on
from North Newcastle Waters is Sturt Plain ; 15 miles across this is also well grassed. Have been no
distance either east or west.

By Mr. A. M. Giles.

Five miles south of Tennant, MacDonnell Ranges, extending east and west. Country west station
broken hills and granite boulders, spinifex; to east, 14 miles well grassed and watered. Thirty miles east,
Boxer Oreek runs north. Strip good country about four miles wide, then 70 miles to Buchanan
Creek. North country broken hills, spinifex, except on creeks, where strip grass country ; north east
Attack Creek well grassed. Scrub for 30 miles, then open downs to Corrella Creek, 90 miles. Country
to west of line more or Jess sandstone ranges, spinifex, and scrub. Country east, north of Attack, and
30 miles east of line, Mitchell grass downs up to latitude Powell Creek ; settled. Great indications of
minerals at Tennant.

 

 

H. Y. L. BROWN, F.G.8. (Government Geologist ).

 

Extracts from Report of “ Descriptive Notes of the Country,” taken from Diary kept by H. Y. L.
Brown during his journey from Warrina to the Musgrave Ranges, dated December 20, 1889 (No. 45).

In consequence of the proposed extension cf the Transcontinental Railway through the interior,
considerable interest has been evinced in the nature of the country through which the line will pass; and
the country on either side, which will in the future provide feeders and traffic for the line, and a few
additional notes may therefore be of service to intending settlers and others.

August 22.—The same character of country, but the hills more isolated, and forming bosses of granitic
rock, At 10 miles arrived at a native well named Moorylana There are mulga trees and grass here, and
the country is very well fitted for grazing.

August 23.—After going three miles came upon a saltbush plain, with scrub and occasional outcrops
of granitic rock. At 10 miles a few mallee trees, limestone, and flat-top ironstone rises. Distance
travelled 21 miles.

August 24.—The same kind of ironstone and limestone country, with red sand and loam between the
rises. We are 2,000 feeb above sea level, and a good view is obtained here of the Musgrave Ranges in the
distance to the north-west.

August 25.—More ice this morning. Came upon a belt of spinifex country at seven miles—the
spinifex four feet and five feet high. Horses are fond of the seeds.

August 26.—At the foot of the Musgrave Ranges, and at two miles, a granite range cropped up.
Stopped the camels here and rode on 10 miles on horseback following the tracks of a few camels, and
reached Carruthers camp on the Ferdinand Creek (a gum creek with waterholes, and water running
between them), near a tree marked E.G, Sep., 73. (Ernest Giles.) We were 2,300 feet above sea level,
and the ranges rise from 1,000 feet to 1,500 feet above the general level.

August 30.—Rode round the ranges in the neighborhood of the camp. Country red loam and sand
plains, mulga and grass, with hills here and there—some isolated and some connected with narrow plains
running between. I consider it is a first-class pastoral country—the hills are covered with spinifex and
there are very few trees about—a few stunted gums are occasionally seen.

September 2.—Travelled in the direction of Mitchell Nob south-west 10 miles, over spinifex-covered
hills, with grass and mulga and pink and purple vetch in blossom, forming excellent feed for horses and
cattle. Found running water in some of the gullies in the hills, and camped at a rock waterhole.

September 3.—Struck Whittle Creek, and travelled up the creek in a south-westerly direction. At
10 miles came upon a tree marked with a broad arrow by some explorer. A fine gully of running water
near here ran into a boggy flat, although there had been no rain to speak of for months before. One of
the horses was bogged here for over an hour. This is called the Marraweetya Spring.

September 28.—Nature of country, red loam and sand and river flats. At nine milesa soakage of
surface water insand. A wide gum creek, and water nearly on a level with the surface ; sandstone table-
hills. At 11 miles came to the junction of the Alberga Creek. At 14 miles a soakage and a waterhole,
red loam and sand, saw fresh tracks of two loose horses. There is good grass and mulga bush all over this

country. Distance travelled, 21 miles. a
i
74 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

i ence to trees and herbage, the largest trees are found only in the sandy beds of the rivers
and Rae belong to the redgum family. They occur all up the Alberga and its paraeta ae in -
Ferdinand and other sandy creeks of the Musgraves, and in sufficient quantity and size to be ae e
“timber.” A tree resembling a willow, and attaining a height of 30 feet or 40 feet, is found ae e peel
flats in the neighborhood of the Musgrave Ranges, an‘l another tree with a thick bark, Seen ee ;
is common in some places. The prevailing tree is the mulga, which sometimes attains a height o eet
or 40 feet, and there are several varieties of this tree. Gidyea is not found far westward. a grows
chiefly in the creeks traversing the tablelands from Cootanoorrinna for some distance up the Arc rns
Creek. As a pastoral country IJ am of opinion that the Musgrave Ranges are well worth the attention o
those who are interested in the pastoral industry. The numerous running waters in the ee
the majority are not permanent—indicate that the rocks beneath are water bearing and that sinking for
water will be attended with success. The rainfall is no doubt very good in such elevated country, and
there would be no difficulty in finding suitable sites for dams should these be required. There are many
different kinds of grass, everlasting flowers, and vetches. The native geranium grows luxuriantly, and
forms splendid feed for horses, who do not want water when they can get it, at least for a couple of days.
Saltbush, cottonbush, and bluebush also flourish. Some of the flats have a rich deep soil.

EXTRACTS FROM EVIDENCE TAKEN BEFORE TRANSCONTINENTAL
RAILWAY COMMISSION, 1887, AND NORTHERN TERRITORY
COMMISSION, 1895, ON THE GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE
COUNTRY.

H. Y. L. BROWN, F.G.8. (Government Geologist ).

Commission, 1895.

4383. In travelling through any of the coast lands, the low-lying lands, did you observe the nature of
the soil /—Yes ; I generally noticed it.

4384. Is there any volcanic soil ?—Yes ; there is some on the Victoria Downs track, between Flora
Falls and Victoria Downs ; also near the Katherine and Renner Springs.

4385, Will you describe the soil {It is a sort of black friable soil ; very much the same as some of
the Mount Gambier soil.

4386. What, approximately, is the rainfall there?—It is pretty good. There is a record kept at
Victoria Downs.

4387. As an estimate, what, approximately, is the rainfall where this volcanic soil exists? Is it 20
inches or 30 inches !—Not so high as that. I believe it is about 18 inches.

4388. Referring back again to the coast country, you say the soil is not volcanic. What kind is it!—
It is a very black cracky soil.

4389. What is the subsoil ?—I do not know, as the soil went down very deep, so far as I could see.

4390. Is it rich soil !—Yes; down at the Daly River Mission Station bananas, maize, and African
corn may be seen growing.

4403, There is volcanic soil on the Victoria Downs ?—Yes ; it extends over a great deal of country.
4408. In what way does the Victoria River country resemble Mount Gambier ?—In the volcanic soil.

4409, Has it the same appearance ?—It is derived from the same kind of rock, and is of the same
composition.

4410. Is there much extent of it?—Yes.

4411, One hundred miles —Yes ; with intervals it would extend for 100 miles, but there is a great
deal of sandstone mixed up in it.

4413. You have not seen the Queensland volcanic country 1—I have seen the Darling Downs country,
and the Northern Territory volcanic soil is similar to that.

4414. You mean the Victoria River country /— Yes.

4415. Is there any other part of the Northern Territory you noticed of this rich character of soil ?—
The Tableland country is generally covered with rich soil.

4416. Is it of a similar character /—No; mostly limestone country. It is a black soil, but good.
4417. Did you see anything of the Daly River country 1—Yes ; I was down to the Mission Station.

4418. What do you think of that in comparison to the Victoria River ?—It is not so good. It is
more tenacious, and more liable to floods, and is very flat. country.

4419. You think the Victoria Downs country to he about the best you have seen? Ido not know
that it is better than the ‘l'ableland country.

HON,
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

1

or

HON. J. LANGDON PARSONS (Government Resident).

(Reports AND EvipENcE.)

During the three years I was Minister, and the six years [ was Government Resident, I saw and
conversed with a large number of explorers, travellers, drovers, and prospectors, and, while their descrip-
tions and opinions varied, and some were tinged with the dreariness of disappointment, the great majority
of them were to the effect that the Northern Territory generally is good pastoral country, that large areas
are very good, that the north coast is good cattle country, and that southward from the head waters of
the Victoria there is fine sheep country.

AGRICULTURE.

Commission, 1887.

1310. You have seen the land !—Yes ; I have seen land in the Northern Territory nearly as good as
the best land I have seen in Queensland.

1393. Is there any extent of country fitted for agriculture in the Northern Territory /—There is an
immense area of such land along the rivers, and there is a great similarity in the character of all the land
along the rivers I have been up I have been up the East Alligator, the South Alligator, the Daly, and
the Adelaide. In the case of each river there are large plains stretching back from the banks. The plains
are composed of alluvial deposits, evidently washed down for ages from the higher lands. I may here
remark that the average rainfall is about 63 inches per annum. The rain falls in each year within a period
of from four to five months, and whenever it falls on a slope it removes off any loose soil that may be
exposed. The deposits on the plains along the rivers are the result of the action of the water carrying off
the soil from higher ground for ages. There must be tens of thousands of acres of such land along the
rivers suited for the carrying on of tropical agriculture.

732. Under this head the first thing to ascertain is whether good arable land suitable
for tropical agriculture exists in the Northern Territory, and if so, to what extent, and with what facilities
for shipment, and with what prospects of producing remunerative crops. Before offering my own opinion
[ will give those of competent and expert persons. In June, 1884, accompanied by Messrs. M. Holtze, F.
Biddles (manager of Delissaville, and a Queensland planter), and Otto Brandt, I visited the Adelaide and
Daly rivers. I give the report of Mr. Frank Biddles, dated June 20, 1884 :—

“Sir—In reply to yours for an expression of my opinion as to the suitability of the Adelaide river
lands for settlement, and tropical and other cultivation, I herewith comply in as few words as possible :—
The Adelaide River is navigable for large vessels for a distance of about 60 miles, there being an almost
total absence of bars, rocks, or other obstacles to safe passage. In many places vessels can lie in the
greatest safety within a few feet of the bank, thereby affording the highest natural facilities for loading or
discharging cargoes.

‘The land is composed of a heavy black top soil with a very heavy black clay subsoil of great depth.
If this land were well and thoroughly worked and cultivated, it would give the most profitable results for a
very long period, improving yearly with cultivation.

“The open plains of very large extent require no expensive clearing, but need draining, when by the
use of steam ploughs, etc., very extensive areas of country can easily and cheaply be brought under cultiva-
tion, and would produce many and various crops of a remunerative character. With reference to its
special adaptability for sugarcane, the soil has every appearance of possessing all the necessary constituents,
and I am certain that cultivation and exposure to the air would do away with the heavy tenacious charac-
ter of the lands. This country in most places naturally produces a very heavy crop of blady grass, the
constant burning of which naturally tends to fertilise the soils, thus constantly and yearly improving it.
There is an unlimited supply of the best fresh water within a few feet of the surface, providing ample
supply for any necessary irrigation or manufacturing purposes.”

Report, July 1, 1884 (63a).

The late Duke of Manchester, after seven weeks spent in the Northern Territory (four of which were
spent chiefly in the saddle), said :—

“J have seen other parts of Australia, and J must say before coming to Port Darwin I had certainly
thought Queensland the finest part of Australia, but I now consider, as far as I can judge by that
portion of the Northern Territory which I have seen, that the Territory is superior to Queensland, inas-
much as the vegetation seems richer, the grass thicker and of a more permanent character, and the
country much better watered.”

Commission, 18965.
From Mr. Holtze’s report in the year 1888 I take this extract :—

“ Now to come to our Jands. Jt has been maintained that land fit for agriculture can only be found in
patches, and that there are no large areas of good soil in the Territory. Now, this point is in most cases
raised by people who have never been more than a couple of miles from Palmerston, or at the most not off
the telegraph and railway track, or on the goldfield. To expect in those places large blocks of good land
is absurd, for the telegraph line was made on the high stony ground where the road would be passable
during the wet season, and mining districts are not generally blessed with agricultural soil ; but even here
are many places, such as the Rum Jungle, The Margaret, Saunders Creek, the back of the Finniss, ae

where
76 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

 

where really good soil is found in considerable blocks. But it is not there that we must look for our good
land ; it is on the wide plains of our rivers, where the tropical rains of centuries have deposited the
alluvial soil of the higher country, that our agricultural lands are chiefly situated. Here again I must
remind you that we really know nothing of our Territory as yet. The few persons who have seen at least
parts of the Territory give of some places most glowing descriptions. We hear of the magnificent soils of
Florida Station, and Mr. D‘Arcy Uhr, who is surely able to speak with authority, tells me that some of
the soil of the country lying between the Howley and the Daly River equals the best soils he has ever seen

in Queensland.”
RIVERS.

Commission, 1898.

Mr. John MacDonald, for 16 years manager of the Government Sugar Plantation at St. Helena,
Moreton Bay, and afterwards of the Pandora Plantation, Rockhampton, reported :—

“T have visited, in company with Mr. Biddles, the Adelaide River in the Northern Territory.
We proceeded up as far as the block owned by Mr. Munro, where Mr. Sergison commenced planting sugar
cane about two years ago. I consider the Adelaide River the finest river I have seen in the Australian
colonies for navigability and as a site for the cultivation of sugarcane. _I carefully examined the soil and
subsoil in different places, digging deep down. I consider that a large quantity of the land I saw on both
banks of the river—thousands upon thousands of acres—admirably suited for sugarcane growing. There
is room for the establishment of many large plantations and mills. I consider this land equal to any
sugar land in Queensland ; and all that is required is surface drains, deep ploughing, and working. The
facilities for irrigation could not be surpassed, and can be very cheaply applied. I have had many years’
experience in tropical and sub-tropical agriculture, and am acquainted also with agricultural chemistry, and
am satisfied that the constituents of the soil on the banks of the Adelaide River, if properly worked, will
produce heavy crops of cane. The cattle belonging to Fisher & Lyons, on the land, were in first-class
condition. TI have also visited Delissaville, and I cannot conceive how anyone pretending to know any-
thing about sugar or any other cultivation could select such a miserable piece of country. The plantation
appears to be formed upon ironstone ridges, without any vegetable soil at all except by the creek.”

Report, July 1, 1884 (58a).

Macarthur River.—The s.s. Palmerston arrived on June 11 after having safely entered the mouth of
the Macarthur River, and proceeded for a distance of several miles up the channel. The reports of
Captain Carrington, and the plan which has been made in the Land Office here from his sketches, show
that the river—though not to be compared with the Adelaide—has a better and safer entrance, and is
itself a better river for navigation than any other (except the Roper) in the Gulf of Carpentaria. Any
vessel crossing the bar can navigate the river for about 20 miles.

Commission, 1887.

Adelaide River.—1394. Are any of those rivers navigable!—Yes; the Adelaide is navigable nearly
as far as Pearson Bar in a launch. That is over 80 miles. The steamer Palmerston has been up the
Adelaide as far as the Beatrice Hills, or say about 60 miles. I have been up the East Alligator about 40
miles ; and the Daly River is navigable for launches for about 60 or 70 miles. The Victoria River is also
navigable for about the same distance. On the Adelaide River, which I specially visited, are hundreds of
thousands of acres of land which could be utilised for agriculture of some kind, whilst vast treeless plains
partly subject to inundation, are now covered with a thick growth of wild rice, and would certainly grow
the cultivated varieties of this cereal, with all the advantages of water carriage by a splendid navigable
river. When it is remembered that the Adelaide is only one—and that not the best—of some 10 or 12
fine waterways it would seem that in time the Territory should become the rice granary of Australia as
South Australia has been in wheat.

Daly and Roper Rivers.—While in the Northern Territory I travelled over 200 miles south of Port
Darwin ; I ascended the Adelaide River to Pearson Bar, about 85 miles; the Daly River to Owston’s
plantation, about 65 miles ; the South and East Alligator Rivers, about 40 miles in each: the Macarthur
River to Borroloola, about 40 miles ; and the Roper River, to Leichhardt Bar, about 85 miles,

June 30, 1886.—On my return from the Katherine, when at Port Darwin camp, I was shown some
splendid bins of rice, which had been grown on the Margaret River. The Chinaman who owned the rice
informed me (and it was confirmed by Mr. M. D. Armstrong) that the Chinese gave two shillings more
per bag for this rice than for the rice imported from China. Originally 30 pounds were sown Gad the
first harvest yielded over one ton of fine sample rice. I thought the sample so fine, that 1 purchased
a 56-Ib. bag for the Colonial and Indian Exhibition in London. At the same place I was oan some
splendid cobs of maize. On suitable soil maize grows two crops in the year, and with fair seasons each
crop yields 40 bushels to the acre. The price of maize up country this year is £10 per ton

Commission, 1895.
Report to Government Resident (Hon. J, L. Parsons) by Mr. M. Holtze, F.R.G.S., June 23, 1884 :—

““Sir—I have the honor, in compliance with your request, to report on the state of the lands bordering
on. the Adelaide River, as seen by me on our recent visit to this river, with a view to ascertain the
suitabilities of those lands for the growth of sugarcane or any other tropical products

“ This
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 77

 

“This land I must pronounce as superior to any soil I have yet seen in the Territory, and I have not
the slightest hesitation in declaring the same as most suitable for sugar plantations, the soil being of a
heavy black description—elay, with vegetable matter more than 12 inches Jeep, with clay subsoil, and
covered with a dense growth of rich grass ; very rich land indeed, and easily irrigated.

“On the opposite bank of the river is a large area of soil of exactly the same description as the first,
but comprising a much larger area, the plain being here many miles in extent. All this land is, by every
sign of soil and vegetation, not inundated from the river, while in dry seasons most effective irrigation can
be carried on from the river at very slight expense.”

TRADE

1404. Do you think that a trade may arise with India and the Hast as the result of the construction
of the railway !— Yes; in the past I paid considerable attention to the possibility of establishing a trade
with India in horses. During the time I was Minister of Education I introduced resolutions on the
subject into the House of Assembly, and I got a good deal of information on the matter from books and
from persons competent to express an opinion on the subject. I feel confident that there is an immense
trade to be done in the shipment of horses for the remount service in India. I feel sure also that on the
construction of the railway large areas of pastcral country, now useless, would be taken up and applied
to the breeding of sheep, cattle, and horses.

Commission, 1887.

1413. Where do you expect the remunerative traffic on the Intercolonial Railway to come from ?—So
far as the section between Pine Creek and Palmerston is concerned, I believe that the traffic will probably
be remunerative directly the line is opened. There will be an immense development of mining operations.
The report on the mineral resources of the Northern Territory, given by the Rev. Tenison Woods, not
only confirms the views previously expressed by Professor Tate, but is even more encouraging. The
country between Pine Creek and the Katherine will also probably be found rich in minerals, so that the
railway will probably have a large traffic arising out of the mining business in connection with the gold,
silver, tin, and copper mines. We know that nothing gives a country so good a start as the successful
prosecution of the mining industry. Speaking generally of the country south of the Katherine, I have
heard it stated that the interior would carry 30 millions of sheep. Whether that be so or not, it is certain
that immense numbers of sheep might be depastured in the interior. I understand it is generally admitted
that the cost of carriage is the great obstacle to the successful settlement of the interior. Wherever it
costs £30 a ton for the carriage of materials, sheepfarming cannot be carried on profitably. The railway
would very much reduce the cost of carriage, and thus enable much country to be settled which cannot
now be profitably occupied. The successful occupation and settlement of the interior by sheepfarmers
would mean the carriage of many thousands of tons of wire and station stores, besides the annual clip of
wool. As matters at present stand, we have paid as much as £90 a ton for cartage to Tennant Creek.
More cattle stations will also be started in the interior, and I do not see why we should not kill the meat
there, can it, and export it in the same way as they do in the centre of America. There would also be
the element of greater certainty in the carriage, and greater speed. The station-owners would know
exactly when their stores would reach the station, and when their produce would reach its market, which
is very important. I should imagine that there would be very few difficulties in stocking the good
country east and west of the line, and light tramways might be run out from the main line to some of the
best of the country east and west.

1414. You are of opinion that the mineral traffic will in itself be very considerable !—Yes ; that
traffic will principally go to Port Darwin.

1415. You say that beyond a certain distance from the coast it does not pay to take up country for
pastoral purposes? It may pay for cattle, because cattle will convey themselves to a market ; but I should
doubt whether sheepfarming can be carried on successfully beyond a point, say, over 400 miles from the
coast.

1416. What is to create the traffic on the railway between the Peake and the point to the north
where the traffic would begin to fall away towards Port Darwin ?—I look forward to pastoral settlement
right through the country—right through the interior. For half the distance I expect the traffic will go
to Port Darwin, and for the other half to the south. The fact of the railway going through the continent
would lead to almost unlimited settlement, and bring great traffic to the line. ‘Then it must be remem-
bered that if the railway is made, the State will be able to get a much more liberal rental for the leases
of Crown lands.

1301. In connection with the India remount business you are strongly of opinion thab we can do
something in that line 1—I am.

Conmission, 1895,

Referring to my speech on the question on November 1, 1884, I gave up to that time as full account
as I could get of the facts of the case. I there gave the different countries from which the Indian
Government buy their horses, and it is my opinion that those horses can be bred in the Northern Territory,
the centre portion being the best for the class of horse they require. The horse should have a good hard
hoof. That is one of the excellencies of the Arab horse, and shows that it is bred in a dry country.
Parts of our northern South Australia, and southern parts of the Northern Territory are admirably suited

for breeding the class of horse wanted for India.
SIR
 

78 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY.

 

SIR OHARLES TODD, K.C M.G.

Commission, 1887.
30. How far is Charlotte Waters from the Peake 7—200 miles by the road, and 168 miles by the
telegraph line.

35, What is the general character of the country there !—The high lands are all covered with stones,
lut well-grassed flats are found on either side of the creeks.

36. I auppose the bush and herbage is pretty much of the same character as at the Peake!—It is
very much of the same character. Our next station is at Alice Springs, 232 miles from Charlotte Waters.

38. I suppose that Charlotte Waters would be hotter than Alice Springs 1— Undoubtedly.

39. Is there any change in the natural herbage when you get to Alice Springs ’—Directly you cross
the Waterhouse Range you get into a better grass country. From Owen Springs the plains are beautifully
grassed in good seasons, and on the MacDonnell Ranges there is plenty of feed in the way of bushes.

40. We have now got beyond the country of the mound springs?—Yes ; the Dalhousie Springs are
the last—25 miles to the east of the telegraph line. Much of thewater is very good, and not largely
charged with salt. Some of it is excellent.

41. Is there guod natural water in the neighborhood of the Finke 1—Yes ; there is always a plentiful
supply of water in places on the Finke. There was a splendid waterhole near the junction of the Hugh
and the Finke, but that got choked up by sand. You can, however, always find water by sinking.
Excepting in long droughts, there are always good waterholes to be found.

42. I suppose there is not sufficient water for stock without sinking 7—No.

43. Is the depth shallow ?—It varies. Commencing with the Cecilia Well, three miles north of the
Peake, we have between there and Charlotte Waters the Storm Creek Well, 67 feet deep ; Macumba Well,
43 feet; Willow Well, 42 feet; Oolabarinna Well, 71 feet ; Blood Creek Well, 67 feet. All the waters
in the district find their way into Lake Eyre in very wet weather.

44. You find the character of the bush and the herbage improved considerably when Alice Springs is
reached ?—Yes.

46. What is the next station we come to ?—Barrow Creek, 171 miles north of Alice Springs.

51. Does the country improve at Barrow Creek ?—It is nearly all fairly good country from Barrow
Creek to Powell Creek.

53. Do you keep stock at Barrow Creek Station?—Yes; we have done very well there with our
stock. Our last lambing was about 85 per cent.

58. What is the next Station ?—Tennant Creek. That country is not so good, but there is some
good grass country there.

59. How far is that from Barrow Creek ?/—123 miles.
68. What is the next station —Powell Creek, 113 miles beyond Tennant Creek.

69. Are the waters in this district practically permanent?—Yes. There would be no difficulty in
travelling stock over any part of this district.

73. What is the next station ‘—-Daly Waters.

76. Is there plenty of water there?—Yes; between Powell Oreek and Daly Waters there are a
number of creeks running into the Newcastle Waters.

__ 17. Does the spinifex country extend from Daly Waters to Powell Creek 1—_No ; those plains are
fairly well grassed,

78. What is the character of the timber there ?—Stringybark, bloodwood, and mulga.
70. Do you do any cultivation there 1—Yes ; we have a beautiful garden at Daly Waters.

81. What is the next station !—The Katherine, 166 miles from Daly Waters. The Katherine is a
fine river, and the water there is permanent. On leaving Daly Waters, forest country is crossed, with
tracts here and there of rich bay-of-biscay land.

84. Is the character of the herbage much the same as at Daly Waters 7—Yes ; near the Katherine
the feed is very good indeed.

87. What is the next station ?—Pine Creek.

89. What is the character of the herbage there ?—It is stated to be coarse grass,

109, Have you seen much good country in the MacDonnell Ranges ?—Not so much in the ranges as
south be north of them. Between the MacDonnell Range and Reynolds Range there are beautifully-
grassed plains.

110, Are there any ferns in the MacDonnell Ranges !—Yes ; plenty, but only small ones.
118.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 79

118. Have you at all considered the question of the conveyance of the mails by railway 1—As far as
the English mails are concerned, the distance from King George Sound to Colombo is about the same as
from Port Darwin to Colombo, so that unless there should be direct railway communication between
Calcutta and London, and along the eastern side of Bengal, the Transcontinental line would be of slight
use for the conveyance of mails to Great Britain from South Australia. Our communication with China
and the Straits Settlement would, however, be much improved.

ERNEST E. 8. FLINT (Inspector of Telegraphs ).

 

Commission, 1887.

150. How long have you been in the North ?—About sixteen years, during eight years of which tlme
T have held my present position of inspector of telegraphs.

154. Have you found Alice Springs a disagreeable place of residence ? —Quite the reverse.

191. What is the main feed for stock in the country between Alice Springs and Barrow Creek !—
Good seeding grasses, saltbush, and cotton-bush.

192. Kangaroo grass ?—In small patches.

_ _193. Could you give us the names of any of the grasses ’—No ; but I have collected 16 or 17 different
kinds of grass in an afternoon.

194, You get your rains from the monsoons ?—Yes.
195, And they bring up the grasses heavily /—Yes.

201. Have you had any experience in keeping sheep /—We have about 4,000 for the telegraph, 10
miles north of Alice Springs.

202. How do they do ?—Splendidly.
203. What is the increase 1—The highest increase has been 97 per cent., and the lowest 67 per cent.
204. You have plenty of water there /—Unlimited.

205. How about wool—do you find the wool fail !—The wool is very good. It is not like the wool
grown further north. I sent some specimens to Adelaide a few years ago, and the wool from Alice Springs
was worth a penny a pound more than wool from sheep of the same age bred and shorn near Farina.

£15. Do you cultivate a garden at Alice Springs /—Yes.

216. At any other places on the line 1—Yes ; also at Barrow Creek and Tennant Creek. We grow
almost every vegetable except asparagus and celery. We have tried potatoes with great success at Alice
Springs, getting 10 or 12 tubers on each root.

217. Have you tried fruit ~—We have put in apricot and peach trees, which are doing well.

 

HON. J. LEWIS, MLC.

 

Commission, 1895.

577. You are a member of the firm of Bagot, Shakes, & Lewis, of the Burra‘—Yes; one of the
managing directors.

581. What is the character of the country from a pastoral point of view after you leave South
Australia ? - Going north from latitude 26° some fairly good pastoral and horse country is met as far as
Newcastle Waters, but I cannot speak in very high terms of the country from there north. In a good
season I have no doubt but what most of the country to the north of 26° parallel south latitude would be
good pastoral land.

606. Do you think the mineral wealth is in the Territory ?—Yes; I think there is a great deal, gold
specially.

607. Any other minerals /—There are some very good deposits of copper and small deposits of tin.

653. In what way would the railway benefit us !—I think it would bring China closer than it is now,
for when they know that we have a regular communication they will take a great deal of our produce,
meats, etc. Singapore now takes a lot, but China could absorb all that we can produce in South Australia

654, In what other way would the railway benefit South Australia ?—It would help to settle people
on the land. Cheap and quick transit would induce them to settle in the interior, along the line, specially
in the MacDonnell Ranges. North of that a large population could be kept, for some patches of the

country in the Territory are extremely rich. pe
80 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

655. Then you think a population would settle in the MacDonnell Ranges if the railway went
through 1—Yes ; they would settle chiefly for pastoral pursuits, also for gold and other minerals, as it is
a very likely looking country. I think there is money to be got in the London market to take up the
railway.

699. You would expect the Transcontinental Railway to be taken up by private enterprise and not by
the Government, and you anticipate that a profitable trade would be secured ?—Yes; it must be con-
structed if we are to have people settled on the land.

700. Do not you think that it would bea big undertaking for a small population like ours?—It
would be an assistance to our country. We would only have to give our land and others would make the
railway for us.

Mr, Lewis also, in addressing the South Australian Parliament in September, 1901, on a motion
dealing with the Northern Territory, said: “That one district alone was capable of keeping 10,000,000
sheep. Barclay Tableland, of which very little was known, was a tract of very good country between
latitudes 17 and 21, and adjoining the Queensland border, and extending in a westerly direction about
150 miles. Some of the cattle bred on that country, after travelling 1,150 miles, sold in the Adelaide
market at about £12 10s. a head, and some sheep which were recently travelled down brought 16s.
He believed that country was capable of carrying from 8,000,000 to 10,000,000 sheep. It had a very
good rainfall, and suffered very little from drought, and was better to go squatting on than the dry salt-
bush country, which this country could well replace. Some members would remember that the country
was known as the Herbert River blocks, and brought as rent up to £2 or £3 a mile. It was close to the
Gulf of Carpentaria ports.”

Mr. 8. J. Mitchell, M.P. for the Northern Territory, also said :—“ There was the Roper. That river
flowed through magnificent black soil flats and rich lands, and its watershed was enough to make
a prosperous land of the Territory. One friend, who spent many years in the Territory, said that the
bullocks working every day in the district where he was were too fat to work, so much feed did they get.
At another place grass was so high that it collected in the stirrup-irons when going on horseback through
it ; and now and again the collection proved so painful that it had to be cleared. The Pastoralists’ Party
would find that their fellows were turning longing eyes to the rich pasture lands of the North, and were
casting up the cost of working runs there. And every true man who wants to help to push the world
would certainly want to see such a large part of it as the Northern Territory sent upon its proper course.”

 

 

C. J. DASHWOOD (Government Resident ).

Commission, 1895.

I consider the area of suitable land for tropical agriculture enormous, Want of capital is the great
drawback in regard to mining and agriculture. Chinese labor is the best (2889). The pastoral industry
suffers from the want of a market. Given a better supply of water and a market for the stock, and there
would be no reason why the pastoral industry should not be a prosperous one (2902). I think the pastoral
laws are most liberal, the pastoralist also having the advantage of the subsidy of £5,000 a year for
exporting cattle. This subsidy has shown that the markets of the East will take our cattle. It would be
money well spent if the Government were to prosecute boring for water (2974). The possibilities of the
tableland are enormous if plenty of water could be found. A Chinese merchant wanted to take up two
or three thousand acres of ]and near Rum Jungle for rice, etc. Not being able to get permission to import
his own labor, he had to give up the idea.

2902. Is there anything in the nature of the country itself to cause the pastoral industry to be in a
depressed condition !—You see a large part of the best pastoral country in the Northern Territory is the
tablelands, which is deficient in water. Losses there in times of drought, in consequence of the want of
water two or three years ago, were very heavy indeed. Given a better supply of water and a market for
the stock, there would be no reason why the pastoral industry should not be a prosperous one in the
Northern Territory. The want of a market is, I believe, the great want in the Northern Territory. If
they had a market the people interested would have developed the industry themselves, and discovered
water. The rents have been reduced, there being now a very small rental paid. In my opinion the

pastoral industry would not have called for a reduction in the rents if they had a market, but they have
never had a market,

2883. Referring to agriculture, can you give the Commission any idea as to the area of land suitable
for tropical agriculture 1—I cannot pretend to do that.

2884, Is it large or small ?—I consider it enormous.

2885. Suitable for different kinds of agriculture ?—I do. In my travels over the country I have seen

vast areas of land which, in my opinion, are eminently suitable for agricultural purposes of various kinds,
such as rice, sugar, and other tropical and sub-tropical products.

2891. To be constructed on any terms rather than not constructed at all?—Yes; I think the land-
grant system is favored. _ That idea is principally brought about because they think it unlikely that the
Government would make it, and that if it is to be made the only hope of constructing it is by land grants.

2892. Do you share that view 1—I think it would be a most advantageous thing for the railway to be
constructed. I have always held the opinion that giving away a certain amount of land fcr this railway,

and
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 81

and thus to enhance the value of the land that remains and give better facilities to the interior, would be
the best thing that could happen to the whole of Australia. It would then be only a matter of time of
connecting it with Queensland and Western Australia, and there can be no question about the advantages
which would be derived from it in the Northern Territory, the distance being too great from the southern
markets. If the mining and agricultural industries had been developed, there would have been a local
market for the stock, which is only the case to a small extent comparatively.

 

 

REPRESENTATIVE VABIEN J. SOLOMON (Commonwealth Parliament ).

Commission, 1895.

16. As to the future of the mining industry in the Territory, I firmly believe that there is no richer
country in Australia for gold, silver, tin, and copper mines. The country on the Victoria River is well-
watered and well-grassed, the greatest trouble with the pastoralists being the want of a market for their
beef, which is equal to any I have eaten in Australia.

23. An industry which has never been tried, except experimentally, is horse-breeding for the Indian
remount service, and I am confident, from the class of stock I have seen grown in the Territory without the
least care or trouble, that the climate and herbage are everything that can be desired for horse-breeding.

24, One of the chief causes of the present depression in the Northern Territory, and the paucity of
European population, has undoubtedly been the lack of encouragement given by the various Governments
to European tradesmen and laborers to settle in the country. For many years past the people of the
Territory and the press have urged upon those entrusted with the administration of government the justice
of only employing Europeans upon the whole of the public works of the colony; but their requests have
been unheeded, the question of cheap labor and economy having been considered of more importance than
the settlement of a European population in the Territory.

31. In addition to the advantages which will be gained by the close proximity of the Port Darwin
terminus of the line to China, Japan, Singapore, Java, and the other Eastern ports, the people of which
would become consumers of our beef, mutton, and other produce, I feel satisfied that when the line is
constructed branch lines will be built to the borders of Queensland and Western Australia to tap the
trade of both these colonies. All the enquiries and investigations I have made lead me to the conclusion
that the construction of this proposed main trunkline through Central Australia will ensure the lasting
prosperity of the whole colony.

125. Referring to the pastoral industry, has not the Government tried to obtain artesian water in
the Territory !—Only on one occasion, I believe.

128. If other bores were put down and water obtained, would it develop large pastoral industries 1—
Yes; there is no finer pastoral country in the whole of Australia than on the Herbert River and
tableland.

137. You lay such stress on the mineral wealth of the Territory !—Yes ; bub I do not think it would
matter much in the interest of the colony who mined the minerals, whether companies or private persons.

227. Supposing people had been able to get land, what would they have done to live ?—In the early
days we had to import everything, including horsefeed and vegetables. These things could have been
grown. Maize grows very well. The difficulty was that the whole of the land was locked up, and people
could not get it.

228. Supposing they had taken up large quantities of land, and had gone into the cultivation of these
products ?—They could have made a good living.

229. Why was not land taken up under the Act of 1890%—Because so much of the good land is
locked up.

 

 

HON. W. FORREST, M.P. ( Western Australia).

 

4275. You are a large lessee of land in the Northern Territory !—Yes ; we hold about 10,000 miles
of country there—that is the Northern Pastoral Company, of which I am a member. We have been
lessees in the Northern Territory for 18 years.

4279, Has anything been done in the way of artesian boring {—Yes ; boring for artesian water has
been tried, but no artesian water has yet been found. However, in all such wells permanent pumping
water has been struck at a depth of 250 feet, which rises about 30 feet in the bore. An the Alexandra
bore this supply was tested by pumping to the extent of 20,000 gallons in 24 hours, without making any
impression. Pumping water can be found all over the tableland, as has been proved by ordinary wells

either on the tableland or just across the border in Queensland. bag

F
82 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

WM. F. BUCHANAN (Stochkowner).

 

Commission, 1895.
2079. You are a resident of New South Wales ’—Yes.

2080. I understand that you hold considerable country in the Northern Territory !— Yes; on the
Victoria River.

2081. Is that a sheep or cattle run /—Cattle and horses.
2082. Have you been in the Northern Territory yourself !—No.

2083. What is the quantity of land you hold from the Government !—Six blocks, comprising on an
average 150 or 200 square miles per block.

2084. How long have you held it ?—About 15 years, perhaps a little more.
2085. Do you consider that you have it fully stocked !—Yes ; ever since.
2086. What is the character of the country generally !— Excellent.

2087. What market have you for surplus stock !—I have always sent mine to Port Darwin, recently
to Mr. H. W. Stevens, who ships them to Singapore, and who is subsidised by your Government.

2088. Is that the only market ?—The only one I know of at the present time, unless you count that
one of Western Australia, which has recently been shut off by the poll tax of 30s. per head, which was
quite uncalled for.

2089. Can you get fair prices for your stock !—Hitherto I have had fair prices. I sold Mr. Stevens
1,000 head last year at 50s. per head on the station, he having to drive them to Port Darwin.

2102.—Is it better country than New South Wales ?—It is grand country. The country on the
Victoria River is some of the best in the Northern Territory, and the increase and health of the cattle is
good. As regards the expenses of carrying on the industry, increased population and a greater amount of
energy thrown into pastoral matters will reduce them. In my opinion, there is a great future before the
Northern Territory.

2110.—Your idea, then, in order to obtain that glorious future is for the Government to spend more
money in fostering various industries !—I think so, because I think that there are very large industries
that might be fostered—for instance, sugar. There are some very large tracts of sugar country in the
Northern Territory. I do not speak from personal knowledge, but still I know such is the case. I am
acquainted with the nature of the soil and the growth that is required for the sugarcane and other tropical
plants, and I think all the necessary elements are largely found in the Northern Territory. The pro-
duction of sugar would find large markets down here. I am connected with the sugar industry, and know
all about it. It would be more productive than Queensland because you can command cheaper labor.

21 11. What, cheaper than the kanaka?—You can get labor in any quantity from the eastern
countries. I have a plantation in Bundaberg and have kanakas working; I also have a refinery. A very
small area absorbs an enormous amount of capital.

; 2112. From what you know of the sugar plantations in Queensland and of the land suitable for
agriculture in the Northern Territory, what is your opinion of the relative position of the two?—I think
the position of the Northern Territory is on a par with Queensland with regard to the disposal of the
produce and transit. You certainly can absorb a great deal of produce here, both sugar and other things.

I am quite satisfied there is a great future in sugar in the Northern Territory provided there are tracts of
land on the banks of those rivers that I think there must be.

2113.—Can you suggest anything that we can do that would attract the sugar planters to the
Northern Territory '—Yes; I think if you judiciously selected an area of land on the banks of some of
these navigable rivers, that by a sort of land-grant system you could induce a large population of practical
workers to work in concert in connection with a subsidised refinery which “would pay tribute. In
Queensland, where these communities are gathered together and can guarantee a certain amount of
sugar, the Government build refineries and make a moderate charge of interest. So long that you get
back the interest that you pay and subsidies, you are in pocket because you get the country settled. By
thus settling a population you also help the pastoral interest by increasing the consumption of stock.

2114. You think there are sugar planters in Queensland who would go to the N i i
; orthern Territory if

they had the chance !—I think so. They would come and take up land on tribute or buy it where éhey
see the prospect of getting a subsidised factory to consume their sugar. These planters get from 10s. to
20s. per ton for the sugarcane in Queensland, and an acre of land yields from 20 to 40 tons. I have got

very good cane from a plantation which had been running 14 years, but th i i
there should be no mistake about the selection of the Ta Deere lee Svan Sigh ot ERE ee

2146. Do you think the Northern Territor ing i
: e No y could do anything in the European market ’—Yes; I
ae ce European market is quite as open to them as it is to us. I think a large livestock trade could
e carried on from the Victoria River, for you have a level sea and calm water and not the great heat to
go through—then you have the Singapore and Indian markets as well.

2147. You think it would be almost as well as re i i i
:  almo gards the Overland Railway to wait and see if we
cn any ee resources !— Waiting is a bad thing in any case if you think ‘ees will be good results.
¢ only danger would be that by not waiting you might throw away large mineral prospects, -

2148.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 83

2148. There is an element of doubt if the railway was constructed whether it would be a paying
concern even to a syndicate ?—I think it must ultimately, as it opens up a high road and a quicker one to
Singapore. It would bring you within 10 days nearer England than you are now. You know what the
present generation are thinking about—to make everything quicker.

2133, Have you any knowledge or experience of the pastoral interest in Queensland {— Yes.

2134. Do you think there are equal advantages in pastoral pursuits in the Northern Territory as in
Queensland 1—I think so; it only wants the facilities to deal with them. You have as good a country.
It only requires an outlet for its produce to make the thing prosper.

2135, Have you given much thought to the continuation of the railway right through ?—I have given
considerable attention to all those things. It would be a fine thing if you had a railway through. You
have 150 miles of railway at the Port Darwin end, and a line from this end to Oodnadatta, so that only
about 1,100 miles or so remain to be made. I see no reason why gold should not be found in the central
portion of the country. If so, then, given the reilway, things must prosper. Then you can run branches
off the main line.

2138. Supposing a railway was constructed between the two places, would that bea very great
advantage to the pastoral interests of the Northern Territory !—I should certainly think so. I do not see
why I could not even bring stock down here. We travel cattle farther than that—from a little distance
from the head of the Gulf right down to Sydney, they being 12 months on the road.

2143. You are favored with some of the beat of the country !—Yes, it is a good country. You can
conserve water anywhere, so long as you have money enough. I have had a great deal to do with water
conservation, and am never deterred in an enterprise for want of water. I would strongly suggest (my
opinion must be taken for what it is worth), if there is country, and it must be recollected that you
cannot judge land by just passing through it, as very often a half-mile on either side of your track there
may be good country—I would suggest that the railway be constructed by a land-grant syndicate. It does
not matter who occupies the land, for they will become consumers.

 

CHARLES OHEWINGS, F.G.S

Extract from paper by Mr. Charles Ohewings, Ph.D., F.G.S., read before the Royal Geographicat
Society (London), in June, 1891 :—*

So vast is the area of unoccupied land in the interior of Australia that it may be counted by scores
of thousands of square miles. Much of the land is admirably adapted for various uses ; much more is
suited only for pastoral and like pursuits , and comparatively little but that can be turned to profitable
account. That this vast area should be occupied, and become an asset to the Crown, but few will disagree
with ; and the question as to how this end can be speedily obtained is of considerable moment.

In the land legislation of the different Australian colonies, and its effect on the back country, we have
a precedent to guide us part of the way, but the land treated on in this paper is farther from the settled
districts, and the nature of the country and the climatic conditions differ, stock have to travel longer
distances to market, and heavier rates for transport of stores, dearer labor, and many other things have to
be taken into account; but nothing will prove of such advantage and stimulus as to make access to the
interior easy by means of a railway, and liberal land laws to induce mankind to stay when there, and
make homes there. The Transcontinental Railway is looked upon by many as a national undertaking ;
and that the national debt of South Australia shall not become burdensome by a debt so large as a work
of such Jarge dimensions would entail, a population should be induced to settle on the land on either side,
which is an essential to the line if it is to become remunerative. The idea of the Transcontinental line
proving a payable investment, I know, is scouted by many ; but I do not, and cannot, think but that it
can, and will, if economically constructed, prove a good investment. Such a vast area of country, with
such natural advantages, must, if utilised economically, be able to support a railway running through the

centre of it.

In the vicinity of the higher lands and the ranges in general, the pastoral prospects are good, and
millions of stock can, and will, be depastured over this great plain in the future ; and but few parts are so
destitute of feed—provided water is obtained—to prevent stock doing well, particularly those bred in the
country. The vegetation covering this land is not semi-tropical, but that of a temperate zone: its growth
is nob rank—the extremes of temperature are too severe for that. In the early morning ice is not
infrequently seen, and at noon on the same day the thermometer will range over 100°. -

Of the fertility of the soil there can be no doubt, and too much cannot be said of the succulent herbs
that grow in profusion after rain. The sandy nature of the soil retains considerable heat, and acts like a
hotbed, and forces the herbage and grasses to grow after rain very quickly. The soil is sweet, and stock
eat almost every kind of vegetation voraciously. Where irrigation can be brought to bear, there is no
limit to the growing of fruit, cereals, and vegetables. Good, fresh water must be used, as proved by the
missionaries on the Finke, near the MacDonnell Ranges. SENATOR

 

* Journal Royal Geographical Society, 1891, Vol. 2,
F2
84 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

SENATOR HON. THOMAS PLAYFORD (Commonwealth Parliament).

—_—_——

The Hon. Thomas Playford, of lengthened experience in agricultural matters, and who visited the
Territory in 1892, gives the following testimony :—*

I look to the pastoral occupation of the country as the one that in years to come will be the more
profitable and the mainstay of the Territory. I believe tropical agriculture can be carried on with success
on the lower part of the Daly River. When that part of the Territory is. occupied with plantations,
experience will be gained, and the chances are that the poorer lands in the vicinity will le found on trial
suitable for some kind of tropical product that will pay to grow.

I believe large quantities of rice and cotton might be grown in the Territory—rice on the river flats,
cotton on the best of the ironstone and sandy land ; but I doubt if either the one or the other of these

products would pay the European planter.

In Palmerston, on the ironstone country, the pineapple grows well, and is of most excellent flavor.
The Chinese sell them in the season for 6d. per dozen. If they could find a ready sale they would grow
them in large quantities. A canning establishment at Palmerston should pay, if properly managed, as well
as at Singapore, where large areas of pineapples are cultivated and canned. The fruit, as tasted by me at
Singapore, is not to be compared in flavor to that I have eaten in the Territory.

The Daly River contains a strip of the best soil that I have seen in my travels in the Northern
Territory, except some land on the Katherine, which is, after all, the main branch of the Daly River beyond
the junction of the Flora. From two miles above the Chinaman’s garden to a point 20 miles down the
river there is a strip of rich, sandy, alluvial soil on the north side, varying in width from a mile to two
and more miles. On the south side the strip is said to be much narrower, but I could get no accurate
information. I landed at one place and found the soil the same, and judging from the absence of any
change in the vegetation, the alluvial land was over a mile in breadth. The banks of the river are from
90 feet to 25 feet above the level of the water, and the land has a slight fall from the river bank. By
pumping, the whole of the rich alluvial land could be cheaply irrigated. Below the 20-mile point referred
to there is for about 10 miles still some excellent Jand ; but at high tide the water, when the river is low,
is brackish, and irrigation could not be depended upon. From the 10-mile point to the sea the land is,
I should judge, better fitted for rice than any other crop.

SPENCER AND GILLEN EXPEDITION, 1901.

The following extract is here appended from the “ Review of Reviews” of March 20, 1902, with
reference to the Spencer and Gillen Expedition of 1901 :—

Professor Baldwin Spencer and his party have returned from their great exploring tour, having
accomplished a somewhat remarkable feat. They left Adelaide 12 months ago, took the line which passes
by Charlotte Waters across the MacDonnell Ranges, thence striking east to Macarthur River, on the
western side of the Gulf of Oarpentaria.

; Professor Spencer was thinking more of ethnology than of trade in his travels ; but, incidentally, his
journey promises to add a new and rich province to habitable Australia. The central regions of the
continent are supposed to be a more vaster and more arid Sahara, where nothing grows and nothing can
live, The Spencer Expedition will help to destroy that unflattering myth.

Professor Spencer saw wide areas of magnificent stock country, which only requires water ake it
habitable. And the needful water, the Professor says, can be obistied Sattly ty artesian oan and
partly by conservation. There is no finer climate in the world than that of the MacDonnell Ranges.
Indeed, the winter in the interior was of the most perfect kind—bright, clear days and cool nights—
admirable conditions for a consumptive sanatorium. With its splendid areas of pastoral lands, its gold-
fields on the MacDonnell and Murchison Ranges ; and, further north, the valuable copper deposits of the
Gulf country, which has also the advantage of a good rainfall, Professor Spencer sees a future full of
promise before that vast tract of country lying between the Bight and the Gulf.

Af, instead of building up a few crowded cities on the seaboard, we were unlocking the treasures of
the interior, there would be a gleam of additional cheerfulness in the outlook for Australia.

INDIAN

* See “ Notes of a Visit to India and the Northern Territory.” Government Paper, page 97.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 85

 

INDIAN REMOUNT SERVICE.

 

PROPOSAL to ESTABLISH INDIAN GOVERNMENT HORSE DEPOTS
IN THE NORTHERN TERRITORY For BREEDING anpb TRAINING
REMOUNTS For tHe INDIAN ARMY.

CAPTAIN W. R. CRESWELL, R.N., C.M.G. *

 

In a report dated November 27, 1898, by Captain W. R. Creswell, R.N., he suggests the establish-
ment of Indian Government horse depots in the Northern Territory for breeding and training remounts
for the Indian Army. Captain Creswell had previously spent some time in the Northern Territory, and
in 1885 was successful in opening a stock route from the tableland to the Gulf country. We append
extracts from his proposal :—

The Austro-Hungarian army, by a splendid system of breeding and breaking for Government use and
of farming out reserve horses, has approached nearer than any other system to the perfection of horse
supply. Upon a somewhat less elaborate plan we should in India command as ready a source, and one
that would prove equal to any demands,

What is the ideal ever before any remount department? (1) A supply equal to the ordinary
demands ; (2) to respond readily to extraordinary demands without undue straia or any lowering of the
standard of quality ; (3) available at shortest notice ; (4) when received and drafted, remounts to be
ready for immediate service. This ideal is really within eagy practical reach of attainment.

The first and cardinal point of the scheme is that the remount depédt must be in Australia, It will
be necessary to meet at once the objection as to distance from the proposed port in the Northern Territory,
for the depdt to Calcutta is only 10 or 11 days’ steaming, and most of it in fairly smooth water.
Remounts now come from the southern and eastern ports—a much greater distance and through stormier
seas. A weak point, and an unnecessary expense, in the present system is the long interval after landing
before a horse is fit for service. During all that time he is eating his head off. Upon landing now he has
both to become acclimatised and to be schooled for his soldiering. If sent to India ready broken he would
shorten the fodder bill by half; ‘“‘ broken” includes trained for his work in cavalry or artillery, as the case
may be. The double wear and tear, each of which reacts on the other, and extends the whole time of
acclimatisation and military training, is a severe ordeal. Expense of maintenance is such a prohibitory
objection to any proper remount reserve in India or any other thickly-populated country that under
present system of supply you have no other or better way than the present. Take your depét out of
India to a comparatively unpopulated country, and the expense-of-maintenance objection disappears. In
fact, this is such an important part of the whole that space devoted to it will be well applied.

Iu Australia the horse in the bush and on nearly all runs “cuts his own grass” ; he is, in fact,
‘allowed nothing a year to find himself.” To realise how exceedingly well he ‘does himself” on this
small allowance he should be seen and ridden. On cattleruns, where a day’s muster and “ cutting-out
work on a camp” is as hard as any day’s hunting, he gets nothing but the grass he picks up for himself.
They are worked off the grass continuously for a fortnight or three weeks —not all cattle-mustering days ;
that goes without saying. Far the greater number have never had a mouthful of any other fodder in their
lives. One very fine old warrior of mine literally starved in a stable for two nights, refusing to eat good
corn and wheaten hay out of a manger. Used to a free life in the open, his legs were the only portions of
him that “ filled,” yet he carried me home 70 miles, and “ reefed ” at his bit for the last half-mile canter to
the home paddock gate.

The fattening and growing qualities of Australian grass are really wonderful. I have seen many fat
horses brought in from the “run,” but I shall never forget the condition of two we chanced upon when
exploring on the tableland which lies to the west and south-west of the Gulf of Oarpentaria. They were
masterless exiles, the property—we found out afterwards—of an unfortunate who had been killed by the
blacks 18 months before. They were so pleased to meet some of their own kind again after such a long
solitude that they ran in amongst our spare loose horses, and we caught them and hobbled them as easily as
our own. One of our party thought he would take a turn out of one of them the next day, and accordingly
saddled him. The “ going” was certainly sticky after rain, but less than two hours was more than enough
for this obese animal, and he simply laid himself out at full length quite pumped out and done up. They
would have taken prizes in a “ fat gelding ” class at Smithfield, and their coats—like all horses on good
grass—shone like satin. It is from these parts—the Northern Territory tableland—where horses on
nothing a year can do themselves so very well that the Indian army should draw its horse supply. The
most weighty objections to a reserve store of horses, viz., fodder, grooming, and attendance would weigh
nothing here. The writer was out on the country with the first men who took their stock there, and well
remembers their delight with those splendidly-grassed rolling downs and plains on the vast tableland.
Occasionally broken by a wooded ridge or belt of timber, the downs stretched away for mile upon mile as
far as one could see. The permanent waters were few and unpleasantly far between, “ but dams and wells
would soon be made,” and it is sad to remember how hopes that ran so high then have since been banished.
There was no fault in the country itself—it was all that could be wished for—but the lack of a market for
their fat stock was an insuperable bar to success. Our horses showed their approval of the new land, and

soon put on rolls of fat.
There

* Published in the Allahabad “ Pioneer,” November 27, 1902.
86 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

There is another trait that marks it as the natural breeding-ground for India—the climate is not at all
unlike the dry air of North-West India in the cool months. Horses would feel the change less if bred
there than any other part of Australia. Shipped and landed in the cool months there would be little or
no change. Both in climate and soil the Northern Territory tableland has everything to recommend it for
horse-breeding. Much of it is limestone country—the best for bone development. Bred there they
would be “dry-country” horses, so noted for stamina, general development, and, in fact, for everything
that makes the difference between a “ sticker” and a “ Sunday horse,” or as a “ one-day ” animal—usually a
coast-bred one—is called in the bush. Now, while in India you have the constant demand, here you have
the most favorable conditions for meeting it, with only a short three weeks by road and steamer between
—a smovther and shorter passage than the breezy Leeuwin or east coast. The shorter route would be a
valuable gain in war, besides lessening the chance of capture at sea.

AxBouT THE Depot.

A pioneer’s hardest work when taking stock on to new land is keeping them there without fences and
paddocks. ‘Breaking stock into the run” keeps him fairly busy, and it is only in the time snatched from
this that he can put up his yards and rough homestead. For some time the stock are herded by day and
“camped” at night ; then they are let go on their honor—an unstable quantity—and the more trying
work of “riding round all tracks and turning in the stragglers ” begins.

After rains a mob or two occasionally strike off for home, and the stockman’s pluck and endurance
are fairly tried, sticking to the tracks, on short rations—perhaps without a blanket—till he gets them.
Where biacks are rowdy there is an additional “charm” to this most exasperating of all work. When
the horses take it into their heads to “make for home” they cover huge distances, and the chances of
heading them back are less. The pioneer squatter, being a man of small capital—which is probably all in
his live stock—cannot afford to fence, but a Government establishment could do so, and endless trouble
and loss thus be saved. In fact the more complete the improvements can be made before the stock
arrives, the better. It is the wisest economy. ‘To begin on too large a scale, putting on more stock than
can well be attended to, is to court failure from the start. A ring fence to contain 200 miles of country,
with paddocks suitably sub-divided for 1,000 or 1,500 mares and stallions, should be built at once.
Horse-fencing, in these days of barbed wire, is comparatively cheap. Much, of course, depends on the
position of the waters, but additional paddocks, as they were wanted, would not be a heavy item.

In the Barcoo and Western Queensland downs country a 90- or 100-mile sheep paddock was not at all
uncommon, and horses can be well looked after in enclosures of that size. Yearling and filly paddocks
would require no sub-divisions, and would cost less ; they would be added as required. The ring fence
enclosing 200 miles would give ample pasture even in a poor season for the “ first families,” numbering
1,500 for the first two or three years.

Everything, of course, depends on the parent stock, and to recommend judgment in their selection is
a platitude. In the matter of cost, I do not think I am under-estimating when I give £10 per head as
the price ab which they could be bought in numbers of not less than 15 or 20 at a deal. It also goes
without saying that they should be bought as near their new home as possible, both in distance and climate
— Western and North-Western Queensland for choice, and perhaps even the north-west of New South
Wales. From the colder country they would take a little longer to become acclimatised. If bought for
delivery at the depét in the Northern Territory, the overlanding is the seller’s concern, but there should
be a clause in the contract requiring them to be delivered in good condition. With a day’s stage between
each, four lots could be easily supervised by a trusty headman. In small numbers they travel faster, are
far more contented, feed better, and the consequences of a smash—a stampede at night—are proportion-
ately limited.

Without going into details of road management, it will suffice here to say that three months
from date of purchase in Queensland, would place the mares in their paddocks on the tableland.
There are, of course, many tastes and ideas as to sires, but I think the chief director of
the depot, whoever he might be, would be unwise in buying sires for army horses to dream
of importing. Stud horses, used to being in the open, and already well-proved stock-getters, would, of
course, command a price, but a good one would be the wisest economy, and no others would answer our
purpose. Later on, a stud farm would be part of the establishment, and to itnport for the “stud farm”
either from the southern colonies or New Zealand or England would be the proper course. Five hundred
mares should be added the second year. Casualties would certainly occur, and when purchasing to make
these up it would be well to send over a large draft. It is the years between investment and first returns
that break down the man of limited capital, but this would not be felt by a Government. Horse-breeding
means a long wait for profits always—with Indian army horses especially so. It is due to this, probably,
that no private speculator has taken up breeding on a large scale for the Indian cavalry market. In the
present case, as “six off” is to be our age standard, it is even longer,

Seven years—or 1907, supposing the stock to have been overlanded early in 1900—should see the first
draft ready. Sixty per cent. of the first 1,000 mares would give 600 foals. The percentage of increase is a
modest one, and includes casualties from foaling right up to six years old. With anything like good manage-
ment the 60 per cent. rate should be more than fulfilled. Of the 600 1901 foals half would be fillies, and
of these it would be well to keep back half, or 100, for breeding. The first year’s draft of 450 would Le
followed by 610 the second year, and at 610 head a year the output should be kept until the 200 home-bred
ones, annually added, gradually came into foal-bearing. When the increase in stock is considered, it will
be seen by the table that there is no capital irrevocably sunk. Live stock is a fairly liquid asset, and the
speculation, from a commercial point of view, fairly remunerative and safe. At the end of the eighth or
ninth year it would be past the experimental stage, and only remain for the Government to decide whether
it had answered so well as to repay repeating immediately with a second breeding depot, or merely to
breed gradually into numbers from the first horse station. The latter would have a certain advantage in
breeding from locally-reared stock, but it would be the slower plan of the two. In either case a few years
would raise the numbers required for the whole remount service.

“ Prospecti ”
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 87

 

= Prospecti” are always discounted. A glance will show that the tables are here modestly estimated.
I think most Australian breeders will allow that 60 per cent. is a small estimate for season’s foals from
mares of this class. My own experience with smaller herds of mares up to 50 and over, running loose in
the bush with one horse, has been far higher, two or three mares only missing. Then, again, £30 per
head is a low figure to charge for a remount ; it would, however, more than cover cost of production. If
we value a remount ready for export on the run at £50, the figure is even then modest enough.

RESERVES AGAINST EMERGENCY.

_ So far this point has not been touched, and it stands as one of the greatest gains of the depét system.
“ Six off,” or even “ rising six,” everybody will admit, is a sufficiently matured age; but all horsemen
know how much longer a horse will last that has all his work in him at six. Two years’ work before six
probably means the loss of three times that amount in later life. With six as the ordinary age standard,
we have on hand all the fives as a reserve—a reserve which, when the depot is in full working order,
might tide over an emergency demand, and would at least allow the Remount Department to make
arrangements at a better advantage than at present. There would be less haste, and the department would
not be faced by hardening markets. It is fairly safe to assume that reductions would follow when the
emergency of war had been met, and the depét would in due time work back to its old standard of age.
A reserve of horses broken and partially trained to military work is worth double the same number of raw
horses. To effect this should be a special feature of the management, of which the following is an out-
line :—Every animal to be(1) handled as a foal, and stabled for a week or two. | Whenever this has been
done—and it has, of course, only been tried with high-class stock—it has well repaid the trouble. The
saving in life or permanent injury, when later on the colts are got in for breaking, is most marked. (2)
Broken to saddle as “two-year-olds,” and then turned out. (3) As four-year-olds, classed as cavalry,
artillery, etc., thoroughly broken to saddle or harness, with some preliminary gunwork, and all made
accustomed to picketing in lines and to the order of service and life before them. (4) As five-year-olds,
tan in their special class; fillies for stud drafted. (5) As six-year-olds, drafted as remounts for

ndia.

Perhaps enough has been roughly outlined to give an idea of the advantages of breeding Indian
remounts in a land so near its shores, at 50 per cent. less cost, and of the exact kind required. Why has
it not been undertaken by private individuals? The reasons are many, but the difference between
breeding horses for one’s own use and breeding for a market is the chief. Breeding horses for oneself has
been so commonly the rule, and proved so successful, that nearly everywhere the supply has exceeded the
local requirements, and the surplus thrown on the market has made horseflesh of a kind such a glut that
many a squatter of horsey tastes has preferred to buy rather than breed. It has only rarely been under-
taken on a large scale, and in each case where it has failed it has not been due to lack of increase, but to
undisguised neglect. Horses, indeed, are so little trouble on a run that they get hardly any attention at
all—rather less than farmyard poultry. It would take too long to go into the question of horse manage-
ment on a run, but the ease with which they can be looked after has caused even the little they require to
be left undone. Then, first a few, and then more, go wild, and in-breeding and general deterioration
follow shortly afterwards, spoiling the herd and making it quite unmanageable. Even on unfenced runs
horses need so little—merely to be seen and yarded once a month or so, and taught where to gallop to
when startled ; instead of which they are sometimes months without even seeing a stockman, and then
abused because some of the youngsters make off at the strange sight, and take to galloping. If they are
followed by a poor bush rider, or one badly mounted who cannot “take a wheel out of them” and yard
them, the mischief has begun. With paddocks, however large, it is simple work. Horses should be
bothered and driven about as little as possible, but they should be seen every few days, when, instead of
only seeing their dust as they disappear in the scrub, we enjoy the most pleasing of all bush sights—a mob
of well-bred mares and youngsters trotting up, tossing their heads, and gathering close round for a good
stare and friendly chin-chin. It is with station horses a case of wanting little, but that little constantly.

Development is retarded owing to the jealousy of the popular vote, and its deep prejudice against the
importation of colored labor to any large extent. A horse-breeding establishment employing only white
stockmen would not offend these susceptibilities. It would be specially favorable to a project giving such
hopes of development on lines which would bring many other indirect sources of business to a land just
now languishing without it. As a great and mutual benefit to both lands—especially India—I do not
think a better could be devised. In conclusion, I may say that though the numbers may appear large,
involving some 10,000 or 12,000 head of horses, they would be perfectly manageable under systematic
treatment ; and it is not at all out of the way in a land where there are 60,000 head of cattle in one herd.

Whenever the Government breeding question is broached to shippers they invariably say that, with
the pick of the Australian market at their own figure, the Indian Government would be foolish indeed to
seek for any change. This does not, however, meet the question of a reserve, or the shorter route from
the Northern Territory to Calcutta diminishing the chances of hostile interruption or capture in war time.
It is true that even when purchasing it would be possible to form a reserve. Such would be a convenience
to both buyers and sellers, but it would not prevent the hardening of the market in war, and be far behind
in the way either of convenience or of getting a better animal of the exact type required—better
acclimatised and already well broken to military work—in increasing numbers each year. In all these
particulars only a great breeding establishment can meet Indian requirements. Lately the horses taken
home by the New South Wales Lancers were sold at very good prices in the London market. At the same
time we hear that a commission of British officers was sent to the Argentine to buy horses. Surely if the
need had been foreseen six years ago, the commission costing thousands might have been displaced for a
cablegram to Australia ordering the required number. And is there no probability that six years,
or even seven or ten years hence, we shall be sending commissions to other “ weed ”-producing lands to
mount our cavalry, and this when we can put them on the best horses that ever looked through a bridle,
when we can mount them as no cavalry has been mounted in all time? Might it not be as well, therefore,

to turn our opportunities to practical use ?
MINERALOGY.
88 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

MINERALOGY.

 

J. G. KNIGHT, LR.IBA, ALCE.

The goldfields of the Northern Territory are now ascertained to be very extensive. At present gold is
known to exist over a block of country containing about 1,700 square miles, which has been indifferently
prospected, and as country of a similar character extends for a much greater distance, it 1s more than probable
that when it has been carefully examined the area already known will be but a small portion of the whole
auriferous country. Many valuable gold-bearing quartz reefs have been discovered and worked ; but the
larger portion are at present lying idle, owing to the want of capital to develop them. Rich deposits of
alluvial gold have also been found; but it is at present believed that the main lead or deposit has not yet
been struck. Large deposits of copper, iron, and lead are known to exist throughout the country. These,
however, will remain comparatively valueless until the construction of a railway to a place of shipment
reduces the cost of carriage.

Quartz reefs and leaders are numerous in the following districts :—The Stapleton Bridge Creek, Howley,
John Bull, Britannia, Fountain Head, Yam Creek, Chinaman’s Rush, Extended Union, Union, Lady Alice,
Pine Creek, Driffield, etc. Some of these may be traced for miles, and many yieid payable percentages of
gold, but none have been tested below 200 feet, and only a few have gone down more than half that depth.
‘The proper development of the reefs depends, as with all other industries, on railway communication, and not
until that indispensable adjunct of civilisation and progress grasps the inland country with its iron-bound
hand can we expect any great results to accrue from the buried mineral wealth of the Territory. When cheap
and easy conveyance reduces the cost of carriage aud of food, tens of thousands of tons of stone, bearing
from half to three-quarters of an ounce of gold to the ton, will be manipulated by powerful machinery, and
made to pay handsomely.

Rich “leaders” carrying from 10 to 50 ounces of gold to the ton, are occasionally met with, and return
large yields of treasure, but they almost invariably die out, and are, therefore, not to be regarded as
possessing the permanent value of quartz lodes. The average yield of all the quartz which has been crushed
has been about an ounce and a quarter of gold from the ton of stone.

Some of the hills are interlaced with leaders and veins that are too thin to work upon separately, but
the day will come when great faces will be opened out, the workmen taking all before them, as at the Black
Hill at Ballarat, and the whole mass—good, bad, and indifferent—passed through the crushing-mill with
satisfactory results.*

REV. J. E. TENISON WOODS, F.R.G.S., F.G.S.

Extract from Rev. J. E. Tenison Woods’ report on the Geology and Mineralogy of the Northern
Territory, October 7, 1886 :—

I have the honor to report that I have completed my examination of the geology and mineralogy of
portions of the Northern Territory, and the following report is the result of that examination.

I have in this report dealt with the general conclusions as far as the detail warrants, and I must record
here my complete satisfaction at the result of the prospecting tour. I confidently assert that the Northern
Territory is exceptionally rich in minerals, only a small portion of which has been made known to the public.
I do not believe that the same quantity of mineral, veins of gold, silver, tin, copper, and lead, will be found
in any equal area in Australia. In fact I doubt if many provinces will be found in any country so singularly
and exceptionally favored as Arnheim Land is in respect to mineral riches. Of the mines that have already
been worked—in gold especially—they cannot be said to have gone to any depth, but nearly all have shown
unusually good ore, and it is unquestionable that not 25 per cent. vf the veins visible have ever been worked
at all. Years will not exhaust the discoveries to be made here when the difficulties of labor have been got

over, as they will be surely ere long. The peninsula of Arnheim Land will become one of the great mining
centres of Australia.

At the Daly River we have an outcrop of the metalliferous country, with copper mines of unusual
richness. To the south of Pine Creek there is a change in the features of the country. Hitherto all the
drainage is to the north, and the sources of the waters are the high lands of the metalliferous ranges and the
springs at the foot of the tableland ; but about 150 miles from Palmerston (railway distance) a watershed is

crossed.

* “The Northern Territory.”—J. G. Knight, 1880.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 89

 

crossed not higher than 800 feet above low-water sea level. Beyond this point the streams have a southern
and westerly direction until the Katherine River is reached, whose bed is about 100 feet above the Maiy.
Ultimately this large river has a north-west direction, and enters the sea as the Daly River. Thus there is a
well-defined mountain system, comprising the ranges in which the principal mines are found. It is an
isolated system, whose culminating points are Mount Wells on the north, and the country between the Union
Mines and the Mary River on the south. It is cut off to the north by the River Finniss, which has a

generally north-westerly trend, and whose coast outlet is unknown. No part of the ranges seems to be over
1,000 feet above the sea.

GEOLOGY.

The whole of the geology of the Northern Territory is of a simple kind. The formations are few in
number. There are no fossils, and the exposed sections are numerous and clear. The most conspicuous, as
well as the most common, is mic slate. It is not crystalline, and therefore I do not call it metamorphic.
At Tale Head, Port Darwin, the brilliant show of mica which there occurs marks the occurrence of five or six
mineral lodes ; also at Suadden Creek, McKinlay Mine, and Mount Shoobridge. The whole of this formation
is paleozvic, and probably, from its mineral character, of the same age as the auriferous slats and schists of
Victoria, New South Wales, etc. In those colonies it is called “lower silurian,” but, in justice to Professor
Sedgwick, should be named “ upper Cambrian,” or (a3 proposed as a compromise) ‘“ Ordovician.” There are
no fresh fossils to verify this identification. Plant impressions are certainly found in the slates at Pine Creek,
but they cannot be identified as yet ; but the whole character of the formation ig such as to leave little doubt
on the mind of the geologist as to the identity in age with the auriferous deposits elsewhere.

Dykes.—In every part of these deposits there are dykes, mineral lodes, and faults. Near Port Darwin
there has been a considerable overflow of ancient lava, which now consists of a few hills of diorite, a volcanic
rock of deep blackish-green color and waxy lustre. It consists of crystals and hornblende, mixed with felspar,
triclinic in small quantities. Until more carefully examined the rock at Port Darwin camp may be called
‘‘diorite.” There are also diorite dykes in many places, especially where the gold has been abundant, such
as at Margaret Creek and other places. In addition, the country is interlaced in abundance with dykes or
veins of a greyish-blue flaggy rock of volcanic character and extraordinary hardness. The term generally
used by the miners for the outcrops of the heads of a vein isa “blow,” and the idea of their origin is con-
nected with the action of fire. Whatever may be the origin of veins, it is certain that the burnt red and
black appearance is the result of exposure to the action of air and water, which has rusted the iron ores and
decomposed the other minerals. For a long time past the miners have had a prejudice against what are called
‘ironstone blows,” or caps of lodes in which there was a great development of peroxides of iron. They have
often been tried and found poor in gold, or destitute of it, so that even prospecting them has been generally
abandoned. There are a good many throughout the district, and the majority have been untouched. They
are the heads of true mineral lodes, the mineral character of which will not be determined until the water-
level is reached. Silver, copper, and lead are the principal minerals to be expected in them, with, probably,
alittle gold. I think they are rich ore, but not suited for ordinary methods of treatment, or the battery
appliances in use here. New and patent methods for the separation of the ores will have to be adopted.

Granite.— The peculiarities of the metals will be dealt with presently. The rest of the geology of the
country may be dealt with in a few paragraphs. All round the mining area is a belt of granite. I infer that
it is a complete ring, though I have not traced it in every part. Thus, granite is found on the west side all
along the telegraph line, and on the east side all along the valley of the Mary, on the north side from the
Fergusson to within four miles of Pine Creek, and on the south about the neighborhood of the Finniss River.
On the north-west and south sides of this belt the granite is pink in color, coarse grained, with large crystals
of orthoclase felspar often two inches and more in length. Usually this coarse kind of granite is termed
granite porphyry. On the west side it is partly of this kind, but on the east its place is almost entirely
taken up by blue, close-grained granite—a valuable stone. On all sides this granite crops up into hills of
100 feet and more in height, but never quite so high as the metalliferous slates.

The existence of this belt of granite round the mineral deposits is of the greatest importance. It is a
state of things which all experience has taught to be the most favorable for mineral deposits. Usually the
greatest richness is found at the edges of these formations, or rather at the junction of the slates with the
eruptive granite ; and from what I have seen, this locality seems tu be no exception. All along the east side
of the ranges, or the valley of the Mary River, there is a continuous outcrop of mineral veins almost upon
the junction.

It would seem as if silver, lead, copper, and tin were the metals developed on the edges of this junction,
while gold exists generally throughout the slates. But the district is hardly sufficiently prospected to form
safe conclusions. The width of this ring of granite varies as far as it is known. On the south of Pine
Creek it is at least 15 miles wide, and in some paits of the valley of the Mary it must be nearly as much,
as well as on the north. On the west it is overlaid by sandstone and magnesite rocks. An accurate
geological survey of this line of junction would lead to the discovery of many mineral lodes.

When the belt of granite is traversed we find that the metalliferous formation again crops out on the
north and south—thus the whole country between Southport and Port Darwin consists of that formation
capped here and there with a little magnesite. There are many quartz lodes, and I am of opinion that the
outcrop of ironstone in ridges of black nodular limonite marks the locality of mineral lodes. There is every
reason to suppose that the junction between the granite and slates on the outside of the granitic ring should
be as rich in mineral lodes as the inside line of junction. Mineral lodes, which become barren in passing
from one country to another, become metalliferous in returning to the country from which they took their
origin. Thus, then, the edge of the granite country on the outside of the belt to the westward of the
telegraph line to the south of the Fergusson and north of the Finniss should be prospected, and may prove

to be rich in minerals.
MINERALS.
90 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY:

MINERALS.

Gold.—From what has been already said, it will appear that the gold of this country is found in exactly
the same manner as in other parts of the world. It is needless to repeat what these conditions are. The
stone in those reefs which have been worked is rich, and would pay well to work in any country but this,
where wages and cartage are so enormously high. The gold generally is of high standard, ee
amount exported from August, 1880, to September, 1885, is 121,779 oz., of the value of £432,959. is, 0
course, is not by any means a full statement of the gold obtained in the Territory. _ The amount is large, but
divided amid the number of mines worked, and the number of miners employed, it is relatively very large,
and shows the richness of the country.

Of two things I am convinced—first, that not one of the mines hitherto worked or abandoned has been
exhausted of gold; secondly, not 25 per cent. of the auriferous reefs of the country have been fourly tested.
If a prospector does not get a good assay from a bagful of stone, which he digs from the top of the ‘blow,
the whole is condemned. The test, of course, is utterly insufficient. The chances are much against the
prospector striking on the shoot of gold at the first blow of the pick. Who does not know the thousands
of instances where rich mines have lain idle for years from bad prospecting? A slight examination convinces
one that many of the reefs in the Territory contain rich metal, even though the prospector has turned away
from them. The gold in most of the reefs is remarkably clean and pure, with little sulphur or arsenic or
other troublesome minerals.

It may certainly be said that the quartz reefs of the Northern Territory have never had justice done
them by first-class machinery. Indeed, it is stated that the Union reefs have been brought to ruin by the
battery employed, which let large quantities of amalgam go down the creek; but with small capital,
enormously high wages, and equally high cartage, it could hardly be otherwise. When these shall have been
adjusted to the rates of the value of the quartz, then the day of the mines of the Northern Territory will
have come. Everything is hoped from the railway to bring this about ; there is plenty of material to work
upon. I regret being unable to give the proportion of gold produced to the quartz crushed. I believe the
average is high, generally over an once. Some of the crushings of the top stone have been enormously rich.
Thus at the Extended Union, in 1877, 40 tons of quartz yielded 740 ounces of gold. This is exceptional, and
belongs to the returns which miners always expect to obtain from the capping of reefs, where the gold lies,
which has weathered out of the stone during countless ages.

In reference to this, I have been asked to give an opinion as to whether deep sinking will give increased
returns. For increased returns, I should say that there is nothing peculiar in the ground which would lead
one to expect it. In those mines where the shoots of gold have a tendency to form pockets of metal, the
ground may become richer at any moment, especially where the quartz lode is intersected by veins of diorite ;
here rich gold will nearly always be found, and often as much in the diorite as in the quartz. All questions
connected with deep sinking are best answered by the diamond drill, but seeing how few of the mines are
able to pay for an efficient battery, it is hardly to be expected that they could pay for drill exploration.
Besides the question of deep sinking is not important. Just now there is plenty of payable stone within
easy reach in most of the mines if labor and cartage were only obtainable at a price commensurate with the
value of gold.

In the alluvial diggings the conditions are precisely similar to alluvial gold in other parts of the world—
the sinking is shallow, sometimes merely surfacing, and the gravel scarcely waterworn. This is the more
extraordinary, as the rainfall is much greater here than in Victoria or New South Wales, where the drift
gravel is so much rounded, but the elevation is much greater.

The alluvial diggings are generally in sballow valleys with low ridges on either side. Ouriously enough,
rich gold has been found in valleys where, on the ridges forming the valley, not a trace of a quartz reef could
be found. Finely divided gold no doubt exists to some extent in the slates, and this must be the explanation
of fine gold in alluvial far from any reefs, just like stream tin. True stream tin is not derived from reefs or
lodes, but from finely disseminated particles of tin in granite. Nuggets are not common, and never of very
large size. The very fine gold would appear to be inexhaustible, as the Chinese always seem able to make
a living, no matter how often they turn over the old headings.

It only remains to say that, as the reefs containing good gold are far from being all discovered in the
Territory, so it is with the alluvial. There are gullies and flats innumerable which have never been even
prospected ; they are all connected with the auriferous slates, and even with quartz reefs. To name them
would be endless, but I especially mention the country between Mount Wells and Mount Douglas, amid the
ranges on the east side until the ranges fall away, a distance of between 40 and 50 miles.

Silver.—All the silver lodes that I have seen in the Territory are silver-lead lodes. Silver is also
associated with gold in one or two mines, and with copper. I have seen no horn silver, or any of those ores
which make a speciality of the mines of the Silverton lodes.

Copper.—Lodes of this metal have been found in many places, either alone or in connection with tin
and silver-lead lodes. The Daly River copper mines I have not visited, but the ores I have seen are of
singular richness. They are apparently abundant as well, and, being situated close to a place of shipment, it
has paid so far to send them to Newcastle, New South Wales, for treatment. This promises well, and, should
the price of copper rise, as it assuredly must do, the Daly River will be a most important mining district.
Moreover, the country is extremely good. Copper is also found at Cruikshank Gully, south of Pine Creek,
at the Howley, and near Port Darwin camp. At Mount Wells there are many small veins intersecting the
tin and the McKinlay Mines. The Eveleen Mine is a lode of copper and galena. The copper ores are poor

but
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 91

 

but probably contain a proportion of silver. Copper would be found in many other places if prospected for,
and it will yet be a valuable mineral in the Northern Territory.

Nickel.—At the Eveleen Mine there are several indications of nickel ore. It is also spoken of as
having been found at Mount Wells and Snadden Creek.

Iron.—Ores of this metal are found everywhere, but of poor quality. No doubt they would be useful in
reducing copper ores, and may be serviceable to the Territory yet.

Manganese, graphite, and bismuth are all found in small veins, especially near Mount Wells, the

Eveleen, and the Union. The bismuth seen by me was metallic, and of fine quality, but the possessor did
not state where it came from.

Gem Stones.—My opportunities for observation were not long enough to investigate in this direction.

The indications are hardly favorable, but the most likely places are the basaltic country ten miles north of the
Katherine River.

 

J. V. PARKES (Inspector of Mines).

Extracts from Mr. J. V. Parkes’ Report on Northern Territory Mines and Mineral Resources, December 8,
1891 :—

I feel constrained to say, and I have no hesitation in saying it, that the Northern Territory of South
Australia is phenomenally rich in minerals, but more especially in gold and tin, and I feel assured that in
course of time it will become one of the chief producers of these two metals. A careful perusal of the returns
I have given of the yield from the various mines will, I am convinced, be a surprise even to those who had
previously had a high opinion of the gold-producing capabilities of the country, and when better facilities are
afforded to mining investors for visiting the country, and systematic mining is carried on, and efficient
appliances are introduced for treating the ores, I am positive that my expectations will be fully realised.
Hitherto mining has been carried on only in the most primitive fashion by fossicking or rooting along the
surface, or, at most, to ouly shallow depths, in following the rich leaders. At the Union, Pine Oreek,
Fountain Head, Yam Creek, Woolwonga, Bridge and Maud Creeks, and the Howley, the reefs are all indica-
tive of permanency, and give promise of large yields when systematically worked. The gold found at Maud
Creek is, however, very fine, and will require other means for its extraction than the ordinary battery. On
the other fields, with an exception here and there, the gold is sufficiently coarse to be saved by ordinary
crushing and amalgamation. The most tangible proof of the richness of the Territory may be found in the
fact that no less than 261,801 ounces of gold, representing a money value of £926,845, was exported from
July, 1873, to September, 1891, as shown by Customs returns, and as the gold is chiefly won by Chinese, it
is fair to assume that a large quanti'y has been shipped from the country of which there is no official record.
My report was written before the results of assays were known to me, and is therefore a recapitulation of the
opinions I expressed in the Territory. The assays, in most cases, give better results than I had anticipated,
and therefore add to the high opinion I had formed of the fields. It will, of course, be understood that in no
case was a small or picked simple taken. On the other hand, the samplcs were taken, if anything, against
the mines, and in all cases consisted of several pounds’ weight of stone.

 

PROFESSOR TATE, F.G.S.

Ex ract from Professor Tate’s Report on the Northern Territory, May 13, 1882 (No. 63) :—

The rock formation over the whole of the metalliferous area is almost entirely of metamorphic origin,
and there cannot be a doubt that much, if not all, of the outerlying area, extending probably to the
escarpment of the great tertiary plateau, is of a similar character, here and there doubtless broken through
by eruptive rocks. We have thus a very extensive metalliferous country awaiting exploration. Year by
year the area of the mireral-bearing ground is extended by discoveries beyond previously known limits. A
little while since, Mount Wells was found to be stanniferous, and later the more distant diggings at
Chinaman and Saunders Rush have considerably enlarged the known area of the auriferous country.

The development of our mineral resources is but in its infancy, and I believe that rich stanniferous lodes
will yet be found, whilst the prospects already unearthed indicate the presence of good percentage copper
ores. Rich auriferous lodes abound over a large trail of country.

Hitherto, adventurers have made a show of developing the mineral resources, but their action has been
protractive rather than otherwise, whilst the honest efforts of the nomadic miners cannot count for much.

It is my honest conviction that, with improved machinery for the extraction of the gold and to cope with
water, more experienced and honest management, a reduction of working expenses, and, above all, the
introduction of more capital, the gold reefs can be worked profitably and to considerable depths. To hasten
the advent of all this, however, there must be a railway to cheapen carriage and make the country accessible
to mining and other speculators, and that railway may also be the means of opening up the copper deposits
known to exist along the route to Pine Creek.

PROFESSOR
92 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. a /

PROFESSOR RALPH TATE AND J. A. WATT, B.Se.

 

Extracts from Report on Central Australia, 1894 :—

(1) Tos MacDonnett Rances.

Dealing with the features of the most important first, we find that the MacDonnell Ranges trend in a
nearly east and west direction for a distance of about 400 miles, and have a width varying from 20 to 50
miles, thus covering an area of more than 10,000 square miles.

In the meridian of Alice Springs Telegraph Station, which is situated from three to four miles north | of
Heavitree Gap, where the River Todd breaks through the southern boundary of the ranges under consideration
they have a width of about 20 miles. Westerly from this point they extend asa rugged main ridge, con-
taining the most elevated peaks, often capped by Ordovician quartzite, with a band of varying bat of
“jumbly ” hills flanking this main ridge on each side. About the longitude of Mounts Liebig and aed
(i.e. about 131° 15’) the range becomes much broken up. Easterly from Alice Springs the range extends to
about 136° east longitude; at 134° 10’ it becomes confluent with the south-east extension of Strang ways
Range, with which may be further considered to be linked by the Georgina Range, about 134° 20’; while
further east (about 135°) it is joined by Hart Range. It may be said to extend approximately from the
130th to the 136th meridian of east longitude, a distance of nearly 400 miles, and to Ke between 23° 7
and 23° 35’ south latitude, with an average width of between 20 and 30 miles.

Ranged in order west to east the altitudes above sea level of the chief peaks are as follows :—Mount
Edward in Belt Range, 4,649 feet ; Mount Houghlin, 4,756 feet; Mount Zeil, 4,040 feet ; Mount Sonder,
4,496 feet ; and Mount Giles, 4,210 feet. The average elevation of the surrounding country is over 2,000
feet above sea level, so that these mountains are not so prominent as one might be inclined to imagine
judging alone from their altitude above sea level. They are nearly all accessible, as the slopes are not usually
very precipitous, except for example, the Belt Range.

(2) Tue James, Waternouse, Gzorce GiLL, and Levi Ranaes.

These have a mean combined width, if we include the intervening plains and valleys, of from 60 to 70
miles. The area occupied by them, therefore, must be more than 15,000 square miles. The highest points
are situated in the most northern ridge, as in the case of Mount Gillen, which must be nearly 3,000 feet
above sea level. The mean elevation of this ridge is about 2,500 feet above sea level, that of the Waterhouse
Range about 2,200 feet, that of the James Ringe about 2,000 feet, while, lastly, the mean elevation of
Chandler Range is only about 1,500 feet to 1,600 feet. From these figures it can be clearly seen tinat there
is a gradual decrease in elevation in the ranges from north to south, each range to the south constitutiog, as it
were, a step in the descent from the MacDonnell Ranges to the plains.*

H. Y. L. BROWN, E.G.S. (Government Geologist).

Extracts from Report of Journey from Warrina to Musgrave Ranges, December 20, 1889 (A. No. 45) :—

At Indulkana, in the vicinity of the Musgrave Ranges, about 26° latitude, there are low rises and
hills of metamorphic and eruptive granite with quartz reefs. Quartz reefs and large ‘‘ blows” are visible
along ths sandstone escarpment north of Mount Chandler, and in the vicinity of the springs there are quartz
veins in kaolinised slate and sandstone, all of which should be prospected for gold. Leaving Indulkana,
metamorphic granite ranges, rising out of the red loam and sand plains, were passed over. The
metamorphic granite rock is usually gneissic, and has a partly stratified appearance, striking north-east and
dipping 45° west. Coarse eruptive granite also occurs. A lode outcrop of ferruginous quartzite and
iron oxide, striking north-west, was passed: an assay of which has since returned no trace of gold or silver.
These ranges alternate with red sand and loam country for 12 or 14 miles, after which the hills become
isolated and detached. At 22 miles a native well, called Moorilyanna, is situated near some flat rocks,
forming the border of a gneissic granite range of from 150 feet to 200 feet elevation. (neissic granite
hornblendic and porphyritic granite in immense boulders and sheets of rock compose the hills at this place.

THe Muscrave RanGEs.

The group of ranges and hills known by this name extend east and west for a distance of 100 miles, and
has an average width from north to south of about 20 miles. Mount Ferdinand and Mount Cuthbert (3,620
feet) are some of the higher poiats, and Mount Woodroffe appears to be the highest point, having an elevation
by barometer of 5,120 feet above sea level. The ranges are not continuous, but portions are detached and
surrounded by narrow plains, or only connected by low saddles, as at Murndale Creek and the Officer Creek,
where the ranges can be crossed without rising more than 100 feet. The south watershed of the range is
drained by the Ferdinand (a large gum creek) and its branches, and a few other creeks discovered and named
by Gilee ; the north watershed by Whittell Creek and Beare Creek and other watercourses discovered by Gosse.
All these creeks are what are known as “gum” creeks, and have their beds full of sand, so that the water, as
soon as it leaves the rocky ranges, becomes lost in the sand, and only occasionally is found at the surface at

places

 

* Journal of Horn Scientific Expedition, 1894.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 93

 

places where the bed rock outcrops near the surface through the sand and forms a dam. It is not likely
that they often become flooded, as the water is so quickly absorbed by the sand, except in times of
very heavy and continuous rain. After leaving the ranges the creeks spread out into wide flats and have no
defined channels, but become lost in the scrub and sandhills that surround them. The Musgrave Ranges are
composed of eruptive granite and metamorphic granite rocks of various kinds, chiefly hornblendic, and seldom
containing mica. Intruded into these are diorite and dolerite. The presence of magnetic oxile of iron is
almost universal here, attracting the compass needle to a considerable extent. There is no doubt but that
the rocks forming these ranges are most favorable for the occurrence of metallic minerals, provided vein out-
crops are found, when such metals may be confidently looked for. The ranges to the westward and south
may, however, show better indications of metallic minerals, At the present the country is comparatively
unexplored, and the drawbacks to prospecting are great. It is, however, reasonable to expect that in a
country composed as this is of highly metamorphic granitic rocks, upheaved and intersected by igneous dykes,
metallic minerals exist, and will be found when the country has undergone thorough exploration.

Tue MaclonneLut Ranaus.

Extracts from Report of Geological Examination of Country in the neighborhood of Alice Springs,
October 30, 1890 (No. 189) :—

GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES.

The MacDonnell Ranges lie immediately south of latitude 23°, and extend, in a southerly direction,
nearly to latitude 24°, stretching eastwards towards Queensland, and, in the opposite direction, towards
Western Australia. They attain their greatest elevation, and their most steep and rugged forms of develop-
ment, in the neighborhood of Alice Springs. The central mountain, from which flow the creeks which drain
that region, is called Bald Hill, and it attains an elevation of some 3,500 feet to 4,000 feet above sea level.
Portions of the range have been named distinctively, and are known as the Strangways, the Hart, the
Georgina, etc. There are numerous high mountains, of which the principal are Mount Benstead, Mount
Campbell, Mount Brassey, Mount Mabele, Mount Riddoch, Mount Pfitzner, Mount Milton, Mount Strang-
ways, Mount Gillen, Mount Conway, Mount Giles, Mount Sonder, Razorback, Mount Zeal, Haast Bluff, ete.
None of these are under 3,000 feet in altitude, and some of them are doubtless much loftier. Most of these
points belong to ranges which run in an east to west direction. The chief creeks forming the northern water-
shed are the branches of the Plenty Creek (which flows westwards and southwards towards the Queensland
border), the Waite, the Gillen, the Miiller the Burt, the Harry, the Hamilton, the Charlie, the Dashwood,
the Davenaut, ete. Lying to the north of the MacDonnell Ranges there are vast plains with, at long
intervals, apparently low, scattered hills. These plains are of considerable elevation, and are covered with
mulga, grass, and herbage of various kinds, and may be described as open mulga country. The valley of the
Plenty is also open grass-plain country ; and there is also a considerable extent of similar land in the valleys
of the Hale, Todd, Hugh, Finke, etc., the plains in the valley of the Todd being the most extensive. Mount
Chapman, which is the centre of the quartz reefs, lies nine miles north-east of Paddy’s Rockhole, in a bend
of the Hale River.

The area over which prospectors have found gold in this locality is about four miles in length from north
to south by about two miles in its greatest width. The sinking all over the field is shallow, varying from a
few inches to a few feet, with generally a soft bottom. The gold is most usually found in a red clay over-
lying the bedrock, It is often leafy and ragged, and not waterworn, indicating that it has been derived from
flucan and mullocky veins rather than from quartz reefs. In other localities the gold obtained is well water-
worn.

THE GENERAL GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE.—METAMORPHIC AND PLUTONIC PRIMARY ROCKS.

These, which are the foundation rocks of the MacDonnell Ranges, consist of micaceous and hornblendic
gneiss ; micaceous, hornblendic, siliceous, and argillaceous schists and slates; syenite; garnetiferous granite,
micaceous granite; epidosite ; dolomite and crystalline limestone, belonging to the metamorphic series, with
eruptive dykes of diorite, pegmatite, and coarse granite. As a rule they exhibit distinct signs of stratification,
and dip at varying angles between the absolutely horizontal and the directly vertical. Their upper beds often
contain nodules of felspar which give them a porphyritic appearance. Garnets exist both in the gneiss and
in the eruptive granite (very often as a constituent) to a considerable extent, and epidosite occurs both in the
veins and scattered through the rock and in association with the quartz veins. Magnetic oxide of iron is
also prevalent in some places. (Quartz reefs are found traversing these rocks over most of the area occupied
by them, although some portions uf the area may be entirely destitute of reefs. The main belt of reef extends
in a west-north-west direction from Ruby Gap, on the River Hale, and along the watershed of that river to
Winnecke’s Depot and Bald Hill. This area is marked by the slaty and schistoze character of the granite
rocks composing it, and there is every reason to expect that a large portion of this area will be found to be
auriferous, in addition to that section of the district which has already been found to contain deposits of gold.

PRIMARY ROCKS (CAMBKIAN 4).

Resting uncomformably upon these rocks there are in series quartzites (sometimes conglomeritic) dolomitic
limestone, and occasionally clay slates, forming rugged and steep ranges. They vary in dip and strike, and
are often much twisted, contorted, and dislocated, presenting steep bluffs and escarpments, due to an extensive
system of fauits, running in an east and west direction. The higher ranges and bluffs as a rule consist of this
quartzite, which, in fact, covers up a large portion of these elevations, whilst in the valleys the crystalline
granitic rocks are exposed, the former having been denuded. The granite and other dykes and quartz reefs do
not extend into these rocks, nor have fossils been observed in this formation, which belongs to one of the

oldest of the primary series.

The following description from a former report on a journey from Adelaide to Hale River in 1888 may
fittingly supplement these observations :—“ The southern barrier of the MacDonnell Ranges is of a most
remarkable
94 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

 

remarkable character, as it rises out of the plains to a height of 1,000 feet or more, like a wall, through which,
at intervals of every few miles, a fissure or opening has been made, out of which a creek emerges. This
range extends east and west, with occasional breaks (the openings before mentioned), which are called gaps,
such as Temple Bar, Heavytree, Emily, and Jessie Gaps. The rock forming it 1s a red quartzite, dipping at
an angle of 45° to 70° south, and resting on gneissic granite. The gaps have every appearance of being
fissures in the rock, and of not having been made by erosion. They are all uf the same character, and after
passing through them low ranges of granite and metamorphic rocks are found, which gradually rise, increasing
in elevation, to the northward. East and west of the Todd River, which flows through Heavytree Gap, the
range is more wall-like than elsewhere, the gaps being six and eight miles apart ; it afterwards becomes more
broken, and there are other parallel quartzite ranges associated with it. The gorge called Glen Annie, through
which the Hale River passes, is the longest of these fissures. It cuts through a quartzite anticlinal, forming
a fissure some 10 or 15 yards wide in places, with walls rising 400 feet or 500 feet, or more. Alongside this
ravine there are others, which have cut through the quartzite to a depth of 100 feet or 200 feet from the top
of the hill, and are evidently caused by parallel eracks or faults across the strata.”

SECONDARY ROCKS.

In the main valleys aud north and south of the ranges there are flat-topped hills of quartzite, con-
glomerate, and ironstone, and ferruginous sandstone, resting horizontally upon argillaceous sandstone. These
beds, which belong to the secondary or tertiary age, resemble those overlaying the cretaceous clays and shales
of the artesian area, and are in all probability the thinning out of similar rocks which have been deposited on
the borders of the primary rocks forming the MacDonnell Ranges.

TERTIARY AND RECENT FORMATIONS.

To this series belong the sand, sandstone, clay, gravel, conglomerate, and loam deposits forming the creek
and river flats, the travertine limestone, conglomerate and sandstone of the plains, the sandhills and loamy
plains, and the alluvium of the gullies, which occur generally over the area referred to, and which latter carry
the alluvial gold.

AREA AVAILABLE FOR PROSPECTING FOR GOLD.

It will be readily understood by those conversant with the circumstances, that in making a geological
examination, there is neither time nor labor available for prospecting for gold ; but only such facts as present
themselves can be noticed. With that in view it should be stated that, besides quartz veins and reefs, there
are other ferruginous, calcareous, and siliceous veinstones in the various parts of the district examined that
will, no doubt, ultimately be prospected. The country worthy the attention of the prospector may be
described, in a general way, as all those parts of the MacDonnell Ranges which are composed of crystalline
gneissic rocks, granite, and schists. Of course it will be perceived that, in the absence of a topographical
map of the whole region, it is impossible to indicate the position of reefs and veins which might be considered
worthy of a trial; but that they exist and are worthy of attention may be regarded as unquestionable.

TIMBER.

The whole of the lower hills connected with the MacDonnell Ranges are covered with stunted timber of
various kinds, the largest being mulga, ironwood, beefwood, etc., available for fuel; whilst the creek beds
and flats are always marked by a growth of gum trees which sometimes attain a considerable size, and can be
used for building and other purposes. The lower part of the ranges and the flats are thickly covered with
grasses of various kinds, and occasionally there are saltbush and cottonbush flats. The grass grows upon the
granitic soil and the red loam plains and flats, the soil of which is due to the decompositiou of the granite.
The higher points of the granitic ranges are chiefly covered with spinifex, and the quartzite and limestone
ranges are almost invariably so clothed. The plains of the Burt and the Plenty and other large creeks on the
north side seem to be most suitable for pastoral puposes, as the country is more open and not made so
difficult for occupation by the existence of steep ranges. The height of Alice Springs above sea level is
about 2,000 feet, and the general elevation of the country east and west is invariably within either a few
hundred feet over or a similar measurement under that height.

GEMS.

It has been alleged that diamonds have been found in this region, but reliable evidence as to the fact of
such discoveries has not been forthcoming. These crystalline rocks are of the same character as those in
which gems are found in other parts of the world, and by inference it may be expected that they may be
found here. The matrix of the Burma rubies isa crystalline limestone interstratified with gneiss, sometimes
associated with pegmatite and hornblendic schist (Report on the Ruby Mines of Burma, by C. B. Brown,

1888) ; 80 there is no reason why real rubies should not be found in these ranges, a3 all the rocks mentioned
in the report just quoted are present.

Report on Country To THE Norru-WeEsTWARD OF OODNADATTA AS FAR AS MoORILYANNA

AND INDULKANA.
June 19, 1893.

From Oodnadatta, rocks of cretaceous age (the artesian water-bearing formation) occupy the country for
a considerable distance westward up the Alberga River. Their western boundary is uncertain, but is
approximately in the neighborhood of Alleumba. The stony downs and tableland country, which generally
indicate the presence of underlying cretaceous rocks, near this place gradually gives way to a tableland
formation of greater elevation and of different constitution, consisting of undulating and sometimes inclined
beds of sandstone and quartzite. This high tableland formation resembles that of the Tent Hills, near Port
Augusta, as previously pointed out by me (vide report on journey from Warrina to Musgrave Ranges, 1890),
and also that of the James and other ranges south of the MacDonnell Ranges, and in the neighborhood of

the
THE TRANSCONTINE NTAL RATLWAY. 95

the Palmer and other rivers in Tempe Downs District. Mount Mystery, Mount Johns, Mount Chandler, etc.,
are some of the chief hills belonging to this formation.

Near Mount Mystery, close to the junction of the Indulkana Creek with the Alberga, slate rocks
outcrop ; and, as the Indulkana Creek is followed up, low ranges and hills of kaolinised granite, schistoze,
micaceous granite, and quartzite, with diorite and coarse granite dykes and quartz reefs, are passed over.
Many of these hills are flat-topped, being capped with a thin bed of jasper quartzite and conglomerate.

All these hills, whether eruptive granite, metamorphic graNite, or clay slate, do not form continuous

ranges, but are more or less separated by plains of sand and loam, which cover up the intervening rocks and
are a great drawback to prospecting.

It is safe to assume the presence of gold in these rocks, although an extensive system of prospecting may
be required to find it. But little prospecting has been done, but it is reasonable to expect that when the
country northwards to the border of the Northern Territory and westward to Western Australia comes to be
thoroughly explored larger areas of country favorable for gold prospecting will be discovered on the flanks of
the high ranges, viz., the Everard, Musgrave, Mann, Tomkinson, and others.

The Musgrave Ranges I have visited, but base my opinion with regard to the others on the specimens of
rocks brought down by Mr. Carruthers when engaged on his trigonometrical survey of this region. In a
country so extensively occupied by granite the presence of tin is also probable.

Although I did not succeed in finding any gold at the numerous places proapected, I am of opinion that
a more protracted search for that metal is advieable, as the rock formation is in many places most favorable.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND SUGGESTIONS.

I. BORING FOR COAL.

As there is a rock formation of carboniferous age at Fossil Head, near Treachery Bay, on the west coast,
and a shale formation of probably the same age on the Victoria and Macarthur Rivers, it is probable that coal
seams exist. To prove this, boring is required, as the greater portion of these formations is but little elevated

bits level, and I would therefore recommend that boring with the diamond-drill be undertaken with
18 object.

; It is advisable that the whole of the northern coast be examined in order that the presence or absence of
additional areas of carboniferous rocks may be ascertained.

II. PROSPECTING FOR GOLD AND OTHER METALLIC MINERALS.

In the neighborhood of the present goldfields the granite areas and the country bounding those areas on
the west and north-west, towards the tableland and down the McKinley and Mary Rivers, are likely fields for
prospecting for gold and tin. It is along these rivers that ‘deep leads” containing both these metals are
likely to exist. The country in the neighborhood of the granite outcrop near Rum Jungle is also likely
country for prospecting. Other individual localities have been previously pointed out in this report.

On the goldfields at present being worked deep shafts are required to explore the ground at a depth. At
Pine Oreek and the Union there are deep shafts, but little (if any) deep exploration has been done from them.
It is worthy of consideration whether the owners of these shafts should not be subsidised in order to induce
them to drive levels and crosscuts at the present depths, or whether a substantial reward should not be offercd
for the discovery uf payable reefs, at present or greater depths, on any of the lines of ieef at Pine Oreek,
the Eureka Mine, Union, Biock Creek, etc. At all the places where batteries are, or have been, at work,
there are large quantities of tailings which might be profitably treated by the cyanide or some other process.

With reference to the central portion of the Territory, viz., that in the Tennant Creek and Barrow Creek
districts, the offer of a reward for the discovery of a payable goldfield would, I believe, induce capable men to
explore and prospect the country.

An exploration of the unknown area lying to the west of the telegraph line, between the above-mentioned
stations and the Western Australian border, would add considerably to what is known of the geography and
geology of the Northern Territory and lead to the discovery of country likely to prove auriferous.

The rocks at the mouth of the Fitzmaurice River are auriferous, and may prove to Le payable when
prospected. An examination of the northern coast is requisite with a view to the discovery of additional
areas of gold or tin-bearing rocks. On the Alligator River and Blue Mud Bay, and in the vicinity of Cape
Arnheim, it is supposed that there are areas occupied by rocks likely to be auriferous. On the Nicholson
River I am credibly informed that metalliferous rocks also occur.

From tHe GoveRNMENT GEOLOGIST’s Report No. 127a.
October 21, 1896.

THE MICA FIELDS.

The principal mica localities are on the northern watershed of Hart Range, east and west of Mount
Palmer, in the vicinity of which hill are the most important finds yet known.

Eastward along the Hart Range for several miles similar dyke outcrops occur, some of which have been
worked to a greater or less extent for mica. Wherever these coarse granite dykes with massive felspar and
quartz in reefs or blocks occur, there, in addition to the ordinary small crystals of mica forming a constituent
part of the granite, whether eruptive or gneissic, mica blocks of greater or less size are found, and the si

when
96 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

when quarried often yield mica of sufficient size to be of economic value. These dykes are always, in some
degree, irregular in shape and size—branching out and widening, or contracting and thinning out, as sunk on.
The occurrence of mica in them is also irregular and uncertain. Mining, therefore, for mica is necessarily an
exploration of these dyke masses, and a search for blocks and patches of sufficient size to render them of value.

The number of mica-bearing dykes is large, and they extend over a large area. Although most frequent
in the neighborhood just described, they occur in other parts of the Hart Range. The work done hitherto, in
most cases, is confined to shallow excavations near the surface, from which a few hundredweights or tons, as
it may be, of mica have been procured. The industry is one which requires capital, as not only is the mining
for the mineral difficult, but after raising it has to be split, cut into sizes, and sorted—a process which
requires the presence of an expert in mica. Even when this has been done, there is no certainty as to the
price that will be obtained for it. It is, therefore, not an industry which can be profitably undertaken by the
individual miner without capital. With regard to the future of mica fields, I believe that there is here a large
field for the employment of capital by those who understand the business, as from the numerous mica-bearing
outcrops a large quantity of mica can be raised. The following minerals are found with mica in these mines :—

Tourmaline —In flattened crystals.
Beryl—Flattened and also in hexagonal crystals.
Garnets—Flattened plates and in the usual perfect crystalline shapes.

Quartz—In flat layers resembling thin glass and white lace-like sheets between the plates of mica.

ALICE SPRINGS NORTH-WESTWARD TO COUNTRY LYING SOUTH-WESTWARD OF BARROW CREEK.

From Bond Springs I proceeded to Burt Well by the inside road, which follows the margin of the
ranges. The rocks passed over consist of granite, syenile, diorite, and the schistoze granite rock, with quartz
reefs, and are favorable to the occurrence of gold. In the vicinity of Ryan Well the rocks are micaceous aud
siliceous metamorphic granite and gneiss, sometimes having a schistose and slaty structure, striking E.N.E. ;
they contain large glassy quartz reefs.

Anna reservoir is a deep rock hole some 20 yards in diameter, in the bed of a creek flowing southward
out of rough ranges. The rocks are hornblendic and micaceous schists, quartzite, and siliceous hornblendic
flags and slaty beds, gneise, and granite, striking north, and dipping north-east and vertically, with a little
eruptive granite and quartz,

In concluding this report it may be stated that the ranges in the neighborhood of Anna reservoir, the
Twenty-mile and Thirty-mile Creeks, where schistoze and slaty rocks traverse the gneiss and granite, as well
as portions of the flat country between these ranges and the next range north, should be prospected for gold.
The occurrence of tin is also probable over any of the granite country. An exploration of the almost unknown
country west of the telegraph line is a work which, if undertaken, would most probably lead to the
discovery of additional areas worth prospecting. The waterholes on the Twenty-mile and Thirty-mile Creeks
are permanent waters in an ordinary run of seasons, and they are suitable starting points for prospecting
explorations. From these waters a party provided with camels would have no difficulty in examining the
country as far west as the Western Australian border.

ARLTUNGA.
Leaving Alice Springs on April 27, 1896, I reached Arltunga on the 30th, for a visit of inspection.

_ The alluvial diggings are confined altogether to the same gullies and creek flats from which gold was
being obtained at the time of my visit in 1890, no increased area having been opened up since.

No deep sinking has been undertaken for alluvial gold, and the river flats of the Hale still remain
untested. In an auriferous country like this gold should be tried for in the deep ground ; the depth of
sinking would be from 30 feet to 40 feet,

Extracts from the S.A. “ Advertiser,” October 4, 1902.

. It = a very promising field with large bodies of fairly rich gold-bearing stone. The gold workings are
all on the quartzite formation, and the gold-heating stone is obtained from ore bodies contained in the rock.

The conditions under which gold occurs are very peculiar, and I do not remember any of similar character,
except op a small scale in connection with defined lodes.

; The gold occurs in cellular quartz, often showing cubical-shaped cavities (the casts of pyrites crystals),
in oe gossan, Iron gossan, iron oxides, hematite, and brown iron ore, pyrites, kaolin, clay or pug, rubble,
- , loam, and earthy matter, such as fill vughs and fissures near the surface, and in solid quartz, although in
this case it appears to be only partially embedded, and it is not disseminated through the stone. It is found
in filaments and crystalline particles in the cellular quartz and gossan, and adheres so loosely that it is
impossible to preserve specimens containing visible gold, as it drops out when handled.

I inspected localities where gold i i
gold has been prospected for—Kurundi, Coodinga, Kurinally, and Hatch
Creek, on the Fiew River, and Munadgee and Mosquito Creek. I consider these of little importance, with

the exception f TN reef a Coodinga and er .
) th ‘
or one t ue on Hatch Creek, each of which returned pro specs of abo es

eens i as Tennant Creek, and from there I went back to Barrow Creek and Alice Springs.
workings of a simila ie i Ge eeu the neighborhood of the White Range pegged blocks other
ioe : Character were seen at various times in passing. The stone had all the indications of

§ auriferous, and no doubt contained gold. I have taken some 40 samples of ore from the various

workings,
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 97

workings, and carefully tested samples from most of them by crushing and washing, with the result that
almost invariably I obtained a good if not rich prospect of fine gold. The White Range is remarkable for
the extraordinary number of auriferous outcrops that are spread about within a short distance of one another,
and for the persistent manner in which the cellular quartz, quartz and iron gossan, kaolin, clay, and sand, etc.,
in the vughs are found to contain gold, these substances, particularly the cellular and gossany quartz, being
almost certain indications of its presence ; also for the absence of gold; except in limited quantity in the solid
quartz. ; With regard to the future of the field, I believe that in course of time, with good management,
economic mining, and treatment of the ore, large and payable returns of gold will continue to be obtained for
many years to come.

NortHern Territory Commission.

; Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, Government Geologist, in his evidence before the Northern Territory Commission
which visited the Northern Territory in August 1894, for the purpose of examining the general geological
structure of the Northern Territory, speaks of it as a valuable field, which only wants opening by deep
sinking ; that some of the returns from the mines are very rich, and that these returns would be augmented
if deep shafts were sunk and work done at the lower levels; also that there is a great deal of country
for prospecting in the neighborhood of the goldfields, and especially at the mouth of the Fitzmaurice River,
and that a large proportion of country likely for minerals is still open :—

4355, Can you give us, in brief terms, your opinion of the Northern Territory as a gold-mining field 1
—I think it a valuable field, only it wants opening up by deep sinking.

4356. What are the returns practically, or generally, rather, of the mines that are working—what is the
average return !—I could not say ; some of them are very rich.

4357. Do you think they are paying for the working 1—Yes.

__ 4358. In what state of development are they !—Generally they are about down to water level, following
rich leaders and veins, working them out as they go. There is no systematic sinking of shafts or stoping.

4359. If they went about it more systematically, do you think the returns would be correspondingly
better !—In addition to what they are doing now, if deep shafts were sunk and work done at the lower levels,
the returns would be augmented.

4360. What is the reason why they are not doing it? Is it for want of capital 1—Most of the work is
done by Chinese.

4366. (By the Hon. the Treasurer)—Were there many parts of the Northern Territory that you visited
which were not being worked, and which you think would be payable to work 1—Yes.

4367. Would you mention to the Commission any district which would be worthy of attention as gold
mines 1—I think the present mining fields are capable of much further development. They should go in for
deep mining: they are working on the surface now.

4368. Were there any districts you saw not being worked that might be, and which you would recom-
mend for attention as gold-mining fields !—There is a good deal of country for prospecting there in the
neighborhood of the goldfields. At the mouth of the Fitzmaurice River I saw likely country for gold.

4369. Country that you think in all probability would pay {—Yes ; as regards country in the vicinity of
present goldfields.

4370. Is there any very large area of that ?—Not very large, but a great deal larger than the present
goldfields.

4371. Do you think that it is probable that all the best gold mining country is now taken up, or is the
best of it still open 7—A good proportion of it is still open.

OOAL.

4372. I understand you to say that from the sandstone formation there is a high probability of coal being
found in the Northern Territory 7—Yes ; it is worth trying for by boring.

4377, Are the places where you think the coal deposits might exist far from the sea coast ?—No ; along
the coast between the Victoria River and Port Darwin there are suitable places for boring and trying for coal.

4378, Do you think the indications are sufficient to warrant the outlay ?—Yes; the fossils, I believe,
indicate the probability of the existence of coal, and the bore would show what is beneath.

4379, Would you recommend the Government to put down a bore !—Yes.

4380. As you come further south of Pine Creek did you pass over any country that should be prospected
for gold —Yes ; between Pine Creek and the Katherine.

4381. Anything still farther south than that !—There is nothing at all after you leave Maud Creak until
you get to Tennant Creek.

4382. Is that likely country }—Yes; gold should be found there. * ‘
HE

* Northern Territory Commission, Paper No. 19/95.
98 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

Tae Waitt Rance Goup MINEs.
Report by Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, F.G.S. (Government Geologist), October 30, 1902 :—

The White Range is situated at Arltunga, a goldfield in the MacDonnell Ranges, some 70 miles
north-eastward of Alice Springs Telegraph Station ; which latter place is 330 miles northward of Oodnadatta,
the present terminus of the Transcontinental Railway. Oodnadatta is 688 miles from Adelaide by rail.

Gold was first discovered here in the matrix by H. E. Luce in the latter end of 1897, at which time the
ravines and gullies in the neighborhood were being worked for alluvial gold.

The alluvial gold was discovered by J. Byrne, and several of the ravines yielded good returns. They
were worked for some two months prior to Luce’s discovery of the ore bodies from which this gold had been
derived.

The White Range is composed of quartzite and quartzose sandstone, dipping easterly, north-easterly, and
northerly along its boundary, where it is faulted against micaceous schists, slates, and gneissic sandstone, with
occasional dykes of granite rock, diorite, etc., which rocks it overlies. The quartzite is much faulted, jointed,
and shattered, and in the vicinity of the gold workings it is traversed by ravines of greater or less depth,
trending eastward and north-eastward through it, which have doubtless been formed at the time of its
upheaval. The average dip of the quartzite is from 10° to 20°, but on the eastern and north-eastern
boundary it is steeper—approaching 25° to 30°. The approximate highest elevation of the range above sea
level is 2,600 feet, and above the general level of the surrounding country about 600 feet. The area occupied
by it extends far beyond the limits of that at present worked for gold. There are also large areas of similar
quartzite country in the Arltunga district generally, which it is advisable to prospect, as the probabilities are
in favor of additional gold discoveries being made in them. At the present time the most important blocks,
so far as the number of workings and the extent and richness of the gold-bearing stone is concerned, are the
White Range Block, Extended, and Great Western, on which the developments are more extensive than
elsewhere. On the same range, outside of the pegged blocks, there are other shallow workings on similar
formations, which offer every inducement to prospectors. The White Range is remarkable for the extra-
ordinary number of auriferous outcrops that are spread about within a short distance of one another, and for
the persistent manner in which the cellular quartz, quartz and iron gossan, kaolin, clay, sand, etc., in the
vughs are found to contain gold: these substances, particularly the cellular and gossany quartz, being almost
certain indications of its presence ; also for the absence of visible gold, except in limited quantity in the solid
quartz.

As already stated, the thickness of the quartzite formation has been proved at one place to be 20) feet,
and at another to exceed 340 feet. Up to the present the ore bodies have been followed down to a depth of
about 60 feet in the quartzite, and in all probability they will continue downwards through entire thickness
of the beds. The question arises as to what change will take place with the ore bodies when they pass into
the metamorphic and granitic rocks beneath. As these lower rocks outside the quartzite area, and sur-
rounding it, contain gold-bearing fissure lodes, which have been worked in the past, and are still in some
cases yielding good returns, it is to be inferred that the ore-bearing bodies of the quartzite will pass into the
lower series of rocks in the form of defined lodes similar to those being worked at the Wheal Fortune, Duffer,
and other mines in the district, and I see no reason why this should not turn out to be the case. Even if
confined to the quartzite formation only, the quantity of gold ore contained must be very considerable. There
are no indications of a falling off in the size and extent, or richness, of the ore-bearing bodies. I am,
therefore, justified in holding the opinion that, with economic mining and treatment, a large and payable
output of gold will be maintained for many years to come.

The present method of working, on account of the hardness of the rock, is a slow and laborious one, and
consists of making small drives and excavations, following the largest and most persistent seams, vughs, and
quartz bodies, which are known to contain gold in sufficient quantities to be profitably worked. A more
extensive system of working, by means of open cuts whereby large masses of rock could be detached, would
result in the saving of much time and expense. The bagging of the koalin, sand, gossan, and other friable
material found in the vugbs, before raising from the workings would, I am certain, result in the saving of an
appreciable quantity of gold, as these deposits are often very rich. Wire tramways to convey the ore by
gravitation from the workings to lower ground, instead of packing it by manual labor, as it is at present being
done, would also result in a considerable saving. For these reasons an amalgamation of the blocks would be
advantageous. The carriage of ore by teams from the mines to the battery costs 8s. per ton; with the battery
on the spot most of this expense would be avoided. I believe that a plentiful supply of water will
be obtained at the junction of the quartzite with the metamorphic slate and granitic rocks, where the former

is faulted against the latter. Mulga is the pincipal wood used as fuel ; and gum timber, which occurs along

the Hale River and other creeks, is available for mining purposes. A seam of lignite, some 12 feet thick, has

lately been found in well sinking on the alluvial flats of the Hale River. Though not of good quality at this
particular place, as it contains a large percentage of pyrites, there is no reason why lignite should not be
found under other portions of the same alluvial plain of a suitable quality to be used for fuel should such be
required in the future. At the time of inspection, May, 1902, the number of men engaged in mining on the
White Range field was 40, and the estimated quantity of ore raised and awaiting treatment was 676 tons.

ASSAYS.

Forty-five samples were taken from the surface to the lowest de
assay. Some of these were selected because
ore, or because they were known to contain
contain gold. Four samples assayed

( pths reached in the various workings, for
of their favorable appearance for gold, as typical examples of the
tain gold ; others as samples of the prevailing materials known to
, In which gold was freely visible, are excluded from the following list.
Most
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 99

Most of the others showed fine gold on panning, although not detected before panning owing in some cases to
the friable nature of the ore, the presence of pyrites or other ferruginous matter.

Five samples returned gold from 2 dwts. to 8 dwts. per ton

Six ” i ais » 14 dwts. to 19 dwts. per ton

Seven ” ” » 5, 1 0z, to 1 oz, 18 dwts. per ton

Five ” i “ » 2023. 2 dwts, to 2 ozs, 19 dwts. per ton
Four _,, 9 Pn » 4028. to 4 ozs. 16 dwts, per ton

Four ,, ‘o 54 » 9 ozs. to 5 ozs, 15 dwts. per ton

Seven _,, is Pp », 6 ozs, 15 dwts, to 8 ozs. 16 dwts. per ton
One zs sip » 9 ozs, 12 dwts. and silver 12 dwts. per ton
One, a ,, 11 ozs. 8 dwts. ‘5 14 dwts. per ton

One __,, a5 » 14 028. 13 dwts. i 2 ozs. 10 dwts. per ton
One ,, is »» 21 ozs. 9 dwts. Re 1 oz. 16 dwts. per ton

WATER SUPPLY.

The following is a list of the wells on the Arltunga goldfields, near and within a short distance of the
White Range :—Arltunga Well, Kangaroo Well, Star of the North (well at the Government Cyanide Works),
No. 1 Well or Miiller’s Well, Wheal Munday Well, Wheal Fortune Well, Claraville Well.

Arltunga Well is near Paddy’s Rockhole. It has supplied water for the inhabitants and a large number
of horses and cattle for some years, and also water for washing alluvial dirt, and at one.time for a battery of
three stamps. It is situated about four miles by road south-westerly from the White Range gold workings.
Supply large, quality fair.

Kangaroo Well supplies the White Range inhabitants, and numerous horses, including those belonging
to teamsters carting ore, and the police. The police station is at this well. Situation about four miles by
road westerly from White Range workings. Supply fair, quality good.

Star of the North Well is situated about three-quarters of a mile northerly from Kangaroo Well, at the
Government Battery and Cyanide Works, which it supplies. The water is good for stock, and although used
for human consumption it cannot be considered very suitable for that purpose.

No. 1 Well, or Miiller’s Well.—Situated about half a mile eastward of White Range. The supply is
smal]. It is used for domestic purposes. The water is fairly good.

The sinking of a well is now in progress on the eastern side of the White Range, near the boundary of
the Extended Block, at a site selected by me on my recent visit.

Wheal Munday Well, Wheal Fortune Well, and Claraville Well are within a radius of a few miles, and
are easily accessible from the White Range. Wheal Munday Well, at the time of my visit, contained 40 feet
of water. It is only used at intervals, and at this time was supplying the men (five in number) working at
the Duffer and Wheal Fortune Mine, and their horses. Wheal Fortune Well is situated near the last-named,
but is not now in use.

Olaraville.—The Government well here contained, at the time of my visit, 15 feet of water; the depth
was 40 feet. This well was originally 100 feet deep, but fell in some years ago. The water comes from the
alluvial drift of the Hale River, which is about 35 feet thick at this place. I believe that other good wells
could be obtained by sinking in the deep alluvial ground of the Hale River, if more water was required. A
small hand-boring plant would be most useful in searching for the deep ground previous to sinking. I have
no reliable information as to the yield of the Claraville Well previous to its falling in: but it supplied water
for a Huntingdon mill, besides providing water for the inhabitants and their horses and other stock. In my
report dated October 31, 1896, I suggested this as a source of water supply for the proposed Government
battery, and, as an alternative, pointed out that there was a good site for an excavated tank about half a mile
north, provided that trial holes proved the ground to be suitable.

APPENDIX.

Since my visit to the White Range Goldfield the Government Cyanide Works near Arltunga have been
re-started, and several parcels of ore have been treated from the different mines, the results of which crushings
(supplied by the manager of the works) are herewith appended :—

 

 

 

 

 

 

| Gold recovered by
Name. Date. Weight of Ore. Battery and Value.
Cyanide.

| Tons, ewt. qr. | Oza, dwts. gra, £os dad.
i e Block (G. Wilson, tributer) ¥ 16, 8/02 10 1 0 ll 6 #5 43 9 5
wink ae Block i Beaaine, tributer) .. o le/s02 | 2l 14 Oo | 36 14 1 139 7 1
White Range Block (F. May, tributer) .. 3 13/9/02 | ol? 19 0 12 15 15 4613 9
White Range Vlock .- . “ slojoz | 209 14 1 az 6 1,820 4 4
1. Williams) 2 16/8/02 8 1 0 | 7 12 11 2910 8
Extended (C 2 ll 8 0 20 18 1 8019 9

Extended (F. Hgan) -- as = oe 16/8/0% : ) 4
, ded (J. Glynn) .. Pe it zs 16/8/02 6 15 0 6 14 23 26 011
Ha iended (J. Glynn) .. a i i 13/9/08 ' 12 2 O 9 8 38 35 14 8
Extended (F. Egan) .-- we he ia 13/9/02 7 7 38 12 8 21 4815 4
White Range East (J. Shanahan) sh 5 16/8/02 1 i 2 10 1 16 40 4 7
White Range East (E. A. Roberts) as 16/8/02 20 138 2 35 6 15 100 7 10
White Range East (J. Shanahan) - | 13/9/02 6 19 0 4 17 . oe 205
White Range West (C. Wilson) . | 16/8/02 6 8 0 6 15 12 26.12 7
White Range South (F. May) .. ses .. | 16/8/02 6 17 0 8 13 11 34.11 5
White Range North (A. G. Evans) fae 13/9/02 9 5 0 1314 «6 54 1 6
White Range Excelsior (H. Bow) a 13/9/02 ll 12 0 27 19 0 11018 4
White Range Excelsior (H. P, Wilkinson) ‘is 13/9/02 1 1 2 17 6 #19 66 6 2
Great Western (B. Webb, tributer) a .. | 18/9/02 37 10 0 36 9 1 136 18 1

RETURNS

G2
100 THE ‘TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

 

 

 

RETURNS oF ORE FROM GOLD Mixes Ovtsipe Tim With RANGE.

__

 

 

 

5 7 | 28 17 9

Carige’s Mine ee ie a8 ee 16/8/02 9 5 0 | 7 7 Ss | 9
Bechiia Mine (Russell) 3 ae er 16/8/02 oO 15 2 | - : ’ a a :
The Duffer Mine (Moody) Me ee a 13/9/02 92 14 2 a i i a a :
Wheal Fortune (Smith) Pe 8 es 13/9/02 1 | 98 16 an 96 15 5
Wheal Fortune (Seymour) “8 . o 13/9/02 19 Ue Be = = Bae eats

Synopsis oF GoLD YIELDS MENTIONED IN THIS REPORT AND IN TITE ABOVE RETURN OF LATER CRUSHINGS.

May, 1898, to November, 1901. July 19, 1902, to October 13, 1902.

Total quartz treated vi .. 1,726 tons 12 ewt. Total quartz treated .. .. 424 tons 10 ewt. 2 qrs.
Gold obtained... ae .. 2,120 ozs. 2 dwts. Gold obtained a .. 741 ozs. 13 dwts. 4 grs.
Value... ai a .. £8,019 9s. 1d. Value ke Pe .. £2,859 18s. es
Average yield per ton ee .. loz. 4 dwts. 13 grs. Average yield per ton.. aie dl oz. 14 1 22% ers,
Average value per 0z. ae .. £3 15s, 7d. Average value per oz. .. .. £31738. led.

 

 

H. B. CORBIN, B.Sc.

 

Reports or Government Battery AND Cyantp—E Works aT ARLTUNGA, MacDonnett Ranes.

 

BATTERY CRUSHING RETURNS.

Mr. H. B. Corbin, B.Sc., manager of the Arltunga Cyanide Works, has forwarded the appended report to
the Minister Controlling the Northern Territory, under date August 16, 1902 :—

Since restarting crushing on July 19, in the four weeks ending August 16 I have crushed 12 parcels of
stone, comprising 139 tons 10 cwts., which have yielded 123 ozs. 19 dwts. 4 grs. of gold by battery, and the
tailings assayed and paid for at 75 per cent. of their assay value show that 47 ozs. 6 dwts. 16 grs. of gold have
been paid for. Gross value of gold won by battery and tailings paid for at 75 per cent.—171 ozs. 5 dwts.
90 grs., valued at £669 15s. 9d. This is an average extraction of 1 oz. 4 dwts. 13 gre. per ton. Details of
crushings as under :—Parcel No. 215—Luce’s White Range: H. Perkins (tributer)—21 tons 14 cwts. yielded
by battery, 25 ozs. 3 dwts. 12 grs. gold, valued at £90 18s. 10d.; tailings assayed 14 cwts. 4 grs.; gross value of
ore, 1 oz. 17 dwts. 8 grs.; net extraction paid for, 1 oz. 18 dwts. 19 grs. per cent. Parcel 216—Wheal For-
tune Mine: F. Seymour—19 tons yielded by battery 19 ozs. 3 dwts. 15 grs. gold, valued at £77 3s. 9d;
tailings assayed 6 dwts. 13 grs.; gross value of ore, 1 oz. 6 dwts. 17 grs.; net extraction paid for, 1 oz. 5 dwts.
2 grs. per cent. Parcel 217—White Range West: C. Wilson—6 tons 8 cwts. yielded by battery 5 ozs.
12 dwts. 7 grs. gold, valued at £21 15s. 1d.; tailings assayed 4 dwts. 20 grs.; gross value of ore, 1 oz. 2 dwts.
9 grs. per ton ; net extraction paid for, 1 oz. 1 dwt. 4 grs. per ton. Parcel 222—White Range Extended:
J. Glynn—6 tons 15 cwts. yielded by battery 5 ozs. 1 dwt. 20 grs. gold, valued at £19 1s. 10d.; tailings
assayed 6 dwts. 13 grs.; gross value of ore, 1 oz. 1 dwt. 15 grs.; net exraction paid for, 1 oz. per cent. Parcel
923—White Range South: F. May—6 tons 17 ewts. yielded by battery 5 ozs. 18 dwts. 16 grs. gold, valued at
£23 1s, 4d.; tailings assayed 10 cwts. 16 grs.; gross value of ore, 1 oz. 8 dwts. per ton, net extraction paid for,
1 oz. 5 dwts. 8 grs. per ton. Parcel 225—White Range Extended: C. Williams—8 tons 1 cwt. yielded by
battery 5 ozs. 7 dwts. 4 grs. of gold, valued at £20 Os. 6d.; tailings assayed 7 dwts. 12 grs.; gross value of
ore, 1 oz. O dwt. 20 grs. per ton; net extraction paid for, 18 dwts. 23 grs. per ton. Parcel 226—White
Range Extended: F. Egan—11 tons 8 cwts. yielded by battery 17 ozs. 0 dwts. 1 gr. gold, valued at £64
12s. 2d.; tailings assayed 9 dwts. 3 grs.; gross value of ore, 1 oz. 18 dwts. 23 grs. per ton; net extraction
paid for, 1 oz. 16 dwts. 16 gre. per ton, Parcel 227—White Range East: J. Shanahan—l11 tons 7 cwts, 2 qrs.
yielded by battery 5 ozs. 9 dwts. 6 grs. gold, valued at £20 16s. 6d.; tailings assayed 10 dwts. 20 grs. per ton ;
gross value, 1 oz. 0 dwt. 10 grs. per ton; net extraction paid for, 17 dwts. 17 grs. per ton. Parcel 225—
Beehive Mine: W. Russell—6 tons 15 ewts. yielded by battery 3 ozs. 19 dwts. 3 grs. gold, valued at £14
13s. 9d.; tailings assayed 7 dwts. 18 grs.; gross va'ue of ore, 19 dwt. 1] grs. per ton ; net extraction, 16 dwts.
12 grs. per ton. This parcel had been carted into battery some months ago, and in order to keep the battery
going when no ore was available I put it through out of its turn. Parcel 229—Luce’s White Range:
J. Wilson (tributer)—10 tons 16 cwts. yielded by battery 8 ozs. 8 dwts. 22 grs. gold, valued at £31 7s. 1d.;
tailings assayed 7 dwts. 3 grs.; gross value of ore, 1 oz. 2 dwts. 18 grs.; net extraction paid for, 1 oz. 0 dwts.
23 grs. per ton. Parcels 218 and 231—White Range East: E. A. Roberts—20 tons 13 cwts. 2 qrs. yielded
by battery 17 ozs. 15 dwts. 10 grs., valued at £68 12s. 9d.; tailings assayed 9 dwts. 18 gre.; gross value, 1 oz.
6 dwts. 23 gre. per ton; net extraction paid for 1 oz. 4 dwts. 13 grs. per ton. Parcel 266—-The Bluebell:
J. P. Cange—9 tons 15 cwts. yielded by battery 4 ozs. 19 dwts. 10 grs. gold, valued at £18 16s. 6d.; tailings
assayed 6 dwts. 13 grs.; gross value of ore, 16 dwts. 17 grs. per ton; net extraction paid for, 15 dwts. 2 grs.
per ton. This parcel was treated out of its order asa special favor. It took place of parcel No. 238; same
owner and equal advance. So far I have not had to call upon any of the owners for a cheque to cover any
deficiency, as all parcels have yielded sufficient to cover battery and cyanide.*

Alice Springs, July 27.—The Government battery was restarted on the 19th inst. There are at grass (at
present) 1,000 tons of average value ore, already available fur the mill. The returns from these, together with
the Government Geologist’s favorable report, will amply prove that the MacDonnell Range is not only a
pastoralist’s country, but rich in gold. With increasing depth better returns than any yet obtained will
almost certainly be secured.

Yesterday,

* 8. A. “Advertiser,” August 27, 1902.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 101

 

Yesterday, in Luce’s Long Lead, at the lowest depth (65 feet), Luce struck one of the richest finds on
the White Range. It consists of a crevice, as described by Mr. H. ¥. L. Brown. There are tons of
exceedingly rich stone in sight, and it is estimated that it will yield the handsome return of 6 ozs. to the ton.

These prospects, and those of the Arltunga field generally, are strong arguments in favor of building the
Transcontinental Railway.

A RICH CRUSHING.

The manager of the Arltunga battery and cyanide works (Mr. H. B. Corbin) has telegraphed to the
Government that he has crushed three parcels of stone, totalling 210 tons, for 472 ozs. 11 dwta. 6 grs. of gold,

valued at £1,820 4s. 4d. The average extraction was 2 ozs. 5 dwts. 21 grs. The stone came from Luce’s
White Range claim.*

A GOOD CRUSHING.

The Minister controlling the Northern Territory (Hon. J. G. Jenkins) has received a telegram dated
November 14 from the manager of the Arltunga Cyanide Works, stating that since his last monthly report he
had completed crushing three parcels of ore, comprising 132 tons 19 cwts. 3 qrs. The yield was 194 ozs,
19 dwts. 21 grs. of gold, valued at £745 93. 10d. He had also crushed 45 tons of a 100-ton parcel from
Luce’s White Range claim. The manager reported a rainfall of 24 inches at Arltunga.

THE NORTHERN COAL DISCOVERY.

Extracts from Official Reports by Mr. H. B. Corbin, B.Sc. (Manager of Arltunga Cyanide Works),
to the Hon. Minister for the Northern Territory on the discovery of Coal in the Claraville Ranges,
near Mount Gordon :—t

Mr. H. B. Corbin, B.Sc. (manager Arltunga Cyanide Works), reports on the discovery as follows :—“ I in-
spected the coal discovery on August 4, 1902. The site of the discovery is on the Claraville Plain, between seven
and eight miles from the Government battery. The water shaft sunk passed through ordinary brown clayey alluvial
ground till about 18 feet, when a 2-feet band of hard calcareous cement was passed through. Then alternating
bands of clay, loose coarse gravel, with boulders up to 6 inch in diameter, fine gravel, etc. At 26 feet a band
of pipeclay was entered, which proved to be 8 feet wide, with a 1-foot seam of fine gravel in the middle.
The coal seam was next entered, and the top portion consists of carbonaceous clay, then shaley coal and friable
brown coal, and at the bottom similar carbonaceous clay as at the top. The total width is 12 feet 4 inches, of
which at least 3 feet is very clayey. All of the seam is fairly highly charged with pyrites, which I have
tested for gold. So far the samples I have assayed have not shown a trace of gold. The pyrites occur in
finely-divided grains, evenly distributed throughout the seam, and also in bunches and flat veins. On testing
the coal in the forge a fair heat was obtainable, but the sulphurous fumes given off were very strong, and the
whole of the coal slagged into one mass. I have regarded this test as conclusive that it would be inadvisable
to attempt to burn any of the coal in the boiler fire-box, owing to the sulphur and clogging of the firebars by
slagging, The coal is mostly of a shaley nature, and is in all probability a tertiary lignite. I have secured a
few fossils, consisting of impressions of stems, etc., which I am saving to show to Mr. Brown on his return
from the Tennant. I am of the opinion that it is probable that by deeper sinking coal of a superior quality
may be found, and I have advised Messrs. Harding & Perkins to sink or bore deeper in the hope of striking
same. The gravels passed through are worth prospecting for gold.”

Mr. H. B. Corbin, B.Sc. (manager of Arltunga Cyanide Works), has forwarded to the Minister
Controlling the Northern Territory a sample of coal from the seam which was struck on Claraville Plain, about
16 miles from the White Range. The coal is apparently a lignite. The specimen will be on view at No. 5,
Grenfell Street.

THE LATEST FROM THE GOLDFIELDS IN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA. ¢

Mr. H. B. Corbin, the late manager of the Government battery at Arltunga, arrived in Adelaide by the
North train on Saturday night, having come straight down from the MacDonnell Ranges. Speaking toa
representative of the “ Register” on Sunday, Mr. Corbin expressed most enthusiastic opinions concerning the
prospects of the goldfields :—

“ At Winnecke’s Depét, 30 miles from Claraville, and about 23 miles north-west of Arltunga,” he said,
“there is a wonderful find on a claim known as Paddy’s Goose, and, in my opinion, that place is going to
develop into a genuine goldfield. Gold has been known to exist there for years, and the prospectors, McNeil
and party, found it only a fortnight before I left. I had a look at it, and found that it is undoubtedly a rich
surface show. Hundreds of tons of payable stone is showing, and it is no exaggeration to call it 2-oz. stuff.
It is unique in its characteristics. Here is a telegram Ireceived at Quorn :—‘ Exceedingly rich find at Paddy’s
Goose. Better than anything you saw before leaving.’ Well, if it is better than what I saw it must be
marvellous, and means that practically a new country has been opened for prospecting. The recent glorious
rains have made it easier to work than ever before. Already this month the fields have had over 5} inches of
rain, and the road is fully opened, so that the outside localities can be prospected. Forty camels have been
dispatched from Oodnadatta, with bags for carrying ore, which means that the transport trouble is being

overcome.”

“And your opinion is that the MacDonnell Ranges fields are going to be really good 1” ti Yes; and
though they are 400 miles from the rail head, I think they are going to be to South Australia what the
Burra, Wallaroo, and Broken Hill mines have been in the past. There is no water difficulty at all, and big
companies could conserve enough in dams to last them for years. Why, the rain we had early this month so
filled the Hale Creek that 1,000 tons of waste tailings, which we had dumped there, were washed clean away.
As showing my confidence in the field I may say that, though I have resigned my position, I intend : go

ack,

 

 

*§, A. “ Advertiser,” October 15, 1902, 8. A. “Register.” 8. A. “ Register,” December 1, 1902,
102 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY

back, and I was so impressed with the value of the prospectors’ claims at Winnecke’s that I got them under.
offer at a satisfactory price, and I will have no difficulty in floating a company, with a good working capital—
one of the great essentials for the successful exploitation of a mine. I had a look at the White Range fields
also, and, although there is only one windlass there, and the method of mining is prehistoric, the mines are
yielding good results. There is a wonderful similarity between the White Range and the Yalwal fields in
New South Wales, where the records show that 55,000 tons of stone treated for £27,000 worth of gold at a
total cost of 7s. a ton left a profit of 3s. a ton. In the ‘Town and Country Journal’ of June 14 I read that
the Yalwal was making a profit on 3 dwts., and what can be done there can undoubtedly be done at Arltunga,
where there is plenty of water, and the dressed stone yields an average of 23 dwts. Then, out of every five

tons, perhaps four of fairly valuable stuff are thrown away.”

C. E. HERBERT, M.P.

Mr. C. E. Herbert, M.P., in the course of a speech in the South Australian Parliament in September, 1901,
on a motion to erect smelters at Port Darwin, said :—

The Rev. Tenison Woods has said, ‘‘I am convinced from what I have seen that no part of Australia can
show tin lodes to the same number and extent as the Northern Territory, though in particular instances, such
as Mount Bischoff, they may be richer. The instances of this will be seen in the detailed descriptions of the
mines such as Mount Wells, the mines on the McKinlay River, Mount Shoobridge, and the Finniss. The
Northern Territory may be emphatically pronounced to be a tin country.” Some of these properties promise a
rich reward when properly developed and equipped with suitable dressing machinery. One specimen of tin
oxide, which I have seen from Mount Lyons, weighed no less than 76 lbs.

J. F. MUELLER.

THE NORTHERN GOLD DISCOVERY.

The Minister controlling the Northern Territory has received the following report from Mr. J. F.
Mueller (warden of goldfields at Arltunga), on tne reported coal discovery : —‘‘T have the honor to report
having visited the locality where the discovery of coal was made, about eight miles north-west from Mount
Gordon, and I beg to forward by this mail, in separate parcels, some samples obtained from the shaft. Nos.
1 and 2 parcels were obtained from about the centre of the seam. No. 3 occurs where the seam first appeared,
and also at its termination, at a depth of about 50 feet. No. 4 was picked up promiscuously, and No. 5 occurs
at intervals throughout the seam. In sinking the well the following strata were passed through :—The first
18 feet loam, limestone rock to 20 feet, drift and gravel to 30 feet, concrete to 32 feet, sandstone to 35 feet,
pipeclay to 38 feet, and coal seam to about 50 feet, making depth of seam about 12 feet. A pothole in the
ae of the well discloses another layer of pipeclay. So far only a small supply of water is obtained in the
we Su

A GOLD REEF DISCOVERED.

The Minister controlling the Northern Territory (Hon. J. G. Jenkins) has received a telegram dated
October 30, 1902, from the warden of the goldfields at Arltunga, reporting the discovery of a new gold reef
about four miles south of Winnecke’s depot, and about 35 miles from Arltunga by the present road. The
warden has visited the locality, and found the hill contains a large body of quartz of irregular formation.
Several samples which have been dollied indicate a yield of 2 ozs. to the ton. There are hundreds of tons of
stone in sight. The nearest available water known of is the Kangaroo Creek Well, 32 miles distant. Water
will be wanted to develop the field, and until a supply is available a definite opinion cannot be given as to the
extent of the deposit. The warden says the neighboring country is promising.

MISCELLANEOUS.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 103

 

 

MISCELLANEOUS.

 

 

RECENT WRITERS AND MISSTATEMENTS.

BY THE EDITOR.

 

. It is not the object of this pamphlet to enter the realms of controversy, but to simply state facts. Were
it otherwise, much might be written in vindication of the country and climate of not merely the central
portions of Australia, traduced by recent writers who should be better informed. The table inserted in this
publication of the averages of the rainfall for many years in the Northern Territory is a sufficient answer
to Mr. Archibald R. Oolquhoun’s unfounded statements appearing in the ridiculously inaccurate map,
which unfortunately finds a place in his interesting work, “The Mastery of the Pacific.”

_ The truth is that over a greater part of the Territory, from the coast to the 20th parallel, the rainfall
1s copious and reliable, varying from 63 inches on the one point to 15-32 (Tennant Creek) on the other.
From Tennant Creek to the 24th parallel (Alice Springs, MacDonnell Ranges) it is good, being from
15.32 to 1l inches. From there to the 26th parallel (Charlotte Waters), the boundary of South Australia,
it decreases from 11 inches to 6 inches, but is still a heavier rainfall than in some parts of Australia
successfully stocked with cattle, sheep, and horses.

The climate of what the gifted author of “The Mastery of the Pacific” stigmatises as an “ arid
desert region” is more temperate than that of a large portion of inhabited Australia, as well as more
fertile and better grassed. It is indeed excellent country, and exceedingly healthy; warm, with
occasional excessively hot days, but cool nights. The climate of the MacDonnell Ranges in particular
(included in the condemned desert) is reported by the residents of years as most enjoyable, as with such
an elevation it must be. Professor Baldwin Spencer writes :—‘ There is no finer climate in the world
than that of the MacDonnell Ranges. Indeed, the winter in the interior was of a most perfect kind—
bright, clear days and cool nights. Admirable conditions for a consumptive sanatorium.”

Mr. Colquhoun’s map is a libel, not only on the Northern Territory, but on parts of every State of
the continent, for nearly half of all Australia is branded as an “arid desert region,” with a rainfall of
‘under 10 inches.” In justice to the country so maligned, before going to a second edition he ought to
correct or withdraw it. It is the experience of many old colonists that extensive portions of all the
States, since proved valuable pastoral and agricultural land, have been ignorantly written of and described
as desert. If this pamphlet dissipates such extravagant and erroneous ideas respecting that part of the
great continent of which it especially treats, it will do good service.

 

ACROSS AUSTRALIA.

 

FROM FOWLER’S BAY TO WYNDHAM.

 

MR. R. T. MAURICE.*

 

I left Adelaide on March 4, 1902, to make arrangements at Fowler’s Bay for the expedition. Having selected
14 camels, the expedition, which was well equipped, left early in April, and was out about seven months.
Mr. Murray has told you we diseovered a valuable run of native permanent waters, and carried a north line
by hills for many miles, crossing the tracks of Giles, Tietkins, Gosse, Warburton, Davidson, and Gregory.
Geological specimens were secured from the start to the finish of the trip.

It was such an excessively dry season that absolute reliance can be placed on all the waters discovered.
We went via Ouldea to a previously unfixed water vamed Tallaring. The blacks told us that whites had
been in the vicinity, but had never discovered this water. We commemorated our visit by erecting a post
with the name of the place, the party, and the date inscribed thereon.

We followed on the northern side of the Musgrave, and visited several permanent waters, amongst others
Wardulka and Annallilla.

Between here and the next water we had to lead the camels singly, expecting every moment to see them
slip and smash all to pieces. This was owing to the fact that we had to cross a ragged, precipitous range
which blocked the country.

From here we made Opparrinna, and were delighted to find that the running spring had not decreased
very much since the previous year.

Out here we saw some auriferous outcrops extending towards the Peterman range, which emphasises the

belief of one of the best geological authorities on the telegraph line that gold will be found in large ae
etween

* 3S. A. “ Register,” November 21, 1902.
104 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

between the Peterman Range and the Musgrave in the outcrops in the sandhills. Arriving at that
extraordinary feature, Ayers’ Rock, we were enabled, after much searching, to get a drink for the camels and

to fill the canteen.

Then we went to Mount Olga.

We were fortunate enough to find water at Tietkins Hole.

We then struck north to some smokes to find a native permanent water which we heard existed to the
south of Lake Amadeus. We followed some fresh black tracks to close to Mount Currie.

Here some blacks promptly took us to a water a short distance to the south of Lake Amadeus called
Ardoonderrina. .

We subsequently crossed Lake Amadeus at the western end, and then went north and picked up another
native water.

Locating a couple of minor waters en route, we made for Gill Creek. No water was accessible, but we
were lucky in obtaining the services of a blackfellow who told us of a water elsewhere. This was the biggest
rockhole that has ever been heard of. It contains perhaps a million gallons of water. I named it Thomas
Reservoir. It would take a column in the paper to in any way properly describe this wonderful water and
the character of the surrounding country.

Thence we made to Mount Stanley.

At Warburton’s found permanent water, called Eva Springs. Whilst examining this range Mupjena found
native tracks, and, following these, we came on two beautiful springs, and near by, a big rockhole, sheltered
by high rocks. From here we struck to Mount Singleton, north of which we found an extraordinary cave.

We next met with outcrops of quartz, which appear to extend both to the east and west. We came to
Mr. Davidson’s traverse. The place is called Tanimi. We found Mr. Davidson’s marked tree at his water,
as described.

We here made for Sturt Creek, where we received every kindness from Messrs. Stretch, Weeks, and
Foster.

Here practically the expedition finished.

 

NORTHERN AUSTRALIJA.

 

A WONDERFUL CATTLE COUNTRY.

 

THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

The statements of Mr. S. W. Copley, who hails from Yorkshire, England, and now has his place of
residence at Perth, concerning the Northern Territory, and the large stock-producing area in the north-western
region of Western Australia, will come as a surprise to many people who are unaware of the vast resources of
those parts of the Commonwealth. During a conversation with a representative of the Advertiser,” he said
there were millions of acres of remarkably rich cattle country which had never yet had a hoof on it. He was
now in occupation of four and a half million acres in the Northern Territory and four or five million acres in
the East Kimberley districts. Cattle-raising was only started in the Kimberley districts in 1885, and a short
while before that in the Northern Territory.

Mr. Copley has chartered two steamers to ship cattle from the port of Wyndham to Fremantle, and
purposes extending the trade to Adelaide if the South Australian Government will consent to a similar
arrangement to that entered into by the Perth Government. There are thousands of head of splendid beef
cattle in the country mentioned, and Mr. Copley was strongly of the opinion it was quite as good grazing
land as that of Argentina. In time he intends competing against the South American country by sending
large shipments of frozen meat to London, and is sanguine of success.

When asked if the proposed Transcontinental Railway to Port Darwin would assist the industry, Mr. Copley
replied emphatically in the affirmative, and added that the line would pass through a portion of his station.
The great difficulty experienced at present was in getting the cattle to market. There was a fairly large
number of small cattleowners, who had 2,000, 3,000, or 5,000 animals, and it was a great expense to send small
lots from these herds to port. There, however, were several stations with from 25,000 to 40,000 head upon
them. Mr. Copley declared that for the next year or two there would be a sufficient demand for his cattle in
the Commonwealth, after which he would ship meat abroad. He intended to take up a lot more country in
the Northern Territory and stock it.

Mr. Copley has in contemplation the erection of immense freezing works in the vicinity of Wyndham
to prepare carcases for export to England and Africa. He does not intend, he says, to go into this matter in
a small way, but will provide plants which will be well up to the requirements of the business he proposes to
start, while all modern improvements introduced in conrection with the freezing trade will be provided by
him. It is probable, to judge from Mr. Copley’s statcment, that the early future will see an immense
development in the meat export trade taking place in tue locality named, which, by the way, is so thinly
populated as to be almost “uninhabited.” There are immense tracts of country which have never yet been
trodden by white man: *

HON.

 

* S.A. “Advertiser,” November 20, 1902,
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 105

 

HON. DATO JAMES MELDRUM.

 

Extract from a letter written to the Government Resident, Port Darwin, by Hon. Dato James Meldrum,
Johore Barn, near Singapore, September 10, 1887 :—*

From my long experience (nearly 40 years) in the East, it appears to me that the completion of the

Transcontinental Railway from Adelaide to Port Darwin will inaugurate an era of prosperity little dreamt of
by the most of people. ;

An agency in Singapore might be found of great service to South Australia, either entirely your own, or,
at least at first, one of the best mercantile firms in the place might be appointed. A small steamer, to ensure
regular communication between Port Darwin and Singapore, would be a sine qua non.

Singapore would take horses, cattle, mules, and goats. An agent would be required to work the frozen
meat trade judiciously. It may be superfluous to mention that the following articles would always stand a
chance of being taken, nevertheless I mention flour, jams, honey, fruit, apples, pears, oranges, grapes,
potatoes, wines and brandy, sugar, horses’ food, preserved milk, cheese, and butter. All the rice—indeed,
everything consumed in Singapore—is imported, with the exception of vegetables. The wants of the
shipping, constantly passing, are very considerable. Singapore is a progressive place, constantly increasing in
trade and population.

LETTER TO THE EDITOR.

Johore, Singapore, 8.8., November 13, 1902.

A great trade in mails, p.-sengers, and goods, produce, etc., will spring up when the Great Australian
Continental Railway is linked up. Singapore produces nothing—everything is imported. In time of war
troops could be moved to aid the Colonies, and in famine times goodstuffs could be supplied to India,
China, etc., by the aid of fast steamers between Singapore and Port Darwin. Hn passant there was some
talk of making Port Darwin a Naval Station, for which it is well fitted.

Australia would benefit by the opening up of the Malay Peninsula by the proposed Great Malay
Peninsular and India Railway, about 2,000 miles or less, parts of which are made already. Then new
markets will be created, and homes provided for thousands of natives of India and Ohina, all using
Australian products, more or less. Chinese might be employed to make the tropical part of the Trans-
continental line. The contractors might be allowed to import Chinese for their special purpose, and engage,
under penalty, to secd them back to China when the line is finished.

The Americans propose making a new line across their continent to connect the Atlantic with
the Pacific coast.

The Russians are concerned in making 7,000 to 8,000 miles of railway. Preferring their routes
seems to me to be giving them a stick to beat our own back. I do not believe in the Great Siberian
Railway being the best thing for Australia ; it will compete with Australia in some things in the markets
of the Far East. On land and sea there are dangers which it would be better to avoid—to wit, the long
sea passage between Port Darwin and Port Arthur is attended often by typhoons in the China Sea, and
fogs and reefs on the coast, sure to cause loss of time, and maybe loss of life ; also, the frost and snow of
the Siberian winter will be very trying, especially to ladies and children. Great advantages attend the
route by Singapore to India. But for the dreadful African war it might have been begun ere this. In
the making of it jarrah, etc., sleepers would be required to some extent this end. Your voice and
Australian influence in urging on the construction of the Great Malay Peninsular and India Railway,
Singapore to Calcutta, may tend to hurry on the making of this much-desired line. I wish you every
success in your great undertaking.

I remain, yours faithfully,
J. Mgiprum.

THE STRAITS SETTLEMENTS.

 

Mr. J. G. Penney, Treasurer of the Straits Settlements, arrived in Adelaide, on Wednesday, October 1,
1902. +

In reply to a question whether the Straits Settlements offered a market for Australian produce, Mr.
Penney stated that he thought in the near future there would be a good opening at Singapore for frozen meat
and all kinds of dairy produce. The Government is erecting freezing works, and when they are completed a
great impetus will, he believes, be given to oversea trade in perishable commodities. He points out that the
class of produce which Australia has to offer is scarce in the East, but if it could be imported and sold at
reasonable rates the demand for it would gradually increase. Mr. Penney isa great believer in railways, and
he would be delighted to learn that the South Australian Government has decided to construct a
Transcontinental line to Port Darwin. He believes that if this were done the Straits Settlements would
benefit considerably, owing to their geographical position. At present there is no railway between Caleutta
and Burma, but as that would be the shortest route from Europe to Australia he predicts that as soon as Port
Darwin became the terminus of the Anglo-Australian mail service an impetus would be given to the
Governments concerned to construct the necessary lines in order to attract passengers and trade.

APPENDICES.

 

* Report Government Resident, 1888, No. 53. + S.A. “ Register,’ October z, 1902.
106

ae. TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

APPENDICES.

A.—STATISTICS.

 

(L)—TABLE OF RAINFALL.

 

 

Average |

Annual |

Rainfall. |

pea Pass a ei |
Port Darwin 62°66
Southport .. 63°20

Yam Creek.. 47°79 |
Burrundie a eda 46:01
Pine Creek es Soke 45°29

Katherine River .. atl 40°36 |
Daly Waters 27°59
Powell Creek 18°65
Tennant Creek 15°32
Barrow Creek 12:28
Alice Springs 10°73
Charlotte Waters .. 5°56
Oodnadatta 4°47

 

Period. | Wettest Year.| Driest Year.
|

Months.
of Dec.-Mar.

Sa 5 eee iaea gaan | parnases
32 years a | 8172 42-44 +960
1°, ob 88-80 41-82 | 50°10
oy 74-44 28°37 | 38°50
2 ,, ad 67°61 27°80) 45°10
204, e 69°71 23-67 37-20
29, Ff 58°91 | 18°84 33°71
9 5 OY 43-90 8:99 22°83
a 37°05 8°34 14.98
23 4, Oh 26-16 4°55 10°95
23 ,, A 31-27 3:29 7°39
a3 7 hl 87-91 5:39 6-11
28, i | igs | 1-16 2°87
10 | 6:68 1°54 2-71

 

 

Average Fall
Four Wettest

 

Average Fall
Eight Driest

Months.

April-Novy.

13°60
13°19

 

a 1870/1901.

b 1874/1888.

¢ 1873/1888.
J/g 1873/1901.

d 1890/1901.
h 1874/1901.

i 1892/1901.

(II.)—MEAN MONTHLY TEMPERATURE.

e 1874/1901 (but 1881, 1882,

1885/1889 missing).

 

 

|
Daly Waters.

 

Port Darwin. Alice Springs. Port Darwin.
January 84:1 | 86°8 84:2 July 769 |
February .. 83:5 85:1 82:4 August 79:2
March 84:3 83°6 77°4 September 82°8
April 84-4 797 68:2 October 85°6
May 816 74:1 : 59°6 November 860
June 78:9 | 70:0 iL 54-2 December 85°5

 

| Daly Waters.

CO M~1+I OD
SADOWsI
Dim DOW or

' Alice Springs.

52°0
58°7
66:0
74:3
80°4
83°5

(IL) — NUMBER OF ELEVATIONS OF THE INTERIOR, NOTED BY C. WINNECKE, AT
CAMPING PLACES ALONG THE OVERLAND TRACK. FROM THE NEALES RIVER
TO TENNANT CREEK, THE DISTANCE IN MILES, AND THE HEIGHT ABOVE

 

 

 

 

 

Hans Creek
Cecelia Creek .

Storm Creek

Sandhills

Blood Creek

Finke River
Finke River

Temple Bar

 

 

 

 

 

 

SEA EYE: *
Miles. from|Feet above! [Miles from|Feet above
Adelaide. | Sea level. Adelaide. | Sea level.

ft. in. = ft.
The Peake Teneap ee Station 480 74 Alice Springs | 968 | 2,000
Neales River .. 496 46 6/, MacDonnell Range (Claypans) 989 | 2,521
520 261 6) Burt Creek . . 1,006 «| 2,532
: 534 300 ; Camp north of Burt Creek : 1,016 2,198
Anglepole Waterhole 548 lll 6 Norton Lagoon _... ‘ | 1,052 2,348
; 566 64 6 Woodforde Creek .. ' 1,066 2,160
Macumba River 579 74 Woodforde Creek .. .. | 1,084 2;002
601 187 Tea Tree Well 2] 1,098 1,490
Three Forges .. 613 171 Creek, Mount Stuart ' 1,120 1,729
Dalhousie Springs 626 192 Stirling Creek | 114) 1,756
Opossum W aterhole .. 644 270 Barrow Creek Telegraph Station “| 1,158 1,724
Lowther Swamp 649 380 Taylor River : 1,167 1,595
659 381 Taylor River 1,177 1,521
Adminga Creek 671 | 411 Taylor River 1,187 1,456
Charlotte Waters 690 481 Taylor River a 1,196 1,318
Gsoyder River .. hoe 705 Near Taylor River.. 1,210 1,382
ae pee Wickliffe Creek | 1,224 1,171
i: 756 30 Wa reek | 1,935 7249
Finke River (Mount Musgray e) 770 962 See ee oi

Finke River (Horseshoe Bend).. 78s 965 McLaren Creek 1.259 1.939
Finke River (B depot) 804 973 Gilbert Creek 1 1,266 ee
Hugh River (Rocky Hill) S13 1,023 Kelly’s Well and Creek .. 1,286 1101
Hugh River (Double Crossing) 825 1,042 Tennant Creck Telegraph Station | 1,318 1,075
Hugh River (Percy Hill) .. 834 1,114 Eastward Tennant Creck 1,325 "380
Hugh River (Mount Burrell) 893 | 1,196 | Rankine River 13460 554
Hugh River (Crossing) 870 1,323 6 Rankine River 1,520 467
Hugh River (Long Waterhole) S76 1,450 Herbert River 1,522 408
Hugh River (Dovtor’ s Stones) S97 1,565 6] Lake Nash .. 1.552 358
Hugh River (Stuart’s Camp) 909 1,726 | Milne River.. 1572 432
Hugh River (McUlure Springs) B15 2 1748 | Milne River. 1,622 525
Hugh River (Owen ERM 922 1,992 Milne River.. 1.626 515

eZ 956 1,925 | ;

 

 

 

* Report Commiasion, 1887,
107

THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

“LGBT 0} snotaerd pourezqo Aq13Uenb ey}

SUlaTezI90e8 JO sUBETH OU eM OLB} pus ‘<4ynp ey} JaIpede esourgyH oy} YSnoIq] plod Jo oFvywe, qvoad wv oq 04 UMOU st a0} 8B L][e10edeo axoMt

‘eiqsqiemed A[naq st pvoy tod sqtodxq 049 Jo onjea 049 4eq9 Woes oq [[IM JI (‘A O[GBJ, e098) pedopreuoo st aoryejndod ey} Jo Aoquinu oy} UIA y

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lo‘L98'T | st6 | “29% |ictz'9e|SFeg9| ete's| sz 1 9 2 | sze're | StP9L | 610'SL| St8SP'S || Sss‘ET seo | 6LF'S69'T | GLP TEP [81810],
LLB'16 0g 3 Se = = | son's 84 || o9r's | Sfrzr |] oT4 | Szot || 6Lg'94 FIL9'Ss TO6T
sig‘es pez | “Foe — | — | 1 0 € O O | 24 | “Est |] se0%1| Sizer | oss | Beez | PEg'Z9 $998'08 0061
o98‘89 90T = = = = = | Ost 6 = = OTL FES 697'89 $6ZS'6L |" 668T
PPS'PS LLB | 3th Se = = OT oP _ es me _ L9¥'8 ¥e9t'6s | S68T
$2018 _— = _ _ a = — = _ _ _ = —20'18 TLLS'SS LE8T
269'S8 ae | FS — | — } 4 }0 O Bt T | oes | Set = = oea't | “fee | SZT‘I8 6162S 968T
SPO'LOT | OS g — | — | se9%}o 0 8 & | sist | Se9 | ot | Stee = — || Be4‘sor 18962 S68T
666'9IT | 68% | “6 — | — | sos*| ez 8 61 ST) Igs‘t | “ze || pos‘t 9ST || STI g |) see'60t | fevg'te POST
64 TIT sah flea — | — | eT |0 O 9 O |] ges‘t | $¥8z | OBIT | Set |] osT _OT | OLL‘8OT | #922‘Te S68T
9oF'STT So ie ae alla = = eer'z | Stee | cot's | S8891 |] oFo'T | SEPIT | 88z‘60T 80L'TE 368
8LL‘L01 — | — loztr | tse | — om o“s't | ez || 619'e | Tr9Ez || oz & | 6PI'S6 6298S |" T68T
189°86 — | — ero | 6 ad = OPT'9 | STPIT |] 009'F | oFZOb |] OZZ‘e | “e6T || PZs‘o8 9e5'e2 0681
€2r'69 — | — |ote’s | se | — = 09s» | ft6g || sos‘tt| “928 || eps‘e | StvoT | ese‘Lr 19681 688
GL2‘99 = — je9r‘st| Sze) — = 6ST'E %g i o9s'T | 18 Ter‘T | stpg | 208'rE S146 j° S88T
699'68 _ — |ez9'et| Ss6e) — = Bee'T 8z || sss‘s | %#99¢ _ — || PAL‘89 f9ps'ST | ° LSet
B10'eL ail | So ai Jl. eh om 84 Tt | 26¥6 | “80g || soe | ct9T || 6ET‘e9 O6F'LT 9881
POS FS = = = = aa = Set g GLL'8T| St980'T || — ae PIP‘OL $909°6T | °° S88T
6FL‘8L aaa = = aa = = PIS E81 = = = = SEG'LL SL49'TS |" F8ST
990'8L ae = fad NF aa = TL8 0% = = = — | s6'es 90812 |" S88T
91928 5 = = = aa = oso'T | tize || 90% 4 = — | oz4‘os gto'ez | 28st
or6 IIT S| fe a ae Me ee = a = = = = — | SPOTIT | i60s'le 1881
089 4 Peeallit eee ie = = _ oa = oa — | 089 _ * O88T
5; | F F g ¥ ¥ s | FF

fits

‘onTeA | ‘sdoy, |) on[BA | ‘eaoT, ‘OnyeA | ‘sql ‘eb “9Mo suoy, | ‘on[eA | “suOy, || on[eA | ‘suOT, || ‘ented suo, | anye a 8ZO |
eee “SHLVALNAO i i ‘ava

L -NOO GNV ||'ava'y AXATIC “VOI ‘aaO NIL ‘aUQ AWddOD ‘CaO UAATIG | ato |

qaQ AION

 

 

UDLSINIP, AHL OL

—! 4 INTWLUVdIG HHL do

AUVLANAG AHL Ad GHITddAg sv ‘AUOLIVUL, NUGHLUON WOUd STVUANIPY

‘SLYOdXA TVYANIN—CAD

NGHLIQ INV CIOL) JO SLYOINY

(V.)
108 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

(V.)—POPULATION.

From the Census Returns taken in March, 1901, and allowing for the increase as estimated, I make the
population (not counting the aborigines) as follows * :—

 

Males. Females, Totals,
Europeans ers 8 a oe ae 691 211 902
Chinese 55 a a as w= 2,681 152 2,733
Japanese 164 33 197
Malays re se Sas ee 122 22 144
Others a ie ea sa een 35 3 38

3,693 421 4,014

 

* Government Resident’s Report, 1901 (No. 45).

(VI.)\—NUMBER OF STOCK IN NORTHERN TERRITORY TO END OF DECEMBER, 1901.*

 

Number of Cattle. |Number of Horses.| Number of Sheep |Number of Goats.

255 521 12,896 48,324 9,774

Totals .. 255,521 12,896 48,324 9,774

 

* By request officially supplied by the Minister controlling the Northern Territory.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 109

 

B.—BIBLIOGRAPHY.

COMPREHENSIVE LIST OF THE LITERATURE ON NORTHERN AUSTRALIA,
CONTAINING WORKS QUOTED IN COMPILING THIS PAMPHLET
(CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED).

Compitep py THomas Girt, Unper-Treasurer or South AUSTRALIA.

DISCOVERY, SETTLEMENT, AND IISTORICAL.

Fiinders—A Voyage to Terra Australis, ete. By Captain Matthew Flinders, R.N. Contains an account of all

Gece y cniee on the north coast of Australia prior to 1800, London: G. & W. Nicol, 1814. 2 vols., royal 4to., and
atlas.

King—Narrative of a Survey of the Intertropical and Western Coasts of Australia, performed between the
years 1818 and 1822. By Captain Phillip P. King, R.N., ete. With an appendix, containing various subjects

relating to hydrography and natural history, INustrated by plates, charts, and woodcuts. London: John Murray,
1826. 2 vols., demy 8vo.

Campbell—Geographical Memoir ef Melville Island aud Port Essington, on the Coburg Peninsula, Northern
Australia, with some observations on the settlements which have been established on the North Coast of New
Holland, accompanied by a map of Melville and Bathurst Islands, together with a plan of Port Essington, Com-
municated to the Royal Geographical Society by Major Campbell, 57th Foot, formerly commandant at Melville
Island, ‘Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc.,” vol. IV. London: 1834.

Wilson—Narrative of a Voyage Round the World; comprehending an account of the wreck of the ship
Governor Ready in Torres Straits; a description of the British settlements on the coasts of New Holland, more
particularly Raffles Bay, Melville Island, Swan River, aud King George's Sound; also, the manners and customs of
the aboriginal tribes, with an appendix, containing remarks on transportation, the treatment of convicts during the
voyage, and advice to persons intending to emigrate to the Australian colonies. By T. B. Wilson, M.D. Illustrated
by plates and a chart. London: Sherwood & Co., 1835. 1 vul., demy 8vo.

arl—Observatious on the Commercial and Agricultural Capabilities of the North Coast of New Holland, and
Advantages to be Derived from the Establishment of a Settlement in the Vicinity of Raffles Bay. By G. Windsor
Earl. London: 1836.

South Australian Record.— Port Essington, Climate, Colonisation, Prospects, Etc., Etc. Vols Wl. and III.
London: 1840-1.

South Australian Record.—Melville Island. Apsley’s Straits Settlement. Vol. II. London: 1840.

Anon.—A Mother's Offering to Her Children, By a Lady Resident in New South Wales. Sydney: ‘‘ Gazette ”
Office, about 1841. Contains an account of Port Essington Settlement. 1 vol., fep. 8v0.

. Earl—Notes on Northern Australia and Neighbouring Seas. By G. W. Earl. ‘‘ Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc.,” 1842.
Vol. XI., pp. 159-41.

Earl—Enterprise in Tropical Australia. By G. Windsor Earl, M.R.A.S., linguist to the North Australian
Expedition, and Commissioner of Crown Lands for Port Essington, with maps. London: Madden & Malcolm,
1846. 1 vol., demy 8vo.

Home—Report on Port Essington Settlement. By Captain Sir Everard Home. Australia; from Port Mac-
quarie to Moreton Bay. By C. Hodgkinson, pp. 115-19. London: 1845,

Stokes—Discoveries in Australia, with an account of the coasts and rivers explored and surveyed during the
voyage of H.M.S. Beagle, in the years 1837, 1838, 1839, 1¢40, 1841, 1842, 1843, by command of the Lords Com-
missioners of the Admiralty ; also, a narrative of Captain Owen Stanley’s visit to the islands inthe ArafuraSea. By
J. Lort Stokes, R.N. Illustrated by plates and charts. London: T. & W. Boone, 1846. 2 vols., demy 8vo.

Leichhardt— Journal of an Overland Expedition in Australia from Moreton Bay to Port Essington, a distance of
upwards of 3,000 miles, during the years of 1844-5. By Dr, Ludwig Leichhardt. Illustrated by plates and charts.
London: T. & W. Boone, 1847. 1 vel., and 1 vol. charts, demy 8vo,

Jukes — Narrative of the Surveying Voyage of H.M.S,. Fly, commanded by Captain F. P. Blackwood, R.N,, in
Torres Straits, New Guinea, and other islands of the Eastern Archipelago, during the years 1842-46, together with
an excursion into the eastern part of Java By J. Beete Jukes, M.A., F.G.S., naturalist to the expedition. Pub-
lished by permission of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. Illustrated by plates, charts, and woodcuts.
London: T. & W. Boone, 1847. 2 vols., demy 8vo.

MacGillivray —Narrative of the Voyage of H.MS. Rattlesnake, commanded by the late Captain Owen Stanley,
R.N., during the years 1846-50, including Discoveries and Surveys in New Guinea, the Louisiade Archipelago, etc.,
to which is added the Account of Mr. E. B. Kennedy's Expedition for the Exploration of the Cape York Peninsula,
By John MacGillivray, F.R.G.S., naturalist to the expedition. Published under the sanction of the Lords Com-
missioners of the Admiralty. Illustrated by plates and charts, London: T. & W. Boone, 1852. 2 vols., demy 8vo.

Earl—The Papuans and Native Races of the Indian Archipelago. By G. W. Earl, Illustrated by plates and
map. London: 1853. 8vo.

Gregory—North Australian Expedition. Letters from A. C, Gregory to the Government of New South Wales,
detailing explorations from Victoria River to Brisbane. S.A. Parliamentary Paper No. 170 of 1861,

Baines—Additional Notes on the North Australian Expedition under A. C. Gregory. By T. Baines. “Jour.
Roy. Geog. Soc.,” London, 1858, pp. 3-16.

Earl—Northern Australia: Its Productive Resources. By G. Windsor Earl. Boothby’s Adelaide Directory,
1865, pp. 30-34.

Earl—Handbook for Colonists in Tropical Australia, By G. Windsor Earl. With charts. Penang: 1868.
Reprinted by George Rivers, London, 1882. 1 vol., demy 8vo,

Earl—Contributions to the Meteorology of Northern Australia. By G, Windsor Earl. ‘Trans. Adel. Phil,

Soc.,” Adelaide, September 5, 1865.
Wells,

 
110 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

Wells -Wool Growing in North Australia, By R. Wells. “'Prang, Adel. Phil. Soc.,” Adelaide, October 18, 1864.
Bauer—The Results of Meteorological Observations at Adam Bay, North Australia. By Jacob lauer, Ibid.

South Australian Government—The Northern Territory of South Australia. Accompanied with a map. Adelaide:
W. C. Cox, 1863. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Woods —North Australia; its Physical Geography and Natural History. By the Rev. Julian E. Tenison
Woods, F.R.G.S, Adelaide: W. C. Cox, 1864. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Oppen—A Description of the Northern Territory of South Australia, Carefully Compiled from the Various
Explorers’ and Surveyors’ Journals and Charts. By Edward A. Oppen. Accompanied by a map, showing the
boundaries fixed by H.M.'s Letters Patent, and corrected in accordance with the last information received, Second
edition. Hertford: S. Austin, 1864. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Stephenson—Essays avd Miscellaneous Pieces. By the late Edward R. Stephenson. With a preface by his
friend, C. Todd, Esq., F.R.A.S. Contains prize essay, St. Peter's Collegiate School, Adelaide, December, 1864, on
“The Difficulties of Colonisation in the Northern Territory.” Adelaide: Andrews, Thomas, & Clark, 1865,
1 vol,, crown 8vo.

Howard —Marine Survey of the Northern Territory. By Captain F. Howard. London: 1866. S8vo.
Douglas— Official Report on the Northern Territory of South Australia. By Lieut. Douglas. 1871. Svo.

Stow —Voyage of the Forlorn Hope from Adam Bay to King George’s Sound ; and Notes on Western Australia,
sy J. P. Stow, J.P. Adelaide: ‘ Advertiser” Office. Pamphlet. Royal 8vo.

Anon —Port Darwin: its Soil, Climate, and Resources and Prospects as a Goldfield ; also a Descriptive Sketch
of Charters Towers, compiled from official, public, and private records. By “ Quiris.” With map. Melbourne:
(x, Robertson, 1872. Crown 8vo.

Newman—Tbe Northern Territory and its Goldfields, By G. M. Newman. Adelaide: ‘ Advertiser” Office,
1875. Pamphlet.

Harcus—South Australia: its History, Resources, and Productions, Edited by Wm. Harcus, J.P, London:
Sampson, Low, & Co., 1876. 1 vol., demy 8vo. Includes Supplementary Chapters on the Northern ‘Territory by
the following :—

Knight —General Sketch of the Territory. By J. G. Knight. p. 156.

McMinn—The Settlement. By G R. McMinn. pp. 156-61.

Little—The Climate. The Overland Telegraph. By J. A. G. Little. pp. 161-8.

Plunkett—The Goldfields. By J. A. Plunkett. pp. 168-74.

Knight Indigenous Vegetation, Fauna, and Building Materials, By J. G. Knight. pp. 174-85.
Bednall—Conchology. By W.T. Bednall. pp. 185-6.

Giles Central Australia and Route of Overland Telegraph. By J. A. Giles. pp. 187-204.

Wildey —Australasia and the Oceanic Region, ete. By William Brackley Wildey. Melbourne: G. Robertson,
1876, Cr. 8vo.

Booth—Australia. Chapter on the Northern Territory. By Edwin Carton Booth. London: Virtue & Co.
No date. 2 vols., demy 4to.

Knight—The Northera Territory of South Australia Edited by J. G. Knight, F.R.1.B.A. Adelaide: E. Spiller,
1880. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Victorian Review—The Mistakes of South Australia in the Northern Territory. By a Correspondent, Palmer-
ston, N.T. See article in ‘' Victorian Review,” No. 19, May, 1881.

_ Wigley—Memorandum of Articles of Association of McKinlay and Mount Wells, Northern ‘Territory, Tin
Mining Association, Limited. W. R. Wigley, solicitor. Adelaide: 1881. Pamphlet.

Sowden -The Northern Ti rritory as it is, A Narrative of the South Australian Parliamentary Party's Trip, and
Fall Descriptions of the Northern Territory, its Settlements and Industries. By William J. Sowd n, With an
Appendix, covtaiving Reports on the General Resources of the Territory, by Professor Tate, F.G.S. Adelaide:
W. K. Thomas & Co., 1882. 1 vol., demy 8vo., 192 pp.

Harry —The Northern Territory of South Australia, read before the Royal Colonial Institute, London, May 9,
1882, By Thomas Harry, ‘‘ Proc. Roy. Col. Iost.,” London, vol. XIII.

South Australian Government —Catalogue of Products of the Northern ‘Territory of South Australia for the
Calcutta Exhibitiou, 1883, Adelaide: E. Spiller, 1883, Pamphlet. 8vo.

Camphell—India in Six, and Australia ia Sixteen Days. By W. Campbell, late member of the Legislative
Council of Victoria, London: W. H. Allen, 1883. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Bull—Karly Experiences of Life in South Australia, etc., with illustrations, Chapters X. to XII. on Northern
‘Territory. London: 1884. Demy 8vo,

Stow—South Anstralia: its History, Productions, and Natural Resources. By J. P. stow. Written for the
Calcutta Exhibition by request of the South Australian Government, Adelaide: KE. Spiller, 1883. 1 vol., demy 8vo.
Chapter XXIL, on the Northern Territory, pp. 166-78 ; Catalogue of Exhibits, pp. 197-208, with map.

Parsons—The Sugar Industry in the Mackay District. Notes of a Trip among the Mackay Sugar Plantations ;
the Colored Labor Question in Queensland ; the Northern Territory as a Country for the Growth of Sugar aud other
Tropical Products ; and the Advantages of Coolie Labor in the Northern Territory, By J. Langdon Parsons, M.P.,
Minister of Education, South Australia. Adelaide: E, Spiller, 1883. Demy 8vo.

Parsons—The Northern Territory of South Australia, By J. Langdon Parsons, Article in the ‘National
teview,” London, March, 1884.

. Conigrave—South Australia: a Sketch of its History and Resources. A Handbook compiled by John Fairfax
Conigrave for the Colonial and Indian Exhibition, London, 1886. Adelaide: E. Spiller, 1886. 1 vol., demy 8vo.

Chapter XIII. contains Statement of Gold exported, June, 1881, to June, 1885, pp. 168-70. Appendix shows area,
area alienated, and area leased.

_  Seoti—South Australia in 1887. A Handbook for the Adelaide Jubilee International Exhibition, with introduc-
tion by Sir Samuel Davenport, K.C.M.G., LL.D. Compiled by H. J. Scott. Adelaide: E. Spiller, 1887. 1 vol.,

demy 8vo. Chapter on Northern Territory, includi Brief Outli f tb i i “Oly
Guulogie of Rakin, ny om 8. Y> ng a Brief Outline of the Territory by J. G. Knight, pp. 174-87 ;

_. South Australian Government—The Northern Territory of South Australia, Report of Government Resident,
ae ea J. E. Tenison Woods, F.G.S., etc., on the Geology and Mineralogy of the Territory, Adelaide:
; et.

Newland.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. Hl

 

A as Far North Country. By Simpson Newland. Adelaide: Burden & Bonython, 1887, Pamphlet.
emy Svo,

Newland—Our Waste Lands and our Productions. By Simpson Newland (late Treasurer), Adelaide: Burden
and Bonython, 1888. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Winnecke— Physical Features of Central Australia, By Chas. Winnecke. ‘Proc, Roy. Geog. Soc. of Aust,
(8S. A. Branch),” 1886-7, pp. 1-8.

Carringion—The Rivers of the Northern Territory. By Captain F, Carrington, ‘Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. of
Aust, (S. A. Branch),” 1886-7, pp. 55-76, with map.

Daly—Digging, Squatting, and Pioneering Life in the Northern Territory of South Australia, By Mrs. Dominic
Daly. London: Sampson, Low, & Co., 1887. 1 vol., demy 8vo.

Lindsay—An Expedition Across Australia from South to North between the Telegraph Line and the (Jueensland
Boundary in 1885-6, by David Lindsay. ‘Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc.,” 1889. Vol. XI., p. 650.

Lindsay—Explorations in the Northern Territory. By David Lindsay. ‘Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. of Aust. (8S. A.
Branch),” 1887-8, pp. 1-16.

Chewings— Central Australia. By Charles Chewings, ‘Jour, Roy. Geog. Soc.,” 1891. Vol. XUIL, p. 548.

Giles—Australia Twice Traversed: the Romance of Exploration. Being a Narrative compiled from the
Journals of Five Exploring Expeditions into and through Central South Australia and Western Australia from 1872

to 1876. By Ernest Giles, F.R.G.S, London: Sampson, Low, & Co., 1889, 2 vols., with maps and illustrations,
demy 8vo.

Tietkens — Journal of the Central Australian Exploring Expedition, 1889, together with Maps, List of Botanical
Specimens, and Catalogue of Geological Specimens, with Geological Sketch of the Country passed over. Adelaide:
C. E. Bristow, 1891. 1 vol., demy 8vo. :

Parsons—The Northern Territory ; with a glance at the East. By the Hon. J. Langdon Parsons (Government
Resident in the Northern Territory). Adelaide: W. K. Thomas, 1887, Pamphlet, Demy 8vo.

Parsons—The Products of the Northern Territory, etc. By the Hon. J. Langdon Parsons, M.P. (late Govern-
ment Resident in the Northern Territory), Adelaide: C. E. Bristow, 1891. Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Woods— Wilson—The Province of South Australia. Written for the South Australian Government, By James
Dominick Woods, J.P. With a sketch of the Northern Territory by H. D. Wilson. Adelaide: C. E. Bristow,
1894, pp. 415-446. 1 vol, demy 8vo, Contains statement of minerals exported 1881-92; with statistical tables
revenue, expenditure, exports, imports, &.

Northern Territory Times—Almanac and Directory from 1885. Published at Palmerston, Northern Territory.

South Australian Government—Cultivation of the Date Palm in the Interior of Australia by Artesian and
Other Waters. Adelaide: C. E. Bristow, 1890. Pamphlet.

South Australian Government—Record of Mining in the Northern Territory of South Australia, with report by
E. Copley Playford, Chief Warden Northern Territory Goldfields. Adelaide: C. E, Bristow, 1900.

Horn Scientific Expedition—Report on the Work of the Horn Scientific Expedition to Central Australia (fitted
out and organised by W. A. Horn, Esq.).

Part I. Introduction, Narrative, Summary of Results, Supplement to Zoological Report, Map, pp. i.-xviii.
and 1-220 with 11 plates and woodcuts.

Part II. Zoology, pp. i.-iv. and 1 to 432, with 29 plates and woodcuts.
Part III. Geology and Botany, pp. 1-204, with 9 plates.

Part IV. Anthropology, pp. 1-200, with 20 plates. Edited by Baldwin Spencer, M.A., Professor of
Biology in the University of Melbourne. London: Dulau & Co., 37, Soho Square. Melbourne:
Melville, Mullen, & Slade, 1896.

Nore—The various papers are detailed under their respective headings under Natural History Divisions.

Winnecke—Journal of the Horn Scientific Exploring Expedition, 1894, By C. Winnecke, F.R.G.S., together
with Plates, Maps, and Plans, and Report of the Physical Geography of Central Australia by Professor Ralph
‘Tate and J. A. Watt, B.Sc. Adelaide: C. E. Bristow, 1897. Demy 8vo.

National Association to Federalise the Northern Territory —The Northern Territory of South Australia: its Natural
Features, Pastures, Minerals, Present Resources and Future Possibilities ; together with a carefully-compiled state-
ment of all the available information respecting the Roper River Country (the Australian Argentine), comprising an
area of 6,234 square miles, or nearly 4,000,000 acres, illustrating its capabilities for Horse-breeding on a large scale,
and showing the facilities and opportunities for establishing, in connection with Cattle-raising, Freezing, Canning, and
Meat-preserving Works. With a vast amount of detailed information about the Buffalo found wild in the country,
with.a view to using its flesh in the making of meat extract. With photos. and maps. Approved and issued by the
National Association to Federalise the Northern Territory; offices, 452, Collins Street, Melbourne. Melbourne:
Green & Fargher, 1901. pp. 1-40. Fep.

Parsons-Holtze—The Northern Territory of South Australia, A brief Historical Account; Pastoral and
Mineral Resources, by the Hon. J, Langdon Parsons, M.L.C. The Capabilities of the Northern Territory for
Tropical Agriculture, by Maurice W. Holtze, F.L.S., ete. With illustrations and map. Adelaide: W. K. Thomas
and Co., 1901, Pamphlet. Demy 8vo. Also in “ Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. of Aust, (S. A. Branch),” vol. V.

Note.—-Much valuable information concerning the settlement and development of the Territory will be found
in the South Australian Parliamentary Papers, a list of which is appended at the end of this article.

ABORIGINAL INHABITANTS,

Wilson—Narrative of a Voyage Round the World, etc. By T. B. Wilson. (See ante.)

Confalonierti—Map Showing Location of Native Tribes on North-Coast, including Coburg Peninsula. By the
Rev. A. Confalonieri (about 1841). Adelaide: E. Spiller.

Bennett—Vocabulary of the Woolner District Dialect, Adelaide River, Northern Territory. By N. W. O.
Bennett. Adelaide: W. C. Cox, 1869. Pamphlet. Fep. 8vo.

Foelsche—Notes on the Aborigines of North Australia. By Paul Foelsche, Inspector of Police, Northern
Territory. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc, 8.A.,” vol. V., 1881-2, pp. 1-18. oe

reed,
a

112 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY.

Creed—Extraordinary Customs of the Aborigines of Central Australia. By John M. Creed, L.R.C.P. The

“ Australasian Medical (razette,” Sydney, vol. II., February, 1883, pp. 95-7. 13

Kempe—The Customs, Religious Ceremonies, ete. of the Aldolinga or Mbendaringa Tribe of Aborigines in
Krichauff Ranges. By Rev. J. Kempe. ‘Translated by F. E. H. W. Krichauff, M.P . “Proc, Roy, Geog. Soc, of
Aust, (S. A. Branch),” 1586-7, pp. 33-7 and 77-80.

Curr —The Australian Race; Its Origin, Languages, Customs, Place of Landing in Australia, and the Routes
by Which it Spread itself over that Continent. By Edward M. Curr, 4 vols. Melbourne: 1886. Port Darwin
and Coast Tribes, see vol. I., pp. 250-278; Alice Springs and Central Australian Tribes, vol. I., pp. 411-422.

East—The Aborigines of South and Central Australia) By J. J. East. Adelaide: 1889, Pamphlet. Fep. 8vo.

Willshire—The Aborigines of Central Australia, with a Vocabulary of the Dialect of the Alice Springs Natives,
By W. H. Willshire, Mounted-Constable, ete. Port Augusta: D. Drysdale, 1888. Pamphlet. Fep. 8vo.

Willshire—The Aborigines of Central Australia, with Vocabularies of the Dialects spoken by the Natives of Lake
Amadeus and of the Western Territory of Central Australia. By W.H. Willshire. Adelaide: C. E. Bristow, 1891.
Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Kempe—A Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language spoken by the Aborigines of the MacDonnell Ranges,
By the Rev. H. Kempe, of the Mission Station, River Finke. ‘‘ Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. of 8. A.,” pp. 1-54,
vol. XIV., 1891.

Schulze—The Aborigines of the Upper and Middle Finke River: their Habits and Customs, With Introductory
Notes on the Physical and Natural History Features of the Country. By the Rev. Louis Schulze, Missionary,
“Trans, and Proc. Roy, S:c. of 8. A.,” pp. 210-46, vol. XIV., 1891.

Ravenscroft—Some Habits and Customs of the Chingalee Tribe, Northern Territory. By A. G. B. Ravenscroft.
‘Trans. Roy. Soc, of S. A.,” pp. 121-2, vol. XV., 1892.

Stretton—Customs, Rites, and Superstitions of the Aboriginal Tribes of the Gulf of Carpentaria. With a
Vocabulary. By W. G. Stretton, $.M. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 227-58, vol. XVII, 1893.

Mackillop — Anthropological Notes on the Aboriginal Tribes of the Daly River, North Australia. By the
tev. Donald Mackillop, S.J. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. of 8, A.,” pp. 254-64, vol. XVIT., 1893.

Weills—The Habits, Customs, and Ceremonies of the Aboriginals of the Diamantina, Herbert, and Eleanor
Rivers, in Kast Central Australia. By Francis H, Wells, of the S. A. Police Department. Read before the Aust,
Assoc, for the Advancement of Science. Adelaide: 1893.

Parkinson— Remarks on the Native Tongues in the neighborhood of Port Darwin. By T. A. Parkinson,
“Trans. of the Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 1-18, vol. KIX., 1895.

Dahi—Treatment after Circumcision in the Hermit Hill Tribe, Daly River, Northern Territory. By Kaut
Dabl. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 122-3, vol. XIX., 1895.

Stirling— Anthropology. By E. C. Stirling, C.M.G., M.A., M.D., ete., 1896. Part IV. of Report of the Horn
Scientific Expedition to Central Australia, with twenty illustrations,

Willshire—The Land of the Dawning, etc. By W. H. Willshire. Adelaide: W. K. Thomaa & Co., 1896.
Pamphlet. Demy 8vo.

Spencer and Gillen—The Native Tribes of Central Australia, By Baldwin Spencer, M.A., and F. J. Gillen, S.M.
With numerous illustrations. London: MacMillan & Co., 1899.

Gillen ~The Natives of Central Australia. By F. J. Gillen, SM. “ Proe., Roy. Geog. Soc. of Aust. (S. A.
Branch),” 1898-9, pp. 17-28.

Gillen—Notes on Some Manners and Customs of the Aborigines of the MacDonnell Ranges belonging to the
Arunta Tribe, By F J. Gillen, S.M., Sub-Protector of the Aborigines, Alice Springs. Ibid, 1896.

Gillen—Magic amongst the Natives of Central Australia, By F. J. Gillen. Read before Aust, Asso. for the
Advancement of Science. Melbourne: 1901.

Naturau [ustory.
GEOLOGY.
Waterhouse—Features and Productions of Country on Stuart’s Track across Australia, ete. S.A. Parliamentary
Paper No. 125 of 1863,

Woods—North Australia: its Physical Geography and Natural Hist By the Rev. Julian E. Teni
Woods, F.R.G.S. Adelaide: W. C, Cox, 1864." Pampblet, Demy aye, gi nee a see Seek

, Tate— Mineralogical, etc., Features of the Northern Territory. By Professor R. Tate. Report, with maps. Fep
S. A. Parliamentary Paper No. 63 of 1882 (re-printed in pamphlet on Northern Territory, Adelaide, 1888),

Woods - Geology and Mineralogy of the Northern Territory. By Rev. Tenison Woods, F.G.S. Report and
maps. Fep, 8, a. Parliamentary Paper No, 122 of 1886.

Brown— Geology. Reports and maps. By H. Y. Lyell Brown, F.G.S. (Government Geologist), as follow :—
Adelaide to ale River. S.A, Parliamentary Paper No. 24 of 1889.
Alice Springs, etc, S. A. Parliamentary Papers Nos, 159 of 1890 and 52 of 1893.
Warrina to Musgrave Ranges. S. A, Parliamentary Paper No. 45 of 1890.
Northern Territory Explorations, §, A. Parliamentary Paper No, 82 of 1895,
Arltunga Goldfields, S.A. Parliamentary Paper No. 127 of 1896.
Report on the White Range Gold Mi Arl i i
NG ace Tae g ines, Arltunga Goldfield, with Plan. S.A. Parliamentary Paper
(All printed by the Government Printer, Adelaide.) fe

Rennie— On some so-called South Australian Rubies from MacDon i
, ‘ nell Ranges, Hale R ; f
E. H. Rennie, D.Sc. “Trans, and Proc. of Roy. Soc. of 8. A.,” pp. 17-18, wal IL, 1887-8, ae oaleworeree

East - Ou the Geological Structure and Ph sical Feat i
Proc. of Roy. Soc. of 8. A,” pp. 31-58, vol. xi, 1888.9. peer seee gsi ca gah ae ae

Brown—Catalogue of Rock Specimens collected b i ical S J
teeny Oe ee es oe a cted by W. H. Tietkens, and Geological Sketch of Country passed

Etheridge—On Silarian and Mesozoi i ia. S i
50 of 1893, 25 of 1804" wea toy eo Fossils from Central Australia, S, A. Parliamentary Papers Nos, 23 of 1892,

Chewings.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 113

 

Chewings—Geological Notes of the Upper Finke Basin. By Charles Chewings, F.R.G.S. With plan.
“Trans, and Proc. of Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 247-55, vol. XTV., 1891.

Chewings—Notes on the Sedimentary Rocks in the MacDonnell and James Ranges. By Charles Chewings,
F.R.G.S. Ibid, pp. 197-99, vol. XVIII, 1894.

Moulden—Petrographical Observations upon some South Australian Rocks. By J. Collett Moulden (Associate
Royal School of Mines, London). ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. of 8. A.,” pp. 70-8, vol. XIX., 1895.

Tate—On Evidences of Glaciation in Central Australia. By Professor Ralph Tate, F.G.S., ete. hid, p. 68,
vol. XXT., 1897.

Parkes —Mines and Mineral Resources of the Northern Territory. By J. V. Parkes. Report and maps, etc,
S. A. Parliamentary Paper No. 32 of 1891.

_ Spencer—Through Larapinta Land. By Professor Baldwin Spencer, M.A., ete. Part I. of Report of the Horn
Scientific Expedition. 1896.

Tate—Physical Geography, General Geology, and Paleontology. By Professor R. Tate. Part III. of Report
of the Horn Scientific Expedition. 1896.

Watt— Physical Geography, General and Economie Geology, and Petrology. By J. A. Watt, M.A., etc. Ibid,
Smeeth— Petrology. By W.F. Smeeth, M.A., ete. Ibid.

BOTANY.

Mueller—Botanical Report on the North Australian Expedition under the command of A. C, Gregory.
Melbourne: 1857. 8vo.

AMueder—A Systematic Arrangement of the Plants noticed around the Gulf of Carpentaria, from the Roper to
the Gilbert Rivers. By Baron Sir F. von Mueller, K.C.M.G, Melbourne: 1862. 8vo.

Waterhouse — Features and Productions of Country on Stuart’s Track across Australia. Report on Fauna and
Flora, etc. S, A. Parliamentary Paper No. 125 of 1863.

AMueller—List of Plants Collected by Mr. Chandler at Barrow and Tennant Creeks. By Baron Sir F. von
Mueller, K.C.M.G. ‘‘ Trans, Roy. Sog. of S. A.,” pp. 172-174, vol. III., 1879-80.

Mueller —On a New Dillenidceous Plant, and a New Rhamnaceous Plant from Arnheim Land. By Baron Sir
F. von Mueller, K.C.M.G. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. of 8. A.,” vol. V., 1881-2, pp. 79-80.

Mueller —Diagnosis of a New Genus of Verbenacez from Arnheim Land. Jbdid, vol. VI., 1882-3, pp. 33-4.
Alueller—Abrus Precatorius. The ‘ Australasian Medical Gazette,” Sydney, vol. IL., July, 1883, pp. 217.

Winnecke —Plants Collected in Central Australia between 8S. latitude 22° 30’ and 28° and E. longitude 136° 30/
and 139° 30’. By Charles Winnecke. ‘‘ Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 10-13, vol. VIIL, 1884-5.

Winnecke— Plants Collected near Stuart Range in 1885. Ibid, p. 160.

Kempe—The Indigenous Plants of the MacDonnell Ranges. By the Rev. H. Kempe. ‘‘ Trans. and Proc. Roy.
Soc. of 8. A.” pp. 129-36, vol. III, 1879-80; and pp. 19-23, vol. V., 1881-2

Mueller— Additions to the Extra-Tropical Flora of South Australia By Baron Sir F. von Mueller, K.C.M.G.,
etc. ‘‘ Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. of 8. A.,’ pp. 57-8 and 216-8, vol. IX., 1885-6.

Mueller— Description of a New Corchorus (C. Elderi) from Central Australia. bid, p. 58, vol. IX.

Mueller—List of Plants Collected during Mr. Tietkens’ Expedition into Central Australia, 1889. Ibid,
pp. 94-109, vol. XIII., 1889-90, and as an appendix to volume on ‘“ Tietkens’ Exploring Expedition.” (See ante.)

Mueller —Suppleweatal Notes to the List of Plants Collected in Central Australia. Jbid, pp. 170-1.

Tate—A Census ot the Indigenous Flowering Plants and Vascular Cryptogams of Extra-Tropical South
Australia. By Professor Ralph Tate, F.L.S., F.G.8., ete. ‘Trans, and Proc. of Roy. Soc, of 8. A.,” pp. 67-128,
vol. XII., 1888-9; and pp. 79-83, vol. XIX., 1895.

Holtze—Introduced Plants in the Northern Territory. By Maurice Holtze, F.L.S, ‘Trans. of Roy. Soc.
of S. A.,” pp. 1-4, vol. XV., 1892.

Holtze—Narrative of an Exploring Tour across Melville Island, with Notes on its Botany. Jdid, pp. 114-20,
vol, XV., 1892.

Tate—Botany. The Larapinta Flora and the Central Eremian Flora. By Professor Ralph Tate, F.L.S.,
F.G.S. Vart III. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition. 1896.

Maiden —Botany and Notes on some Vegetable Exudations, By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S. Ibid.

Spencer—Botanical Results of the Horn Scientific Expedition. By Professor Baldwin Spencer, M.A., etc,
Part J. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition, pp. 159-61. 1896.

ZOOLOGY.

Richardson—Ichthyology of the Seas of China and Japan (including Australia), By Jobn Richardson, M.D.,
F.R.S., etc. Report Brit, Assoc, for the Advancement of Science, pp. 187-320. Part I., 1845.

Castlenau—Contribution to the Ichthyology of Australia. Notes on Fishes from North Australia, ‘+ Proc.
Zool. and Acclim. Soc. of Victoria,” vol. II., Melbourne, 1873, pp. 83-97.

Bednall—Conchology of Port Darwin. By W. T. Bednall. See Harcus ante.

Tate—Note on the Occurrence of a Second Species of Crocodile from Arnheim Land. By Professor RK. Tate,
F.L.S., F.G.S. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” vol. VI., 1882-3, p. 96.

Waterhouse— Features and Productions of Country on Stuart's Track across Australia, etc. S. A. Parliamentary
Paper No. 125 of 1863.

Tate—The Land and Freshwater Molluscs of Tropical South Australia. By Professor Ralph Tate, F.L.‘.,
F.G.S. ‘‘Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” vol. V., 1881-2, pp. 47-56.

Stirling—Description of a New Genus and Species of Marsupialia, ‘‘ Notoryctes Typhlops.” By E. C, Stirling
M.A., M.D. “Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. of S, A.,” pp. 154-187, with 7 plates, vol. XIV., 1891. :

Stirling—Further Notes on the Habits and Anatomy of the Notoryctes Typhlops. By E. C. Stirling, M.A.,
M.D., with plate. Ibid, pp. 283-291, vol. XIV., 1891.

Stirling.
H
114 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

List of Plants collected in Central Australia between S. lat, 17° and 22°. Ibid, p. 262, vol. XV., 1892.
Ibid, p. 1, vol. XVIIT., 1894.

By G. Elliot Smith, M.D.,

Surling —
Stirling—Supplemental Note on the Osteology of Notoryctes Typhlops.

Smith—The Comparative Anatomy of the Cerebrum of Notoryctes Typhlops.
Ch.M., etc., Sydney. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 167-193, vol. XIX., 1895.

Walson—On the Myology of the Notoryctes Typhlops, with comparative notes.
13 plates. ‘‘ Trans, Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” pp. 3-74, vol. XVIII., 1894.

Plackburn —Further Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. By the Rev. T. Black-
burn, BA, Trans. and Proc. of Roy. Soc. of S. A.,” p. 179, vol, XL, 1887-8; also pp. 121-60, vol. XII, 1890.

Blackburn—Further Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Geuera and Species. By the
Rev. T. Blackburn, B.A. Ibid, pp. 292-345, vol XIV., 1891; pp. 20-73 and 207-61, vol. XV., 1892; pp. 200-41,
vol. XVIL, 1894; pp. 27-60 and 201-58, vol, XIX., 1895; pp. 35-109 and 233-59, vol. XX., 1896; pp. 88-98,
vol. XXI., 1897; pp. 18-64 and 221-33, vol. XXIL, 1898; pp. 22-101, vol. XXIII, 1899.

Blackburn—Coleoptera. Part II. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition. 1896.

Tepper—The Phaneropteridce of Australia and Polynesia. By J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S. ‘Trans. of Roy. So.
of S$. A.,” pp. 77-118, vol. XV., 1892.

Tepper—The Gryllacridce and Stenopelmatidce of Australia and Polynesia. did, pp. 137-78.

Tepper -—The Blattarice of Australia and Polynesia. Ibid, pp. 25-126, vol. XVIL, 1893; and pp. 169-89, vol.
XVUL, 1894.

Tepper—Orthoptera. Part II. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition. 1896.

Lower—New Australian Lepidoptera. By Oswald B. Lower, F.E.8.  ‘* Tras. of Koy. Soc. of 8, A.,”
pp. 146-85, vol. XVIT., 1893.

Lower—Lepidoptera. By Oswald B. Lower, F.F.S. Part II. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition, 1896,

Kirby —Hymenoptera. By W. F. Kirby, F.L.S., ete. Part I. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition. 1896.

Spencer—Zoological Results of the Horn Scientific Expedition. By Professor Baldwin Spencer, M.A.,
C.M.Z.S. Part I. of Report of the Horn Scientific Expedition, pp. 139-58 and 210-11. 1896.

Spencer —Mammalia, Amphibia, Crustacea, ete. By Professor Baldwin Spencer. Part IL. bid.
North—Aves. By Alfred J. North, F.L.S.; with Field Notes by G. A. Keartland. Part If. bid.
Lucas—Reptilia. By A H S. Lucas, M.A., etc. Part I. Dhid. :

Frost—Reptilia. By C. Frost, F.L.S. Part UW. Lhid.

Zietz—Pisces. By A. Zietz, F.L.S. Part I. Ibid.

Tate—Moliusca. By Professor Ralph Tate. Part Il. bid.

Hedley—Mollusca. By C. Hidley, F.L.S. Part UW. bad.

Hogg—Araneide. By H. R. Hogg, M.A. Part IL. Ibid.

Sloane—Carabide. By Thomas G. Sloane. Part II. Jbid.

Froggait—Honey Ants. By Walter W. Froggatt. Part I. Ibid.

Waite—Muride. By Edgar R. Waite, F.LS. Part I. Zbed.

Tepper—Martin—A List of Libellulidce of Australasia. By J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., with annotations by
Mons. René Martin. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. of 8. A.,” pp. 1-8, vol. XXIII., 1899,

Turner—Notes on Australian Lepidoptera. By A. Jefferis Turner, M.D. Jdid, pp. 9-21.

Tate —Contributions to a Revision of the recent Rissoidce of Australia. By Professor Ralph Tate, F.LS.,
F.G.S. Ibid, pp. 230-248.

By J. T. Wilson, M.B., Edin,

SouTH AUSTRALIAN PARLIAMENTARY PAPERS (INCLUDED IN ANNUAL VOLUMES OF BLUE-Books).

Colonization and Annexation—Papers Nos. 37, 70, 113, and 127 of 1863; and 118 of 1883-4.

Settlement, Correspondence relative to the—Papers Nos. 89 of 1866-7; 15, 88, and 184 of 1886; 16, 55, and
80 of 1866-7; and 91 of 187] . se pra res ay er ener

Counties, Definition of—Paper No. 51 of 1873.

_ Commission to Enquire into the Management of the Northern Territory, together with Minutes of the
Evidence, Reports of, and Appendix—Papers Nos. 17 of 1866 and 19 of 189d.

@ me Holders—Papers Nos, 103-4 of 1866-7, 175 of 1867, 127 of 1868, 160 of 1868-9, and 129 and 129a

Purchasers of Allotments—Paper No. 104 of 1866-7.

Order of Choice Town Allotments—Paper No. 29 of 1870-71.

Order of Choice Country Sections—Papers Nos. 30 and 304 of 1870-1.

Horses for Indian Army—Papers Nos. 48, 67, 674, and 155 of 1869-70, 25 of 1874, and 53 of 1899.
Goldfields Reports—Papers Nos. 126 of 1871, 106 of 1876, 72 of 1877, and 155 of 1880.

Survey of Northern Territory—Papers Nos. 31 and 157 of 1869-70, and 32 of 1870-71.

Maps and Plans of Land in Vicinity of Palmerston, and Pl f Pal irgini A
Papers Nos 161 and 204 of i869-70, 73 of 1870-71, and 31 of 1873, Caer Pee peeing nee

- ic Port Darwin—Papers Nos. 60 of 1871, 41 and 156 of 1872, 28 and 29 of 1873, 180 of 1874, and 109

N Territory Litigati : at ; 4
Paper alee ee Litigation (Report of Proceedings before the Judicial Committee of the Privy Council)—

Emigration : Coolie, Santhal, and Indian—Pa
ee : ‘ end —Papers Nos. 38 and 65 of 1874; 61, 73, and 106 of 1875; 50 of
18t0 ; and 42 of 1882; and Acts 163 of 1879, 240 of 1882, 137 of 1891, 65 of 1892, and 69 of 1998-9.

Explorations,
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

Explorations.—J. McD. Stuart—Papers Nos. 65 of 1861, 219 of 1862, and 21 of 1863.
A. C, Gregory— Paper No. 170 of 1861.
J. McKinlay—Papers Nos. 131 of 1865-6, and 82 and 82a of 1866-7.
Captain Cadell— Papers Nos. 178 of 1867 ; 24, 79, and 79a of 1868-9.
Major Warburton— Paper No. 28 of 1875.
W. C. Gosse—Paper No. 48 of 1874.
Ernest Giles—Papers Nos. 215 of 1874, 21 of 1875, 18% of 1876, and 22 of 1877.
H. V. Barelay—Paper No. 209 of 1878.
C. Winnecke— Papers Nos. 121 of 1882, 39 of 1884, and 19 of 1896.
Favenc and Crawford— Paper No. 181 of 1883-4.
D. Lindsay—Paper No. 239 of 1883-4.
W. H. Tietkens—Paper No. 111 of 1890,
Geology, Mineralogy, ete.— Rev. J. E. Tenison Woods—Paper No. 122 of 1886.
H. Y. L. Brown (Government Geologist)—Papers Nos, 24 of 1889, 45 and 189 of 1890, 52 of 1893,
82 of 1895, 127 of 1896 and of 1902.
Professor Ralph Tate— Paper No, 63 of 1882.
J. V. Parkes (Inspector of Mines)— Paper No. 82 of 1892.
R. Etheridge (Paleeontology)—Papers Nos. 23 of 1892, 50 of 1893, 25 of 1894, and 127 of 1896,
Rivers in the Northern Territory—H.M.8.S. Beatrice — Papers Nos. 18 of 1865, 84 of 1865-6, and 79 of 1866-7.
8.8. Palmerston, Captain Carrington—Sce Government Resident's Reports for Years 1884-6.
Victoria River Settlement—Paper No, 128 of 1879.
Railway, Transcontinental—Papers Nos, 87 of 1872, 138 and 177 of 1873, 105 of 1876, 190 of 1881; 65, 79, 82,
and 204 of 1890; 150 ( Cimber) of 1891, 86 of 1896, and 67 of 1897,
Palmerston to Pine Creek—Papers Nos, 225 of 1877, 47 of 1879. and 25 and 89 of 1890.
to Queensland Border— Papers Nos. 33, 33A, 187, and 188 of 1890; 77 of 1891, and 95 of 1899.
Transcontinental, Report of Commission —Papers Nos, 34 and 34a of 1887.
Map showing Distances from Centre of Australia—Paper No. 79 of 1886.
Reports by Ministers Hon. T. Reynolds—Paper No. 55 of 1873.
Hon, J. C. F. Johnson—Paper No. 178 of 1891.
Hon. T. Playford— Paper No. 97 of 1892.
Government Resideats' Reports —Papers Nos. 138 of 188), 33 and 105 of 1831, 147 and 1474 of 1882; 53, 53a,
54, and 54a of 1883; 53, 53a, 53B, and 54 of 1884; 53, 54, and 55 of 1885 ; 53 and 54 of 1886,
53 of 1887, 53 of 1888, 28 of 1889, 28 of 1890, 28 of 1891. 181 of 1892, 158 of 1893, 53 of 1894,
24 of 1895, 45 of 1896, 45 of 1897, 45 of 1848-9, 45 of 1899, 45 of 1900, 45 of 1901.
Port Darwin, suitable for Imperial purposes—Paper No. 105 of 1887.
Defences, Port Darwin and Thursday Island—Paper No. 73 of 1892.
Mennonites, Correspondence with Bishop Bugnion—Papers Nos. 29, 160, and 160a of 1876.
Chinese Immigration and Emigration—Papers Nos. 101 of 1887 and 57 of 1893.
Japanese, Correspondence re Introduction of--Paper No. 37 of 1898-9.
Agricultural and other Lands (Brackenbury )—Paper No. 65 of 1896,
Cattle Export—Papers Nos, 34 and 159 of 1893, 137 of 1394.
Table Lands, Report on (Lindsay and Winnecke)—Paper No. 66 of 1898-99.
Red Water, Report on—Paper No. 95 of 1890.
Tropical Products, Bonuses for—Paper No. 73 of 1889.
Sugar and Tropical Products, Cultivation of—Papers Nos. 43 of 1878 and 179 of 1881.
Climate, Soil, etc., Mr. Todd’s Report on Climate— Paper No. 114 of 1868-9.
Mr. Goyder’s Report on Soil, ete.—Paper No. 32 of 1870-1.
Government Resident on Climate, Soil, ete.— Papers Nos. 35 of 1871, 138 of 1880, and
54 of 1885.
Rainfall and Meteorology—See Annual Reports of Sir Charles Todd since 1876.
Date Palm, Cultivation of, in Interior of Australia-~Paper No. 129 of 1890.
Well Sinking, Alice Springs, Cost of—Paper No. 123 of 1891.
Finke River Aboriginal Mission Station, Report on—Paper No. 148 of 1890.
Transfer of Northern Territory to Commonwealth, Hon. F. W. Holder's letter—Paper No. 27 of 1901.

SourH AUSTRALIAN PARLIAMENTARY DEBATES.
For Debates on Northern Territory, see volumes South Australian Hansard, published annually in Adelaide,

IMPERIAL PARLIAMENTARY PAPERS.

Colonial Land and Emigration Commissioners, London—Reports on Formation of Settlement at Port Essington.
See Annual Reports of the Commissioners for the years 1840, pp. 45-54; 1842, p.8; 1843, p. 11; 1844, pp.
3 and 53-66; and 1847, pp. 10 and 47-48.

Port Essington, Establishment of a Settlement at—H. C. paper, printed March 27, 1843.

Exploration—Expedition under A. C. (sregory—H. C. paper, printed 1857. .

Australian Exploring Expedition—H. C. paper, printed March 28, 1862.

Port Darwin to Oodnadatta, Earl of Kintore, G.C.M.G.—Report on a Visit to Port Darwin, and upon the

Affairs of the Northern Territory—H. C. paper, printed July, 1891.

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN PARLIAMENTARY PAPERS.
Exploration—Champion Bay to Overland Telegraph Line. By John Forrest, F.R.G.S. Perth: 1875.
DeGrey to Port Darwin. By Alex. Forrest, F.R.G.S8, Perth: 1880.
Botany—Plants collected during John Forrest’s Expedition, By Baron Sir F, von Mueller, K.C.M.G.
Perth: 1875,

logy—Specimens of Rocks collected during John Forrest's Expedition, By R. Brough Smyth. Perth : 1875,
perce Geological Character of Country between Beagle Bay and Katherine Station, By Fenton Hill,

Perth: 1880.
ACTS
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RATLWAY.

116

 

ACTS OF PARLIAMENT RELATING TO THE SETTLEMENT AND DISPOSAL OF Crown LaNps, ETC., OF THE NORTHERN
TERRITORY PASSED BY THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN PARLIAMENT.

r disposal of Waste Lands of the Crown lately annex2d to the Province of

An Act for regulating the sale or othe D
0. 23 of 1863. Assented to November 12, 1863. Contains preamble and

South Australia and for other purposes—N

17 Sections.
Note.— Sections 8,9, 11, and part 14 were repealed by Act No, 28 of 1872. Sections 1 to 9 were repealed by Act

No. 271 of 1882. Section 10 repeated and new Section substituted by Act No, 383 of 1886.

* An Act to amend “The Northern Territory Act ”—No. 3 of 1868. Assented to November 24, 1868.

* An Act to amend an Act No. 3 of 1868, intituled ‘‘ An Act to amend the Northern ‘Territory Act "—No. 2 of
1869-70. Assented to February 9, 1870.

* An Act to amend ‘The Northern Territory Amendment Act, 1868”—No. 3 of 1871. Assented to October
26, 1871.

* An Act to regulate the sale and other dispozal of the Waste Lands of the Crown in that portion of the
Province of South Australia commonly styled the Northern Territory—No., 28 of 1872. Assented to November 30,

1872. This Act also deals with mining, fishing, ete.

* An Act to provide for the publication iu the Northern Territory of certain matters and things required by law
to be published in the “ Government Gazette "—No. 5 of 1874. Assented to November 6, 1874.

* An Act to amend “The Northern Territory Land Act, 1872”—No, 48 of 1876. Assented to October 27, 1876.

* An Act to provide for the Payment of Compensation to certain Selectors of sections of Land, in the Northern
Territory, of deficient area, and for other purposes- No. 71 of 1877. Assented to December 21, 1877.

*An Act to further amend “Che Northern Territory Land Act, 1872”—No. 158 of 1879. Assented to
October 25, 1879.

* An Act to reduce the Rental of Lands leased for pastoral purposes in the Northern Territory—No. 179 of
1880. Assented to October 25, 1880.

* An Act to encourage the settlement of that part of the Province of South Australia known as the Northern
Territory and to provide for the cultivation of sugarcane and other tropical products therein—No, 194 of 1880.
Assented to October 28, 1880.

~ An Act to amend “ The Northern Territory Land Amendment Act of 1876,” and for other purposes—No. 220
of 1881. Assented to November 18, 1881.

* An Act to amend Act No, 194 of 1880—No. 224 of 1881. Assented to November 18, 188].

Nore.—All the foregoing Acts marked with an asterisk were repealed by Act No. 271 of 1882.

An Act to consolidate the Acts to regulate the Sale and other disposal of the Waste Lands of the Crown in
that portion of the Province of South Australia commonly styled the Northern Terr.tory—No. 271 of 1882.
Assented to November 17, 1882.

Nore.—This Act was repealed by Act No. 501 of 1890.

An Act to amend ‘‘The Northern Territory Act, 1863,” and ‘‘ The Northern Territory Customs Act, 1882 ”—
No. 383 of 1886. Assented to November 17, 1886.

An Act to repeal ‘The Northern Territory Crown Lands Consolidation Act, 1882,” and to make other pro-
visions in lieu thereof—No. 501 of 1890. Assented to December 23, 1890.

Note.—Sections 59 to 76 repealed by Act No, 722 of 1899.

Anu Act relating to the Mining and Pastoral occupation of the Northern Territory—No. 649 of 1896. Assented
to September 2, 1896. [Provides for Leases for encouraging establishment of Horse-breeding Stations. ]

Nore.—Section 5 repealed by Act No, 722 of 1899.

An Act to amend the Northern Territory Land Laws—No. 722 of 1899. Assented to November 22, 1899.

Acts OF PARLIAMENT RELATING TO RAILWAYS.

An Act to provide for the formation of a Line of Railway from Palmerston to Pine Creek—No. : -
Assented to October 26, 1883. : Bee aes

An Act to provide for the construction of a Line of Railway from Oodnadatta, in the State of South australia
to Pine Creek, in the Northern Territory, and for other purposes—No, 803 of 1902. Assented to November 13,
1902, [Provides for construction by grants of land in fee simple in blocks situated alternately on either side of the
railway.] See Appendix C herewith (page 117).

ACTS OF PARLIAMENT RELATING TO GOLD MINING IN THE NORTHERN TERRITORY.

An Act to regulate the Sale and other Disposal of the Waste Lands of the Crown in that portion of the
es of South Australia commonly styled the Northern Territory—No. 28 of 1872. Assented to November 30,
Note.—Sections 44 to 56 and 72 and 73 repealed by Section 4 of Act No. 18 of 1873.
An Act to amend the Laws relatiag to Mining for Gold in the Northern Territ
—No. 18 of 1873. Assented to December 18, 1873. Sr eearpren ns inten

An Act to amend ‘The Gold Mining Act No. 353 of 1885,” so far as relates to New Goldfields—No. 368
of 1886. Assented to September 8, 1886. Incorporated with act No, 353 of 1885, intituled “An act to amend
the Laws relating to Gold Mining, and for other purposes.” ;

Note,— Sections 1 and 7 repealed by Act No. 628 of 1895.

An Act to amend “The Northern Territory Gold Mining Act, 1873,” ‘The Gold Mini
1886,” and for other purposes—No. 628 of 1895. Assented A December 20, 1895. peer a

An Act relating to the Mining and Pastoral Occupati f th i —
‘ene ee g pation of the Northern Territory—No. 649 of 1896. Assented

_ An Act to amend “The Northern Territory Gold Mining Act, 1873,” and “Th i
Mining Amendment Act, 1895” —No. 695 of 1898-9. Aasentad to Bee 33, 1898. NORGE See as

An Act to provide for the Issue of Leases for Dredgi rold i i
wee ee ging for Gold in the Northern Territory—No, 720 of 1899.

Cc.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 117

 

 

C—THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY ACT.

 

ANNO SECUNDO

HOWARDI VIL REGIS.

A.D, 1902.

J

 

L

 

ERLE SLE EERE REE ER OR ROR On PRE OE Ron On eR Re

 

No. 808.

An Act to provide for the construction of a Line of Railway from Oodnadatta, in the State of South Australia, to
Pine Creek, in the Northern Territory, and for other purposes.

[Assented to, November 13th, 1902.]

BE it Enacted by ihe Governor, with the advice and consent of the Parliament of South Australia, as
follows :

PART. J.
PRELIMINARY.

1. This Act may be cited for all purposes as ‘‘ The Transcontinental Railway Act.”

2, The Acts set forth in the First Schedule, together with the Acts amending the same, shall, so far as
applicable, be incorporated with and form part of this Act.

3. This Act shall be divided into Parts, as follows :—

Part 1.—Preliminary :

Part 11.—The Authority to Contract :

Part 111 —Relating to Tenders:

Part 1v.—The Contract and Construction :

Parr v.—The Contractor’s Duties :

Parr vi.—Grant of Lands for Construction :

Part vit.—Miscellaneous :

Parr viit.—The Palmerston and Pine Creek Railway.

4, In this Act the terms set forth hereunder shall have the respective meanings set opposite to then—

“© Commissioner ”»—The South Australian Railways Commissioner :

‘‘ The Engineer-in-Chief ”’— The Engineer-in-Chief of the South Australian State Railways:

‘The Railway "—The railway to be constructed under the provisions of this Act and any part thereof
and the lands whereon the same is constructed or that may be used therewith, including all works,
buildings, rolling-stock, machinery, and plant of every kind connected therewith, and, for the
purposes of ‘‘ The Lands Clauses Consvlidation Act,” shall be deemed to be “ The Undertaking ”
therein referred to:

‘¢ The contract ” means the contract entered into between the Governor and any person, pursuant to the
provisions of this Act, for the construction and maintenance of the railway :

“The contractor ”—The person who contracts to construct the railway; and shall include ‘The
Promoters of the Undertaking ” under ‘‘ The Lands Clauses Consolidation Act,” and ‘* The Com-
pany ” under ‘‘ The Railway Clauses Consolidation Act ” ;

‘¢The termini ”—The present terminus of the railway at Oodnadatta and the present terminus of the
Palmerston and Pine Creek Railway at Pine Creek :

‘(Land ” shall mean land which the Governor may lawfully grant in fee simple and which is not subject
to any lease or licence granted by or on behalf of the Crown, except pastoral leases.

PART Il.

PaRT I.

Short title.

Incorporation
with other Acta.

Division of Act
inte Parte.

Definitions.
118 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

Parr 1. PART II.
. THE AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT.
i i j isi is Act, with any person for
Power) te 5. The Governor is hereby authorised to contract, subject to the provisions of this Act, wit! ;
pe an the construction of the railway in return for land to be granted to the contractor in manner hereinafter provided.
Route defined. ¢. The route of the railway ahall be as defined in the plan in the Second Schedule marked “‘ Route of Proposed

Railway,” or such alternative route as may be agreed upon ; but in no case shall the length of the railway exceed
one thousand two hundred miles.

Pakr 111. PART II.
RELATING TO TENDERS.

uke 7. The Commissioner shall, within three months after the passing of this Act, call for tenders by advertisement

tenders. in the ‘‘Governmeut Gazette” aud in public newspapers in Australia, Great Britain, America, France, and

Germany for the construction of the railway.
Tenders to con- 8. Tenders shall be forwarded to the Commissioner on or before a day to be named in the advertisement, not
He aes being later than eighteen months from the passing of this Act, and shall contain the following particulars :—-
ae 1. The quantity of land required by the tenderer for the construction of each mile of the railway :
nae 11. The number of miles undertaken to be constructed in each year from each of the termini:
111. The time within which the tenderer undertakes to complete the construction of the railway :
iv. Such other particulars as the Commissioner shall require.

Tenderers not 9. Tenderers shall not be restricted to the route as defined in the plan in the Second Schedule, but they may
acne fe tender for the construction of the railway by such other route as may be defined in the plan accompanying the

plan. tender.

pee we 10. In the event of any tender being accepted, a plan of the railway as tendered for shall be deposited by the

be the “original successful tenderer in the office of the Surveyor-General, and such plan shall be deemed to be the “‘ original plan”

plan.’ within the meaning of ‘‘ The Railway Clauses Consolidation Act.”

Each tenderer to : “
deposit fet 11. Each tenderer shall deposit with the Commissioner a sum of Ten Thousand Pounds with his tender, which
Posuds. shall be returned to him in the event of his tender not being accepted, but which shall be absolutely forfeited to

Lands required the Commissioner should the tenderer, in the event of his tender being accepted, fail or refuse to sign a contract

not toexceed under this Act in accordance with his tender.
seventy-five

ps aes 12. No tender shall be accepted in which the lands required to be granted shall exceed seventy-five thousand
constructed. | acres for each mile of the railway, exclusive of the land taken or used for the railway as provided by Section 18.
oe ee oe 13. The Governor may accept or refuse any tender.

any tender,

Governor may 14. In the event of no tender being sent in or accepted within eighteen months from the passing of this Act,

contract Fonicon the Governor may at any time thereafter contract with any person for the construction of the railway upon the
fininabetace? conditions allowed by this Act.
of tender.

Part iv. PART IV.
THE CONTRACT AND CONSTRUCTION.
Successful ten-

dévertasion con: 15. The successful tenderer shall, within one month of the acceptance of his tender, sign the contract and
tract and deposit deposit Forty Thousand Pounds with the Commussioner, which, together with the deposit of Ten Thousand

io Paar Pounds previously paid, shall be held by the Commissioner as security for the faithful performance of the contract.

sae eee 16. Before proceeding with the construction of any part of the railway, the contractor shall deposit in the

etc, to be iepo- Office of the Engineer-in-Chief plans showing the line and levels of such part, and also all working plans, sections,

sited and app'o- specifications, and drawings for the construction thereof; and such plans, sections, specifications, and drawings

ved. shall be submitted to the Governor for his approval, and the contractor shall not proceed with the construction
until such approval has been signified to him in writing by the Commissioner.

pene 17. The Governor may authorise deviations from the route as defined in the original plan.
Railway :
gered es. ‘ 18. The lands to be taken or used for the railway shall not exceed two chains in width, except where the

chains in wilth, Engineer-in-Chief certifies that a greater width is necessary for—
subject to neces- s

sayy Toure 1. Affording an approach to the railway ; or
11. Affording room for rolling-stock to turn, remain, or pass ; or
11. Raising embankments for crossing valleys or low grounds ; or
iv. Outting through high ground ; or
v. Erecting fixed or permanent machiuery stations, or other structures or buildings ; or
vi. Excavating, removing, or depositing earth or other materials; or
vii. Any other purpose connected with the construction or maintenance of the railway.
Reilway to be

commenced front 19 Unless otherwise allowed by the Commissioner, the construction of the railway shall be simultaneously
both termini. commenced and continuously carried on from each of the termini, in unbroken lines, until completed.

The line to 1 : : : ; :

eipaiviied by ik 20. The railway shall be constructed of sound material, subject from time to time at all points of construction
Engineer in- _ to the supervision and approval of the Engineer-in-Chief, or of any officer duly authorised by the Governor in that
Chief. behalf.

a 21. The gauge of the railway shall be three feet six inches.

22.
THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY. 119

 

 

; gee Ths rails and fastenings shall be of steel, and the rails shall be of a weight of not less than sixty pounds
o the yard.

23. The motive power of the railway shall be steam, or such other power as may at any time be approved by
the Governor.

24 Not less than two hundred miles of the railway shall be constructed within two years after the signing of
the contract, and not less than one hundred miles in any one year thereafter, and the railway shall be completed
and opened for public traffic within eight years after the signing of the contract.

PAhT V.
THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES.

25. The contractur shall continuously after the completion of the railway provide a train for goods and
passengers, which shall run once in each week the whole distance from each of the termini to the other, and which
shall travel at a rate of not less than twenty miles in each hour, including stoppages.

26. The contractor shall at all times during and after the construction of the railway—

(a) Convey upon the railway free of charge all Members of the South Australian Parliament, and also
all persons authorised by the Commissioner who are engaged in connection with the railway,
together with their necessary luggage, stores, and equipments :

(b) Keep the railway in good and efficient repair and working condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Chief :

(c) Comply with all reasonable requirements of the Engineer-in-Chief :

(ad) Comply with all the requirements of the contract and of this Act.

27. Except with the approval of the Governor, the charges per mile for the carriage of goods and passengers
on the railway shall never at any time exceed the rates per mile being charged on the South Australian Railways
from Port Augusta to Oodnadatta.

28. If the contractor shall fail or neglect to carry out any requirement of the contract or of this Act, the Com-
missioner may give four months’ written notice to the contractor to begin, carry on, or complete any of the matters
so required to be begun, carried on, or completed ; and if at the expiration of the time specified in such notice the
works and matters therein required to be done are not so begun, carried on, or completed, the Governor may, by
Proclamation, cancel the contract, and the deposit of Fifty Thousand Pounds hereinbefore mentioned, together
with the railway, shall thereupon be absolutely forfeited to the Governor.

29. Where notice has been given to the contractor by the Engineer-in-Chief for the doing of any repair or work
on or about the railway, and the same has not been done or efficiently done, the Governor may do and complete
the repairs neceasary to be done, and all costs and charges connected therewith shall be recoverable from the con-
tractor in any Court having jurisdiction for the amount claimed.

30. When the railway has been certified to the Governor by the Engineer-in-Chief as being unsafe for public
traffic at any place, the Governor may, by Proclamation, prohibit the continuance of public traffic over the railway
until it has been certified safe for traffic by the Engineer-in-Chief.

31. Before proceeding with the construction of the railway the contractor shall furnish the Commissioner with
the name of some person on whom any notice to the contractor under this Act may bo served, and all notices
addressed and posted or delivered to such person at Adelaide, South Australia, shall for all purposes be deemed to
be good and effectual service of the same upon the contractor.

PART VI.
GRANT OF LANDS FOR CONSTRUCTION.

32. For every mile of railway constructed the contractor shall be entitled, subject to the provisions of this
Act, to a grant in fee simple of the land to which he is entitled under the contract, together with all gold, metals,
and minerals thereon or thereunder: Provided that no grant of land shall be made for any portion of the railway
which is less than forty miles in length.

33. The land to be granted to the contractor shall be in blocks situated alternately on either side of the rail-
way, and—

1. Each block shall be as nearly as practicable in the shape of a parallelogram having a width of twenty
miles and running true east and west :
ur. Each block shall abut upon a completed portion of the railway, except where that is impracticable
owing to intervening land not available for selection or not selected by the contractor, in which
case the block shall abut upon such last-mentioned land :

ur. No block shall be wholly or partly within the same latitude as any other block.

34, When each forty miles of the railway is completed, but not before, the contractor shall be entitled to
select, and shall select, the land to which he is entitled for such completed portion.

35. The contractor shall bear the cost of surveying the land selected, and as soon as possible after survey he
shall have issued to him land grants for the land to which he is entitled.

36. The contractor shall, if the railway be constructec and opened, have granted to him in fee simple the land
whereon the railway is constructed, together with any land certified by the Engineer-in-Chief as being required
under section 18.

37. The following land shall not be available for selection by the contractor :—

1. All land situate south of the latitude of the present terminus of the railway at Oodnadatta and north of
the latitude of the present terminus of the Palmerston and Pine Creek railway at Pine Creek :

u. Lands included in any proclaimed hundred or township :

ut. Lands included in any goldfield proclaimed before the coming into operation of this Act:
ly.

Rails to be not
less than sixty
pounds to the
yard.

Motive power to
be steam.

Mileage to be
constructed each
year; and time
allowed for coi-
pletion.

One triin each
week to be run
at not less than
twenty miles
each hour.

The contractor to
convey Members of
Parliament and
Government
employcs free.
Keep railway in rep
Comply with re-
quirements of
Engineer-in- Chief.
Comply with Act
and contract.

Scale of charges.

Railway and
deposit liable to
forfeiture.

Repairs to be
effected.

Where line
unsafe traffic to
be suspended,

Effectual service
of notices.

Part VI.

Contractor
entitled to grant
of lands for every
mile of railway
constructed.

Conditions
governing grant
and selection of
land.

Contractors may
select land as
portion of line
finished.

Fee simple to be
granted to
contractor on
completion.

Fee simple of
railway to be
granted when
railway opened.
Lands excepted
from selection.
120 THE TRANSCONTINENTAL RAILWAY.

 

 

tv. The land on which the Overland Telegraph Line is erected for a width of three chains on each side of
such line, together with all lands heretofore reserved and dedicated for the use and purposes of the
Overland Telegraph Department :
v. The lands on which telegraph offices are erected and land used in connection therewith :
vi. Land which the Commonwealth has the right to acquire under Section 85 of the Commonwealth of
Australia Constitution Act :
vit. The beds of all navigable rivers, al) water reserves, and aboriginal and travelling stock reserves :
vit. The lands on which any buildings the property of the Crown are situated, and any fenced land used in
connection therewith:
1x. All public roads.

Governor may 38. The Governor may at any time resume possession of any portion of the land granted to the contractor
Saeco for which may be reasonably required for roads and travelling stock reserves; but no land for stock reserves shall be
travelling stock taken within ten miles of the railway without the consent of the contractor or his successors in title without being

BESEENES liable to pay compensation therefor to the contractor or to his successors in title.

Land under 39. Land selected by the contractor which is under pastoral lease shall be taken by him subject to such lease ;
pastoral lease but he shall have power to enter upon the same with all necessary agents for the purpose of making a survey
y be selected. zs :
thereof without being liable for trespass. ,

Contractor to be 40. When any land selected forma part of a pastoral lease the contractor shall be paid by the Commissioner
paid rent propor- annually a share of the rent reserved by the lease proportionate to the area so selected ; but the Governor shall at
area selected. all times exercise the powers reserved by the lease to the lessor over the whole of the land included in the lease.

Grants to be 41. Grants for land which is selected while under pastoral lease shall be issued subject to this part of this Act.
issued subject to

this part of the

Act.
Part vi. PART VII.

MISCELLANEOOS.
Contractor en- 42. Subject to the approval of the Governor the contractor shall be entitled to running powers over any
nae railways belonging to the State directly connected with the railway on terms to be fixed by the Commissioner.
nee 43, The Governor may extend the time for doing or completing any act, matter, or thing required or con-
time. tracted to be done under the provisions of the Act.
oe 44, On the completion and opening of the railway the contractor shall have refunded to him his deposit, and
tobeiwtuned, Shall in the meantime receive interest thereon annually at the rate of Three Pounds per centum per annum.
No taxes to be 45. No taxes shall be imposed by the State of South Australia on any of the lands granted pursuant to this
paid ty ae Act for a period of ten years after the granting of the fee simple thereof.
Ran Erantneta 46. The contractor shall pay all compensation payable to any person whomsoever, or to the Commonwealth of
pay compensa- Australia, in connection with the construction and working of the railway.
lon.
Governor may 47. It shall be lawful for the Governor, at any time after the completion of the railway, to purchase and
ae the acquire the same from the contractor ; and the contractor is hereby required to sell the same to the Governor, and

the purchase-money payable therefor shall be fixed by arbitration.

ae Boaey 48. If at any time hereafter the Northern Territory, or any part thereof, shall be transferred to the Common-
part thereof, wealth of Australia, then the Governor-General of the Commonwealth shall have all the powers and rights of the

panei eiree fo Governor under this Act in regard to such portion of the railway as is situated in the Northern Territory or
wealth railways in regard to any part so transferred ; and such officers as may be appointed by him shall have and exercise the
o nee Ba mee powers conferred upon the Commissioner and the Kngineer-in-Chief, respectively, by this Act.

om nL EL .

ae 49, All matters in dispute between the parties to the contract relating to the construction of this Act, or as to
eateersica any matter arising out of the contract, shall be decided by arbitration.

arbitration.

Part VIII. PART VIII.

THE PALMERSTON AND PINE CREEK RAILWAY.
Coutractor may

eauenes 50. The contractor may at any time, after six months’ notice to the Commissioner, purchase the Palmerston
Palmerstonand and Pine Creek Railway, with all the rolling-stock thereon, at a sum to be fixed by arbitration.

Pine Creek

PEN 51. Should the contractor purchase the Palmerston and Pine Creek Railway, it shall thenceforth form part of
Pine Creek Rail- the railway authorised to be constructed by this Act, and shall be subject to all the provisions of this Act which

way subject to apply to the inspection, supervision, maintenance, management, and purchase of the railway.
provisions of this

Re eee 52. The Palmerston and Pine Creek Railway heretofore referred to shall, for all purposes, be deemed to be the

and Pine Creek railway authorised to be made and maintained pursuant to ‘‘ The Palmerston and Pine Creek Railway Act, 1883.”
ailway defined.
In the name and on behalf of His Majesty, I hereby Assent to this Bill.

8S. J. WAY, Lieutenant-Governor.

THE FIRST SCHEDULE.

 

‘* The Land Clauses Consolidation Act.”
“The Railway Clauses Consolidation Act,” except thereout Sections CXLIV. to CKLVI., both inclusive.

THE SECOND SCHEDULE.

[See Map attached.]

46477.—Hussey & Gillingham, Printerr, 26 and 28, Waymouth Street, Adelaide, South Australia.
    
      

    

eo ME PTT ee a aoe aie ee,
x ~~ ye ie ee. \
= name ae =} aah
6 ieee we ean / AG a ?sismo exsaunt | : £ Nail
ae oe be
pe iT m Ke a iy
y ee SS Rots
i Z
: : “gnosav4 NSS

  

id EN

    

HLOMAN'S A. |
6

   

ae
&

we

oy

 

La Be
ee [aE
oN i Yr
NS Si va Su3aHVRD f
PN OTAS Gd ‘
AS ae
RRebe ewer

 

 

Am,

   
  

 

 

Hid NVA
Dee ee ey
Swans

ry wi. }
Le we ie Gee
6 oy —

=

        

 

   

       

hey, (quowaypas pio}
Fon, Sappung 1.105 &

ads y 3

          

        

 

mons 2 aun TS
lah Ny)

id 10-4207 |

  

 

 

 

 

 
NORTHERN TERRITORY
SOUTH AUSTRALIA,

_ PREPARED UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF THE HONORABLE THE COMMISSIONER OF CROWN LANDS,

By H. Y. L. BROWN, F.GS., GOVERNMENT GEOLOGIST.
—<soa>—

PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY,
Compiled by

ee C. WINNECKE, F.R.G.S,
LOS From private and official records.
ir Sy
ee ) \ ADELAIDE .
iI | _ 1898.
on ’ GOULBURN I?

os A Scale

MILES 109876543210 10 20 30 MILES

RG ~courturn 1s J SN
So

 

 

    

  

   

    

             

y |
Or

L®

      
     

       

é / ee fan ( RUART (9
Wiss ie) a)
we vane SWIGHAMS 19
2 os Sa ES ee

LEN Biome

SY

  

     

    

2,
BAssoos WO x

             
  

 

   

 

                      

 

 

   

 

le ne 4
aK CLE Bey
Ty) y G LEC SP) 8
S =| fo x by, re
TT ICASTLERE se Bi
: = ya M! Bonner 5
ove 3, =
Pf; \s ue ae
i s re 3:
ow a, a
Table Hilla i 3 Be
Mt Cabman* %@ He a 4 at % Ze
: oe = >) y %
<\ ‘ J ged Clits
A ynetsons 1 :
(eee

k
f, 4 Hh
fz. 7 a ea scl TEE ey
ant Y sped gto a vt
age ¥ Pa % yt
at : ¢ Gj yi
of his haggons : ye
sowie, eg ENS ¥en
4 z
q i :
‘ 2
Se “e
if Ma i Me Medal i
er ners ME Ope ay Te Her CATS :
a
A

ps re
é hor, ee s
ye : ; Se
f a x

+ Shee 9) 7 2 Ras Lape Or
z pune Di Low wooded country nS IE TY
ea ie ad : ‘a hey . cc *
‘5 NF cos a
\

 

DS eg
on
“af

he
fri.
uh

 

 

@
oes gee Yh
pe lenge te %

 

 

mr
                               
         

Saunas > ky
¥° ng Auors

  

fo 713M

 

  

oN 172. H - a iy
pues

DALAT LOM. syony Ks

   

Sy wot

z

qu Od t 19 f é abpry pabOry
5 :

Moy pean Ss

 

    

» YD DbOT SH yoap arty eS
7 oY

=
‘

 

 

am,

ve
; wy _ py seca iF
2, Laomog wis |

f

SIT 5

     

              

 

ER ot

vog shioboitNe®

 

i
3
1S
8
.
“
‘Py
*

 

TBH $404 OAS
S{f24 waatypoyes

          

    

epee 2

Lo” heepanen pessnil yam redo 7

  

bt yb?
+ ee

ne oe 1

Dp

  

4,

suzvja uadg

  

are tase

Let ig

   

SS INVITE

        
 
   

 

Se uossnbsay YM YPF : ay /
my Jo uonounl posodding sobpn 2 kuorg \= : c i de

\ af YG

a
El

     
 

 

HOAIISOY Yip

“orn

 

 

 

 

iene Ar
tHe oe :

ey Mary

 

 

 
Te eee ) *% "Ele, Se Me MOF iY), i J
W\¢

CM A Ty
=
Gu,

te ; ‘Herberts Bluff
pines
ie ‘f 2 7 aa

‘ wi eg OS Ne <

¥ Ie f
; ee os ( %  bytGhoral Hull
3, Bluff HL &E

( J} CROOTE ZEYLANDT 7/

is ]

y Whaat f ia ay
> s { ‘
AS Blut ® LC

ermpene Fee \
{
11)

ape Beatrice

) |

=
in

aol
fH

sen,

thai cg
ee

     

 

               

    

a Me HE

A A HE TE

      

/
\

MD, SE, IN oP

gay PFE

3
ae

    

   
   

[Drovte 1p . ad Pr
Se |

. Munga Jn 4
Se ‘ofp f ‘a
}
4
tf, ’
Ct ht

   

 

ort Roper
Rep

}

  

Oo PSS

r Blut E} R A
gademoetad
Or INF

jHAWARDEN| | --32¢

        
     
       

 

Dougadleitusr

Black Jatk

L Ul Hodgkiss
age! liza. Saal te oe

‘a af rows Hilly

        
   

 

         
  

      

    

       

    

    
 
 

 

      

         

 

 

  

s3 ;
é = a] oe ;
¥ ra ag i
aon a,  Muciber aecgiads
“ena orien, = hg max
See Mag f+
aah gemouge PA
ng table Lard gC a)
ag a
we te i as L.. ——- —S.4-Be a >
ESC fer: ee ze
29 9 &Maiss Balt zs
ik 3%
a Ye a5
gh : a =
OC Nee se —
% % owe e Ly ae
= % _ Supposed Letcharats bag £1 SSSR % e i hve ie
SE 7" CON & DELATOUR 5 CROSS IBC 4, =§ : ile ; ~&
ge P RELBCOIE ee & oe Four Archers Se at Peles, 6
Tee ; %E Le oy a a osin WY? aoe ;
w table land covered pee ff {y = £ jp, RGA NORTH 10%, 2p OU \
& nee ta Re sé : ‘
ih grass gums & other trees 7 ‘ x af f Ge Hed, \ \
se hF 7 gi 4 \
*! “ \ re 4 : : : Ssours west CENTRE 1?) PVANDERLIN S | *
: Nae por ve : at \ 2S 1G is « Y
Se! | te. eee ; AK
+ aly a ( ; 2 = $ s I
4 ge) “ap aE ei
PE xf g

\
Ms,
hy

he We

x

=

oe
g

&

a

i.

~~

8

z

S

a

7
& ky

eo

~

MWe
ay,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
                 

se ai? spopoom yonaT

vad are

gH vet
t

\

7 5d8 SAVIN

 

      

im, Res
sb £ shat?

 

   

 

bad Asse nag

a |

-
er
" on
= 7a
m
as

Vi dsy FZ
5

Tou slo seo
a

 

           

 

  

te ae
juiag 21d abr POOF
: ee a
a? iz
iF

mittee Ss Oe
iy Soyyp tals
xt ROR ;
yoeeg poodnai XQ ey
1 FONVULNG

™
am
i ae
 

he

Teepe")

ith, grass gums & othen trees

\

Yu Sy PURDIES PONDS

Biwegrasswetinp

« PENELOPE PONCS

ae

“Sli
ee
ne

Mr

Mew, hl de Wie We

Oe ne ne

/
“ate

ae

3
h
nhc!

 

 

SICK POND
Splendid. , grassed country with rich

uarts Swamp
ALYWATER'ST.S. 0g. soil covered) with fine trees
+ ae Is yes
nd ie
fet “

° Tongmurr’ Lagoon

 

 

a P
con
he s .
z : . Lagoon
Good, grassed) country wih. : \ ( Perm Hater Pan
: ° Barleghh gies
. subtle lel dO” ape
Repent

p PONDS

numerous pods of water , nm m
Mole dhree ye

: filrer: 's Lagoon,
: Wate. sh

SS ee

ed

-_
~
— oe]

o Mohnstors Lagoon eat om ; we.
>

 

          

 

         

 

 

if : ~ .
~
‘ ; Wes | Oe
eEW'S IRONSTONE PONOS : ~ a) gS 4, Se ne
Is POND : : ars & were,
@ tor : * s ST
OD pale, wit yet
tT tale, , ’
ge ee! Vite ys ,
ee eee g ¥ ~
eee he 3 ~ <
aye po’ : ~~
TL ¥ 74 Pg ~
A Ve, x" a, y ~~
ade alates Th we “i, ¥ me a,
vem” yin : Mea pg "Mea, SS mle
i pia we A a" ; Katy? ; ~n ye
- es — — —
WAHT ye ¥ : 7 aes) nf
id is E ¢ : ' OMEN gE hae gt RN Heh em
ka ¥ 3
YE ; oO P EON Me : ‘
IS ¥ : At
4 i ae é Pook N
Hi zy
val = g
= af se. €
all BE S23 é fey
er oa :
x\ FY
ay
eS
Open. plaan
t
°
tet,
hn, S
s AES fun
Se E>

:

 

 

Qf
. Sas
JAKE Wo00D

 

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

‘say ajoy pun oBuntpy “op ‘hajmopy ‘Yaa suid ‘¥oolg ajnvg ‘snyplyoW ‘saulpIOH junow ‘ourw pjeyteddog

“Op VeAly ajoy pus nSunysy “OP 'auipy Dyainz ‘euly Udjaaz ‘yaadg auig ‘aFpisqooyg iunowq

‘adunp wny—'yFdd0o
‘aBunp way—gy7T HFATS

‘op vadiy Ajog ‘sifay junow pub Anjutyoy ‘uly stoliog ‘sssuuly junow ‘eEplqocys junoy ‘saujo, junoy ‘sogsny soudg—'NIi

youg wo, IH Bundy “arly joepguvy ‘oyainz ‘ysny S,1pjiyosnoyy ‘pooH

‘op “aay ajop ‘bSuny “op. ‘ipuny, ‘yaorg apnoy ‘uolufy pepusixz ‘oJunjooyy

uppjunes ‘IIH aarp "Youn USieg YOuQ 23piig ‘uerydeg “you1g Aplng “Fo[moy ‘youg 8,4o0Ig ‘voIUA) “YoaN] BWid—'SGTI4ATOB

 

== 'S3ILITVOOT WHYZNIW OFTIVLSW ===

—$—$—— LT © a

Csyoog snowasTi¥l7H) org. LOUreJO_T
‘op ‘spsryos oiyspdsjaf pun snogajjie snosonO;u ‘OrpuafquéoY . pee

‘auuads ‘setau8 yyim soanjd us pazojoossn “op ‘Aedydsod ansspaf ‘9418/24 oTu0yn

‘ausajop ‘ayuoip ‘asuaks ‘ayynunsd ‘ound ousskydaed ‘anoudad ‘aysunip = Td

(8008 Sno¥zsITIVLIH) ‘Op “a401p omowy, I

‘oyuaks ‘aynuns® ‘apnnuded ‘aiuasd Jo suojsndzus fouojsvaz0 Yai “OP Pas

‘auzponb ‘suojspuns ‘guopsausy ausjpoysMo ¢ sazpje pun ss1yoe snoani/is

_pun 9soy2jn snosanipdso ‘snosonajw ! sysryos Dosw ‘apueds ‘soup orydroureyo Wy

© apiog punjsuaan® 242 pun yeeD
8,[JoMOd UaaMjog ‘YORI DUpURxery DOU ‘hifogog * "74 “AT —NAMOUQ SNTIANIIO
K “ussoa

  

C8H00U SNORTAITIVIZH) *sexkp snosUa! welqure,)
pup Saat audpsuods pup zpionk qua “op ‘sapnsauof3uoo ‘saugpsautly ‘sapizpmnb
‘squopepus ‘ss14y98 volut ‘sapnjs vosu ‘souopspuDs snozoD/j1S4n ‘saynjs ADD
‘270,-—SNVOI] S3LINCH3Lg
+372 —WNWLSODILOZH SYUIOOHOOH |. rag Z—VRONLYOL YOUVAYId
+970. —HOLY3RTTOUOLK si “nz,
sayng — ISNILNIATY sag —SlNTNOIaYO
+240. AN8O330181 ‘ ‘agp _—SIKUOMNdO
7¥ “Yag - FS809 5 saguz—1OOIHIY
-ag7.t —USONIMIHQ S¥Y200HLYQ ‘ang —ieyy ly,
24 4237 —INOLUNGUY A, Ke ‘ant —SINNOAVTVULYSSHND ¢
saga. —MMUYNAAY S¥U300GNA “ayn —=¥IVONECD — YOHYOS}
1H YIU SYBIOONKOY “7 ‘477 —SISNTIA1 ‘e
"247.2--SOMBUR SALTO -2j0,—SIWHOLOHOIG — Stel

“79 “4437 —INMONG VROLSIHAVY
+770, —WAWIdVRYT YIUYHOLOUNI Tq
7¥ 47H—18Ig VT) cagng—slliadosstT,,

_ eZ Wn VINA 70 “HZ —SISNAUNT SNHAYSY

SLOWWLSIO SNINIOPGY ONY SNMOG 3dW3L WOW SUISSOJ 40 ish

7 yg —INHOROH
"29 “Y7T—INDINEOH SL —,,

‘OP ‘sauojsautis ‘sappys ‘sapizponb ‘sauojspu2S—-U BLAIS Id. ALOT

_ 2 ‘Opp ‘appsousojFuoo suojpsoui 7
ways pup punf YUM sojimosop pun ‘seuojsourl, ousstoiskig

{seSy pouruejopuy

.  “‘amsauoj3u0d pun WWE ‘auejspuys ‘21124010 89.8 pouluLiejopu no

"NV HOUV

‘DIOZOW Wd

 

 

 

 

dane ‘supopd oy; fo “op ‘appiawos8uoo “auojspune ‘ouopsatay) oupsoape; “wnsds

 

——= TONTUCITA

“(eT Oded “1681 70 £81, "ON
“pias {ge aed ‘gegt 30 gg “ON ‘sledeg Arequeumpied “y's 99g)

‘sas ‘NOHd
~OURTIIG ‘y2e7zs07—-NNOIVUQ SNWIHENJ ‘xoysq—STUWNH YINOTUNOW
§ af “yz — \NYAONYY) NOLOIAOTAOIAY ‘fopayy—SIvEISNY WTA wOGIIRY SnO1EFIMOG1Bl)-OUlIa
‘Q¥3H TSS04 WOHF STISSOU 40 18
“BIBALS NYE YO PY PUD DjIOpOL
ayy Jo saypyg ‘hog hreyovas, ‘pray jissoy fo sayorspung

‘op ‘ysp ‘projupSiwo-dasy “y0seg——OTUBOO A
vaaiy ayuly ay, Jo “op ‘sajprawos3uoa ‘34183 ‘soucjspung 9. peTiulioyopu yy

‘uordas aikz 2407 aut Jo sy901 snoeoDjAlN 4aMo7 snOtaft)
-issof Ayy81y oy, fo uossuajxa usaypiou ay; < spung euojspuns
pun auojsuod) ‘gucjsauti) yzim sajpys pun sjaput ‘shojo snossddp

*(eg aBed “gggT Jo 2g ‘ON ‘Ladeg SrejusurenEA “Y's 02g)

{48 WITZONY ‘eS 'SALHAVOS “eS ‘STV HO SYHRIOOTIONY “/-220.@ ‘Maa
"Y SYIN) SILINOWMY ‘/-<gs ‘SNVIBYA “Y BVBN) SHLINORMY—/ s/rsso,
snoaonpatg JaM07 Sujmojpol ay} sapznyg rufog ty —‘28v snoeon}
-a19 saddy jo Ayqissod ‘saunwi13g Jo sjsp0 pup spjnow uiming
MOg jo Fuluimuoo ‘saypiawoj8u09 pun ‘seuojspuvs ‘sjDYg

SNOVDBJOLILI) TOMOT
pu

seddy

‘sajpys snosaljIs pup sajpys snosans[Sun ‘guojspuos
‘apnaaura;fuoo ‘pjooag ‘ajjuipyeosod «“yoos sodenf ‘aprzppnd

snosovjoig reddy)
Saenqacy,

shaunoo ayn pun ,, jfiypups ,, ’sajinnpse ‘spy
uo

ALOYIOT,
ie

‘yaput ‘onnsd ‘wives ‘dojo ‘puns ‘kjunoa ,, 11ypups ,, pun yspoo ay} Jo puns uMojg

JAoaYT

 

‘OHOZO®W 1d

7 enews 0 CaUE © GREE © mame: © GEA © CEES © WEEE OIE

‘DIOZOSAW

f

 

 

 

 

wbuey pit “al
Serreganogy Ybipy Teh bn

 

 

  

omm 0am ¢ owns came

 

 

 

2
"poem

WTR me eo

 

 

7 Saag

 
Tae

     

: & te ladae & i
AY ”, % WO ene } Se
é BUCHANANS WH. e 5

ey, WHITTINGTON

      

  

  
 

 

    

 

 

      

            
    

   

 

 

 

       

    

Ps, + REES WELL 7
@ dna eh Ee,
ity Dre meas fs Yat wietthe AOR / 5
ere qlesgpteetateaa sol 2 aA
: NERS CRAVE PEE 3
: J
‘Rockey WF 3
3
Zt
Pa
a
7
a Nth ME pestle
. HR AE
: e
7 SE ena Dee ee
s,
oe to lake Eyre)
a ee Alroy Downs set ’
Pee
2 WATIVE WELLS _ NATIVE WELL
ae a -_— s
a f : ; PLAIN
a Rea hy
4
al
: _-
SAND AND SCRUB
-— B00R0D0 W.
“NATIVE WELL 7 ‘i :
ae ef
aeoon al Sou th
—_—O Ae
of 6
Boundory CQWER CIOGEA W.
DAWSON'S WELL gr im se “K
“ Fe
gr Bee we
‘ @ Sate we
‘ Bede nH yee
“rath ve oe os i ae aed
gt ahs Z a
He 5 Native Wel!
f Pd 7 pe Mae
‘ -
sy fe
oe Z
Zz i at
Samp Be AF
4
a

      

        
 
      

    

b ‘, x(
‘ .
‘ % ing’ mt,
& ‘ wad tarding’s 1d sty
wy z \ bee
. t, os
= € 5 =
) Ns
é ~
Ta . 4
SOMMEY \WELL ?
at
lf
é
=
=
é

4 garter tne ree

C

 

 

 

 
 

     

S9IHIANDT

      

 

 

   

= a wv LOL a, 17IM
EE EE NOs rt AS PIO gd
Sats cae ots Er 3d

      

aS

aah ty,

= ae Tak BP abor pc ot
: TIM FALLEN ©

 

 

             

 

  

reg so reulpissi Maree el
hi, ©

     

      

      

et Men yi:
orsten, Seto. ON SD
Saat, Tp eak te teen ae INOS,

             
           

 

     

7s annoy iW;
Uaall nga pepna) ' set
Lf aMngDU yO saquinryy

  

om “onit aucrspuNs 2

iB Aebuno ms MoT

 

=e
‘ey, TIM TAN
* ¥

 

IM SOFY4

 

 

 

ey Jjoqdure
Se ot al Ea, ‘
AAA AE yh RS

 

de) 8.asMmo.sj%
7

TIM mayo FHL

           
  

oe pol Meta,

Pati a Sp Ree
AA AMM MySay
ae ae AMER I A

        

   

 

        
  

syo]s 2
rien aatsia ype qno suns p dn syyds

       

 

   

z Sus aZuey teh:
ve . FSOLU oy

| sh aug meee G  Sawiatds aig im =

6 Pesan % ia ee

Ra S DU Aes
™ Ponape

 

 

 

 

MA ab eb ab
Yinnecke

rne

 

  

ff gy OE ne”

A

 

 

BU Cornish FSS i
. open out on flak ale gid te
5 Mins AP ES ;
i Sone ‘Wow broken hills
ET ae FA % pons peerurawent oN tn 9 5
a Q z
| ys WATERHOLE
1 FR SATE a
oFlints farthest
NATHVE WELL

   

   

 

       

 

    

 

 

  

 

eqs A 7,
nto Re
eal ai il 7. of8 h100 WH.
ps < RMS,
x ie oy ee gee
ane
at’
arm, “¢

 

fv
9 i +
Son

[ en ors Pee,
wohl
RANGE ap

we
Mt CAIRNS
: tenn, 5 S

  

           

 

 

 

 

RM WATER

 

y

 

 

N E A #4

       

cLavean- 3

WATIVE WELL

L. CAROLINE ?
oe

 

 

WALGATAMAR Wits P
e

 

>

{

 

 

 

 

 
    

cxowddY ATHDNON) -
SONIHES YONIOTET

1S CPUIPLG-

 

 

 

(ysryavsg}
TIIM SNVEY, cy .

 

 

 

 

  

f

   

 

 

 

!

DWOFL SHEE S

ans gp ey
715

     

BIOAUF:

 

a
FW gn. ooh ®

che OE Bla on
nh hg a Siu,

os 5
gushed, UP MBP QO TE seg
aga PRS SLOT | H

peel, MA Maye ee

Pin est rea ican

Sze

otek

908 TNOLSONYS * ats

apa) | We

isagh

 

     

 

    

     

     

   

   

POHBTLIME Seige \ %
a8n, : ga9uesney OES
ante "i Seta

Ge ~ AS BIO gq S10 hee
SSE oe ES 5 SATO Cae CEN ok
epee a (bangs Wr, Speen aniee

5 wig UoIss OF ik

EEL p \ \ ney

*

 

              
       

4 rad useib ream popyo) ° Sve
AfSvar anyou jo wyeeny

 

 

 

 

 

sg, aaah met,
% EL kent go

TIIM FALLYN ”

ere!

ney Wien
 
      

      

\
= : TINNARGEE ca ae
WALGATAMAN WHS iP
ve

to

, H
N EB A wiih |

 

 

 

 

acle Hills
MALICE WELL

   

 
 

© ame ¢ com 5

Ps wi

 

<a © mme @ amine 6 wre 6 quem + sun

 

 

               

5 SPS ¢

Engoordins
hoe Bend

iigunspeansn bare -MtObstruction.
1 pace ne
Tene

Fa Wot] Stster Hil

  

   

.4
s
3,
ms D.
soordina St? carPhgon)

re
Mase?

~

we

si
se
Je

are

pe edie

Hi

ite

 

 

 

 

 

yams © WaNS ¢ SEER © GUE. © comes © ui Cum: ¢ comm 5 sift met
Fal ANT RP PoP ad eer
PT en ane eM ee
Pee ee ee eee ee x5
HH rae Dae wt Pore
: Leg oy) io a) HA
Pa aw ‘
ByPBENe i
Prater) Gi
f o PH fre
Eade aa eth

Gi a ie Te \
rin rere res
ty Chats Bide) AER eee
4 aero ae
oy Ore aren
i terran ren
ma Hy we'd sen ae

Hs io oH bf i ft saa
U oud

A

eth

a

ie
” ei ye thts re
nietatea Weer errr

aH Peres p ee Bae

‘

Hu

:

a

aan $2RFU shod
re

ay

Bs

i

:

A

af

STaaeee
rns
ed

$

Demand Tee re oh

SEE LL

oe
<

a

rs

eee
aero st

Ee

ede
aires

ul

i eae

Sean a —
jab mre poi hy NE ca
nts ponies ty
intact lates
cE ie

 

rae

ne

“anne Heh Sachin Pan Ort cet nt
ei ahsent Pate Menten hn iter eer tore

#

i
bh

wit

tit

mutant

ne

vay of
oan Se cy! Or aii “ ct

nant Lt
a Rares aa
c

Srerets sea

 

cere